Home

Unify DataServer/ELS Reference

1. sql gt from emp dept recognized query emp Name Location Smith Dallas Smith New York Smith Chicago Smith Los Angles Smith San Francisco Smith Dallas Smith Dallas Jones Dallas Jones New York Jones Chicago Jones Los Angeles Jones San Francisco Jones Dallas Jones Dallas Whittaker Dallas Whittaker New York Whittaker Chicago Whittaker Los Angeles Whittaker San Francisco Whittaker Dallas Whittaker Dallas Ww Ww Ww The entire result is not listed because it is too long Note that the first employee is listed with the location of every department and so on Of course this is not very useful information Joining Tables with the where Clause The real power of a relational DBMS is the ability to qualify the results of a join The where clause lets you select a subset of the records from the Cartesian product For example you can select records where the department number in the emp table is the same as the department number in the dept table SQL Query DML language 383 384 There are two factors to consider with this type of query 1 The fields Name and Number must be preceded with table names because both emp and dept have fields with these names The field Dept_No does not require qualification because it only occurs in the emp table 2 The expression dept is used to select all the fields in the dept table without listing each one separately EXAMPLE the emplo
2. database field entry area When the program starts it checks the database directory for necessary B tree index files If any files are missing you are asked to rebuild them The rebuild process is included in the following description After the index file check the operation prompt displays IINQUIRE A DD D ROP RJEBUILD The valid operation selections are described as follows i Inquire about B tree index definitions a Add B tree index definitions d Drop B tree indexes 158 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference r Rebuild B tree indexes Rebuild the indexes when e The system asks you to do so e There is a problem with the B tree index e You want to reduce the size of the B tree index file after you delete a large number of records in a table Inquiring rebuilding and dropping B trees When you select inquire rebuild or drop mode the screen displays the current mode in the top left corner For example in rebuild mode the screen displays as follows idxmnt EX ID ICAT REBUILD NUMBE ES ALL Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Add Drop B Tree Indexes ASC DSC Database design utilities database field entry area 159 To select a B tree to rebuild you can either enter a B tree ID number at the INDEX ID NUMBER prompt or a table name at the TABLE prompt In add mode both prompts are display only These two prompt
3. dept_goal using SSS SS amp amp amp and your department print had dept_total using S S S S amp amp amp in sales no newline if dept_total gt dept_goal then begin RPT Report processor 473 print Your department exceeded the print goal for the lst quarter and I want to congratulate print everyone responsible end else begin print As you can see your department print failed to reach its quota I expect everyone will print work harder next quarter to meet the objectives end page footer print mrl jk end NOTE You can place documentation comments in an RPT script by starting each comment with and ending it with Some examples of comments are included in the report script 474 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 17 3 Advanced report techniques The Department Listing example in the previous chapter shows you how to write a basic multiple level report The report contains report page and column headings It also contains page numbers subtotals totals minimums maximums averages and counts Once you can write this kind of report you are ready for more advanced techniques These techniques include more complex arithmetic and Boolean expressions named expressions string operators print conditions variables and local functions This chapter introduces a database design to track purchase orders and includes the specificatio
4. field definition Table name display area entry area EY REE TYPE LEN LONG NAME N ext page P rev page A dd line or numbe definition paging area The Field Entry screen form is similar to the Table Entry screen form Both screen forms contain a data entry area and a paging area Because the Field Entry screen form is also used in Design and Create a New Database refer to Database Fields in section 8 1 for an explanation of the prompts FIELD If you want to change an existing key field or a COMB key component see the KEY description in this subsection See the KEY description if you want to change an existing non key field to a key field or COMB key component 140 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Deleting a field deletes existing data in the field If you want to Then Change a Field s Name 1 If no data has been entered in this table skip to step 2 If data has been entered to this table dump data to an external file See Dumping Data to External Files in section 16 3 2 Delete the field definition 3 Add the new field definition You can use the field information in the Data Dictionary Report to reenter the original field definitions 4 Run Reconfigure Database scom 5 If the changed field is a key or COMB key component Run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey 6 If no data has been entered to this table you are finished If data has b
5. sorted input name numeric length amount length float length string length text length date ldate time table field lz name numeric length Till EASE AR amount length float length string length text length date ldate time table field length number width number top margin number bottom margin number left margin number sort expr desc expr desc header command group commands footer command group commands before report command group commands RPT Report processor 553 554 before name command group commands detail command group commands after name command group commands after report command group commands end In the RPT script the input section must be first and the end command must be last Otherwise the commands and command groups can be in any logical order such as the order they appear in this table The length width and margin commands are optional and have associated default values One optional sort command can be used You must include at least one command group in each report script A command group is terminated by the next command group or by a non command group command such as width A command group command can only be used in a command group For example you cannot use the print command directly following a non command group command such as sort RPT reports this as an error The before name and after name command groups can occur more than once
6. The following command line pipes the results of the SQL query contained in sscript to RPT and formats the results according to the commands in rscript SQL sscript RPT rscript If you want to use SQL this way remember to turn off the column headings in the SQL output by using the lines 0 command You then can use any custom program to pipe to RPT For more information about the lines command see SQL Reference section 16 5 RPT table usage information report In the RPT Table Usage Information Report the terms command and statement are used interchangeably This report is the result of the following command RPT rscript And the RPT Table Usage Information report looks something like the following RPT Report Processor Copyright Unify Corporation 1987 RPT TABLE Table Name Variables Constant Commands Print Statements Print Items Sort Input Items Items Command Groups Set If Statements Aggregates Function Calls Statements Arguments 546 Expression Nodes INFORMATION Used PP YP YP YD YP YP YD DPD YP VD YD YD DVD No syntax errors were found in the report script USAGE Maximum 400 250 250 256 125 256 15 100 25 100 50 50 50 100 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference RPT internal tables The following describes the internal RPT tables and their corresponding environment variables Expression nodes RPTNODECNT This table
7. 1234 1 234 00 ot BS 123 1 23 00 10 28 12 3 12 30 10 2f 123 456 k 123 46 12 4e 123 456 4 2346e 02 10 4g 123 456 423 4560 8 4g 123456789 1 23e 08 Figure 17 25 Format template examples The RPT using option also checks for simple errors in the format string This involves the special character amp which displays leading zeros Before printing a value with the format string RPT checks for illogical combinations involving the amp special character If illogical combinations with amp are located RPT uses a default hierarchy for the format string RPT scans the format string from left to right Once RPT locates the amp character it interprets subsequent special characters as the amp character For example when RPT locates the first amp character it replaces characters other than amp to the right with the amp The other characters include and RPT does not change the following characters r The error checking function ensures that the printing of leading zeros is either on all amp characters or off no amp characters RPT Report processor 537 538 Examples of the default format are shown in figure 17 26 FORMAT DEFAULT VALUE RESULT HE SHH RERE 1234 56 1234 56 1234 5 1234 50 123 123 00 12 012 00 1 001 00 0 0000 00 HEH Bef HEE 8 1234 56 1234 56 1234 5 1234 50 123 123 00 12 012 00 1 001 00 0 00
8. Optimization Calculate this parameter as follows Step 6 parameter num_dev 4000 num_users 6000 where num_dev is the average number of simultaneous developers and num_users is the average number of simultaneous end users To continue with the Installation procedure return to Step 7 in Preparing to Install Unify DataServer ELS 693 694 Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide
9. Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt This value is a duplicate Please enter a different value Explanation Either the field is a key field or the field is indexed in a B tree that does not allow duplicate entries it is a secondary key The same field in another record in this table has this value Correction Either change the other field or enter a different value for this field gt gt gt This was detected in a set expression on line nnn Explanation This message helps you locate the error that generated the previous error message gt gt gt This was detected in the column expression for the print statement on line nnn Explanation This message helps you locate the error that generated the previous error message gt gt gt This was detected in the expression on line nnn Explanation This message helps you locate the error that generated the previous error message gt gt gt This was detected in the if expression on line nnn Explanation This message helps you locate the error that generated the previous error message gt gt gt This was detected on line nnn Explanation This message helps locate the error that generated the previous error message gt gt gt To move the current field position the cursor and hit the TRANSFER FIELD key Explanation The standard PAINT command key for this operation is T Your unicap file can be set differently Unify DataServer ELS message
10. a Add mode This lets you register screen forms with ENTER m Modify mode This lets you modify TARGET TABLE HEADING and FORMATTING PROGRAMS information for a screen form previously registered with ENTER d Delete mode This lets you remove the ENTER registration for a screen form Deleting an ENTER registration removes all references to the screen form such as menu listings However it does not affect the original screen form See section 13 2 or 14 1 for information on deleting screen forms from the data dictionary and section 11 2 for information on listing menus SCREEN NAME The name of the screen form to register TARGET TABLE The name of the table that the screen form maintains the one inquired added modified or deleted You must specify the target table because fields from secondary tables can also display on the screen form HEADING A string of up to 34 characters that displays on line 2 of the screen form when ENTER is running The heading also displays on each menu where the ENTER screen is a selection option FORMATTING PROGRAMS The area below this prompt is for updating and displaying the report generating programs associated with this ENTER screen The combination of the formatting program NAME PARAMETERS TITLE and OUTPUT options is called a report registration ENTER data entry query by forms 331 332 NAME NOTE Report names registered with an ENTER screen display on the Report options
11. Figure 17 1 Relationships between rpt and other programs For more information on using RPT with SQL see SQL Screen Form Report Interface section 16 4 and Using RPT with other Unify DataServer ELS tools section 17 10 For information on combining RPT with ENTER or with user programs and shell scripts see Register Screen Form with ENTER section 15 1 or Using ENTER screens section 15 2 and Using RPT with Other Unify DataServer ELS tools section 17 10 Example report To understand how the report writer operates you need to understand the structure of an RPT report and the terms that describe the parts of a report Suppose you have a small database that contains three tables employees departments and taxes This is the same design used in the SQL description in chapter 16 And suppose you want a report that lists all departments each employee s name job salary and commission with a total for each department and a grand total for the company RPT Report processor 455 456 Figure 17 2 contains an example of such a report Department Listing lt before report 10 Administration lt before dept_no Name Job Salary Commission Bleriot programmer 1100 00 0 00 lt detail line Jones clerk 900 00 0 00 Lee president 7500 00 0 00 Scharf clerk 800 00 0 00 Total 10300 00 0 00 lt after dept_no 20 Eastern Sales Name Job Salary Commission Klein salesep ee 1500 00 0 00 O Neil salesrep 1500 00 150 00
12. For more information on how NSEGS and DEFSIZE work together see the description of NSEGS later in chapter 5 The name of a text editor or word processor The default setting is usually the UC Berkeley vi editor If you don t have the default editor or if you have something else you like better you can change it The editor is used by Create or Modify Help Documentation section 12 4 by Edit SQL or RPT Command Files section 12 5 by SQL section 16 3 when editing queries and by ENTER section 15 2 for editing text fields Format for printing floating point numbers The default for FLTFMT is g You can specify any other valid conversion character for C float variables for example 17 9f 2f or 0f The format in which long dates are accepted and displayed If LDATEFMT is not set the default format is MM DD YY The valid entries for this variable are the following DD MM YY or DD MM YY or DD MM YY DD MM YYYY MM DD YY MM DD YYYY 59 60 LMPROMO YY MM DD YYYY MM DD DD AAA YY DD AAA YYYY where D day M month Y year and A alphabetic month can be entered in upper or lower case To specify that days or months less than 10 display as 1 9 rather than 01 09 you can enter D and M For example if LDATEFMT is set as LDATEFMT M D YYYY the first day of June displays as 6 1 1999 rather than 06 01 1999 To specify a three letter month as in MAY or DEC use the DD AAA YY or DD AAA YYYY f
13. MAX The maximum size of the volume in 512 byte blocks specified by the user TOTAL database SIZE The current size of the database in 512 byte blocks 254 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 9 Display hash table statistics hts The Hash table statistics report displays statistics for various hash table parameters To display this report on the screen select Display hash table statistics hts from the database maintenance menu The program has no options for you to select The following is an example Hash table statistics report Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Display Hash Table HASH TABLE STATISTICS Total Entries 107601 Per Cent Filled 42 00 Average Chain Length 3 08 Longest Chain Length ap Starting Address 56896 Number of Chains of Length 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 gt 10 3568 14165 18 0 0 97 466 71 103 1613 gt gt When you are finished looking at the report press RETURN The items on the report are described as follows Total Entries The total number of filled slots in the hash table Per Cent Filled The percent of entries filled If 50 of the slots are filled the table is at Data Dictionary reports 255 256 optimal density If 70 or more of the slots are filled the performance of acckey and addrec degrades Average Chain Length The average number of consecutive filled slots before an empty slot in the table 50 of this number is a gross measure of the probes necessary to find a rec
14. Unify DataServer Unify eWave Unify VISION Unify WebNow and the Unify logo are trademarks of Unify Corporation in the United States and other countries Unify and ACCELL are registered trademarks of Unify Corporation in the United States and other countries Other brand or product names shown are trademarks of their respective owners Printed in U S A Part Number 7061 02 Contents About this manual 13 Reference Manual Organization 13 Syntax Conventions 17 Other Conventions 17 Part I The Unify DataServer ELS environment 19 Chapter 1 Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS 21 Building a Unify DataServer ELS database application 23 References 24 Chapter 2 Unify DataServer ELS and the operating system environment 27 File name suffixes 28 Directories and path names 28 Text editors 29 The print spooler 29 Running operating system commands from Unify DataServer ELS 30 Using operating system security from Unify DataServer ELS 31 Chapter 3 The Menu Handler 33 Standard Unify DataServer ELS menus 33 Users 39 Help documentation 40 Executables 41 Starting Unify DataServer ELS automatically 41 Customizing Menu Handler commands 42 Chapter 4 Files and directories 45 Files 46 Directories 49 Chapter 5 Environment variables 53 Using environment variables 53 Setting environment variables 53 Unify DataServer ELS environment variables 54 Environment variables and Unify DataServer ELS programs 67 Chapter 6 Termc
15. e The schema elements tables fields field relations Screens e Programs menus amp executables e B trees e Data security groups and employees e Storage information in multi volume databases The actual data for master dd is kept in sunify db sunify db contains the total number of tables and fields allowed the names of system menus and screens and the programs that control them the total number of B trees and volume definitions allowed and other information You can compare sunify db to an application s file db file Unify DataServer ELS uses sunify db to create your application data dictionary unify db The application data dictionary When you create a database you are prompted with the following Do you wish to create a new data dictionary If you answer yes sunify db is used to create unify db your application data dictionary file Unify DataServer ELS stores schema design information about your application in unify db The schema design information stored in unify db includes names for screens menus programs tables and fields The application data dictionary unify db however is confined by the limits set in the master data dictionary sunify db For example if sunify db limits the total amount of fields allowed in your application to 800 this may not be enough fields The ability to Custom message control 585 customize the master data dictionary gives you access to sunify db so you can increase the
16. 5 If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise if this is a negative number print a minus sign If a minus sign has already been printed print a space If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise if this is a negative number print a left parenthesis If a left parenthesis has already been printed print a space If this is a negative number print a right parenthesis in this position If there is a digit to the left of this position print a comma Otherwise print a space Print a decimal point in this position float field format templates RPT Report processor For float type fields RPT uses a print specification exactly like the C printf function The print specification has the following format minimum field width precision f e lg where the percent sign is required Options enclosed in square brackets are optional The list of items separated by the vertical bar indicates that you must choose one of the items in the list 535 The optional minus sign before the conversion specification indicates that the result is to be left justified in the field width The minimum field width is a number indicating the minimum number of print positions in the result If the result has fewer characters it is padded to fill the field width Precision indicates the number of digits that appear after the decimal point If precision is 0 no digit
17. 524 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 17 8 Command groups The command groups can be used in any order They are processed in an order determined by RPT not by the order they appear in the report script Each report script must contain at least one command group Some reports can be produced using only the detail command group Others just require summary information Summary reports are produced using only the after report command group The following is the syntax of the before report command group before report command group commands where before report identifies the command group The command group commands are what RPT processes If the commands are indented a few spaces the script s structure is more obvious You can begin to write your report script with an outline Start with the keywords and fill in the commands later A command group doesn t have to contain any commands For example the command group identifier header can be in a script as a reminder to add the appropriate command group commands later A command group is terminated by another command group identifier or a non command group command or at the end of the file For more information on command groups see sections 17 6 and 17 11 after report SYNTAX after report command group commands USE This command group is processed at the end of the report You can use it to print final totals or report summaries Therefore the after RPT Repo
18. Arguments table The name of a table in the current database If you don t know the table names use the tables command SQL errors SQL has two classes of errors syntax errors and semantic errors Syntax errors are errors in the structure of the statement such as misplacing or misspelling a keyword Syntax errors prevent SQL from recognizing your query Semantic errors are errors in the meaning of the statement such as selecting a unique field such as employee name and grouping by department number The statement is valid grammatically but the results aren t very meaningful Thus a semantic error can occur when you use aggregate functions and you list a field that is not a property of the group used to compute the aggregate In this case SQL does not report an error But the value s listed for the indicated field s has nothing to do with the aggregate function value returned For example suppose you want to know the employees who earn a salary equal to the average salary for all employees To answer this question you can use the following query select name avg salary from emp SQL Query DML language 449 450 This query does not result in an error It does produce a name and the average salary for all employees but the name returned is merely the last one read This employee may or may not earn the average salary In fact other employees who are not listed may earn the average salary To list the employees who ear
19. Bye Inexact matches When comparing strings you often need to check for a range of characters or for all the strings with common letters Special characters can be used as string constants to perform such inexact matches The following explains how special characters can be used in inexact character matches The wildcard character The question mark matches a single character For example if you want to print a special message for all the Smiths and don t know whether the spelling is Smith or Smyth you can use the string constant Sm th t The wildcard string The asterisk matches a string of characters of any length This includes zero length strings or null strings For example RPT Report processor 501 502 the string constant John matches all strings beginning with John such as John John Johnson John 3 16 The wildcard string helps you compare two strings when the length of one string is not known or part of its value must be matched Suppose you have a report field of type string and length 30 The field name is client and it contains client names To print the names of all the clients with the last name Smith the if command begins as follows Lf elient Smith then ss The wildcard string at the front of the string constant matches first names or initials The space following Smith ensures such names as Smithy or Smithsonian do not match The wildcard string aft
20. Emp_No and Dept_No 10 and lt Job Salary gt is in select Job Salary from emp org where Number Emp_No and Dept_No 10 The conditional fields are Job and Salary in the nested query Job is 10 bytes in size and Salary is 4 bytes for a total conditional field size of 14 bytes If you expect 50 records your equation is 50 144 4 2 for a result of 1800 Determining TIMEM for Duplicate Joins To calculate the memory needed for duplicate joins use the following formula SQL Query DML language 409 410 number of expected records total size of conditional fields 4 2 12 average number of duplicated 2 EXAMPLE For example the following query yields duplicate joins select emp Name Location mgr Name mgr_dept Location from emp dept org emp mgr dept mgr_dept org mgr_org where emp Manager mgr Number and emp Number org Emp_No and mgr Number mgr_org Emp_No and org Dept_No dept Number and mgr_org Dept_No mgr_dept Number and dept Location mgr_dept Location The conditional fields are emp Manager emp Number mgr Number mgr_dept Number and dept Number from the where clause The total conditional fields size is 10 bytes If you expect 10 records and the average number of conditional duplicates that result in the same Manager is 4 your equation is 10 4 10 2 4 12 4 2 for a result of 204 Determining TIMEM for No Duplica
21. Enter your license key sh for shell x to exit Answer appropriately as described below key Enter your license key X If you do not have a license key code or want to skip the software licensing enter Y You see the following message To continue the installation return to step 18 Not installing license Installation continuing sh If you want to escape to the operating system enter sh You see this message Pushing shell Type exit to return Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide 687 688 2 We fo ko XXXX To return to this spot in the installation process enter exit at the operating system prompt When you enter a license key you are asked to verify the key you entered with this message License key entered XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Use y n Respond appropriately to the prompt as described below No If you answer with n you will be given another opportunity to enter the license key Yes If you answer yes the key value is placed in the install license key file The licensing program then licenses the appropriate executables depending on the options and additional products you purchased You see the message Preparing to license your product As the license key is being installed in the appropriate executables the following message is added to the Installmsgs file for each executable that is licensed License code xxxx has been installed f
22. Explanation The table named xxxx doesn t exist in the database you are trying to load Correction Make sure you are using the right database file and the right table and that the file name and field name are spelled correctly gt gt gt Invalid table xxxx Explanation SQL cannot recognize the table name xxxx used in the query The problem in the following invalid query is that the table name is misspelled Invalid Query select name from epm Correction select name from emp gt gt gt Invalid table specification in the select clause xxxx Explanation SQL cannot recognize the table name xxxx used before the The problem in the following invalid query is that the table name is misspelled Invalid Query select epm from emp Unify DataServer ELS messages 627 628 Correction select emp from emp gt gt gt Invalid time Explanation The format of a time constant is incorrect TIME constants are of the form HH MM where HH is the hour 0 to 23 and MM is the minute 0 to 59 For example the following invalid RPT script tries to set a time variable to an incorrect format Invalid Script set report_time to 12 344 Correction set report_time to 12 34 gt gt gt Invalid type Explanation The field type just entered is not valid The valid field types are NUMERIC FLOAT STRING DATE TIME AMOUNT COMB BINARY LDATE and TEXT gt gt gt Invalid Type Entered Explanation This message displays
23. Explanation This is an internal error Your system does not have enough memory to complete the compile process Correction Try reducing the complexity of the Advanced Field Attributes file gt gt gt Insufficient memory for the record relocation table Explanation A fatal error has occurred causing the replay the program to fail because the program cannot allocate enough memory to hold the record relocation table The record relocation table keeps track of record locations that have changed because of incomplete transactions This error should only occur if you have a large number of errors or incomplete logical transaction groups and your hardware has limited address space gt gt gt Internal error In ckset nnn Ill Explanation You are trying to set a variable to an unrecognized type Invalid Script input i_time time value numeric 4 before report set x to DATA detail print x i_time value Correction input i_time time value numeric 4 before report set x to DATA Unify DataServer ELS messages 621 622 detail print x i_time value gt gt gt Internal system error unable to execute the backup driver Explanation Read Database Backup or Write Database Backup cannot find or cannot run the backup device driver The backup device driver is either the default BUDRVR or a custom version of BUDRVR specified in the BUDRVR environment variable Correction Make sure BUDRVR or the custom
24. Figure 6 6 Imaginary character command keys Assigning command keys to commands Some restrictions apply when assigning command keys to commands 1 Acommand can be invoked by more than one character but any character can only be associated with a single command 78 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 2 Digits cannot be used to invoke commands This is because digits are used to indicate the command repeat count The exception is 0 which can only be assigned to the FAINT column 0 command 3 Only nonprinting characters should be assigned to the escape command If you assign a print character to the escape command you cannot enter that print character in a screen form because entering it cancels input mode 4 Imaginary character names that appear as members of the command key list must be enclosed in the symbols lt and gt You can check the syntax of the unicap file with a command that can be invoked from the shell The form of the command is ckunicap p file name where file name is the path name of the unicap file you are using The optional p prints the file after the messages It reports errors in the format and representation of characters but does not check semantics Semantic errors are checked and reported by PAINT and the Menu Handler before they start The ckunicap program also accepts standard input If no file name is present ckunicap expects data from standard input The standard unicap file Fi
25. If you want the SQL output to be processed by another program whether it is RPT an operating system program or a custom program you should suppress the header lines that label the fields in the output The way to do this is with the lines command described in section 16 3 Add the command lines 0 to the beginning of the script to suppress these header lines For more information on SQL scripts see Creating and Running SQL Scripts also in section 16 3 Registering a screen form with SQL ssqimnt Before SQL can drive a screen form it must be registered with the SQL screen driver Screens can also be registered with ENTER section 15 1 but not with both SQL and ENTER To determine how existing screens have been registered run Print List of Programs section 11 7 The SQL registration process tells the SQL screen driver what to display when the SQL screen is running and what SQL script to use SQL Query DML language 415 416 This program also allows for the registration of reports Each report is the product of a formatting program associated parameters title and output options These reports can then be run using the SQL Report Options screen earlier in chapter 16 After a screen form has been registered with SQL it can also be placed on menus section 12 2 When you delete an SQL screen references to that screen form such as menu listings are removed You can obtain a list of all menus using Print Menus section 11
26. Invalid Script input x date name string 30 before report set x to 4 Correction input o_date date name string 30 before report set x to 4 gt gt gt There is an error in an if expression Explanation RPT has found an incorrect expression in the if command Correction Review correct RPT expression syntax in Section 17 4 gt gt gt There is an integer constant expected for the length Explanation When a data type and length is assigned to a report field in the input section LENGTH must be an integer See Sections 17 2 and 17 7 Invalid Script input customer_num numeric xx Unify DataServer ELS messages 661 Correction input customer_num numeric 12 gt gt gt There is an invalid aggregate expression Explanation The syntax for an aggregate function is incorrect See Section 17 5 Invalid Script print total total print total cust_amount where cust_amount gt 7 00 Correction print total correct_field print total cust_amount where cust_amount gt 7 00 gt gt gt There is an invalid command Explanation RPT do0es not recognize the word located on line nnn asa command group identifier The next error message indicates the error line number Often this error is caused by a misspelling of the first word ona non command group line following a command group command Invalid Script before report ssset X to 0 Correction before report set x to 0 662 Unify DataServer ELS Devel
27. PO in column 6 po_number in column 10 using ld Date Ordered Ordered Date Shipped Shipped Set vdate to Ordered print Ordered by in column 6 pe_name on dy print Item in column 6 Oty in column 36 Price in column 44 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Ext in column 56 print 53 in column 6 detail print Description in column 6 Quantity in column 36 using Price in column 41 using S S SS amp amp after po_number print Total in column 43 total Quantity Price using S S5 SSS amp amp skip after v_number need 7 skip print Order Summary for v_name in column 20 skip print Current in column 6 order30 using Over 30 in column 20 order60 using Over 60 in column 33 order90 using Over 90 in column 46 orders_over90 using Total in column 59 order30 order60 orderg90 orders_over90 using print 73 in column 1 skip 2 set tot30 to tot30 order30 set tot60 to tot60 order60 set tot90 to tot90 order90 set tot_over90 to tot_over90 order_over90 after report need 5 skip print Grand Totals in column 32 skip print Current in column 6 tot30 using Over 30 in column 20 tot60 using Over 60 in column 33 tot90 using H Over 90 in column 46 tot_over90 using Total in column 59 tot30 tot60 to
28. SQL has two ways to run such scripts from SQL and from the operating system Suppose your query which computes the maximum salary for all employees is stored in a file called maxsal From SQL From SQL you can run a script by entering start followed b the file name of the script containing the query NOTE If the script file name contains special characters other than the underscore such as slashes or periods put single quote marks around it to mask the characters from SQL for example query or selrec cmd To run the example script maxsal from SQL you would use the following command SQL Query DML language 397 sql gt start maxsal The query runs just as if you typed it from the terminal except that it is not stored in the edit buffer From the operating system From the shell you can type SQL maxsal to run the query in maxsal Make sure you have set the appropriate environment variables as described in chapter 5 The results go to the standard output while any error messages go to the standard error output These can be piped or redirected using standard shell syntax The complete shell syntax for running SQL is as follows SQL b script name where the script name is required The b option tells SQL that the query results should be in a binary format The default without b is ASCII format Running operating system commands You can run operating system commands from within SQL by preceding them
29. TABLE FIELD The short names of each table in the database and the fields in each table listed in the order in which they were defined REF The names of each field referenced in an explicit relationship TYPE The data types of the fields in each table LENGTH The display lengths of the fields in each table LONG NAME The long name of each database table and field DATE 04 30 99 TIM B 11 29 46 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Table List TABLE NUME customer 4 item 3 manf 1 model 2 order 5 Figure 11 2 Table list report PAGE 2 EXPECTED LENGTH 10 122 100 52 10 112 50 64 100 38 The column headings on the table list report are described as follows 236 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference TABLE The short name of each table in the database listed in alphabetical order NUMBER The number that identifies each table in the data dictionary EXPECTED The number of records each table is expected to contain LENGTH The record length in bytes for each table DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 49 PAGE 3 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Field List FIELD NUMBER TABLE TYPE LENGTH caddr 21 customer STRING 30 ccity 22 customer STRING 20 cname 20 customer STRING 30 cnum 19 customer NUMERIC 5 cphone 25 customer STRING 14 cstate 23 customer STRING 2 czip 24 customer STRING 5 iad 12 item DATE imodel 9 item COMB 6 imodel_momano TT
30. Unlike the two other control characters CTRL X can be used whenever an ordinary character would be accepted This gives you a quick way to exit an ENTER screen Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The simplest query is to locate a record by its primary key Enter the key value and ENTER can find the record without searching After you locate a record this way in modify mode press RETURN to move the cursor to the field you want to edit and update the record by entering new data Besides locating records by primary key ENTER has two additional query capabilities exact matching and inexact or generic matching Exact matching is when you fill in the field or fields on the screen form with exactly what you want the selected records to contain Inexact matching is when you enter expressions using combinations of values and special characters rather than exact values Examples of inexact matches are numeric and date ranges such as numbers from 1 to 100 or dates from 3 1 82 to 3 31 82 or substring matches such as all the strings that contain the string Smith Inexact matching on string fields To specify an inexact match on string fields enter a search expression containing special characters ENTER uses these special characters to form patterns to be matched The length of your search expression string can be two times the field length plus two characters The following describes the special characters used to construc
31. emp Name emp Job emp Salary emp Commission detail print Name Job Salary Commission end You can send RPT presorted input from SQL or a custom program by using the sorted option When you specify that the input is presorted you save processing time because RPT doesn t have to resort all the records In this case level breaks only occur on presorted fields Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference If you use the sorted option RPT assumes that all fields listed in the input chapter are sorted in the order listed To specify the number of presorted input fields you must set the RPT environment variable RPTNSITM to that number When using the sorted option the input field order and the RPTNSITM setting are extremely important For the complete syntax of the input chapter see Non Command Groups section 17 7 For more information on RPT environment variables see Using RPT With Other Unify DataServer ELS Tools section 17 10 Department listing 2 report script Two new RPT script chapters are required to add column headings and a Report Complete message to the report The two new RPT script chapters are as follows e before report e after report Two new clauses are also added e column positions column headings and detail line columns e The using clause contains format instructions for detail lines The report script for Department Listing 2 Figure 17 5 is as follows input name string 10 job strin
32. sql gt where emp Manager agr Number sql gt and emp Dept_No dept Number sql gt and mgr Dept_No mgr_dept Number sql gt and dept Location mgr_dept Location recognized query emp Name dept Location mgr Name mgr_dept Location Smith San Francisco Reilly Chicago Whittaker New York Lee Dallas Reilly Chicago Lee Dallas Dugan Los Angeles Lee Dallas SQL Query DML language 387 Variable Queries SQL evaluates standard nested queries from the inside out passing the resulting value s from the innermost query to the next outer query Each query is evaluated only once Variable queries reverse this procedure working from the outside in Variable queries let you perform an inner query multiple times using values from the outer query Suppose you want compare salary and commission levels and you want to know which employees earn more than 25 of the total paid to everyone else with the same job To make sure the results are meaningful choose the job categories with at least four employees Take the following steps 1 Find the job categories with at least four employees 2 For each employee in one of these job categories do the following a Total the salary plus commission of everyone else with the same job Leave out the salary plus commission of the current employee b If the current employee earns more than 0 25 times this total select this employee The query that determines which e
33. 1 500 00 O Neil salesrep 18 000 00 150 00 Dugan salesrep 19 800 00 900 00 Schmidt programmer 30 000 00 0 00 Klein salesrep 18 000 00 0 00 Scharf clerk 9 600 00 0 00 Lee president 90 000 00 0 00 Otsaka engineer 21 600 00 0 00 Kawasak salesrep 21 600 00 1 000 00 Dupre clerk 9 600 00 0 00 Bleriot programmer 13 200 00 0 00 Moehr clerk 11 400 00 0 00 Colucci salesrep 30 000 00 3 000 00 Amato salesrep 24 000 00 750 00 Fiorella clerk 9 600 00 0 00 Brown engineer 24 000 00 0 00 Report Complete Figure 17 5 Department listing 2 RPT Report processor 461 DEPARTMENT LISTING For World Wide Sales Inc 10 Administration Name Job Salary Commission Scharf clerk 9 600 00 0 00 Lee president 90 000 00 0 00 Jones clerk eee 10 800 00 _ eee 0 00 9 Bleriot T programmer B 13 200 00 0 00 Total 123 600 00 0 00 20 Eastern Sales Name Job Salary Commission Whittaker salesrep CS 30 000 00 500 00 _ O Neil salesrep 18 000 00 150 00 Klein salesrep 18 000 00 0 00 Total 66 000 00 650 00 70 Finance Name Job Salary Commission Moehr clerk 11 400 00 0 00 Fiorella clerk 9 600 00 0 00 Total 21 000 00 0 00 Grand Total 439 200 00 8 800 00 Average Salary Minimum Salary Maximum Salary 23 115 79 9 600 00 90 000 00 Total Employees 19 Report Complete Figure 17 6 Department Listing 3 462 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Department listing 1 report s
34. 260 Transaction logging is a way to restore the database to a logically consistent state with a minimal loss of information after a hardware or software failure Transaction Logging tracks updates at the function level to ensure physical database integrity It writes a log record when the database is updated by adding or deleting a record or modifying a field However the user application program must maintain logical database integrity Only the application recognizes that a series of database functions should be grouped in a single logical transaction The application program uses the startltg and endltg functions to indicate that a set of database updates must be treated as a single logical transaction For more information on these functions see the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual The Unify DataServer ELS programs that update the database ENTER SQL and DBLOAD issue calls to mark the start and end of what they consider a logical transaction ENTER treats a set of updates made to a record as a logical transaction SQL treats all updates made by one DML statement as a logical transaction And DBLOAD treats an entire set of additions or updates as a logical transaction If you have enabled transaction logging using the Transaction logging status program each update made to the database is logged to the log file For more information see Transaction logging status in this chapter When a software or hardware failu
35. 3 A blank If you enter a blank no formatting program is used and the report lists the fields in a simple tabular format Therefore a blank entry can cause output lines to wrap PARAMETERS Four 14 character strings that are passed as parameters to the formatting program The formatting program interprets the meaning of the parameters Enter parameters one string per row next to each hyphen The number of parameters allowed is determined by the type of formatting program as shown in Figure 16 6 If the FORMATTING Then the maximum PROGRAM IS number of PARAMETERS is RPT 1 the name of an RPT script blank 0 custom program 4 Figure 16 6 Number of Parameters per Formatting Program If NAME is a custom program you can enter more than one parameter in each PARAMETERS field To do this enter the parameters with spaces between them providing the total length does not exceed 14 characters SQL starts the custom program as if you entered the command from the shell using the following syntax SQL Query DML language 419 420 TITLE OUTPUT CMD SQL sql script program pl p2 p3 p4 where sql script is the name of the SQL script file registered with the screen form program is the name of a formatting program RPT LST or your custom program p1 p4 are the four parameter strings The descriptive label for the report produced when you select this option through the SQL Report Options Screen This field and it
36. 5 record s added update statement The DML update statement lets you modify fields in existing records This statement consists of the update keyword followed by the set clause and the optional where clause The set clause lets you specify the new values of the selected fields in a record The where clause specifies which records to update Otherwise all the records for the indicated table are updated You can specify updates with literal values expressions or query statements You can also use the field value validation feature of Advanced Field Attributes AFA with the update statement For more information on AFA or for field validation warning messages see Advanced Field Attributes in section 8 6 For update error messages see Messages at the end of section 16 5 EXAMPLE Change Owens salary to 1000 sql gt update emp sql gt set Salary 1000 sql gt where Name Owens recognized update 1 record s updated You can update a field using an expression and you can update more than one field in a single update clause EXAMPLE Move all the salesreps to department 70 and set their commissions to 35 of their salary SQL Query DML language 393 sql gt update emp sql gt set Commission Salary 0 35 sql gt Dept_No 70 sql gt where Job salesrep recognized update 22 record s updated As the following example shows you can update a field using a query statement to calculat
37. A date constant consists of three values separated by slashes periods or dashes The default format is MM DD YY where MM is the month DD is the day and YY is the year This is the same default format as for an LDATE field data type If only two digits are specified the year value refers to a number of years after 1900 The following are valid dates in the default format 1 1 1 1 1 00 12 31 99 6 3 82 The following are not valid default format dates 0 0 0 13 32 178 3 14 You can change the default date format with the DATETP or LDATEFMT environment variables For a complete description of DATETP and LDATEFMT see chapter 5 If DATETP is set the possible date formats are as shown in Figure 17 15 DATETP value DATEFORMAT AM American MM DD YY EU European DD MM YY Figure 17 15 DATETP settings and date formats RPT Report processor 495 496 DATETP value DATEFORMAT IN International YY MM DD US United States MM DD YY Figure 17 15 DATETP settings and date formats If LDATEFMT is set the possible date formats are as shown in Figure 17 16 LDATEFMT value DD MM YY DD MM YY DD MM YY DD MM YYYY DD MM YYYY DD MM YYYY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD DD AAA YY DD AAA YY DD AAA YY DD AAA YYYY DD AAA YYYY DD AAA YYYY Figure 17 16 LDATEFMT settings and date formats RPT uses the format specified in LDATEFMT for inp
38. Called from SQL By Forms the SQL Report Options Screen lets you choose a report a combination of output destinations and the optional debug mode for a set of retrieved records The exact reports available and valid output destinations are set with Register Screen Form with SQL The following is an example of an SQL Report Options Screen custmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Customer maintenance REPORT TO EEN PRINT Customer Report 1998 Customer List by States Purchase Ranking Mailing List Market Area Report The report Options Screen prompts are described as follows SQL Query DML language 423 424 REPORT REPORT TO Any listed option number can be entered as a report choice RETURN defaults to the first report item You can also escape to the shell from this prompt using the command sh or to a text editor using the command edit This is useful when you want to modify formatting scripts with an editor or you want to look at output that has been redirected to a file The title of the report produced when you select this option This string derives from TITLE on the SQL Screen Registration screen Output can be directed to the following destinations SCREEN The terminal screen PRINT The print spooler FILE A file with the name specified in FILENAME Enter an x between the brackets to select the corresponding output destination for the current repor
39. Extra spaces are left when actual name is less than 25 characters Thus the following print statement print City State Zip_Code gives the result Sacramento CA 95825 The indirect concatenation operator eliminates trailing blanks Thus the following print statement print City State Zip Code gives the result Sacramento CA 95825 Now that you are aware of the features of this advanced report the following is the complete text of the report script input v_number numeric 4 v_name string 20 Address City State Zip_Code vr_name string20 po_number numeric 9 Ordered Shipped Line Number Description Quantity Price pe_name string 20 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference width 8 sort lt d P before set set set set set skip prin skip prin 1 prin skip prin skip set set set set set prin Yy prin skip prin page header skip prin prin footer skip prin before if s b RPT Report processor 0 use 8 1 2 by 11 paper t gt Shipped v_number o_number Line Number report pg_title to orders not yet shipped tot30 to 0 tot6o to 0 tot9o0 to 0 tot_over90 to 0 10 t 57 centered ORD I O R T centered ea w t PURCHAS STATUS RE t 57 centered W Fl t Purchase Orders Issued from 1 to 2 centered 2 vdate to today weekday to
40. Figure 8 2 Database tables and fields Using the two tables Figure 8 3 shows how the long names of most database fields are used to generate their access names For the Field Its Access Name Is momano Manufacturer_ID mdes Description isal Sales_Price iorder Order_Number Figure 8 3 Field access names However because mokey is a COMB field with two component fields momano and monum two implied fields are created in the imodel field one for each component field in mokey When a field such as imodel references a COMB field in a second table the field s long name is not used to generate its access name The referencing field must have separate access names for each of its implied fields The access name of each implied field is a combination of the first field s short database name and the short name of each component field it references in the second table Figure 8 4 illustrates this naming convention Its implied fields access names are For the field imodel imodel_monum imodel_momano Figure 8 4 COMB field access names COMB FIELD This is the name of the combination field a COMB type field in the current table of which the current field is a part 130 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference A combination field is not accessed by its long name but by its component field long names as described above To add new fields to the current table enter an a at the operation prompt to select add mode Th
41. If an order was issued more than 90 days ago it is marked for follow up action Figures 17 8 17 9 and 17 10 show title page detail page and report totals excerpts from the report kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PURCHASE ORDER STATUS REPORT Purchase orders issued from 10 1 98 to 1 31 99 Friday January 27 1999 Report Run on 01 27 99 at 10 10 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Figure 17 8 Purchase Oorder status report title page Purchase order Status Report 01 27 99 20 10 orders already shipped 101 Precision Tool Co Contact Howard Johnson 2600 West 16th St Alhambra CA 92155 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt gt gt Po 1237 Date Ordered 10 10 99 Date Shipped 10 17 98 Ordered by Tony Cartwright on Monday Item Qty Price Ext combination pliers 4 6 89 27 56 leather mallet 8 8 75 70 00 Total 97 56 PO 1238 Date Ordered 12 13 98 Date Shipped 22 29 98 ordered by Tony Cartwright on Tuesday Item Qty Price Ext 3 Phillips 12 2 35 28 20 screwdriver 8 power lock tape 12 2 69 32 28 measure 6 slotted screwdriver 12 2 89 34 68 Total 95 16 Order Summary for Precision Tool Co Current 0 Over 30 1 Over60 O Over 90 1 Total 2 HAAR KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KAKI KIARA KKK KKK KIA KKK KKK IKI KKK KIARA KIA k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k Figure 17 9 Purchase order status report detail page Gran
42. L to cursor coordinates x y g x RETURN RETURN must be entered after the xandy y RETURN coordinates to col 0 of the current line 0 to the first non blank character on the x current line to the last non blank character on the current line Figure 13 2b Cursor motion command summary Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Prompt editing commands When you want to Then use enter append mode a enter insert mode i enter replace mode R exit append insert or replace modes ESC delete the current character open a blank line above the current line open a blank line below the current line a o o x delete the current line transfer the current line toggle normal video on off toggle reverse video on off ioe a ee toggle underline video on off toggle reverse underline video on off Figure 13 3 Prompt editing command summary Screen field editing commands When you want to Then use add a new field A modify a field M delete a field D transfer a field T Figure 13 4 Screen field editing command summary Miscellaneous commands When you want to Then use display PAINT help display the name of the current screen form s toggle the cursor position display on off c redraw the screen CTRL R Figure 13 5 Miscellaneous paint command summary Screen form development tools 297 Miscellaneous commands When you want to Then use quit PAINT mode returning to Save q D on
43. Query facilities 351 Required and optional clauses 351 Identifying tables and fields in queries 352 Entering query statements 352 Help features 353 select from CLAUSE 355 where CLAUSE 358 unique KEYWORD 366 Arithmetic expressions 367 Aggregate functions 369 order by CLAUSE 371 group by CLAUSE 372 Nested queries 375 Contents having CLAUSE 378 Join queries 381 Variable Queries 388 Data Manipulation Language facilities 390 insert statement 390 update statement 393 delete statement 394 Unify DataServer ELS SQL extensions 396 Editing queries 396 Creating and running SQL scripts 397 Running operating system commands 398 Dumping data to external files 399 Loading data from external files 400 Using text fields with SQL 404 Using binary fields with SQL 405 Using SQL internal tables and environment variables 405 SQL Screen Form Report interface 413 SQL by forms ssql 413 Registering a screen form with SQL ssqlmnt 415 Using an SQL screen 421 Using the SQL report option screen 423 SQL reference 427 Keyword summary 427 Formal language syntax 427 Query statements and clauses 428 DML statements and clauses 441 Non Query commands 444 HELP commands 448 SQL errors 449 Part VI Report generators 451 Chapter 17 RPT Report processor 453 Report writing concepts 454 Files used by RPT 454 Example report 455 Basic report examples 459 Department listing example 459 8 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Form
44. SQL and custom HLI programs If the programs that interface with AFA cannot read the unify afa information into memory the Advanced Field Attributes cannot work as if they were never created If any of the programs that interface with AFA cannot read unify afa into memory try one of the following solutions 1 Define and compile fewer Advanced field attributes 2 Decrease the amount of memory needed by the program Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference AFA file structure The general structure of the Advanced field attributes file is as follows table section field section statement statement field section table section Each table section contains one or more field sections Each field section contains one or more statements pa eis normally take a single line but they can be continued on additional lines by putting a backslash at the end of the line The following describes how to specify Advanced Field Attributes This includes a syntax diagram for each section The syntax diagrams use the following conventions bolditems These words or characters are required in the attribute statement or are optional keywords The words have special meaning and cannot be used for table or field names italic words These are place holders for words numbers or expressions you define Examples include table for a table name field for a field name and offset for a constant value Square brackets around a word or e
45. The default setting for TERMCAP is etc termcap The maximum amount of memory used as a buffer for a temporary index If this variable is set too low and the temporary index requires more memory the overflow is stored in up to two disk files If the temporary index uses less memory than specified in TIMEM only the smaller amount is used The default value is 8192 8k For more information about setting TIMEM and other internal SQL table sizes see section 16 3 Specifies the C compiler options to be used by ucc to generate an object file during program loading If UCFLAGS is not set the default is 65 66 UCNAME UNICAP UNIFY UNIFYTMP UUACL c For more information about ucc see section 1 5 of the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual Specifies the name of the C language compiler to be used during program loading and by ucc If UCNAME is not set the default C compiler is cc For more information about ucc see section 1 5 of the Direct HLI Programmer s Manual The complete path name of the unicap file If UNICAP is not set the default setting for UNICAP is the unicap file located in the directory specified by Unify DataServer ELS This file is used by Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 and the Menu Handler chapter 3 to determine how the keyboard works A standard unicap file is supplied with Unify DataServer ELS The unicap file is described in section 6 2 The location of the Unify DataServer E
46. Your department exceeded the goal for the first quarter and want to congratulate everyone responsible mrl jk The following SQL query is used to produce the input file for the form letters It selects everyone in the sales offices select dept Name emp Name Commission from dept emp where dept Name Sales and dept Number Dept_NO The report script required to print the form letters is as follows Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference input dept_name string 15 emp_name string 101 emp Commission paper size specifications left margin 8 width 80 length 66 sort dept_name before dept nam skip 6 print MEM 0 in column 23 skip 4 print To dept_name in column 10 print FROM Mr Lee print SUBJECT Sales quotas for lst quarter 1998 skip 2 print AS you know our sales goal for the 1st quarter of 1998 print for each salesrep was 10 000 The following salesreps print in your department met or exceeded the goal skip print Name in column 8 Total Sales in column 25 print 35 in column 8 detail if Commission 05 gt 10000 then print emp_name in column 8 Commission 05 in column 20 after dept_name initialize sales totals set dept_total to total commission 05 set dept_goal to 10000 00 count skip 2 print Congratulations Keep up the good work skip print The department goal was
47. and index translates the numbers to character strings The following commands can be used to set variables to the week and month set vdate to today set weekday to lt dy gt index dow vdate Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday set month to lt mnth gt index mdy vdate 0 1 January February March April May June July August September October November December print weekday month If you want to add your own local functions as well refer to the Unify DataServer ELS Programmer s Manual for more information For a report with page titles that change you can enter the value of a string variable in the header section Then you reset the variable to different messages depending on the page being printed In the example report you want the page title to indicate whether the current page contains unshipped or shipped purchase orders You do this by setting a variable pg_title in the before report section This indicates that unshipped orders are being printed Remember that unshipped orders list first Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference When the dt control break occurs the message changes to indicate that shipped orders are being printed RPT then skips to the next page The following are the sections of the report script described so far sort lt dt gt shipped vendor Number po Number Line Number before report set pg_t
48. and LST assigns default columns headings and formats At the most complex level you specify the column line and format for each field or expression You can define sort order subtotals and totals You can also specify multiple line list and column headings 557 If LST cannot satisfy your reporting needs see chapter 17 RPT Report Processor for information about formatting more complex reports The following explains the syntax conventions and the types of expressions you can use in LST commands LST Syntax conventions Tbe following conventions are used to describe the syntax of LST commands Optional item Square brackets enclosing an item indicate that the entry is optional and can be omitted Repeat item The ellipsis indicates that the preceding item can be repeated a number of times Choose one item Vertical bars enclosing a stacked list of items indicate that one item in the list must be chosen Expressions The term expr is used by the listing processor to refer to a combination of fields operators and constants The syntax of expr is as follows expr field number string ref field 558 F expr 7 field j number string start end Z ref field lt gt lt gt substr and or Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Expression operators are evaluated in the following order from highest to lowest substr lt gt lt gt SS Expressions o
49. because the Unify DataServer ELS preprocessor converts each function name into its identifying number as given in file h For a list of functions see the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual 579 580 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Appendix C Custom message control Appendix C contains information for customizing your database application You can customize your application as follows e Using Custom message control you can change the messages that Unify DataServer ELS displays while running e You can set the CURR environment variables to specify currency display formats e You can set the DATETP and LDATEFMT environment variables to specify date display formats Using Reconfigure data dictionary you can modify the Unify DataServer ELS master data dictionary to change Unify DataServer ELS system menu headings and other system characteristics 581 C 1 Custom message control 582 Custom message control enables you to modify the messages displayed by Unify DataServer ELS You can change a message to display custom instructions for the user For example a message can tell the user the following Contact the System Administrator at Extension 326 You can even change all the messages to another language All Unify DataServer ELS messages are stored as ASCII text in the following two files unifymsgs localmsgs Both unifymsgs and localmsgs are located in the Unify DataServer ELS
50. from emp sql gt where Commission lt Salary 5 100 and sql gt Job salesrep recognized query Name Salary Commission Salary 5 100 Whittaker 2500 00 500 00 1350 00 O Neil 1500 00 150 00 850 00 Dugan 1650 00 900 00 925 00 Klein 1500 00 0 00 850 00 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Name Salary Commission Salary 5 100 Amato 2000 00 750 00 1100 00 EXAMPLE Suppose you make 3000 per month and earn commissions of 5000 per year Compute your total compensation base tax amount and marginal tax amount using the data from taxes sql gt select 3000 12 5000 Base_Tax sql gt 3000 12 5000 Min_Amount Marginal_Rate sql gt from taxes sql gt where 3000 12 5000 between Min_Amount and Max_Amount recognized query 3000 12 5000 Base_Tax 3000 12 5000 Min_Amount Marginal_Rate 41000 00000 7323 00 2262 00 Aggregate functions SQL has five built in aggregate functions to calculate grouped items in a query The functions are count min max Sum and avg Aggregate functions are only valid in select or having clauses You cannot use an aggregate function directly in a where clause although you can achieve the same effect by using a nested query This is detailed in Nested Queries later in this chapter An aggregate function applies to a group of records with a common characteristic for example the average salar
51. name is a label assigned to an expression in a sort command A before name command group often has a matching after name command group that uses the same name expression But no two after command groups can use the same name Likewise no two before command groups can use the same name The following commands are used in the command groups to describe report output need number print expr in col umn number using format expr in col umn number using format l no newline centered skip number Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference page no footer no header set variable to expr if expr then command else command In the if statement command can be either a single command or a sequence of command group commands When command is more than one command group command the commands must be enclosed by the keywords begin and end as follows begin command group command 1 command group command n end The page and need commands aren t valid in the header or footer command group In command groups other than the after report command group command group commands can name an expression the first time it is used The expression can be used again by giving its name Therefore expr often implies the following expr lt name gt expr RPT Report processor 555 556 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 18 LST Listing processor The Unify DataServer ELS Lis
52. plus several miscellaneous programs You can use these programs to control database security provide database reports and database design information report the status of database changes develop help documentation and command scripts register executables and load data in the database 213 214 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 10 Database security utilities This chapter describes how to control access to a Unify DataServer ELS database to create a secure environment Using an encrypted password scheme Unify DataServer ELS has several levels of protection These Unify DataServer ELS protection levels enforce login security program and menu security and field security Login level security prevents unauthorized operating system users from accessing Unify DataServer ELS databases Users must enter user ID s and passwords to access databases The system administrator can be assigned a super user ID Program and menu level security restricts unauthorized database users from accessing some programs or menus If users don t have access privileges for specific programs or menus those options don t display Field level security prevents unauthorized access to individual database fields Users must supply the correct read and write passwords to access read protected or write protected fields You can combine Unify DataServer ELS s protection with your operating system s file protection to increase security The operatin
53. print FALSE The command on the left prints TRUE and the command on the right prints FALSE Logical expressions can also be used as part of arithmetic expressions RPT substitutes the numeric value of the logical expression 1 or 0 in the arithmetic expression to perform the evaluation NOTE An arithmetic expression cannot be used in place of a logical expression in an if command Comparison operators 490 Two values can be compared using the comparison operators Either value can be in the form of a report field a function a variable another expression or a constant Figure 17 11 shows the comparison operators COMPARISON OPERATORS equal to not equal to lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to Figure 17 11 Expression comparison operators Expressions using comparison operators yield the numeric results 0 if FALSE and 1 if TRUE The table in figure 17 12 shows how comparison operators can be used in expressions The value of each expression and its TRUE or FALSE interpretations are Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference shown fielda and fieldb are report fields containing the numeric values 21 and 0 respectively Expression Result fielda gt fleldb TRUE fielda lt fieldb FALSE fielda lt 34 TRUE 98 3428 gt flelda FALSE fielda fieldb fielda fieldd FALSE fielda 21 gt fieldb TRUE fielda 21 gt fieldb N A Figure 17 12
54. select Create or Modify Screen Forms screens from the Main Menu The following menu and options display screens Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Create or Modify Screen Forms PAINT Screen Forms Register Screen Forms with ENTE Register Screen Forms with SQI Check Screen Form Coordinates Display List of Screens Test Sceens Compile Screens Restore Screen to Data Dictionary Create Default Screen Form Oo MAAN A ON RAUNG ECTION paint B ESC select U up RET down X home P previous Z clear D exit Options 1 and 9 are described in sections 13 2 and 13 1 For descriptions of options 4 through 8 see sections 14 1 through 14 4 For a description of option 2 see section 15 1 And for option 3 see section 16 4 288 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 13 1 Create default screen form cdsf Using this option a screen form that refers to all the fields in a particular table can be created compiled and registered with ENTER Start the program by selecting Create Default Screen Form cdsf from the Create or Modify Screen Forms menu The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Create Default Screen Form The TABLE prompt is where you enter the name of an existing table This generates a default screen form for that table After the default screen form is created processed and registered with ENTER the screen form is erased You then can en
55. separator The command lets you execute operating system commands And when you finish using SQL you can exit with the end command The following explains each of these commands edit COMMAND edit restart COMMAND restart start COMMAND start filename Arguments filename The edit command lets you modify the current SQL query The query is stored in a temporary file in the directory specified in UNIFYTMP You can correct syntax mistakes or modify the query to produce a different result The default editor is vi If you prefer a different editor set the EDIT environment variable to specify the editor of your choice For more information on environment variables see chapter 5 The restart command lets you run the current SQL query stored in the temporary file When you enter a new query it becomes the current query replacing the old one in the temporary file You usually use this command after you edit the current statement The start command runs the SQL query stored in the named operating system file Running a query this way does not cause it to become the current query The current query remains the last one you entered The name of an ASCII file that contains an SQL query The query runs and the results display on the screen If the file name contains special characters such as a dot or slash then it must be enclosed in single quotes to mask the characters from SQL e g xxx out SQL Query DML languag
56. siln trnfld trnin ulon up move cursor left modify current screen field start normal video move to next line move to next word open line above open line below move to previous word quit paint mode redraw screen start replace mode move cursor right start reverse video start reverse underline video display the system name of the current screen move to beginning of line transfer current screen field transfer current line start underline video move cursor up Figure 13 6 PAINT command names and actions The standard unicap PAINT section is shown in Figure 13 7 SECTION paint paint info ignoremiss FALSE report missing command definitions mrkchar co10 0 column 0 help help delch x lt del_char gt delete character oplnb o open line below oplna 0 open line above Figure 13 7 Standard unicap PAINT section Screen form development tools 309 310 SECTION paint paint info ins i insert mode app a append mode rep R exchange replace mode delln d lt del_line gt delete line delfld D delete field train T transfer field trnin t transfer line modfld M modify field addfld A add field redraw r redraw screen cpdisp c change cursor position display escape E escape exit X exit quit q quit goto g go to x y left h b h lt left_arrow gt cursor left right 1 040 lt right_arrow gt up k lt up_arrow gt down j lt down_arrow g
57. t save prompt exit to the Menu Handler without saving CTRL X Figure 13 5 Miscellaneous paint command summary The command keys can be changed by modifying your unicap file See Customizing PAINT commands later in this chapter You usually begin an editing session with cursor motion commands to position the cursor and then use edit commands to make changes You should end the session by saving your changes Because saving changes involves extensive database updating it is a good idea to wait until you are finished editing before saving This is somewhat different from using a text editor where you save updates more often The following are details on the groups of commands CURSOR MOTION 298 Cursor motion commands let you move the cursor in the editing area of the screen In some cases more than one key has the same effect For example you can move the cursor right one column by pressing the space bar the right_arrow key gt or l You can move the cursor anywhere in the editing area Cursor motion is not restricted by blank areas screen field prompts or screen fields When the cursor is positioned on a screen field the screen field name displays in the top right corner of the screen directly below the screen form name The cursor motion commands are described as follows cursor left Moves the cursor one column to the left You can move more than one column at a time by entering a number before the command The
58. the direct concatenation operator the indirect concatenation operator and the substr operator Concatenation is the creation of a new string by joining two strings end to end NOTE String operators cannot be used with text fields direct concatenation The direct concatenation operator joins two strings and retains trailing blanks For example the result of the following expression ALPHA BET 4 is the new string ALPHA BET The new string contains all the characters from the two original strings including trailing blanks However when you concatenate two strings you often need to eliminate trailing blanks from the first string You can use the operator to remove trailing blanks RPT Report processor 503 indirect concatenation The indirect concatenation operator removes the first string s trailing blanks before joining the two strings For example the result of the following expression ALPHA BET i is the new string ALPHABET The trailing blanks are removed from the string on the left Then the two strings are concatenated Therefore the result of the following expression ALPHA A BET is the new string ALPHABET Remember two single quotes without a space between them is the null string ora string with length zero substr substring A substring is a portion of a string A substring can also be the same as the original str
59. they can access only the menus programs and screens listed for them on the Add or modify group privileges and Add or modify individual privileges screen forms Database security utilities 225 For example if you want users to have access to sh or edit you must explicitly specify those program names on the Add or modify group privileges and Add or modify individual privileges screen forms 226 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 10 4 Field security maintenance fldsec Field level security is implemented in two steps 1 Field security maintenance The Field security maintenance program lets you specify separate read and write passwords for each database field 2 Process field passwords After you set or change a password with the Field security maintenance program you must process the passwords using Process field passwords to create a binary file containing the password information After the field password has been processed users can only read or write to the field if they enter the correct password The table in Figure 10 1 summarizes how read and write passwords control access to fields If Then you specify a read only but not users who enter the password can both read and write a write password you specify both passwords users who enter only the write password can both read and write users who enter the read password can only read Figure 10 1 Password read write privileges In addition to the p
60. updates contained in a transaction log file to the database SQL 16 Query Data Manipulation Language Lets you query and update a data base file using a powerful non procedural language uid 10 The program to echo the current user s operating system ID to the standard output RPT input section builder rip 17 10 RPT input section builder Simplifies writing RPT scripts for ENTER screens ckunicap 6 2 Program to check the syntax of the unicap file enter ld Unify Direct HLI Shell command files Let you build custom versions of ENTER rpt ld Programmer s and RPT that contain your own host language functions Manual Figure 5 1 Unify DatsServer ELS Programs Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 6 Termcap and Unicap The termcap and unicap files contain information Unify DataServer ELS uses to work with your terminal and keyboard Hardware functions of most CRT terminals are stored in the termcap file The default location of this file is in the directory etc termcap Your operating system documentation manual should have an explanation of the format and use of this file under termcap The unicap file associates Unify DataServer ELS commands with key strokes The default location of unicap is in the Unify DataServer ELS lib directory You can change this location with the UNICAP environment variable Section 5 Environment Variables 69 6 1 Termcap The Unify DataServer ELS termcap file has descriptions for most
61. way Start the program by selecting Test Screens sfsamp from the Create or modify screen forms menu The following screen form displays sfsamp Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Test Screen Enter the name of the screen form you want tested at the SCREEN prompt The screen form displays with an x indicating the position of each screen field Either enter the name of another screen form to test at the SCREEN prompt or press CTRL U to return to the Create or modify screen forms menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 14 4 Compile screens sfproc This program creates two screen form files used by application programs a h anda q file The h file or include file is used by C programs to reference screen field names The q file contains a binary version of the screen form that can be read quickly at run time For more information about these files and how they are used see the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual You should run this program after you modify a screen form with Check screen form coordinates However PAINT automatically compiles the screens Start this program by selecting Compile screens sfproc from the Create or modify screen forms menu The following screen form displays sfproc Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Compile Screens At the SCREEN prompt either enter a screen form name to compile a specific screen or enter all or ALL to compile all screen forms in the data dic
62. you can also associate an optional list of reports with the screen form Each report has a formatting program parameters title and a set of allowable report output destinations These reports can then be run using the Report options screen described later in this chapter The registration process creates an entry for the screen in the data dictionary The registered screen is an ENTER screen Once registered an ENTER screen can be used as an option in a menu section 12 2 When you delete an ENTER screen from the data dictionary all menu references to the screen form are removed You can list all the menus in the system using Print Menus section 11 2 ENTER data entry query by forms 329 Start this option by selecting Register Screen Form with ENTER entmnt from the Create or Modify Screen Forms Menu The following screen form displays fentmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Register Screen Form with E screen data entry area FORMATTING PROGRAMS NAME PARAMETE OUTPUT report program entry and update area report program The prompts and column headings on this screen form are described as follows IINQUIRE A DD MJODIFY D JELETE The operation prompt The following operation modes can be entered at this prompt 330 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference i Inquire mode This lets you view an ENTER screen s registration data
63. 1 Report writing concepts The Unify DataServer ELS report processor RPT includes a nonprocedural language that lets you quickly and easily specify the format of multiple level tabular reports The data you want to format can come from an SQL or Query By Forms query from a user program or from an ASCII file You can control the placement and format of fields headings footings column titles and pagination Thus you can design the appearance of the report This chapter describes how to create an RPT report and defines the terms you use Files used by RPT You need two files to produce a report with RPT an input file and a report script file The input file contains the data you want to format and summarize in a report The input file is an ordinary ASCII file composed of identical lines Each line has a number of data fields and ends with a new line character You can use such tools as SQL Query by Forms a user program or a text editor to create input files The report script contains report processor commands The commands describe the format of the lines in the input file and control the appearance of the finished report RPT reads the input file and uses the commands in the report script to produce a 454 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference report The diagram in Figure 17 1 illustrates the relationships among input files report scripts and RPT User Text o Y Input File RPT Report Script Report
64. 2 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference To register a screen form with the SQL screen driver select Register Screen Form with SQL ssqimnt from the Create or Modify Screen Forms menu The following screen form displays ssqlmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Register Screen Form with SQL screen data entry area SCREEN NAME SQL SCRIPT HEADING report entry area FORMATTING PROGRAMS NAME PARAMETE F OUTPUT report definition E paging area There are two entry areas on this screen the screen form data entry area and the report entry area There is also a report definition paging area The Register Screen Form with SQL screen has the following prompts and headings INQUIRE A DD M ODIFY DJELETE SQL Query DML language 417 418 The operation prompt This prompt allows you to select an operation mode for the program Figure 16 5 shows when to select each operation mode When you want to Then select view an existing SQL screen s registration i inquire register screen forms with SQL a add modify HEADING and FORMATTING PROGRAMS for m modify an existing SQL screen remove the SQL registration for a screen form The d delete deletion does not affect the original screen form The deletion does however remove all references to the screen such as menu listings Figure 16 5 Register Screen Form with SQL Opera
65. 2 The parameters are placed in the where clause instead of the dates you would normally enter This part of the where clause is constructed as follows where ordered between 1 and 2 The entire text of the SQL query reads as follows lines 0 select vendor Number vendor Name Address City State Zip_Code vr Name po Number ordered Shipped Line_Number Description Quantity Price person Name from vendor vr person po pol item where ordered between 1 and 2 and Arrived and V Nun vendor Number and Vendor Num vendor Number and P_Num person Number and PO_Num po Number and Item_Num item Number The query should be placed in a file and given a name for example pq_sal 478 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following is a design for the screen form to prompt for the dates poaging Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Purchase Order Aging Report The value entered for the first screen field is substituted for 1 The value for the second screen field replaces 2 Parameters can be used the same way in report scripts as shown in the following RPT script before report print Purchase Orders Issued from 1 to 2 centered print Report Run on today at hour centered In this report example you print the purchase order date range and the date and time of the report on the tide page You can use parameters and the buil
66. 7 15 The name Gull Harold begins the second half of this new division i e the second quarter of the directory Because DuPres is before Gull the second quarter of the directory can be eliminated At this point the search space is one fourth the original size and only two comparisons have been made Czynal Alt Darmon Dirks Bar Dornan Everett DuPres Jacques Eaton Mar Ebbott Iv Evanson Kri Fitzsimmons Francis Becky Galt John Gilbert Marty Gorman Mike Figure 7 15 Repeat binary search 112 Mortimer Foreman Hillary Frederickson Dan Gull Harold Harreldsen Herman Jason Horbarger Minnie Ian Jo Ivers Marguerite James Jamison Kristopherson Dennis Larsen Livingston Lyle James Mabley Jeff Mack Susan Matthews Second half of first half of phone book Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference As the procedure is repeated the search space is reduced to one eighth one sixteenth one thirty second and so on until only DuPres is left shown in Figure 7 16 Czynal Altea Darmon Beverly Dirks Dornan Everett Du Pres DuPres Jacques Scope of last search Eaton Ebbott Ivan Evanson Kris Fitzsimmons Mortimer Foreman Hillary Francis Becky Frederickson Galt John Gilbert Marty Gorman Mike Figure 7 16 Last binary search locating DuPres A binary search can find one value out o
67. Commission sql gt from emp recognized query Name Job Lee president This query works by evaluating the inner query to obtain a value for the maximum salary plus commission This value is then used as a constant by the outer query which finds the employee s who earn that amount You can also use the previously described set inclusion notation in nested queries For example suppose an employee not in department 10 suspects that everyone in that department earns more because department 10 is company headquarters A nested query using set inclusion can be used to confirm or deny this EXAMPLE List the name job and salary of employees not in department 10 who have the same job and salary as employees in department 10 sql gt select Name Job Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 10 sql gt select Job Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 10 recognized query Name Job Salary Dupre clerk 800 00 Fiorella clerk You can nest queries to five levels not just the two described so far The following four level query finds the person with the second highest earnings The query finds Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference the name of the person with the maximum earnings and then finds the maximum earnings of the remaining employees This query illustrates how you can compare an expression with the results of a nested query To understand nested queries you should start w
68. Comparison expression results The only arithmetic expression in figure 17 12 is the last expression The last expression illustrates the difference between logical and arithmetic expressions It is identical to the logical expression just above it except for the parentheses that cause the numeric operator to be evaluated last Thus RPT interprets it as an arithmetic expression with a value of 20 Logical operators There are three logical operators and or and not The and and or operators are used to form compound logical expressions The not operator reverses or negates the value of the applicable expression These three operators can only be used with logical expressions This means such expressions as 1 and 1 and not 0 are invalid RPT Report processor 491 RPT evaluates a compound logical expression by determining the value of each subexpression then combining the results The tables in figure 17 13 illustrate how RPT evaluates compound logical expressions Expression Result TRUE and TRUE TRUE TRUE and FALSE FALSE FALSE and TRUE FALSE FALSE and FALSE FALSE Expression not TRUE not FALSE expression result TRUE or TRUE TRUE TRUE or FALSE TRUE FALSE or TRUE TRUE FALSE or FALSE FALSE Result FALSE TRUE Figure 17 13 Logical expression results The table in figure 17 14 shows how logical operators can be used in compound logical expressions Again fielda contains the numeric value 21 and fieldb conta
69. Correction The having clause can only use simple aggregate functions Nested aggregates are not recognized in this context select dept_no from emp group by dept_no having avg sum salary gt 50000 select dept_no from emp group by dept_no having sum salary gt 50000 gt gt gt A having clause must be preceded by a group by clause Explanation Invalid Query Correction The having clause calculates the values of aggregate functions based on the sets of records specified by the group by clause Therefore a group by is required to use a having clause select job from emp having avg salary gt 1000 select job from emp group by job having avg salary gt 10000 gt gt gt A having clause requires an aggregate function Explanation Invalid Query The having clause is used to select records based on an aggregate property of a group Consequently you must use an aggregate function select job salary from emp group by job having salary gt 1500 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction select job avg salary from emp group by job having avg salary gt 1500 gt gt gt A line containing screen fields cannot be deleted Explanation The current line contains at least one screen field and cannot be deleted Correction To delete a line containing screen fields delete the fields then delete the line gt gt gt A line number must be
70. Correction Reduce the table s record size before trying to maintain it using an ENTER screen gt gt gt Record is in use by another process Explanation Another user has selected this record A record can only be selected by one process at a time Correction You must wait Try to select this record later Unify DataServer ELS messages 641 642 gt gt gt Remove the current transaction log Explanation The database has been restored and the current transaction log replayed so remove the diskette or tape on which the current transaction log is stored gt gt gt Requested video mode not supported on this terminal Explanation PAINT cannot locate the terminal entries for the requested video mode in your termcap file Correction Modify the termcap file to include the necessary entries However some terminals lack certain video capabilities Required entries are so and se reverse video us and ue underline and ru and re reverse underline See Section 6 1 for complete termcap information gt gt gt Restore complete Explanation The backup has been successfully recovered Any keyboard response exits the program and returns you to the menu gt gt gt Right end of normal area is not on right edge of a video field Explanation You are trying to change a video field back to normal mode but the right end of the normal area does not match the right edge of the existing video field Correction When
71. Dupre clerk 1700 Moehr clerk 1800 Amato salesrep 900 Brown engineer 2000 Jones clerk 2100 Reilly salesrep 2200 Dugan salesrep 2300 lein salesrep 2400 Lee president 2500 awasaki salesrep 2600 Bleriot programmer 1700 Colucci salesrep 2800 Fiorella clerk SQL Query DML language 371 You can sort more than one field and specify the direction for each sort using ascending asc or descending desc EXAMPLE List every employee s department number name and job by ascending name in descending department number sql gt select Dept_No Name Job sql gt from emp sql gt order by Dept_No desc Name asc recognized query Dept_No Name Job 70 Fiorella clerk 70 Moehr clerk 60 Brown engineer 60 Otsaka engineer 60 Schmidt programmer 50 Dupre clerk 50 Smith salesrep 40 Amato salesrep 40 Colucci salesrep 40 Dugan salesrep 30 Kawasaki salesrep 30 Reilly salesrep 20 Klein salesrep 20 O Neil salesrep 20 Whittakerr salesrep 10 Bleriot programmer 10 Jones clerk 10 Lee president 10 Scharf clerk group by CLAUSE The group by clause arranges rows that contain the same values together into groups Use this clause when computing aggregate functions for groups of rows with common characteristics 372 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Each field specified in the select statement must also be specified in the group by clause if not the results of your query will be incorrect or misl
72. ELS uses another access method to find the record For Unify DataServer ELS to find a record in the hash table it must search for an exact primary key Unify DataServer ELS uses a hash algorithm to calculate the relative record number for the record containing the given key value The major advantages of hashing are 1 Itis the fastest random access method when the primary key is entered exactly It is especially fast for short keys of eight bytes or less Introduction to database design 107 2 Its speed is relatively independent of the number of records in the database table A hash table access among a million records takes no longer than among 100 records 3 The overhead in storage space and database updates is moderate compared to that for explicit relationships and B trees The major disadvantage of hashing is 1 Hashing does not support access to the data in any special order For example hashing is not an effective access method for stepping through manufacturers in alphabetical order by name Hashing is appropriate for looking up a unique code like an ID number Specific examples in the Unify DataServer ELS Tutorial Manual include the manufacturer number invoice number and item number Explicit relationships An explicit relationship refers to an access method that supports a one to many linkage between two tables If you need to join two tables frequently an explicit relationship joins the tables faster than any ot
73. Explanation You are at your home menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt There was an error creating an index file Explanation A B tree index file could not be created Correction Make sure you have read and write privileges for all B tree index files for example bt001 idx Also make sure you have permission to create files in the database bin directory gt gt gt There was an error writing to the disk Explanation The data dictionary and database file could not be recovered The data dictionary and database are now invalid Correction Any keyboard response returns you to the menu To recover either read this backup again or try a different one Make sure you have enough disk space for the files gt gt gt This definition is the same as the one for index number nnn Do you want to change this definition If you don t it will be discarded Explanation You have entered a duplicate of index number nnn Correction Discard this definition or change it gt gt gt This definition specifies that duplicates are not allowed but the database contains duplicates Explanation Your attempt to add or rebuild a B tree index failed because the definition specifies that duplicate entries must not exist in the index However the database contains field values that can cause duplicate index entries Correction Make sure all database fields listed in the B tree index definition have unique values i
74. Field Passwords If you enter a Y or y the program produces the upasswd file in the current directory The program stores upasswd in the directory specified in DBPATH if this environment variable is set See chapter 5 Environment variables If you enter an N n or CTRL U you exit the program and return to the menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 10 6 Using the operating system security The security levels described in the previous chapters are only as secure as the operating system environment If users can run programs designed to defeat the security or if they can dump the contents of the database files directly they can access unauthorized data This chapter describes how to use the operating system to create a more secure environment for Unify DataServer ELS To develop a more secure environment that combines the levels of security provided by Unify DataServer ELS with that of the operating system consider the following 1 The most important level of security is the Unify DataServer ELS menu system You must keep the Unify DataServer ELS super user password secure so it is used only by the system administrator Enter or change this super user information using Modify system parameters amp security See Modify system parameters amp security section 10 1 for information on how to modify the user ID and password for the super user 2 You should also assign the database design and recovery progra
75. Introduction to database design 91 92 DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT Currency symbol position left or right of the amount Currency symbol up to three characters such as or DM This is a short date with a display length of 8 characters Its default format is MM DD YY but you can set the DATETP environment variable to specify a different order for month day and year A null value is stored as Use a DATE data type for a date between 1 January 1900 and 31 December 2077 This data type takes half the physical storage space of the LDATE data type This is a long date with a display length of 11 characters Its default format is MM DD YY DD MMM YYYY in PAINT to permit three letter months You can set the LDATEFMT environment variable to specify a different order for month day and year You can also specify a different type of month numeric or alphabetic and year 2 or 4 characters A null value is stored as Use the LDATE data type for dates between October 1 1752 and December 31 9999 That is use LDATE fields for any long term events like business plan data forecaster into the next century or historical records that span centuries This is a time of day with a display length of five characters Its display format is HH MM Based on a 24 hour clock HH is the hour from 0 23 and MM is the minutes past the hour from 0 59 This is fixed length alphanumeric data up to 256 characters in
76. Loading Data Dictionary Reports O OE OG Py CONS 2 Database Maintenance Write Database Backup Read Database Backup Add Drop B Tree Indexes Rebuild the Hash Table Rebuild Explicit Relationships Define Database Volumes Print Display Database Statistics Display Hash Table Statistics Print Display B Tree Statistics 3 Security Maintenance Modify System Parameters amp Security Add or Modify Group Privileges Add or Modify Individual Privileges Print Group Privileges Print Individual Privileges Field Security Maintenance Process Field Passwords 7 Data Dictionary Reports Print Database Design Print Menus Print Screens Print Group Privileges Print Individual Privileges Print Help Documentation Print List of Programs Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference When you start Unify DataServer ELS this is the first menu that displays active option s system name mainmenu selection prompt Y LECTION E command key line 3 4 Dis 6 7 heading active option s heading Unify RDBM UNIFY Main Menu selection number Create of modify Screen Forms SQL Query DML Language Edit SQL or RPT Command Files Add Modify or Delete Menus Data Base Design Utilities System Administration cursor zsc seiect SUTTUR RET down X home P previous command command key name 30 APR 1999 menu pointer current menu
77. PROGRAM HEADING IDX SCREEN DIRECTORY ENTER smod100 Model 0 smod100 aintenance smanl00 Manufacturer 0 sman100 aintenance HTS N hts Display Hash 0 Table Statistics IDXMNT N idxmnt Add Drop 0 B_Tree Indexes LST N 1st Listing 0 Processor MOD300 N mod300 Model Listing 0 ORD100 Y ord100 Order 0 sordl100 ord Maintenance SQL N sql SQL Query DML 0 Language Figure 11 11 Executable listing report The column headings on the Executable listing report are described as follows Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXECUTABLE The name of each file that contains an executable registered with the Unify DataServer ELS system SYSFLAG A single character that indicates whether the executable uses the sysrecev function y A standard argument list will be passed to the executable from the Menu Handler when the executable is started The argument list is interpreted by sysrecev n No arguments will be passed to the executable from the Menu Handler when the executable is started PROGRAM The name of each program in the executable file HEADING The heading that displays on line two of the screen when the program is running IDX The index code of each program in the executable If the executable contains only one program that program s index code is zero 0 If the executable contains several programs the programs index codes are zero 0 to one less than the number of programs SCREEN The name of an optional screen form that sys
78. Press the info command key CTRL I Displays the help documentation for the current menu selection 3 Enter help at the selection prompt Displays help documentation for the active menu 4 Enter help n at the selection prompt Displays the help documentation for the option with selection number n 5 Enter help xxxx at the selection prompt Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Displays help for the option whose system name is xxxx Executables An executable is a shell script or a compiled program that you can run as a command from the operating system shell The shell is the operating system level where you enter the command to start Unify DataServer ELS Custom programs or executable can be registered with Unify DataServer ELS When registering an executable with Unify DataServer ELS you must specify the heading that is to appear on every menu line where this program appears This heading is also placed at the top of the screen when the Menu Handler executes the program You can also specify a screen form which should be displayed before the program begins to run and the source directory where the program s object code archive is located The latter information is used by Program Loading see the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual For detailed information on registering executables with Unify DataServer ELS see Describe Program to System section 12 3 Starting Unify DataServer ELS automatically The syst
79. Query DML language 437 438 select The count function counts the number of records in each group that match the query selection criteria The min max and avg functions calculate the respective minimum maximum and average values of the indicated expression for the records in each group that match the query selection criteria The sum function totals the indicated expression for the records in each group that match the query selection criteria Aggregate functions may be applied to fields of tyoe NUMERIC AMOUNT FLOAT DATE LDATE and TIME although the results on DATE LDATE and TIME fields can be meaningless Also aggregate functions can be nested to achieve such expressions as avg count and min avg salary This indicates that a query block can be used in the having clause For more information on query blocks refer to the beginning of Query Statements and Clauses earlier in this chapter lt constant gt This indicates that a constant tuple or literal tuple can be used instead of a single value to compare for equality with the left side of a Boolean expression A literal tuple is a list of constants separated by commas and enclosed in angle brackets Literal tuples can be used as follows field is in c1 c2 c3 This is equivalent to the more cumbersome expression field c1 or filed c2 or field c3 lt constant gt This indicates that a list of literal tuples can be used to com
80. Screen Forms 1 Paint Screen Forms paint P 2 Register Screen Form with entmnt P ENTER 3 Register Screen Form with ssqlmnt P SOL 4 Check Screen Form sfmaint P Coordinates 5 Display List of Screens sfslist P 6 Test Screens sfsamp P oh Compile Screens sfproc P 8 Restore Screen to Data sfrestr P Dictionary 9 Create Default Screen Form cdsf P TOTAL MENUS 4 Figure 11 7 Menu list report The column heading on the Print menus report are described as follows MENU The short system name of each menu and the numbers of the options on the menu HEADING PROMPT The heading that displays on the second line of the screen when each menu is displayed and the prompts that display for each menu s options MENU PROG M P The short system names of the options that display on each menu M P A single character that indicates each option s type Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference M The option is another menu P The option is a program E The option is an ENTER screen S The option is an SQL screen Data Dictionary reports 243 11 3 Print screens sfrep The Print screens report prints a copy of the selected screen form a list of all the screen field information or both This information can help you document an application system The report is 120 columns wide To generate this report select Print screens sfrep from the Data Dictionary reports menu The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 199
81. Screens section 14 4 These files contain a list of screen field names used for that screen form by C programs Although created in the bin directory the h files should be moved to either the def or include directories idx Files and directories A B tree index file These are binary files that reside in the database bin directory They are created by Add Drop B Tree Indexes section 8 5 and are updated by any program that stores data into an indexed field The files named bt mn idx nnn is a number are actual B tree files The file field idx is a directory to the index files A shell command file that uses the operating system command Id to create executable files These usually reside in the user s build directory A relocatable binary file that is the result of a cc c These files are usually kept in an archive file A Unify DataServer ELS screen form file These files contain binary versions of screen forms which can be read quickly at run time They are produced by either Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 or Compile 47 48 Screens section 14 4 Unify DataServer ELS system screen forms are kept in the system lib directory A user s screen forms are usually stored in the database bin directory Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 4 2 Directories Unify DataServer ELS uses two types of directories Unify DataServer ELS system directories and application directories Unify DataServer ELS system direc
82. These field types do not conflict because any numeric value up to nine integer digits can be represented as an amount with zeros to the right of the decimal Any amount value up to 11 digits to the left of the decimal can be represented as a float The following rules control RPT in determining the type of a numeric variable numeric The expression in each set command that sets the variable returns a numeric value amount The expression in each set command that sets the variable returns either a numeric or an amount value At least one expression returns an amount value float The expression in each set command that sets the variable returns a numeric an amount or a float value At least one expression returns a float value RPT considers all set commands in a script before choosing a type For an expression using a constant RPT determines the type of the expression result from the way the constant is written For example the table in Figure 17 21 shows the RPT Report processor 511 number 1 written in different forms The table also shows the type dictated by each form Constant Type 1 numeric in numeric 1 amount 1 0 amount 1 00 amount la amount 1 000 float if float Figure 17 21 Constant data types If you append the letter n a or f to a numeric constant RPT should be able to interpret the constant as the represented type numeric amount or float Initializing variables 512 Each variable must be initial
83. UYU KUYU KY the footer command group Y Y YU KYU KUYU KY the detail command group Y Y YU YU A the before report command group Y Y YU A KU K a before name command group Y Y YU KUYU KUYU KY an after name command group Y Y Y YU KUYU KU KY an after report command group Vv Y VW dv an aggregate function argument Y Vv Y Y a local function argument Y Y YU KUYU KUYU KY Figure 17 23 Expressions used in RPT scripts RPT Report processor 513 17 6 Control break processing Control break processing supports the logical grouping of sorted data Group headings can be printed to label or introduce a group of data items Calculations can be performed such as totaling by group or determining group extremes A special report heading can be printed at the beginning of a report And a footer with final totals can be printed at the end of the report For example in a Sales report sales figures can be totaled by state by city within state and by customer within city Group headings can be used to introduce each new city and state and a final total of sales can be printed at the end of the report This arrangement of groups within groups occurs when several fields or values are sorted hierarchically The before and after command groups use control break processing These groups of commands are run during control breaks Control breaks occur in the transition between logical groups of data Usually unsorted data is not logi
84. Up to seven characters can be entered to define the currency amount format The first three characters are required and the last four characters are optional The default currency format is comma separated thousands with a decimal point and two decimal digits as follows CURR 2 The format in which to accept and display dates from January 1 1900 to December 31 1999 DATETP can also be used to change all brackets that display on menus and screen forms to parentheses The default date format is MM DD YY where M stands for month D stands for day and Y stands for year The default format also displays brackets on menus and screen forms The format in which long dates four digit years from October 1 1752 through December 31 9999 are accepted and displayed If LDATEFMT is not set the default format is MM DD YY Custom message control 583 C 2 Reconfigure data dictionary The Reconfigure data dictionary utility enables you to modify several data dictionary attribute tables You can increase the number of tables fields screens programs B trees field relations group and employee entries and volumes Reconfigure Data Dictionary is an essential tool for the developer who needs greater control and design flexibility for a Unify DataServer ELS database application Just as you can increase the Expected number of records for any of the tables you create in your application database you can increase the Expected number of recor
85. You can then display data entry prompts on screen forms in reverse underline or reverse underline video modes Refer to Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 for information on how to use these features In prompts the escape sequences r and s turn reverse video on and off u and v turn underline on and off and w and x turn reverse underline video on and off respectively If your terminal uses embedded attributes i e turning video attributes on or off takes up a display position you must specify sg 1 and ug 1 If you want to use a terminal with 132 columns specify co 132 The li attribute should be set to 1124 The Menu Handler and PAINT can use a larger value but ENTER requires that li either be set to 24 or 0 zero You can design a screen with a field below line 22 or 23 but remember that ENTER writes over any lines below 22 If your terminal supports a graphics character set specify gs gx and ga through go This lets the Menu Handler draw a box around the current menu Keyboard mapping The entries Es EC Ex Uf Ui and Ub let you substitute different control characters for the standard ones used by ENTER screens You can customize these control characters The termcap file entries described inthe table above must be inthe form name X Termcap and Unicap 73 where name stands for the two character code of one characteristic in the table and X is a control function formed by pressing CTRL and a letter key For thi
86. a 9 track tape drive There is no default value so this must be set for any program that uses the backup device It is usually set up by the installation procedure The name of a custom program to be used as the backup device filter The specified program is a custom version of the BUDRVR program BUDRVR reads from and writes to BUDEV a file If the BUDRVR environment variable is not set the default backup device filter is BUDRVR For an example of a custom BUDRVR program see the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual The number of blocks that fit on one tape or diskette on the backup device specified in BUDEV To ensure a successful backup this variable must be set If this variable is not set or is set to zero 0 blocks are read or written until the read or write cannot be completed The budb utility uses the BUTAPESZ environment variable to indicate the number of blocks to be written to the media If BUTAPESZ is not set budb relies on the operating system to correctly handle the end of media condition however the end of media condition is often not handled correctly by the operating system In these cases you must specify BUTAPESZ in the environment otherwise the backup may not be recoverable Always set BUTAPESZ to a value smaller than the number of blocks that can fit on the media Allow approximately 100 extra 1k blocks of unused media or 25 extra 4k blocks To determine the approximate number of blocks that ca
87. a previous error DBLOAD found another error This B tree index can be invalid Correction Rebuild the B tree index after the database load gt gt gt Errors encountered Press RETURN to continue Explanation Some errors were detected while compiling the Advanced Field Attributes All error messages were sent to the error file fields afa err Correction Press RETURN for the editor to display the error file If you are using vi you can enter n to switch to the source file After that you can enter e to switch between the two files gt gt gt Fatal error Explanation SQL or RPT has encountered an internal error that it cannot work around This error message is preceded by an error message indicating the type of error Correction Try rewriting the query or script differently If the problem persists report the problem to Unify Corporation gt gt gt Field ffff requires a password use unlock Field xxxx ffff requires a password use unlock Explanation The indicated field in the select where or having statement has been protected with Field Level Security Correction You must unlock the field before you can list it Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Field exists Explanation A field with the name you are trying to enter already exists in the database Correction Check the spelling or use a different field name gt gt gt Field ffff is not in table xxxx Explan
88. a specific number of characters other than the display length or the entire field use the text command For example suppose you have a file empmemos that contains employee memos To print 50 characters from each TEXT field in the file you would enter the following command sql gt text 50 sql gt select from empmemos NOTE If you use the text command it applies to all TEXT fields in the database table e You can search order by group by and select unique TEXT fields SQL uses as many bytes of the TEXT field as it needs to perform the operation 404 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Using binary fields with SQL You can use BINARY fields with SQL with the following considerations e You can input a BINARY field interactively using insert or update if you enter the information as a single string or numeric constant e SQL can print BINARY field data only if you use the lines 0 command This command prints the BINARY field and suppresses column headings e You can order by group by and select unique BINARY fields SQL considers as many bytes of the BINARY field as i needs to perform the operation Using SQL internal tables and environment variables SQL has some internal tables that limit the complexity of a query These internal tables limit expression nodes fields database tables constants selection items sort items and the output buffer size Each SQL table size can be increased or decreased to fit qu
89. about creating your own local functions and linking them with RPT see the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual A local function accepts a variable length list of arguments and returns a value of type char short long or double For example suppose you want to calculate trigonometric functions using data stored in the database You can use a local function to calculate and return the value to the report You can use local functions with just one restriction The input argument s required by the function you want to use must be available when the function is called Consequently local functions can be used in sort expressions as well as in any of the command groups The syntax for calling local functions is as follows function name arg 1 arg 2 The number of required arguments varies according to what the specific function expects Some local functions do not require arguments but the parentheses must still be used Usually an argument can be any expression that would be valid where the local function is used The exception is that aggregate functions aren t valid in an argument expression You can work around this by calculating the aggregate function result assigning the result to a variable and then passing the variable to the local function Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following explains the three local functions included with RPT dow index and mdy dow SYNTAX dow date USE Thi
90. also print the database design create default database screen forms for each table create the new database and create a menu containing the new screen forms Modify database design schent is similar to dbcreate You can use it to change an existing database s design This program however does not have the options available with Design and Create a New database Create database crdb creates an empty database without doing all the other things that docreate does for you Reconfigure database scom reformats the database file and updates the data dictionary after you make changes with Modify database Design 119 Add drop B tree indexes idxmnt adds a secondary index to the database or drops an existing index This program can also rebuild the existing B tree indexes Advanced field attributes afa lets you specify field attributes in addition to the basic attributes of length and data type You can specify a default value a list of legal values an information message and a help file with more information about the field Database directory structure 120 Your database should be created in a directory structure suitable for the application development that will begin once the database is established The following diagram suggests a directory structure area bin hdoc build def src This is not a required structure but rather an example The bin directory contains the data dictionary file the program executable f
91. an offset greater than any of the unique field values of the reloaded records Legal values You can also use the field statement to specify the legal values that can be entered for this field If the value entered for a field matches any legal value set in this statement then the value is accepted You must enclose legal values for STRING fields in single quotes Regular expression notation In addition to literal character strings you can use a more powerful regular expression notation to set AFA legal values for STRING types This is similar to the way you specify matches in ENTER SQL and RPT but regular expression notation is more comprehensive The following special characters are recognized in the regular expression notation Character class The character class matches any character that is a member of the class enclosed in the brackets A A caret in brackets negates the character class It must be the first character after the For example abc recognizes any character except a b and c A dash in brackets specifies a range of characters It can be a member of the class only when it is the first Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference character after the caret if any or last character of the class For example 0 9 equals 0123456789 A right bracket ends the character class It can be a member of the class only when it is the first character after the caret if any of t
92. and commands are optional 530 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For a command group command to be valid in an if command it must be valid when used alone Therefore when if appears in a header or footer it cannot include the page command because the page command cannot be used in header or in command groups The need command cannot be used in an if command Note that if commands can be nested For example the following is a valid if command if exprl then begin if expr2 then print fieldl field2 else print field3 field4 end else begin if expr3 then print fieldd else print field6 end need SYNTAX need number USE This command specifies the number of lines required to continue printing output on the current page If there are not enough lines left output pauses and appropriate footers print The printer paper ejects headers print and the output continues Only one need command can be used in a command group The command is evaluated once at the beginning of the command group and if there isn t enough space the page ejects This command is not valid in the header or footer command groups or in an if command RPT Report processor 531 page SYNTAX page no footer no header USE This command causes a page to eject If specified the footer prints at the bottom of the current page and the header prints at the top of the next page The no footer option suppresses processin
93. and emp Number Number group by Job gt 4 0 225 x Name Job Salary Commission Jones clerk 900 00 Moehr clerk 950 00 Colucci salesrep 5500 00 SQL Query DML language 389 16 2 Data Manipulation Language facilities SQL s Data Manipulation Language facilities DML let you interactively insert modify and delete records in your database using a high level nonprocedural language SQL also interfaces with the following Unify DataServer ELS programs to improve DML performance e DBLOAD is the Unify DataServer ELS database Load program chapter 12 6 SQL interfaces with DBLOAD so you can load a database quickly from regular ASCII files All of the query features of the language are retained so you can use regular query statements to insert data from existing ASCII files into other files and select records to be modified or deleted e AFA is the Advanced Field Attributes program section 8 6 SQL interfaces with AFA so SQL can validate field entries for new and existing records and set default field values for new records grpmnt and empmnt are the Add or Modify Group Privileges section 10 1 and Add or Modify Individual Privileges section 10 3 programs SQL recognizes access privileges set with gropmnt and empmnt for add modify and delete functions When a set of records is selected to be modified SQL locks the table This prevents other users from modifying the same records at th
94. and average salary for departments with an average salary less than the average for all departments sql gt select Dept_No avg Salary sql gt from emp sql gt group by Dept_No sql gt having avg Salary sql gt select avg Salary sql gt from emp recognized query Dept_No avg Salary 20 1833 33 50 1150 00 70 875 00 You can use nested queries in both the where and having clauses at the same time The following query finds the employees who work in the department with the highest average salary SQL evaluates this query as follows 1 The maximum average salary for all departments is computed 2 The department with that average salary is located 3 All the employees in that department are located EXAMPLE List the name job and salary for employees in the department with the highest average salary sql gt select Name Job Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No sql gt select Dept_No sql gt from emp sql gt group by Dept_No sql gt having avg Salary sql gt select max avg Salary sql gt from emp sql gt group by Dept_No recognized query Name Job Salary Jones clerk 900 00 Scharf clerk 800 00 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Lee president 7500 00 Bleriot programmer 1100 00 Join queries The previous query examples have involved only a single table However you can list fields from a number of tables in a single SQL query Queries that
95. and null for STRING DATE LDATE TEXT and BINARY fields NOTE Primary key field names and values must always be specified in the field order list and external file Loading data from a binary file The following example creates a binary external file using data from a database table The binary external file data is then loaded into another table 402 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference NOTE To load data from a binary external file the binary file must have been created by SQL Suppose the table candidates has been added to the database This table contains the fields Name Number Dept_No and Salary Dept_No has a default field value defined by Advanced Field Attributes of 99 EXAMPLE Dump a subset of the emp table to the binary file emp file sql gt select Number Name Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 40 sql gt into binary emp file recognized query NOTE To get an ASCII dump file in correct load format you must eliminate the header at the beginning of the output using the lines keyword However a binary dump file is created without a header so the lines keyword is optional EXAMPLE After the data has been dumped load it into the new table candidates Allow the Dept_No field to default to 99 sql gt insert into candidates Number Name Salary sql gt from binary emp file recognized update 3 record s added The insert statement explicitly specifies the input file field order
96. any number of characters matches any single character and matches any single character in the specified set For each subset that matches the specification the name table and number of records are listed unlock fleld password The unlock command allows the selection processor to read a protected fleld Either the read or write password for the file can be Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference specified Attempting to access a locked field without first using this command causes an error For more information on protected fields see section 10 4 report SYNTAX report subset USE The report command invokes the listing processor The listing processor lets you create simple lists from the selected records The subset name is the subset of selected database records that the listing processor must format LST Listing processor 563 18 2 Listing records After you select a set of records with the selection processor ENTER or a program you can use the listing processor to format a report Formatting reports with LST can be simple or complex At the simplest level you specify the fields to list and LST assigns default columns headings and formats At the most complex level you specify the column line and print format for each field or expression You can define sort order subtotals and totals You can also specify multiple line report and column headings Running the listing processor You can run
97. are used to print section or group headings before processing a group of lines in the input Me with identical sort keys A before command group has access to the information in the input line about to be processed This is how the command group can identify a control break Similarly an after command group has access to the information in the group just processed after command groups are used to print group totals or summaries after a group There are two types of before and after command groups 1 The before name and after name command groups process during control breaks throughout a report 2 The before report and after report command groups process at the beginning and ending of a report before AND after name One before name and one after name command group can be associated with each named expression specified in the sort command When a control break occurs the before name and after name command groups for that level sort expression are processed as well as the command groups for any sort expressions lower in the sort hierarchy For instance in the example sales report the input is sorted by state by city within state and by customer within city Therefore when a control break occurs because of a change in the city value RPT processes the after customer commands followed by the after city commands Then RPT processes the before city commands followed by those in the before customer command group RPT does not proc
98. as it is entered in the help file You can control where the help file displays on the screen by starting the file with the statement x y where x and y are the column and row coordinates of the file s upper left corner This statement must be on a line by itself ENTER screen coordinates are zero based The valid x column coordinates are 0 131 and the valid y row coordinates are 2 21 If you do not include display coordinates ENTER tries to display the file at the field s input position If the help file is too wide to fit on the screen at the input position ENTER displays the file in the middle of the screen If the help file is still too wide ENTER truncates all text that overruns the right margin In addition ENTER does not overwrite the last three lines on the screen Therefore it ttuncates any text that overlaps these lines Plan your help file and its display coordinates carefully to achieve the best results An example file 178 The following is an example of the kind of file you can develop to control default and legal values and display messages for fields The example database has the tables and fields shown in Figure 8 19 emp Number Name Dept_No dept Number Name Location 8 19 Example file tables and fields Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Figure 8 20 shows the database design for the example database Table field Ref Type LEN Long name emp 7 employee enum NUMERIC 7 Number
99. assign this number to BUTAPESZ CURR The display format for amounts Up to seven characters can be entered to define the currency amount format The first three characters are required and the last four characters are optional Each character in the CURR specification is described as follows The first character in the string is reserved for the thousands separator Enter a comma a period or a blank This character is required 56 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DATETP Environment variables The second character is the decimal point Enter a period ora comma This character is required The third character indicates the precision the number of decimal digits that appear after the decimal point Enter either a two 2 ora zero 0 If you enter a zero neither the decimal digits nor the decimal point display This character is required The fourth character indicates the position of currency symbol in the amount display Use a greater than symbol gt to display the currency symbol on the right Use a less than symbol lt to display the currency symbol on the left This character is required The fifth six and seventh characters are reserved for the currency symbol The currency symbol can be any one two or three characters except numeric characters For example the currency symbol can be DM or xxx At least one character is required The default currency format is comma separated t
100. avg Salary 10 president 1 7500 00 10 programmer de 1100 00 20 salesrep 3 1833 33 30 salesrep 2 2150 00 EXAMPLE Compute the average yearly amount paid salesreps in each department The yearly amount is the monthly salary times twelve plus the commission Also list the department number and salesrep count in each department sql gt select Dept_No count avg Salary 12 Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Job salesrep sql gt group by Dept_No recognized query Dept_No count avg Salary 12 Commission 20 Sy 22216 67 30 Zeul 27050 00 40 g 26150 00 50 19000 00 You can also apply an aggregate function to the result of another aggregate function This lets you compute such items as the maximum average or the average count When used this way an aggregate function requites a group by clause SQL computes the result as follows 1 All qualifying records are selected using the where clause if any 2 The selected records are sorted according to the fields in the group by clause 3 The inner aggregate function is computed 4 The outer function is then applied to the results Because the second level of computation removes all identity from the groups you must use a nested query to list fields other than the function result 374 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE List the average department size in the company sql gt select avg count sql gt f
101. be used in this field statement because the current field is not a NUMERIC field with a length of 5 9 characters gt gt gt Only time field types are valid for the hour default Explanation The keyword hour cannot be used in this field statement because the current field is not of type TIME gt gt gt Operation not allowed on a video control space Explanation Because of the terminal s characteristics the current position although blank contains a video control character Therefore PAINT cannot perform the requested operation in this space Unify DataServer ELS messages 637 gt gt gt Operator abort Explanation You have asked to stop the Read Database Backup or Write Database Backup program as for example when you answer N to a Continue prompt gt gt gt Other records reference this field You cannot change its value now Explanation Other records in the database also reference this field Therefore this field s value cannot be changed at this time Correction You must change the related records so they do not reference this record gt gt gt Output width overflow Explanation This message displays at run time when a print line s output is longer than the page width This message also displays when you include a no newline in your last print statement Invalid Script input cnumber number 8 name string 30 state string 2 width 20 detail print This is a listing of customers c
102. blocks The maximum size of the transaction log in 512 byte blocks The default size is 4000 blocks The log file size limit is useful if your transaction log is a removable diskette and you want transaction logging to stop before the log is full Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference ENTER reports when the log is 50 80 90 and 100 full When the log is 100 full transaction logging is turned off NAME OF ERROR REPORTING FILE NOTE Miscellaneous utilities The name or path of the ASCII file that stores error messages generated by transaction logging For example if a write error occurs while attempting to write an entry in the transaction log transaction logging sends a message to this file The default name is txerrorfile This file is opened in the DBPATH directory if DBPATH is undefined the file is opened in the current directory If the error reporting file cannot be written to or cannot be opened by the error routines transaction logging errors display on the screen After you have changed transaction logging from OFF to ON you must run Write database backup to activate a new log 265 12 2 Add modify or delete menus menumnt 266 To start this program select Add modify or delete menus menumnt from the main menu The screen form displays as follows menumnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 odify or Delete Menus FADING menu data entry area ENU PROG PROMPT M O
103. character can appear between the brackets Any printable character can be used Therefore 64 128 and 12 are all valid repeated character constants Comparing strings 500 When report information is to be printed under certain conditions the if command can be used see section 17 9 The expression following the if keyword in the if command cannot have a string result However the expression can consist of string comparisons Suppose for example you want a special message to print for each occurrence of the state code CA and statecode also refers to a string of length 2 You can use the following commands Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference if statecode CA then begin skip 1 print SPECIAL MESSAGE end You can compare two strings using any of the comparison operators lt gt lt and gt Strings are equal only if their contents match and their length or number of characters is the same The following is a guide on how to order most string characters eae 0 gO lt g 9 lt A A lt 2 Z lt a a lt Z The first set reads The space character is less than the zero character When comparing strings the result is one or zero as with any comparison A result of one indicates the comparison statement is TRUE and zero indicates it is FALSE Because the result of a comparison is numeric the result of the following expression is two 1 Hi
104. constant gt constant expr count ee SAPE lt count min expr lt min expr max expr in max expr sum expr is in sum expr avg expr avg expr select lt constant gt lt constant egreso Pea field field field table field table field table field constant Between constant T constant expr expr expr count count count min expr min expr min expr max expr max expr max expr sum expr sum expr sum expr avg avg expr expr avg expr The having clause lets you select some groups formed by the group by clause and reject others based on the value of an aggregate function Therefore the having clause must contain at least one aggregate function and it must be preceded by a group by clause A having clause is composed of one or more Boolean expressions connected by and or or Each Boolean expression can be in one of two forms 1 Using the comparison operators 2 Using the between and operator If a having clause contains multiple Boolean expressions connected with either and or or square brackets can be used to indicate the expression to evaluate first Otherwise the default order is and expressions then or expressions from left to right Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Arguments field table field constant expr NOTE count min expr max expr avg expr sum expr The na
105. cost in terms of disk space and update performance When joining five or more tables in multi user applications explicit relationships can outperform B trees by a factor of more than ten to one B trees B trees have become the standard for indexes in most database management systems for several reasons 110 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 1 B trees are always balanced so every search takes the same amount of time 2 The number of disk accesses required to find a record rises very slowly as the index gets larger 3 B trees reorganize themselves automatically so their performance stays constant even after many additions and deletions Data access by B trees is a modified binary search technique To understand how B trees work it is helpful to review how a binary search operates Before a binary search can be used to find records the records must be sorted For example a binary search can be used to find the name DuPres Jacques in a telephone directory The binary search can find the name only if the list of names has been alphabetized and the name exists The telephone directory is already sorted as shown in Figure 7 13 Aa Su Ling Border Thomas Aaron Tilman Calford Hugh Abbanth Shirlene 8609 Camden Derrik Abbott Abner Collins John Abbott Alfred Connor Gerald Adier Henry Cuthburt Daniel Anderson Sue Damian Charles Arke William DuPres Jacques Baker Rarnst Franks
106. data type as the primary key in the table you are defining Correction Either enter a valid primary key data type or remove the primary key indicator from this field definition gt gt gt TEXT type fields are not allowed Explanation Only NUMERIC STRING DATE LDATE TIME FLOAT or AMOUNT fields can be used in an index definition gt gt gt The advanced field attributes file is not present or is not readable Explanation The program cannot find the file fields afa in the current directory Correction Make sure the Advanced Field Attributes file has been developed and that the source file name is spelled correctly Also check that you have write privileges set for the file fields afa gt gt gt The backup device environment variable BUDE V is not set Explanation The environment variable must be set to the name of the backup device The environment variable is usually set during the installation procedure Any keyboard response returns you to the menu gt gt gt The correct usage is SQL b filename Explanation SQL was started from the shell command line with an incorrect number of parameters Correction Enter the command again with the correct parameters Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt The create on intermediate file xxxx failed Explanation The intermediate file named xxxx cannot be created This can be caused by the directory not having enough space or not having corr
107. default values are also described in Query Facilities earlier in chapter 16 Sort Items SQLORDCNT This table sets the number of sort keys allowed by sort Queries containing the order by clause use this table The default number of sort keys per query is 9 NOTE You must set this variable if the sort key capacity of sort Tables SQLTABCNT This table sets the number of database tables allowed in a query The default number of tables per query is 10 Selection Items GQLSELCNT This table sets the number of items that can be specified in all select clauses in a query The default number of selection items is 100 Output Buffer SQLPBUFSIZ This table sets the size of the buffer used to store a query s output items It must be able to store the total of the output items field lengths The default output buffer size is 2048 bytes A summary of the internal SQL tables with their corresponding environment variables is shown in Figure 16 4 SQL TABLE ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE DEFAULT VALUE Expression Nodes SQLNODECNT 100 Fields SQLFLDCNT 100 Figure 16 4 Internal SQL Tables and Environment Variables Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference SQL TABLE ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE DEFAULT VALUE Constants SQLCONCNT 100 Sort Items SQLORDCNT 9 Database Tables SQLTABCNT 10 Selection Items SQLSELCNT 100 Output Buffer SQLPBUFSIZ 2048 Figure 16 4 Internal SQL Tables and Environment Variables SQLPMEM SQLSMEM AND TIMEM Three
108. describe string constants string comparisons and the string operators String constants The word characters refers to printable characters A character string constant can be specified as a string of characters enclosed in single quotes or as the repeated character The repeated character is a character enclosed in square brackets 1 that is repeated a number of times The syntax for both methods is as follows characters count character RPT Report processor 499 The quoted string describes a literal set of characters You must enter the string on a single line The following are examples of quoted string constants ne the null strng string of space characters 12 A OKt Headings underlines and other unchanging information in a report can be printed by using string constants A string constant containing no characters the null string length zero is represented by placing two single quotes next to each other with no space between them The repeated character syntax count character specifies the count or number of times you want the character to print Zero 0 is not a valid count You must enter one printable character between the brackets You can enter long and hard to manage strings using this syntax The following are examples of repeated character constants 9 is equal to 18 is equal to 20 _ is equal to i i 7 is equal to 3 N is equal to V Exactly one printable
109. device filter to be used instead of the default device filter BUDRVR For more information on setting BUDEV BUBLK BUTAPESZ and BUDRVR see chapter 5 Environment Variables If transaction logging is being used Write database Backup clears the log file when the backup is complete and resets transaction logging status to ON NOTE If you have changed transaction logging from OFF to ON you must run Write database Backup to activate a new log Before starting the backup make sure no one is using the database This ensures that a physically valid copy of the database can be made Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference To start the program select Write database Backup budb from the database Maintenance menu or the database Design Utilities menu You see the following screen form Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Write Database Backup This program copies the database dictionary to diskettes or tape No one should be using the database while this program is running Proceed E Mount a diskette or tape that is blank or can be overwritten Make sure it is write enabled Respond with Y or y at the PROCEED prompt to start the backup process If you want to exit the program and return to the menu respond with CRTL U N or n Database maintenance utilities 183 9 2 Read database backup redb This option reads the backup diskettes or tapes written by Write database Backup and then lets you replay the transaction log file prod
110. entered Explanation When you modify or add menu lines you must enter line numbers to indicate in what order the options should display Correction Enter a number from one to 16 gt gt gt A literal tuple contains the wrong number of items Explanation Every literal tuple must contain the same number of items as listed in the field specification list Otherwise SQL cannot determine what to do with the extra value or missing field Invalid Query select name from emp where lt job salary gt lt clerk gt Correction select name from emp where lt job salary gt lt clerk 950 gt gt gt gt A newly created field cannot be indexed before running one of these programs Create Database or Reconfigure Database Explanation You are trying to create an index definition using a field that has not yet been compiled in the data dictionary Unify DataServer ELS messages 599 600 Correction You must run the appropriate option first REUTRN gets you back to the FIELD NAME prompt to enter another field name gt gt gt A screen field already exists with that name Explanation PAINT does not allow duplicate screen field names Correction Choose another name gt gt gt A sort command is not allowed on presorted input Explanation When the sorted option is used with the input command RPT doesn t allow the sort command to be used gt gt gt A string constant was expected Explanation The synta
111. entering a screen name or ALL at the SCREEN prompt but there are no screen forms defined for this database gt gt gt There are too many saved strings Explanation This internal error occurs when too many strings are formatted with the using option of print Correction Reduce the number of using formats in the report print statements gt gt gt There is acommand group which refers to a non existent sort expression on line nnn Explanation The report script is trying to refer to a name in a before or after command that is not listed as a sort element Invalid Script sort customer_num before zip_code print Zip Code Area Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction sort customer_num zip_code before zip_code print Zip Code Area gt gt gt There is a nested aggregate operator on line nnn Explanation Aggregate functions cannot be used in a sort expression Invalid Script print total new_amount total old_amount Correction set to tal_old to total old_amount print total new_amount total_old gt gt gt There is a phase error in the input file Explanation The format of an input line does not match the input section of the script Correction Check for extra values on each line of the input Make sure that there is a value for each input column in the input section Also verify that the type of the value and the type of the input column
112. entry query by forms 337 15 3 Using ENTER with advanced field attributes AFA You can use Advanced field attributes to specify default and legal values for individual fields You can also specify a one line information message an error message and a help file to be displayed for the field For information on entering Advanced field attributes see section 8 6 The following describes the effects Advanced field attributes AFA have on ENTER screens Adding and modifying records with AFA 1 In add mode if AFA defaults have been specified all primary table screen fields are filled in with their default values when you enter the primary key value 2 If no AFA defaults have been specified the standard defaults are filled in as shown in Figure 15 3 If the field data type is NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT BINARY Figure 15 3 Standard AFA defaults Then the AFA standard default is 0 0 0 00 aa per per wr per per 00 00 blank n a n a 3 Ifthe primary key field has an AFA default press RETURN to move the cursor past the key field All fields their custom defaults 338 including the primary key are then filled in with Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 4 If the table has no primary key all fields with custom defaults are filled in when you select add mode or when you clear the screen after completing an add operation You must enter d
113. form With this tool you can move to the next or previous page select a particular screen field to modify or delete add new screen fields or delete screens Start this option by selecting Check screen form coordinates sfmaint from the Create or modify screen forms menu The following screen form displays sfmaint Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Check Screen Form Coordinates screen form screen field data entry area data entry area ELD DFIELD TP LEN FX FY PROMPT PS PY M ODIFY ELETE AM screen field paging area 314 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The Check screen form coordinates screen form has three parts 1 A screen form data entry area This is where you enter the name of the screen form you want to use 2 A screen field data entry area This is where you enter the information for the screen fields you want to add modify or delete 3 A screen field paging area where screen field information is listed You can display the list of screen fields page by page The prompts and column headings on the screen are described as follows INQUIRE A DD MJODIFY DJELETE SCREEN The operation prompt This prompt lets you choose an operational mode for the screen form data entry area of the screen The meanings of the various operation modes are as follows Inquire mode This lets you see the screen fields for an existing screen form Add m
114. group access privileges in the data dictionary These privileges specify which programs and menus a group may use as well as the types of updates they may make You can also set access privileges for SQL and for the Unify DataServer ELS exit to the operating system command sh Users may access only the menus programs and screen forms listed for their group To run this program select Add or Modify Group Privileges grpmnt from the Security Maintenance menu The following screen form displays grpmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Add or Modify Group Privileges GROUP ID ENT group data iEVELS ENU PROG M P INQ ADD MOD DEL LN MENU PROG M P INQ ADD DOD DE access privilege data entry area access privilege paging area This screen form lets you inquire about add modify and delete user groups and their access privileges It has a group data entry area where you enter user groups an 218 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference access privilege data entry area where you enter access privileges and an access paging area where the screen form lists access privileges The following is an explanation of each of the prompts and column headings on the screen form IINQUIRE A DD MJODIFY D JELETE The operation prompt The meaning of each selection is as follows i Inquire mode This lets you view the access privileges for an existing us
115. gt gt gt There is an invalid non command group command Explanation Invalid Script Make sure the correct syntax is used for the non command group The causes of this error include the following e misspelling a command word omitting a comma e trying to print a multi word heading without single quotes omitting the end command to terminate the report script e not putting the set command within a command group input name string 30 number numeric 5 beffore report Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction input Correction input name string 30 number numeric 5 before report gt gt gt There is an invalid print item Explanation The print expression has an incorrect syntax Note that you cannot use keywords in print expressions Invalid Script print report report is a keyword gt gt gt There is an invalid type expression Explanation RPT does not recognize the data type in a report field listed under input Verify the spelling of the word numeric float amount date Idate time string or text COMB is not a valid data type Invalid Script model_num Numeric 20 Correction model_num numeric 20 Unify DataServer ELS messages 665 666 gt gt gt There is insufficient memory for the record buffer Explanation Correction The allocated record buffer doesn t have enough room to read the current input record data Reduce the size of the record g
116. has a status of 30 3 Modifying The status of a city appears more than once If you change a city s status you must change the status for all manufacturers in that city If you miss a record you have different statuses for two manufacturers in the same city For example if you change the status of Lynn from 10 to 20 you must change the status for manufacturers 0001 and 0004 So the database needs further refinement To eliminate the problems of status depending on a non key field split manf into two tables manf and cities The primary key for the new manf table is manf_ID and the key for cities is city The new tables have the layout shown in Figure 7 7 Introduction to database design 101 manf cities Primary Key Primary Key manf_ID city city status 0001 Lynn Lynn 10 0002 Reston Reston 20 0003 Reston Reston 20 0004 Lynn Lynn 10 0005 San Diego San Diego 30 item Primary Key imanf_ID ser_no price 0001 101 3 00 0001 102 2 00 0001 103 4 00 0001 104 2 00 0001 105 1 00 0001 106 1 00 0002 101 3 00 0002 102 4 00 0003 102 2 00 0004 102 2 00 0004 104 3 00 0004 105 4 00 Figure 7 7 Database Design 4 manf cities and item table 102 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Now each table in the database design contains information about a single subject manf contains information about manufacturers cities information about city statuses and item information about the items for sal
117. installation The licensing program activates these ACCELL SQL files depending on the options and additional products you purchased Executable Archive Description ENTER UNIFY ENTER screen manager SCHENT Unify Datraserver ELS database schema development utility SQL Unify Datraserver ELS SQL manager cmn a Common release archive Licensing after installation To prepare for licensing your software after installation complete these steps Step 1 Make sure that the Unify DataServer ELS configuration variable is set to the full pathname of the release lib directory Step 2 Make sure that the PATH configuration variable contains the full pathname of the release bin directory Step 3 Start licprod licprod version f filename unify version Directs the utility to display the release version of licprod that you are using 686 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 f filename Directs the utility to retrieve the license key from the file named filename If you do not use the f option licprod will use install license key if the file contains data Otherwise licprod prompts you for the license key unify License only the Unify DataServer ELS DBMS executables If you do not use the f option the utility prompts you for a license key with this message Enter your license key sh for shell x to exit Enter your license key or answer appropriately as described below X If you do not have a license key code ent
118. is embedded rv str Start reverse underline re str End reverse underline rl str Begin reverse low ru str Begin underline low rw str Begin reverse underline low nm str Begin normal video mode ws str Start write protect half intensity we str End write protect restore full intensity gs str Start graphics mode gx str Exit graphics mode ga str Lower left round corner gb str Upper left round corner gc str Upper right round corner gd str Lower right round corner ge str Lower left square comer gf str Upper left square corner gg str Upper right square corner gh str Lower right square corner gi str intersection gj str vertical bar gk str horizontal bar gi str 1 intersection gm str I intersection gn str T intersection go str L intersection Figure 6 1 Unify termcap Functions Termcap and Unicap 71 72 Figure 6 2 lists terminal functions that are used only by ENTER Name Type Pad Description Ec str Clear entry default is CTRL Z Es str Begin search default is CTRL E Ex str Exit ENTER default is CTRL X Ub str Move backward upward on screen default is CTRL U Ui str Display help text for the current field Uf str Move forward downward on screen default is RETURN Figure 6 2 Keyboard mapping functions ENTER only The three functions shown in Figure 6 3 are required to use Unify DataServer ELS Name Type Pad Description ce str P Clear to end of line cl str Clear all cm str P
119. item NUMERIC 4 imodel_monum 10 item NUMERIC 7 ilorder 17 item NUMERIC 9 ipamt 18 item AMOUNT 5 isal T item AMOUNT 5 madd 3 manf STRING 30 mano manf NUMERIC 4 mcity 14 manf STRING 20 mdes 7 model STRING 30 mname 2 manf STRING 35 mokey 4 model COMB 6 Figure 11 3 Field list report Data Dictionary reports 237 238 DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 49 PAGE 3 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Field List FIELD NUMBER TABLE TYPE LENGTH momano 6 model NUMERIC 4 monum 3 model NUMERIC 4 mstate 15 manf STRING 2 mzip 16 manf STRING 5 ocust 28 orders NUMERIC 5 odate 27 orders DATE onum 26 orders NUMERIC 9 sno 8 item NUMERIC 9 Figure 11 3 Field list report The column headings on the Field list report are described as follows FIELD NUMBER TABLE TYPE LENGTH The short name of each field in the database including the access name for each component field of a COMB field listed in alphabetical order The number that identifies each field in the data dictionary The short name of the table that contains the field The data type of each field The length of each field DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 49 PAGE DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Table Relationships ABLE TABLE FIELD item model imodel item manf imodel_momano Figure 11 4 Table relationships report Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11
120. key in file is unique or updates the existing database record if the key is a duplicate The default mode requires the table to have a key If the table does not have a key you must use either n or u mode The specification file spec file describes the format of the input file The file consists of a single line with an entry for each field to be updated You need not list every field in the table just the ones you want to update Nor do the fields have to be ina particular order The order in the specification file just has to agree with the order in the input file The specification file has the following format field sep field sep field where field is the name either the database name or the long name of the database field and sep is a single character field separator that indicates where the field ends The field cannot be a COMB type field Instead separate COMB fields into their component subfields in both the specification and the input files Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The separator must not be a letter a digit or the underscore character _ because these are used in field names Choose a separator that does not occur in any STRING field A good separator to use is the pipe or vertical bar You don t have to use the same separator between each field But each separator in the specification file must match each separator in the input file The input file must have the same format as the sp
121. length Use STRING data types for names addresses short descriptions telephone numbers zip codes serial numbers or any combination of characters you don t expect to do calculations on This is variable length alphanumeric data that can exceed 256 characters in length such as a word processed ASCII file Although Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference you can only specify a display length up to 256 characters a TEXT field s internal length is the length of the ASCII data The maximum internal length of a TEXT field is limited only by hardware considerations such as disk size As data is added or erased the internal length increases or decreases automatically The minimum internal length of a TEXT field is 12 characters in the file db record The 12 characters specify the location of file dbv which contains the actual TEXT field data In general short alphanumeric fields are stored more efficiently as STRING fields because of the additional disk I O and processing overhead associated with TEXT fields Unlike STRING fields which are fixed length and include trailing blanks TEXT fields contain only the characters you enter TEXT fields do not contain trailing blanks unless you explicitly enter the blanks For more information about editing a TEXT type field see Entering Data in a Text Type Field in section 15 2 Use TEXT data types for such things as annotated bibliographies where you want to store long descriptions
122. list fields from several tables are called join queries because they combine or join the tables The tables to be joined in the query are listed in the from clause in any order In join queries SQL determines the most efficient method of performing the selection and qualification The following examples illustrate various methods of joining tables General Join A join query forms the Cartesian product of the selected tables A Cartesian product is formed when two tables are joined so that every record in the first table is joined to every record of the second table For example if the first table has 100 records and the second table has 200 records their Cartesian product would contain 20 000 records Cartesian Product Example The Cartesian product is best understood by an example Consider three tables A B and C Table C is the Cartesian product of A and B It contains every possible combination of the records in tables A and B i e the first record in A with all three records in B and the second record in A with all three records in B SQL Query DML language 381 382 Figure 16 2 illustrates how A and B combine to form C Table A Table B Table C aaa cece aaa ccc ddd aaa ddd Ee B aaa eee bbb ccc bbb bbb ddd bbb eee Figure 16 2 Cartesian Product of A and B is C In this example table A has two records table B has three records and the Cartesian product table C has six records When tables contain m
123. lt dy gt index dow vdate Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday month to lt mnth gt index mdy vdate 0 1 January February March April May June July August September October November December day to mdy vdate 1 year to mdy vdate 2 t weekday month day using ld ear 1900 using 4ld centered t Report Run on today at hour centered t 57 centered t Purchase order Status Report in column 1 oday in column 31 hour in column 40 t pg_title in column 1 skip 2 t in column 37 pageno using srd dt hipped then egin 483 484 set pg_title to Orders already shipped page end before v_number set order30 to 0 set order60 to 0 set order90_overg90 to 0 need 10 print v_number in column 6 using d v_name in column 11 Contact in column 42 vr_name in column 51 print Address in column 11 print City State Zip Code in column 11 skip before po_number set old_order to 0 if Ordered gt today 30 then set order30 to order30 1 else begin if Ordered gt today 60 then set order60 to order60 1 else begin if Ordered gt today 90 then set order90 to order90 1 else begin set orders_over90 to orders_over90 1 set old_order to 1 end end end skip if old_order 1 then print gt gt gt gt gt in column 1 print
124. manual assumes that you already know how to use your operating system but this chapter is included as a summary of how Unify DataServer ELS interfaces with Unix based operating systems The following table lists some of the basic operating system commands you are expected to be familiar with Command Description cat display contents of an ASCII file cd chdir change directory cmp compare two files cp copy a file df fsck check disk Is list files and subdirectories in a directory mkdir create a new directory mv change a file name pr lpr send output to a print spooler rm delete a file rmdir delete a directory setenv export vi set an environment variable open the standatd text editor Figure 2 1 Summary of Operating System Commands 27 File name suffixes Unify DataServer ELS identifies the type of a file by its file name suffix For more information on file names and suffixes see Files This table lists the file name suffixes recognized by Unify DataServer ELS Suffix Description a an archive file created by ar afa an advanced field attribute file C aC source code file db a data base file dbr a raw data base file dbv a file containing variable length data base fields TEXT or BINARY fields err an error log file Lh an include file used with C source code idx a B Tree index file id a command file used to create executable files O a relocatable binary object file usually kept i
125. match Look for unescaped separator characters embedded in a column value gt gt gt There is a saved string overflow Explanation This internal error occurs when an excessively long string is formatted by the using option of print Correction Try reducing the length of the input string Unify DataServer ELS messages 659 gt gt gt There is a type mismatch in the set clause on line nnn Explanation You cannot assign a new value to a variable that has been set if the values data types are not compatible Invalid Script Set z to 1 34 if employ_code 3 then set z to abc efg Correction set z to 1 34 if employ_code 3 then set string_variable to abc efg gt gt gt There is a variable used in a sort expression on line nnn Explanation You cannot use variables as sort elements Make sure you have not used variables as sort elements Otherwise make sure you have no misspellings in the command line Invalid Script sort czip x before report set x to 0 gt gt gt There is an aggregate expression embedded in a sort expression on line nnn Explanation Aggregate functions cannot be used in a sort expression Invalid Script sort czip total x_amount 660 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt There is an assignment to a non variable on line nnn Explanation You cannot use an alphabetic string as a variable and as a report field name in the same report script
126. modify help documentation enthdoc 273 Edit SQL or RPT command files 275 Database load DBLOAD 276 Program loading Ifilegen 280 Monitoring locks Impeek 281 Part IV Screen form development and maintenance 283 Chapter 13 Screen form development tools 285 Create default screen form cdsf 289 Paint screen forms paint 293 Screen editing commands 295 Customizing PAINT commands 308 Chapter 14 Screen form maintenance utilities 313 Check screen form coordinates sfmaint 314 Display list of screens sfslist 319 Test screen sfsamp 320 6 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Compile screens sfproc 321 Restore screen to Data Dictionary sfrestr 322 Part V Data entry and retrieval 323 Chapter 15 ENTER data entry query by forms 325 The Rules of Using ENTER 326 Register screen form with ENTER entmnt 329 Using ENTER for data entry 335 Entering the primary key field 335 Moving the cursor on the ENTER screen 335 Adding or changing field data 336 Entering data in a text type field 336 Enter data in a binary type field 337 Changing data in a secondary table 337 Using ENTER with advanced field attributes AFA 338 Adding and modifying records with AFA 338 ENTER and AFA messages 339 Using ENTER for query by forms 340 Inexact matching on string fields 341 Inexact matching on non string fields 342 Using queries to modify delete or report 343 Enter report options screen 344 Chapter 16 SQL Query DML language 349
127. more information about setting internal SQL table sizes see SQL Extensions section 16 3 The amount of memory used during an SQL sort to hold the sort keys If this variable is set too low and the sort needs more room for the sort keys the overflow is stored in a disk file This slows down sort performance The default value is 16384 16k For more information Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference TERM TERMCAP TIMEM UCFLAGS Environment variables about setting internal SQL table sizes see SQL Extensions section 16 3 The type of your terminal as defined in your termcap file There is no default value so this variable must be set for your terminal to work properly Set the TERM environment variable to your terminal type and speed For example using the Bourne shell you set the terminal type and speed with the following syntax ta ERM XXXJC export TERM stty nnn where xxxx is the code for your terminal type in the termcap file and nnn is the baud you are running at usually 9600 If your terminal requires delays to function properly you must set the terminal speed explicitly as shown The method for setting terminal speed varies depending on the terminal you are using Read the Users Manual that came with your terminal for more information The path name of the termcap file This file tells Unify DataServer ELS how your terminal works It may not be necessary for you to set this variable
128. name is the long name of the field However a field that references a COMB type field in another table must have a separate access name for each implied field The access name of each implied field is a compound of the short name of the field it is part of and the short name of the component field it references in the other table PX The x coordinate column of the prompt on the screen form Itis a number between 0 and 79 for 80 column screens and 0 131 for 132 column screens PY The y coordinate row of the prompt on the screen form It is a number between 0 and 23 318 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 14 2 Display list of screens sfslist This program generates a report of all the screen forms in the data dictionary It has no selection options or prompts that you must answer before the program runs Start the program by selecting Display list of screens sfslist from the Create or modify screen forms menu The following is an example of what you should see sfslist Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Display List of Screens smanl100 smod100 sitm100 The program displays the screen form names in columns Press RETURN to return to the Create or modify screen forms menu Screen form maintenance utilities 319 14 3 Test screen sfsamp 320 This program lets you test a screen form without writing a program to display the form The position of screen field prompts and screen fields can be easily checked in this
129. names referred to as field names or fields are as follows 1 Field names must begin with a letter They can contain only upper or lower case letters digits and the underscore character _ 2 Field names cannot contain spaces SQL cannot distinguish a single field with a space from two separate fields 3 Field names must be unique in a table Entering query statements SQL lets you enter query statements in a free form manner This means that you can use extra spaces and carriage returns to make a query easier to read without changing the query s meaning All the queries in the following chapters exhibit this feature A query is ended by the slash character When SQL reaches the slash character it begins to evaluate what you have entered If you have entered a valid query the following message displays recognized query 352 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference to let you know that your query is being processed If SQL cannot understand your query it displays an error message that indicates what kind of error you have made For a summary of error messages and suggested solutions see Messages at the end of section 16 5 And for information on how to edit save and restart saved queries see SQL Extensions chapter 16 4 When you want to exit SQL enter end and you return to the Menu Handler The following subsections describe each of the SQL clauses using example queries However because of the complexity of S
130. nnn Completed tables nnn Current table xxx Number of records nnn Writing hash table Program complete gt gt Any keyboard response returns you to the menu Database maintenance utilities 193 9 4 Rebuild explicit relationships repoint 194 This option rebuilds the explicit relationships in the database Use this option if you change an existing ordinary field to an explicit relationship or if an explicit relationship is damaged To rebuild explicit relationships run repoint from the shell If you have a large database and only a few explicit relationships need to be rebuilt see Rebuilding selected explicit relationships at the end of this chapter Rebuild explicit relationships zeros the existing pointers then reads the database relinking the related records It can do this because Unify DataServer ELS stores a certain amount of redundant data that indicates what the relationships should be Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference From the Menu Handler From the database Maintenance menu start the program by selecting Rebuild explicit relationships repoint You see the following screen form repoint Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Rebuild Explicit Relationship This program rebuilds all the explicit relationship pointer chains in the database No one else should be using the database while this program is running referencing field name PROCEED W Respond to the prompt with Y or y
131. on line nnn does not contain an integer expression Explanation Invalid Script Correction RPT cannot recognize the expression in the if command on line nnn You must compare integers to numeric or amount report fields or variables in if statements input cnumber numeric 5 name string 30 address string 30 state string 2 zip numeric 5 if zip 95648 then input cnumber numeric 5 name string 30 address string 30 state string 2 zip numeric 5 if zip 95648 then The indexes will not be usable until the preceding error is corrected and this program finishes successfully If the database is updated before the indexes are usable they will have to be rebuilt Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Explanation This message displays in two parts if the program encounters trouble just before it finishes processing If you can fix the problem before any database updates are done run this option again gt gt gt The input value is not within any of the given ranges Explanation This is the standard error message that displays when the entered value for a field is not a legal value Legal values are set using the Advanced Field Attributes feature Correction Check the value for mistakes gt gt gt The maximum number of indexes 255 has been reached Another index cannot be added to the system Explanation This message displays if 255 indexes are defined and you are adding
132. or display data See the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual for more information 285 286 Before you leam how screen forms are created and modified look at the elements of a screen form The following is a typical screen that could be used to update and view a simple customer file screen form name Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Customer Maintenance screen field prompt screen field screen field name sname data base field name sname Type string Length 30 OMER NAME John Jones ESS 1234 Main Street Sacramento E CA Isteady customer orders 2 times a month usually pays within 30 days A screen form has three elements The screen form name the screen field prompts and the screen fields Every screen form must have a unique name so it can be referred to without confusion The screen form name in the example is cus100 The screen field prompts are the static unchanging decorative elements that make up the basic screen design In the example CITY and the box around the comments are screen field prompts Screen field prompts identify explain or highlight screen fields Screen fields are windows into the database file They let you see the values of database fields for the current record In the example screen fields let you see the values for the cname caddr ccity estate and ccomms database fields Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference E
133. print once for every record in the selection file The order is determined by previous or subsequent sort commands If a name has been defined in a sort command then you cannot redefine the name Otherwise the listing processor uses the name to assign a column heading to the expression You can include a slash in the name to indicate that the heading continues on a new line You can include any number of slashes in a name for a multiple line stacked heading The default heading for an expression consisting of a single field is the field name Otherwise there is no default heading After naming a heading for an expression use the heading in subsequent commands instead of the expression By default expressions are assigned columns from left to right on line one The larger of either the expression output size or the heading size determines the spacing Default spacing can be altered in two ways 565 566 1 By setting the ine and column absolutely after the list command 2 By using the under syntax to indicate that the expressions are to appear below a previously defined expression The using Format Numeric float and amount fields are normally printed using a default format You can change the print format of these fields with the using syntax and a template composed of special characters Include one special character for each position in the field width The special character at each position in the template indi
134. registration You must a add enter a on a blank line move a report to another position in the display area the line number of the new position The number can range from one to n where n is the number of reports registered with this screen The current item is moved to this line number modify fields associated with the current report m modify NOTE If NAME is changed to blank the parameter fields are erased If NAME is changed to RPT all parameter fields except the first are erased Figure 16 8 Control Commands for CMD Column Using an SQL screen Once you have selected the SQL screen you want to use from the Menu Handler the screen form displays with the following prompt Accept entries CTRL E Clear field CTRL Z Exit CTRL X This prompt indicates the default control key values for the accept entries clear field and exit functions You can change the control keys by editing your termcap file as described in section 6 1 The control characters have the following functions CTRLE This substitutes the field values in the SQL script and displays the Report Options Screen CTRL Z This sets the current selection specification to its default value CTRL X This exits the current SQL screen and returns you to the Menu Handler Unlike CTRL E and CTRL Z CTRL X can be used SQL Query DML language 421 422 whenever an ordinary character would be accepted This gives you a quick way to exit an SQL screen All fi
135. specify the records to be deleted Refer to the previous where clause description earlier in this chapter for more information SQL Query DML language 443 set CLAUSE set field expr select Q ll fiel The set clause lets you indicate how to update the fields in a table You can set a field to an expression or to the result of a query statement Arguments field The name of a field in the table that is being updated expr An arithmetic expression composed of fields and constants connected by the operators and The fields must be in the table being updated Parentheses can be used to change the order in which the operations are performed select This indicates that a query block can be used in this part of the clause For more information about query blocks refer to Query Statements and Clauses earlier in this chapter Non Query commands 444 Unify DataServer ELS SQL includes the following commands that augment the language edit restart start unlock lines text separator run operating system command end Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The edit restart and start commands enable you to change then rerun the current query or run queries stored in ASCII files The unlock command enables you to access fields protected by passwords The lines and separator commands let you set the number of lines per page for the column headings and change the standard field
136. statement to set default values and legal values for a field Enclose default values in parentheses then list comma separated legal values The default value is used when a new record is added to the database This value is not checked against the legal values for validity If you have not specified a default value for a field then the default values shown in Figure 8 18 apply Data type Default STRING null blank displayed TEXT null BINARY null NUMERIC 0 AMOUNT 0 DATE ae Ke A Figure 8 18 Field default values Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Data type Default LDATE be ida ee TIME 00 00 FLOAT 0 Figure 8 18 Field default values If the field is NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE or TIME when you specify a default value for a field you can also include an offset The offset is added to or subtracted from the default value before the value is stored in the field See Figure 8 15 for the field offsets The following example illustrates why you may want to have an offset Suppose your table has a field that has a unique ID number for every piece of equipment equip_ID You want all equipment ID numbers to be over 5000 You can have the system automatically assign this number by using the following field statement with a default and an offset value equip ID unique 5000 This statement causes the default value for equip_ID to be set to the current record number plus 5000 Considerations Problems c
137. store all data associated with the print statements Correction Increase the number of constants allowed by using the RPTCONCNT environment variable Or reduce the total memory requirements by decreasing the lengths of output strings and report fields decreasing the number of variables or by reducing the complexity of the report script gt gt gt There is no current field to delete Explanation There isn t a screen field in this position to delete gt gt gt There is no current field to transfer Explanation There isn t a screen field in this position to transfer gt gt gt There is no field to modify Explanation There isn t a screen field in this position to modify gt gt gt There is no help file for this field Explanation You are asking to display a help file for the current field but no help file has been specified for this field Correction You can assign a help file to an individual field using the Advanced Field Attributes option For more information on Advanced Field Attributes see Section 8 6 gt gt gt There is no index with the given ID number Explanation The index ID number you have entered is not in the data dictionary Correction Check the index ID number entry You can list all index ID numbers and their associated tables using Print or Display B Tree Statistics Unify DataServer ELS messages 667 668 gt gt gt There is no logical transaction group current Explanation Becau
138. terminal and keyboard to work with Unify DataServer ELS Part Il Database Design and Maintenance contains three chapters Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Introduction to Database Design contains information that can help you set up the most efficient database design for data entry manipulation and retrieval Database Design Utilities tells you how to design and create new databases modify existing databases reconfigure databases work with B tree indexes and use Advanced Field Attributes for data validation Database Maintenance Utilities explains how to read and write database backups rebuild the hash table rebuild explicit relationships and define database volumes Part IIl System Administration also contains three chapters Chapter 10 Database Security Utilities tells you how to manage security for your Unify DataServer ELS application You can define group and user privileges for database access and operations and set up field passwords If your operating system supports this feature you can also Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference combine the Unify DataServer ELS security system with that of your operating system Chapter 11 Data Dictionary Reports explains several reports you can request to see the status of your database menus screens security programs and other statistics relating to your application Chapter 12 Miscellaneous Utilities describes such operations as how to Add or Dele
139. the 600 Expected Number of Records fit into 6 data segments Because Unify DataServer ELS allocates 10 segments automatically there are still 4 segments of 100 records each available for table storage These 4 segments provide storage space for an additional 400 records for a total of 1000 table records in the 10 data segments The Expected number of records formula in Figure C 1 is important to consider if you want to change the Expected number of records for a particular database table You must decide whether you want to change the estimated number of records or the actual number of records available for record storage Custom message control 589 590 If you want to change the estimated number of records enter the new estimate as the Expected number of records parameter The amount of actual table storage available will always be 30 greater than the estimate you entered The amount overflow is determined by the expected number of records formula shown in Figure C 1 If you want to allocate space for an actual number of records in a table decrease the Expected Number of Records parameter by 30 Decreasing the expected number of records by 30 compensates for the 30 overflow space that is automatically created using the formula in Figure C 1 Therefore to allocate space for a specific number of records enter an Expected Number of Records value which is 60 of the actual number of records you want to allocate space for The hash t
140. the RPT built in functions or one of your own The default number of local function calls is 50 For more information about local functions see section 17 5 Arguments RPTNARGS This table limits the total number of function arguments allowed in a report script You can pass arguments or parameters to local Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference functions to repeat an operation on different data The default number of arguments is 100 For more information about local functions see section 17 5 sort by key buffer RPTPBUFSI Z This table limits the size in bytes of the sort by key buffer This buffer must be large enough to accommodate the total length of all the sort items field lengths The default size of the sort by key buffer is 1024 bytes input buffer RPTINBUFSZ This table limits the size of the input buffer This buffer must be large enough to accommodate the total length of all the input items field lengths The default size of the input buffer is 1536 bytes The table in figure 17 29 summarizes the RPT tables and their corresponding environment variables Table Expression Nodes Variables Constants Commands print Statements print Items sort Items Input Items command groups set Statements If Statements Aggregates Function Calls Arguments sort by key b Input key buffer Environment variable RPTNODECNT RPTFLDCNT RPTCONCNT RPTNCOM RPTNPRINt RPTNPITM RPTNSITM RPTNITM RPTNCGRP RPT
141. the database field CAUTION This message is also generated when the report field is matched to a COMB database field Invalid Script input cnum cname detail print cnum cname end Correction input customer enum customer cname Unify DataServer ELS messages 619 620 detail print cnum cname end or input cnum numeric 5 cname string 30 detail print cnum cname end gt gt gt Insufficient memory for arglist Explanation When describing a user function call in a script too many arguments were used to call the function Correction Try using fewer arguments gt gt gt Insufficient memory for backup device structures Explanation There is not enough memory left for the backup device internal data structures The value specified in BUBLK may be too large gt gt gt Insufficient memory for logical transaction table Explanation A fatal error has occurred causing the replay program to fail because the program cannot allocate enough memory to hold the incomplete logical transaction table This error should only occur if you have a large number of incomplete logical transaction groups and your hardware has limited address space gt gt gt Insufficient memory for sort line Explanation Either the group by or the order by clause has too many elements Correction Use fewer sort elements Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Insufficient memory for successful compile
142. the output order is reversed The expressions are listed according to decreasing sort importance The optional name argument assigns the expression a name that can be used in total and list commands If a name has been assigned and the expression is listed or totaled the name is used as a column heading The uniquely syntax specifies that duplicate lines should not be output An entire line must be identical to be suppressed not just the sort expression As a result each line in the list contains a unique set of sort expressions total name expr name using format USE LST Listing processor expr by name name end The total command outputs expression totals and subtotals By default the named expressions are totaled for the entire set of selected records The by syntax produces totals at level breaks The names specified after by are the names of expressions that have previously appeared in sort statements A total is produced for each change in value for these expressions LST supports up to five sort expressions in a sort command Correspondingly LST supports a maximum of five break level subtotals as well as grand totals If the expression was named previously only that name should be used If the expression was named in a previous list statement the output column and format are the same as that specified in the list 569 go print 570 SYNTAX USE SYNTAX USE statement If the expressi
143. the table you specified Correction Make sure the field name is spelled correctly gt gt gt ffff is an invalid field name Explanation A field name specified in the field list for the insert statement is incorrect or has been misspelled Correction Make sure the field name is spelled correctly gt gt gt XXXX is an invalid file name Explanation The ASCII or binary file named xxxx does not exist or cannot be read Unify DataServer ELS messages 629 630 Correction Make sure you have spelled the name correctly and you have access privileges to read the file gt gt gt pppp is an invalid Password for xxxx ffff Explanation The password you specified to unlock the field is incorrect Correction Make sure you have spelled the password correctly gt gt gt XXXX is an invalid table Explanation The indicated table does not exist in the database Correction Make sure you have spelled the name correctly gt gt gt XXXX is an unrecognized function name Explanation The function name does not exist or cannot be read You may have misspelled the function gt gt gt lt ffff gt is not a field of lt xxxx gt table Explanation The field named ffff in the specified field statement is not a field in table XXXX Correction Check for a possible misspelling of the field name and make sure this field statement is within the correct table section Left end of normal area is not on left edge of a
144. this password grants users both read and write privileges for the field Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference READ ONLY GROUP The group name for a set of fields All fields with the same read only group string are in the same group If users enter the read only password for any member of a field group access is granted as if the passwords were entered for all fields in the group WRITE PASSWORD The password that users must enter to write to the field you specify in FIELD NAME If you set the write password then users who enter the password can both read and write to the field WRITE GROUP The group name for a set of fields All fields with the same write group name are in the same group If users enter the write password for any member of a field group access is granted as if the passwords were entered for all fields in the group Database security utilities 229 10 5 Process field passwords procpass 230 After field level security is implemented by specifying passwords those specifications must be processed to produce a binary file that can be read by other Unify DataServer ELS functions Process Field Passwords compiles the password specifications to produce the binary password file named upasswd To process the current set of field level passwords select Process field passwords procpass from the database Maintenance menu The following screen form displays procpass Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Process
145. this to assign unique key values You can only use this default for long NUMERIC fields NUMERIC 5 9 today This sets the default value of a DATE or LDATE field to the current month day and year hour This sets the default value of a TIME field to the current hour and minutes The time is formatted as hh mm offset The amount the default value is reduced or increased before the value is stored in the field Fields can be offset in the amounts shown in Figure 8 15 Data Type Offset increment NUMERIC integer DATE day LDATE day TIME minute AMOUNT penny FLOAT integer STRING none Figure 8 15 Field offsets 170 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The table in Figure 8 16 contains examples that show how default values can be offset When offset is Then the value of field 1 is today 1 one day from the day the record is entered in the database table hour 3 three minutes from the time the record is entered in the database table unique 10000 a unique value starting with 1001 instead of 1 Sal_Amt 2 75 to a Key Field the value of Sal_Amt in the current record plus 2 75 where Sal_Amt is the name of a field in the current table Figure 8 16 Default value offsets checkreference checkref The checkreference or checkref clause enforces data integrity It only allows a value to be entered for a field if the value matches an existing key field value in a referenced table Either the checkreference or ch
146. to add a menu line for a menu or program that is on this menu Correction List menus and options only once on a menu gt gt gt Menu unknown Explanation The menu you are trying to access cannot be found Correction If you want to add this menu make sure you are in add mode If you want to modify or delete this menu make sure you spell the menu name correctly You can use Print Menus to get a list of menus For more information see Section 11 2 gt gt gt Message statement not preceded by a field statement Explanation No current field statement precedes the message statement on the indicated line The field statement tells the system what field is associated with the message Correction Precede all message statements with field statements Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Mount NEW transaction log Explanation After you remove the old transaction log volume used for the replay program mount a new diskette in the device to record new transactions gt gt gt Mount the NEW transaction log Explanation The backup is done Remount the diskette or tape used to record transactions gt gt gt Mount the transaction log Explanation If the transaction log file is a removable device the program asks you to mount the current transaction log file diskette or tape before you start the replay program The log must match the backup just read gt gt gt Mounted backup media is not part o
147. to another 400 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Data can be added to the database from external files ASCII or binary by using the DML insert statement This statement consists of the insert keyword followed by the into and from clauses The into clause indicates what table to add the records to The from clause specifies the type and name of the file to use as input If you are using a binary input file the word binary follows the from clause Otherwise SQL assumes the input file is in ASCII format NOTE Binary input files must be created using SQL only For more information on creating binary files see Creating and Running SQL Scripts and Dumping Data to External Files in this chapter For information on the insert statement see the explanation of the insert statement in section 16 2 You can use field value validation and default value features of Advanced Field Attributes AFA with the insert statement For more information on AFA or for field validation and default value warning messages see Advanced Field Attributes in section 8 6 For insert error messages refer to Messages in section 16 5 Simple data loading from an ASCII file Suppose you have an ASCII file named employees with the employee records shown in Figure 16 3 5700 Moehr 30 clerk 6400 950 00 0 00 5800 Amato 40 salesrep 6200 2000 00 750 00 6800 Fiorella 30 clerk 5700 800 00 0 00 5900 Brown 60 engineer 1300 6000 00 0 00 67
148. to start the program or CRTL UN or n to exit to the menu When the program is finished it displays the message Program complete gt gt Any keyboard response returns you to the menu If the repoint program cannot relink some of the records the following message displays instead WARNING All the records were not relinked You must manually relink them following the instructions given in the file repoint err Database maintenance utilities 195 196 This message means repoint cannot repair the pointers for some of the database records because the pointer values linking the records to their reference files are invalid and the data values in the reference fields do not exist in the reference files Two reasons for invalid pointer values can be that the record has been corrupted by a bug in a user program or there is a hardware malfunction Another reason is that a valid data value has never been stored in an explicit relationship field For example when a child record has only a system default null value stored in a field that references a parent record the link to the parent record is never established This can happen if you add a record but do not enter a value in a field that does not have an Advanced field attribute default value see section 8 6 Advanced field attributes If you want to use the system default null value in the child record you can try the following 1 Add a parent table record th
149. transaction logging feature of Unify DataServer ELS reconfiguration of the database causes logging to be turned off Correction You must back up your database to restart transaction logging Unify DataServer ELS messages 673 674 gt gt gt Transaction logging will be turned on once the database is backed up Explanation After you set transaction logging if you have updated the database you must back up the database before transaction logging can be turned on gt gt gt Transaction logging is off due to an error Backup the database to restart transaction logging Explanation Transactions cannot be written to the log file This can be caused by a write error a file permission problem or a log file that s full You must back up the database before transaction logging can be turned ON gt gt gt Transactions are currently being logged Explanation The transaction logging status is ON gt gt gt Trying to initialize command prompt lines Explanation While trying to set up the Unify DataServer ELS command prompt lines the operating system ran out of memory This often signals a hardware problem You can get second level help messages by responding to the error message with gt gt gt Trying to initialize virtual characters Explanation While trying to set up the Unify DataServer ELS virtual characters the operating system ran out of memory This often signals a hardware problem You can get second level help
150. two ways e You can access the operating system shell with the Unify DataServer ELS system sh command e You can run operating system commands from SQL using the command To access the operating system shell from Unify DataServer ELS enter sh at the selection prompt as follows ELECTION sh E ESC select U up RET down X home P previous Z clear D exit A screen similar to the following one displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Operating System Shell At the shell prompt enter the operating system commands you want to run To return to the Unify DataServer ELS menu press CTRL D To run operating system commands from SQL enter followed by the operating system command For example to see a list of the files in the current directory enter and the Is command at the SQL prompt as shown 30 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference sql gt 1s ddlockfile file db unify db sql gt The command runs displays its results and returns to the SQL prompt Using operating system security from Unify DataServer ELS Unify DataServer ELS provides a security maintenance system that you can use with your operating system to prevent unauthorized access to your database application Unify DataServer ELS lets you specify a super user ID and password group and individual access privileges and database field passwords In addition to the Unify DataServer ELS security measures you can specify an operati
151. value entered for field ffff in record number nnn of the input file is not a legal value DBLOAD has not updated this record Correction Check the value for mistakes Set legal values with the Advanced Field Attributes feature gt gt gt Invalid record location specification record nnn Explanation The record location for record number nnn of the input file cannot be understood DBLOAD has not updated this record gt gt gt Invalid response enter device or file Explanation The only two valid transaction log types are device and file gt gt gt Invalid response enter yes or no Explanation The only valid responses to the prompt are Y Yes and N No gt gt gt Invalid select list syntax Explanation The syntax of the select clause is incorrect This can be caused by various errors In the following invalid query the fields to be selected are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt The angle brackets cannot be used this way Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Invalid Query select lt name job gt from emp Correction select name job from emp gt gt gt _ Invalid selection Explanation You are trying to select an option that cannot be found in the data dictionary is not on the menu or that you are not allowed to execute gt gt gt Invalid status enter on or off Explanation The only valid responses to the prompt are on and off gt gt gt Invalid table xxxx
152. video field Explanation You are trying to change a video field back to normal mode but the left end of the normal area does not match the left edge of the existing video field Correction When changing video modes you must change the complete video field Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Left type is right type is rrrr operator is xxxx Explanation The data types of the two operands in the expression do not agree and cannot be converted You may have used the wrong field or variable name Invalid Script input cnum numeric 3 name string 30 zip string 5 if zip 95648 then Correction input cnum numeric 3 name string 30 zip string 51 if zip 95648 then gt gt gt Line must be 1 16 Explanation Menus can only have 16 menu lines per menu Correction Enter a number from one to 16 gt gt gt Line number must be between 3 and 20 Explanation Only line numbers 3 through 20 are valid y coordinates for the go to command Unify DataServer ELS messages 631 632 gt gt gt Load interrupted nnn records added mmm records updated Explanation The data load process has been interrupted By termination DBLOAD has added nnn records and updated mmm records gt gt gt Media too small unable to write data blocks Explanation Only the backup header block fits on the tape or diskette gt gt gt Menu or Prog already exists Explanation You are trying
153. want to call the file something else you can specify a different name in the Unify DataServer ELS environment variable DBNAME The default storage location for the database file is the current database directory You can change the location for the database file by setting the DBPATH environment variable For more information about setting Unify DataServer ELS environment variables see chapter 5 File volumes When you use ordinary files with database volumes defined the volumes are ordinary files or file volumes With file volumes you can have several database volumes in one or more file systems To locate file volumes Unify DataServer ELS checks the directory specified in DBPATH If DBPATH is not set Unify DataServer ELS checks the current directory If Unify DataServer ELS cannot locate the file volumes in either directory it checks the directories listed in the VOLPATH environment variable A file volume must have an identifying suffix which tells Unify DataServer ELS which database volume it is This suffix is db where is the volume number The volume Database maintenance utilities 203 number is the same as the volume s line number on the Define database volumes screen form For example the root volume has line and volume number zero and the next volume has line and volume number one If you do not include the suffix when defining a volume device Define database volumes adds the suffix to the file name using the volum
154. want to us a block device that does not exist in dev you must use the super user ID and create the file with the mknod command You must create this file before you define the database volume that uses it For file volumes The block device name can be up to 17 characters Of the 17 characters four are for the file suffix do where us an integer volume number from 1 through 7 The remaining 13 characters are for the file name Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The name you enter in the BLOCK DEVICE column must be the name of an ordinary file If the volume is the root volume the program automatically fills in the volume name The default root volume name is file db or the names specified in DBNAME if that environment variable is set If the volume is not the root the ordinary file must exist in the directory specified in DBPATH in the current directory if DBPATH is not set or in the directories specified in VOLPATH If the file name you enter does not end with db the suffix db is added to the file name The in the suffix must match the volume number which is the same as the volume s line number on the Define database Volumes screen For example the first volume after the root volume is volume 1 and has the suffix dbl Volume 2 has the suffix db2 and so on The exception is the root volume The root is volume zero so it uses the db suffix Once you enter a valid block device name the program
155. with an exclamation point For example to list the ASCII file maxsal from within SQL enter sql gt cat maxsal at the SQL prompt The operating system command runs and the SQL prompt redisplays This feature is particularly useful in stored queries where you can run a program or command without leaving SQL 398 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Dumping data to external files You can send the output of an SQL query to an external file in two ways e from SQL e from the operating system From SQL From SQL use the keyword into to send data to an ASCII file as shown in the following query select from emp into employees SQL puts the results of the query in the ASCII file called employees in the current directory In this example the result is all fields from every record in the emp table The employees file contains the heading that normally displays at the beginning of each page of output NOTE The into clause is the last clause in the query This is because SQL statements and clauses must be entered in a specific order Thus the statements and clauses in a longer query would be entered in the following order select from where group by having order by into filename From the operating system From the shell to send data to an ASCII file use a stored query and redirect the standard output to a file For example to send the results of the previous query to a file calle
156. you are using an 80 column terminal or from 2 79 if you are using a 132 column terminal Press RETURN to move the cursor to the column coordinate indicator C Enter a column number from 0 79 if you are using an 80 column terminal or from 0 131 if you are using a 132 column terminal Press RETURN and the cursor moves to the indicated position Use CTRL U cancel the command If you want to turn the cursor coordinate indicator on or off press c Screen form development tools 299 column 0 Moves the cursor to column 0 of the current line beginning of line Moves the cursor to the first nonblank character on the current line end of line Moves the cursor to the last nonblank character on the current line PROMPT EDITING 300 Prompt editing commands let you add modify and delete screen field prompts on screen forms Screen field prompts are fixed strings of text that make up the basic design of a screen form You can display prompts in normal reverse underline and reverse underline video if your terminal supports these video attributes To add text to a screen form you must switch from command mode to text input mode Once in input mode the print characters you type display on the screen and existing characters shift to the right Depending on whether you want to add text before or after the current cursor position you can enter input mode two ways by inserting e by appending In addition to input mode you can us
157. you can move the cursor up or down this column by pressing CTRL U or RETURN The valid operation commands are as follows m Modify the INQ ADD MOD or DEL entries for the current access privilege d Delete the current access privilege q Quit the current entry mode and redisplay the paging prompt A line number generated by the system Use the line number to refer to the access privilege you want to modify The name of a menu program ENTER screen or SQL screen that users in this group can access A display only field that indicates the type of MENU PROG entry The definitions of the characters that display in this column are as follows M A menu P A program E An ENTER screen Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference S An SQL screen INQ A Y in this column indicates that users in this group can use inquire mode with the named option An N indicates they cannot ADD A Y in this column indicates that users in this group can use add mode with the named option An N indicates they cannot MOD A Y in this column indicates that users in this group can use modify mode with the named option An N indicates they cannot DEL A Y in this column indicates that users in this group can use delete mode with the named option An N indicates they cannot If you have specified group or individual access privileges for users they can access only the menus programs and screens listed for them on the Add or modify group privileges and Ad
158. you have been using transaction logging it is now possible to replay the log Do you want to replay a transaction log If you answer n no transaction logging is turned OFF or ON depending on the current request set in Transaction logging status and the program ends If you want to replay the current transaction log file to bring the database up to date answer y yes The name of the log file used in the replay process is set with Transaction logging status The replay process reruns the transactions from the transaction journal This is also known as roll forward recovery because the resulting database is built from a previous backup plus the transaction log 186 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference This program uses the Unify DataServer ELS transaction configuration file unify conf to determine the transaction configuration The Unify DataServer ELS transaction configuration file is created by Transaction logging status and Read database backup when a database is recovered While the replay process runs the following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Read Database Backup ERFORMING THE TRANSACTION LOG REPLAY UILDING THE TABLE OF INCOMPLETE TRANSACTION 0O TRANSACTION PACKETS PROCE A packet is a database record that has been modified deleted or added A transaction is a group of packets preceded by a start logical transaction code and follo
159. 0 salesrep O Neil 1500 00 salesrep Dugan 1650 00 salesrep Klein 1500 00 salesrep Otsaka 1800 00 engineer Kawasaki 1800 00 salesrep Amato 2000 00 salesrep Brown 2000 00 engineer Boolean expressions can be negated in whole or in part to select records that do not match a specified criteria Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For instance suppose the research and development department has such employees as engineers programmers clerks and typists Using either the not operator or the operator you can select all employees except engineers without listing each job title The following two examples compare the use of the comparison operator and the not logical operator EXAMPLE List the department number name job and salary of everyone in department 60 who is not an engineer Use the operator sql gt select Dept_NO Name Job Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 60 and sql gt Job engineer recognized query Dept_No Name Job Salary 60 Schmidt programmer 2500 00 EXAMPLE List the name job and salary of all employees who are not salesreps or who make less than 2000 Use the not operator The square brackets indicate that the operator applies to the whole expression sql gt select Name Job Salary sql gt from emp sql gt where not Job salesrep or Salary gt 2000 recognized query Name Job Salary Jones clerk 900 00 Scharf Clerk 800 00 Otsak
160. 00 00 HHH HB HERS 123 45 123 45 123 4 123 40 123 123 00 12 12 00 1 1 00 0 00 GH SEA 88 amp 8 123 45 123 45 123 4 123 40 123 123 00 12 12 00 1 1 00 0 00 00 23 23 00 SHHBS 8a SHH amp BB 1234 56 1234 56 1234 1234 00 123 123 00 12 12 00 1 01 00 Figure 17 26 Format template default examples using and the CURR Environment Variable If the CURR environment variable is set the format specified in CURR overrides the using format template as follows 1 The currency symbol s specified in CURR replaces the currency symbol appearing in the using format template 2 The thousands separator specified in CURR replaces the thousands separator appearing in the using format template Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 3 The decimal separator specified in CURR replaces the decimal separator appearing in the using format template However the using format template overrides the currency symbol position specified in CURR The position of the currency symbol left or right of the amount as specified in the using format template stays the same The table in Figure 17 27 illustrates with example amounts of 100 000 USD s and 100 000 dollars AND the using THEN the output CORRS 2 template is is 2 gt USD SSS SHEHE USD100 000 00 lt 2 HHH HHE 88S 100 000 00 Figure 17 27 Format template default examples NOTE The currency sy
161. 00 Colucci 40 salesrep 2200 2500 00 3000 00 7000 Simpson 40 salesrep 2300 2750 00 3500 00 Figure 16 3 Records in the ASCII File employees SQL Query DML language 401 EXAMPLE Load records from the ASCII file employees into the database table emp that contains the following fields Number Name Dept_No Position Payroll_No Salary and Commission sql gt insert into emp sql gt from employees recognized update 5 record s added Input file field order If you do not specify the field order of an external file SQL assumes the external file fields are in default field order To find the default field order of a table use the keyword fields For example for a table named emp you would enter fields emp If you have an external file with fields that are not in default field order or an external file that contains an incomplete set of fields you must specify the actual field order in a field order list The field order list specifies the actual order of the fields in the external input file The field order list is specified in parentheses in the insert statement following the table name as follows insert into emp Name Number Dept_No Salary from empfiles If the external file contains an incomplete set of fields the missing field values either are set to a predefined Advanced Field Attribute or are set to the standard default values The standard defaults are zeros for NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT and TIME fields
162. 1 1 Print database design schlist 234 The Database design report is actually six reports Schema Listing Table list Field list Table relationships Table change list and Field change list The Database Design report lists tables and fields in the order they were created Under each table name it lists that table s unique short field names and descriptive long field names The report does not separate fields that refer to COMB type fields in other tables into their component fields The Table List reports the lengths of tables in bytes including overhead needed by Unify DataServer ELS The Field list report lists all fields in the database in alphabetical order This report does separate fields that refer to COMB type fields into their component fields by listing the implicit names of the component fields The Field list report also lists a field number for each field This number refers to the field s internal position in the database To print the database Design reports select the Print database design schlist option from either the database design utilities or Data Dictionary reports menu This program has no options to select or prompts to answer The Data Dictionary reports print in the order shown in figures 11 1 through 11 6 The reports are 79 columns wide but have been reduced for this document DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 35 PAGE 1 DATA DICATIONARY REPORT Schema Listing
163. 15 RPT Report processor 547 548 The RPTNSITM environment variable also indicates the number of presorted input fields This variable should always be set when the sorted option is used with the input statement Input items RPTNITM This table limits the number of fields allowed in the input section of an RPT script The default number of fields is 100 Command groups RPTNCGRP This table limits the number of command groups allowed in a report script The default number of command groups is 25 For more information about command groups see section 17 8 set statements RPTNSETCL This table limits the number of set statements allowed in a report script You use set statements to assign values to variables The default number of set statements is 100 if statements RPTNIF This table limits the number of if statements commands allowed in a report script The default number of if statements is 50 For a description of the if command see section 17 9 Aggregates RPTNAG This table limits the number of aggregate functions allowed in a report script Aggregate functions are min max avg count and total The default number of aggregate functions is 50 For more information about aggregate functions see section 17 5 Function calls RPTNCALL This table limits the number of local function calls allowed in a report script A local function call is when you use a local function in a report script The function can be one of
164. 17 20 mdy results The mdy function can be used with index to print dates using words such as Sunday December 11 1998 Variables 510 The result of an expression can be assigned to a variable using the set command Variables are useful because once a variable is set to a value the value can be used in any expression in which a variable is valid A variable can be used in an unnamed expression in a command group command except in an aggregate function argument Variables can be used to produce page numbers and section numbers or to perform complex calculations and character string manipulation As with expression names you choose variable names when you write the RPT script according to the following rules The variable name should begin with a letter The variable name should consist of letters digits and underscores up to 32 characters e The name should not be an RPT keyword For a list of RPT keywords see section 17 11 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Determining variable types A variable s type doesn t have to be explicitly declared in the report script A variable is automatically declared by using it with The set command Therefore you must not set a variable to values of conflicting types The following are the variable types recognized by RPT numeric NUMERIC AMOUNT FLOAT date ldate time string text numeric type includes the NUMERIC FLOAT and AMOUNT database field types
165. 1998 for each salesrep was 10 000 The following salesreps in your department met or exceeded the goal Name Total Sales Reilly 30000 00 Kawasaki 20000 00 Congratulations Keep up the good work The department goal was 20 000 00 and your department had 50 000 00 in sales Your department exceeded the goal for the 1st quarter and want to congratulate everyone responsible mrl jk 470 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference TO Eastern Sales FROM Mr Lee SUBJECT Sales quotas for 1st quarter 1998 As you know our sales goal for the 1st quarter of 1998 for each salesrep was 10 000 The following salesreps in your department met or exceeded the goal Name Total sales Whittaker 10000 00 Congratulations Keep up the good work The department goal was 30 000 00 and your department had 13 000 00 in sales As you can see your department failed to reach its quota expect everyone will work harder next quarter to meet the objectives mrl jk RPT Report processor 471 472 TO Western Sales FROM Mr Lee SUBJECT Sales quotas for first quarter 1998 As you know our sales goal for the 1st quarter of 1998 for each salesrep was 10 000 The following salesreps in your department met or exceeded the goal Name Total Sales Dugan 18000 00 Colucci 60000 00 Amato 15000 00 Congratulations Keep up the good work The department goal was 30 000 00 and your department had 93 000 00 in sales
166. 29 49 PAGE 4 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Table Relationships TABLE TABLE FIELD item orders iorder model manf momano orders customer ocust Figure 11 4 Table relationships report TABLE The short name of each child table that contains an explicit relationship TABLE The short name of the parent table that contains the field referenced by each child table FIELD The short name of the field in each child table that references a field in the parent table If the field is a component of a COMB type field the access name of the component field is listed DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 49 PAGE 5 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Table Change List ABLE CHANGE orders A model M tester D Figure 11 5 Table change list report The column headings on the Table Change List Report are described as follows TABLE The short name of each table that has been changed CHANGE A single character indicating the change that has been made to the table A The table has been added to the database Data Dictionary reports 239 M The table has been modified D The table has been deleted from the database DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 49 PAGE 6 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Field Change List FIELD CHANGE madd M mcode D ostat D Figure 11 6 Field change list report The column headings on the Field Change List Report are described as follows FIELD The short name of each field
167. 5 sql gt and Dept_No dept Number recognized query emp Name Location Salary 12 Commission Tax_Amount Smith San Francisco 19000 00 2673 00 Jones Dallas 10800 00 1058 00 Whittaker New York 30500 00 5772 00 Reilly Chicago 31500 00 6102 00 O Neil New York 18150 00 2486 00 Dugan Los Angeles 20700 00 3062 00 Schmidt Dallas 30000 00 5607 00 Klein New York 18000 00 2453 00 Scharf Dallas 9600 00 866 00 Lee Dallas 90000 00 32449 00 Otsaka Dallas 21600 00 3287 00 Kawasaki Chicago 22600 00 3537 00 Dupre San Francisco 9600 00 866 00 Bleriot Dallas 13200 00 1481 00 Moehr Dallas 11400 00 1154 00 Colucci Los Angeles 33000 00 6597 00 Amato Los Angeles 24750 00 4080 50 Fiorella Dallas 9600 00 866 00 Brown Dallas 24000 00 3887 00 Self Join A self join is a query that joins a table with itself as if it were two separate tables For example in the sample database the emp table contains a field that indicates the employee s manager This is merely the manager s employee number Employee number 2100 Reilly is the manager of Smith and Kawasaki You can join the emp table to itself using the employee s number and the manager s number The best way to understand this type of query is to imagine you have two copies of the emp table one with employees and one with managers SQL doesn t make a copy but achieves the same effect by letting you give a table a temporary name You can join temporary tables like any other tabl
168. 9 Print Screens SCREEN LISTING Y or N PRINT SCREEN The prompts on this screen are described as follows SCREEN If you want to print a specific screen form enter its name at this prompt If you want to print all forms in the data dictionary enter ALL LISTING Y or N If you want to print a tabular report of the attributes for each screen field answer Y at this prompt If you want to omit this part of the report answer N PRINT SCREEN If you want to print an image of the screen form as it displays on a CRT answer Y at this prompt If you want to omit the screen form image answer N 244 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 4 Print group privileges Igrp The Print group privileges option prints the Group access listing This report lists all user groups in the data dictionary by group ID Following each group is a list of the menus and programs that the group is allowed to access and the access privileges for the programs The report is 79 columns wide To print the Group Access Listing report select Print group privileges Igrp from the Security maintenance menu This program has no options for you to select DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE 1 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Group Access Listing ACCESS PRIVILEGES ID NAME ENTRY PT MENU PROG INQ ADD MOD DEL DEC Data Entry fmntmen smanl00 E y y y n Clerk smod100 E y y y n sitm100 E y y y
169. 9000 45800 00 6000 00 11457 00 0 44000 356 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 6000 00 85600 00 85600 00 99999 00 17705400 30249 00 When you use the to select all the fields the fields display in system determined order When you select the fields separately you can control the sequence and number of fields EXAMPLE List the employee number Job name and salary for every employee sql gt select Number sql gt from emp recognized query Number 1000 2000 1100 2100 1200 2200 1300 2300 1400 2400 1500 2500 1600 2600 1700 2700 1800 2800 1900 Job salesrep clerk salesrep salesrep salesrep salesrep programmer salesrep clerk president engineer salesrep clerk programmer clerk salesrep salesrep clerk engineer SQL Query DML language Job Name Name Smith Jones Whittaker Reilly O Neil Dugan Schmidt lein Scharf Lee Otsaka awasaki Dupre Bleriot Moehr Colucci Amato Fiorella Brown Salary Salary 1500 00 900 00 2500 2500 1500 1650 2500 1500 00 00 00 00 00 00 800 00 7500 1800 000 1800 00 00 800 00 1100 00 950 00 2500 2000 00 00 800 00 2000 00 357 where CLAUSE Because you rarely want to list the entire contents of a specific table you can use the where clause to specify selection criteria Selection criteria are the conditions th
170. Amount Max_Amount Smith 18000 00 16000 00 20200 00 Jones 10800 00 7600 00 11600 00 Whittaker 30000 00 29900 00 35200 00 Reilly 30000 00 29900 00 35200 00 O Neil 18000 00 16000 00 20200 00 Dugan 19800 00 16000 00 20200 00 Schmidt 30000 00 29900 00 35200 00 Klein 18000 00 16000 00 20200 00 Scharf 9600 00 7600 00 11600 00 Lee 90000 00 85600 00 99999 00 Otsaka 21600 00 20200 00 24600 00 Kawasaki 21600 00 20200 00 24600 00 Dupre 9600 00 7600 00 11600 00 Bleriot 13200 00 11900 00 16000 00 Moehr 11400 00 7600 00 11600 00 Colucci 30000 00 29900 00 35200 00 Amato 24000 00 20200 00 24600 00 Fiorella 9600 00 7600 00 11600 00 Brown 24000 00 20200 00 24600 00 Now that you have seen how to find the proper tax bracket you can compute the tax liability for each employee There is no limit to the number of tables you can join so you can list the employee s name location total yearly compensation and tax amount all in The expression to calculate the tax amount is comparatively long so the column the same query heading has been edited to fit the result on the page EXAMPLE sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt tax bill select emp Name Location Salary 12 Base_Tax Salary 12 Commission Marginal_Rate from emp taxes dept where Salary 12 commission between Min_Amount and Max_Amount SQL Query DML language List each employee s name location total yearly compensation and 38
171. CRT terminals Unify DataServer ELS uses the termcap file to control cursor movement screens and some keyboard input If you are on a system that doesn t come with a termcap file you can use the termcap file included with your Unify DataServer ELS release and located in the lib directory Terminal functions Unify DataServer ELS can work with just three standard terminal functions ce cl and cm However Unify DataServer ELS can use some unique functions that are not part of a standard termcap entry You can add these to your termcap to describe additional video characteristics and some keyboard input responses The following table Figure 6 1 is a summary of the Unify DataServer ELS termcap functions and their uses Name Type Pad Description co cd ce cf cl cm ps pe so se us Figure 6 1 Unify termcap Functions 70 num num str str str str str str str str str str Number of columns on terminal default is 80 Number of lines on terminal default is 23 Clear to end of display Clear to end of line Clear unprotected fields Clear all Cursor motion Start protect mode End protect mode Begin stand out mode reverse video or similar End stand out mode Start underline Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Name Type Pad Description ue str End underline sg num Reverse on off is embedded ug num Underline on off is embedded rg num Reverse underline on off
172. CTRL T or TAB when the cursor is on the corresponding screen field ENTER data entry query by forms 339 15 4 Using ENTER for query by forms 340 Query By Forms is the process of locating a record or set of records that you want to inquire modify or delete The following describes how to locate records with Query By Forms As with data entry query by forms is best illustrated by example Refer to the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual for a query by forms example Query by forms works in the following way After you select inquire modify or delete mode at the operation mode prompt on the ENTER screen the following prompt displays Begin search CTRL E Clear field CTRL Z Exit CTRL X This prompt indicates the default control key values for the begin search clear field and exit functions You can change the control keys by editing your termcap file as discussed in section 6 1 The control characters have the following functions CTRLE Starts the search for the selection criteria you have entered If you realize that you have entered the wrong selection criteria and you want to interrupt the search while it is in progress press the RUBOUT or DELETE key CTRL Z Clears the current selection criteria Use this when you have entered selection criteria to a field and decide that you don t want to search for that criteria CTRL X Terminates the current ENTER screen and returns to the Menu Handler
173. Cursor motion Figure 6 3 Required terminal functions Your terminal must be able to use these three operations The functions must all be present in the termcap entry for your terminal type The termcap entries for most terminal types already contain cursor motion cm clear all cl and clear to end of line ce You may also want to set cd clear to end of display if your terminal supports it Unify DataServer ELS has a capability that erases the screen line by line if your terminal does not support cd However if your terminal does support cd you can achieve maximum performance by defining a cd entry in your termcap file Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Optional terminal functions The rest of the terminal functions are optional If your terminal supports protected fields the attributes cf ps pe ws and we it can display screen prompts in low intensity protected mode and data values in high intensity unprotected mode Data can be erased from the screen in a single operation by clearing all unprotected fields Terminals without these capabilities display prompts and data at the same intensity and require each data field to be erased separately When used these five entries must be in a group because field security can t operate properly if you use some of these characteristics individually and leave some of them out If your terminal supports video attributes specify so se us ue rv re rl ru rw and nm
174. DIFY D ELE menu line data entry area The Add modify or delete menus screen form enables you to inquire about add modify and delete menus and menu lines in the data dictionary The screen form has a menu data entry area where you enter the menu name and heading and a menu line data entry area where you add modify and delete menu lines Each menu can have up to 16 lines in the menu line data entry area This is because the data dictionary is limited to 500 menu lines and 16 menu lines per menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The prompts and column headings on the screen form are described as follows INQUIRE A DD MJODIFY DJELETE NAME HEADING amd Miscellaneous utilities The operation prompt You can select one of the following operation modes at this prompt i Inquire mode This lets you view an existing menu a Add mode This lets you create a menu m Modify mode This lets you add modify and delete lines on the menu d Delete mode This lets you delete a menu A unique menu name of up to eight characters It must be different from other menu screen form and program names A string of up to 34 characters that displays on the second line of the screen form when the menu is active and on other menus where this menu is an option The column where you enter an operation command for the current menu line The cursor marks the current menu line You can move the cursor up
175. Database xPhase Phase xPhase tte tape as the temporary file i This prompt gives you the option of using a diskette or tape as a temporary work area Answer y or Y to use a diskette or tape for the temporary work area Reconfigure Database uses the device specified by the BUDEV environment variable Answer n or N to reconfigure on the current disk lf your database is very large or you have little free file space you may not be able to reconfigure without using off line storage The temporary files created by Reconfigure require as much storage space as unify db and file db combined Finishing the reconfigure 1 If you have changed the internal data type of any key field you must run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey Otherwise you will not be able to access the affected table by its primary key 152 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference NOTE If Reconfigure has rebuilt the hash table skip this step See REBUILD HASH INDEX prompt description 2 If you have changed an existing ordinary field to an explicit relationship Reconfigure does not build the necessary pointer lists To rebuild pointer lists you must run Rebuild explicit relationships repoint See section 9 4 3 Reconfigure does not update existing screen forms with changes to the database To update or delete existing screen forms you must use Paint screen forms paint or ChEck Screen Form Coordinates sfmaint Use Create Default Screen F
176. Database maintenance utilities 181 Write database backup budb 182 Read database backup redb 184 Reading the database backup 185 Replaying the transaction log 186 Rebuild the hash table rekey 191 Rebuild explicit relationships repoint 194 From the Menu Handler 195 From the operating system 197 Define database volumes volmnt 200 Using a raw disk partition 202 Using ordinary operating system files 203 Defining database volumes 205 Part Ill System administration 213 Chapter 10 Database security utilities 215 Modify system parameters amp security parmnt 216 Add or modify group privileges gromnt 218 Add or modify individual privileges empmnt 222 Field security maintenance fldsec 227 Process field passwords procpass 230 Contents Using the operating system security 231 Chapter 11 Data Dictionary reports 233 Print database design schlist 234 Print menus Imenu 241 Print screens sfrep 244 Print group privileges Igrp 245 Individual access listing lemp 247 Print help documentation prthdoc 249 Print list of programs lexec 250 Print display database statistics dbstats 252 Display hash table statistics hts 255 Print display B tree statistics btstats 257 Chapter 12 Miscellaneous utilities 259 Transaction logging 260 How transaction logging works 260 Transaction logging status txconf 262 Add modify or delete menus menumnt 266 Describe program to system execmnt 269 Create or
177. Dept_No 10 10 10 20 30 40 60 Job clerk president programmer salesrep salesrep salesrep programmer Arithmetic expressions Arithmetic expressions let you calculate values using the standard arithmetic Repeat the previous query but eliminate the duplicates Again the operators and Arithmetic expressions can be used wherever a field is allowed in select where and having clauses SQL Query DML language 367 368 Both constants and fields can be used in arithmetic expressions which are allowed on fields of types NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE and TIME NOTE The subtraction operator must be surrounded by spaces to distinguish it from the minus sign EXAMPLE List the name job and total salary plus commission for employees in departments 20 30 and 40 These are the sales departments sql gt select Name Job Salary Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No in lt 20 30 40 gt recognized query Name Job Salary Commission Whittaker salesrep 3000 00 Reilly salesrep 4000 00 O Neil salesrep 1650 00 Dugan salesrep 25500 00 Klein salesrep 1500 00 Kawasaki salesrep 2800 00 Colucci salesrep 5500 00 Amato salesrep 2750 00 EXAMPLE List the name salary commission earned and earning potential for all salesreps who aren t earning commissions of at least 100 plus half their monthly salary sql gt select Name Salary Commission Salary 5 100 sql gt
178. Design and Create a New Database selection 2 menu line option heading cllieaeie ADe kl command key set All Unify DataServer ELS menus are similar to this one The top two lines display the active menu s system name mainmenu descriptive heading Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu and the current date and time These top two lines are also the same for all programs and screen forms The Menu Handler 35 36 Centered on the menu is a list of the options that you can select using this menu These options are listed as menu lines A menu line consists of the option s descriptive heading preceded by a line number This number is also Known as the selection number Unify DataServer ELS allows up to 16 menu lines per menu The current menu selection is marked by the menu pointer The menu pointer is represented on the screen by either reverse video text or an asterisk The type of menu pointer used on your screen depends on your terminal s capabilities and its termcap entries see Termcap Near the bottom of the screen is the selection prompt SELECTION You enter commands or selection numbers here to indicate your choice At the bottom of the menu screen is the Menu Handler command key line This line displays the Menu Handler commands Each command is represented as a pair of items the command key and the actual command name This pair is known as a command key set The command key is a keystroke that ex
179. Developer s Reference compound expression is true if either simple expression is true It is false if both simple expressions are false group by CLAUSE group by field err table field The group by clause lets you sort records into groups so you can apply an aggregate function to each group Using a group by without an aggregate function is meaningless The group by clause implies that each field or expression in the select clause has the same value for each record in that group If you list fields or expressions that don t have the same value for every record in the group the query result is not very meaningful For example if you select employee name and group by department number the name that displays isn t necessarily the only employee name in the department Arguments field The name of a field in one of the tables listed in the from clause table field The name of a field preceded by the name of the table that contains the field If the table has been assigned a label or temporary name in the from clause the label can be used in place of the table name You must qualify a field in this way when you use a field name that occurs in two or more different tables listed in the from clause Without this qualification it is not clear which table the field is from SQL Query DML language 435 having CLAUSE 436 having field ONS 3 table fiela 7 poe an table field or
180. EFSIZE environment variable value as outlined below e Unify DataServer ELS calculates an attach address that is comfortably outside the process data space In this case shared memory segments are attached relative to the process size e If Unify DataServer ELS cannot attach at the calculated attach address it steps down through memory in even steps until it can attach NOTE Because it steps down in even decrements Unify DataServer ELS attaches at the original default if it can find no other attach address Unify DataServer ELS looks in the DEFSIZE environment variable for a default process size to use in calculating the attach address The default value for DEFSIZE is 1MB You can set DEFSIZE to another multiple of 1MB if you don t want Unify DataServer ELS to use 1MB For more information on DEFSIZE see the DEFSIZE description earlier in chapter 5 When NSEGS is set to 1 Unify DataServer ELS uses the default system attach address Set NSEGS to 1 only if the system provides the same default address for all processes attaching to a segment Check the hardware documentation for your computer to determine whether a system default address must be used The page length for LST and RPT reports The default value is 66 This value is also used for the following data dictionary and database reports Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference PATH PATH SEPARATOR SHMID SHMMAX Environment variables Print Datab
181. Explanation Correction This message displays after a file volume definition is completed when the volume definition is type F for a file volume but the block device name is not a regular ordinary file Change the block device name to a valid regular file name gt gt gt The volume type F needs file db or DBNAME as its block device Explanation This message displays after a volume definition is completed for a root volume of type F file volume if the block device name is neither file db nor the name specified in the environment variable DBNAME Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction Redefine the root file volume The program should fill in the block device name as file db or as the name specified in DBNAME if the environment variable is set gt gt gt The write to FNDEFLD failed errno nnn Explanation RPT cannot write to the FNDFLD program This error message usually accompanies other error messages Correction Correct all other errors found Then make sure the UNIFY environment variable is set correctly and that there is correct write permission on the directory If this is the only message and the problem persists contact Unify Corporation gt gt gt The xxxx table has overflowed Explanation The table xxxx has exceeded its maximum number of elements Correction Reduce the number of elements of type xxxx in the script or increase the size of the table using the appropriat
182. Explanation The current SQL query contains a syntax error A message detailing the error follows this message Unify DataServer ELS messages 643 644 gt gt gt syntax error Explanation The structure of an RPT command is invalid This error message is followed by more debugging information gt gt gt Table exists Explanation You are trying to add a table with the same name as an existing table All table names must be unique Correction Try entering another name gt gt gt Table has no fields Explanation The dbcreate program cannot create a screen for tables that don t have fields gt gt gt Table is referenced Explanation You are trying to delete a table from a database that has one or more of its fields referenced by other tables fields Correction Remove all references to this table before trying to delete this table gt gt gt Table limit exceeded This program will exit Explanation This is an internal system error There can only be 256 tables per database You have exceeded this limit Correction To add more tables you must delete some existing ones gt gt gt Table limit will be exceeded Explanation There can be only 256 tables per database If you add another table you will exceed this limit Correction To add more tables you must delete some existing ones Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Table xxxx does not have a key The table must have a key
183. Francis Beaman Gilbert David Beezley Hanford Diane Bernmass Darold Holman Xavier Best Judith Jerome Karl Blender Carsten 8662 Jasper Clive Bombani Marco orrison Jolene Figure 7 13 Simple telephone directory A binary search starts by dividing the list of names in the directory into two halves each containing the same number of names Suppose that the second half begins with the name North David as shown in Figure 7 14 The first decision in the binary search process is whether DuPres occurs after North The answer is no it must occur before Therefore the second half of the directory can be eliminated and the Introduction to database design 111 search restricted to the first half Aa Su Ling Aaron Tilman Abbanth Shirlene Abbott Abner Abbott Alfred Adier Henry Anderson Sue First half of Arke William phone book Baker Beaman Beezley Bernmass Darold Best Judith Blender Carsten Bombani Marco 8662 Southby Branston Sullens Mitch Thomasson Bert Urson Peter Victor Yolanda Vernon Vorhees Connie Watson Kevin Williams Manny Williams Zoe Wills Martha Wilson Mort Wilson Belinda Womak Brian Yeager Hank Yergens Fred Figure 7 14 Begin binary search of phone book Last half of phone book The divide and search process is repeated for the remaining directory names as shown in Figure
184. If the database is made up of raw files the operating system can transfer raw file blocks directly into a user program s data space The program can specify a buffer larger than the standard operating system buffer The default buffer size is 2048 bytes Because raw file disk blocks are physically adjacent a single disk read can return several blocks of data Buffered sequential access can be used for files that are not raw Disk blocks tend to be scattered in non raw files so you must wait between each read for the disk head to find the correct track and then for the correct block to rotate under the head Using a raw file eliminates these delays The major advantages of buffered sequential access are 1 Buffered sequential access had no disk storage overhead 2 If used with raw files a buffered scan is much faster than an unbuffered scan for read only transaction For more information on raw data file see the File subsection in chapter 4 and the define Database Volumes subsection in chapter 9 3 If you must read every record or most records in a table and order is not important a buffered scan is the fastest method The major disadvantages of buffered sequential access are 116 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Introduction to database design It looks at every record in the table If you are only interested in a few of the records there is no need to read all of them sequentially The records are returned in a sy
185. If you want to Then Change a Table s 1 If no data has been entered in this table skip to step 2 If data has Name been entered to this table dump data to an external file See Dumping Data to External Files in section 16 3 Delete the table definition 3 Add the new table definition You can use the table information in the Data Dictionary Report to re enter the original table and field definitions 4 Run Reconfigure Database scom 5 If no data has been entered in this table you are finished If data has been entered to this table reload the external file data In the new table See Loading Data From External Files in section 16 3 or Database Load in section 12 6 N Add a Table 1 At the Table Entry screen form use add mode to enter the new table definition If a Table Exists Table can t have field names Field Exists or Fields can t have table names message appears a Choose another name or b If you recently deleted a table or field name you want to use run Reconfigure Database scom and try again 2 At the Field Entry screen form enter the new field definitions 3 Run Reconfigure Database scom Delete a Table 1 At the Table Entry screen form use delete mode to delete the table entry 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Figure 8 5 Allowable Modifications to TABLE Entry EXPECTED Changing the expected record count affects the size of the hash table Consequently it also affects the size of t
186. It defaults to su To change the password enter any string of up to four characters PASSWORD The super user password It defaults to su To change the password enter any string of up to eight characters The string does not display as you enter it so the program asks you to re enter the password to confirm the spelling The program encrypts the password before storing it in the data dictionary ENTRY POINT The name of the menu the super user sees after logging in Users who don t have group or individual entry points assigned also see this menu after login SYSTEM HEADING A string of up to 50 characters that displays at the center of the first line on each screen form and menu in the application system MONTH MNEMONICS A 36 character string that contains three characters for each month of the year The string is used in the date that displays in the upper right corner of each screen form and menu in the application system LOGINFLAG T F A flag that controls whether a login screen displays when a user starts Unify DataServer ELS The default mode is F false for no login screen When the screen displays for this program the cursor is at the SUPER USER ID prompt Press RETURN to move the cursor down the screen form or CTRL U to move it up To return to the menu press CTRL U at the first prompt Database security utilities 217 10 2 Add or modify group privileges grpmnt This program enables you to add modify and delete
187. Key Field 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to remove the key indicator from the Key column 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom 3 Run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to add the key indicator to the Key column Note A table can only have one key indicator before adding a new one 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom 3 Run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey 1 See Add a Field in the Field section Be sure to place a key indicator in the Key column 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to remove a field reference from the REF column 2 See Delete a Field in the Field section Figure 8 9 Allowable modifications to key entry REF A reference is used to relate a field of one table to the key of another table If you want to Add a Reference Then 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to add a field Delete a Reference reference to the REF column 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom 3 Refer to Rebuilding Explicit Relationships in section 9 4 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to remove a field reference from the REF column 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Figure 8 10 Allowable modifications to REF entry TYPE A Field Data Type describes how data for a particular field is displayed Type also defines how the field is stored internally The valid data types are AMOUNT FLOAT NUMERIC DA
188. LI Programmer s Manual The repoint err file may also contain the following message nnn child records with null reference field values and no matching parent record This message lets you know that some child records have default or null values for the referencing field From the operating system From the operating system shell you can rebuild explicit relationships by running the REPOINT executable This makes it possible for you to use a command script executed by cron to run REPOINT during DBMS down time like in the middle of the night or on the weekend To rebuild all explicit relationships you can run REPOINT from the shell using the following command REPOINT a where a tells REPOINT to rebuild the pointer lists for all the explicit relationships in the database See the next subsection if you want to rebuild only selected explicit relationships Do not omit the a argument If you omit the a REPOINT assumes it is being run from the Menu Handler and displays the screen shown in section 9 4 Database maintenance utilities 197 As REPOINT rebuilds each explicit relationship s pointer list it sends the name of the current relationship s referencing field to the standard output device If REPOINT cannot relink all of the records it displays the following message after the field names WARNING All the records were not relinked You must manually relink them following the instructions given in the file re
189. LS system lib directory If it is not set to the right directory or if it is set to null Unify DataServer ELS cannot locate the system q files the system help files or the system libraries The temporary directory used by Unify DataServer ELS The default value for UNIFYTMP is the directory tmp You can reset the temporary directory to any existing directory on your system provided the following e The directory path name begins with root e The directory path name does not exceed 17 characters e The temporary directory must also have read write and execute permission for all users The following is an example of a UNIFYTMP setting UNIFYTMP usr mytmp The Unify DataServer ELS user s access level for the current program The access level is part of the Unify DataServer ELS security system and indicates the user s access level for the current program Its value Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference is a string of length 2 00 to 15 This value is defined in Add or Modify Individual Privileges UUID The ID of the current Unify DataServer ELS user as defined in Add or Modify Individual Privileges This variable is set by the Menu Handler so user programs can reference it VOLPATH The complete path name for your database volumes When VOLPATH is not set all your database volumes are assumed to be in the current directory or in DBPATH if DBPATH is set NOTE Only set the VOLPATH environment variable when data
190. NSETCL RPTNIF RPTNAG RPTNCALL RPTNARGS RPTPBUFSIZ RPTINBUFSZ Default value 400 150 250 256 125 256 15 100 25 100 50 so so 100 1024 1536 Figure 17 29 RPT tables and environment variables RPT Report processor 549 550 Setting RPT environment variables To set an RPT environment variable use the following syntax Using the C shell csh setenv variable value Using the Bourne Shell variable value export variable For example to set the Commands table to 300 and the Input Items table to 40 using the Bourne shell enter the following RP TNCOM 300 RPTNITM 40 export RPTNCOM RPTNITM After you have set these environment variables compile the RPT script Again The changes you have made to the Commands table and the Input Items table display at the beginning of the RPT Table Usage Information report This report now displays as follows RPT RPTNCOM set to 300 RPT RPTNITM set to 40 RPT Report Processor Copyright Unify Corpoation 1987 No syntax errors were found in the report script RPT TABLE USAGE INFORMATION Table Name Used Maximum Expression n 400 Nodes Variable n 150 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference RPT RPTNCOM set to 300 RPT RPTNITM set to 40 RPT Report Processor Copyright Unify Corpoation 1987 No syntax errors were found in the report script RPT TABLE USAGE INFORMATION Table Name Used Maximum Constant n 250 Com
191. Paint screen forms option the following screen displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Paint Screen Forms I INQUIRE You can inquire about add modify and delete screen forms prompts and screen fields The blank area from lines 3 to 22 is the editing area This is where you can Screen form development tools 293 design your own screen form The operation prompt displays at the bottom of the screen INQUIRE A DD MJODIFY DJELETE Selecting any operation mode displays the current mode in the top left corner of the screen and replaces the mode prompt with the prompt SCREEN This is where you enter the name of the screen form you want to access Pressing CTRL U at the SCREEN prompt erases the screen and redisplays the mode prompt Pressing CTRL U at the operation prompt returns you to the Menu Handler NOTE If you use the PAINT exit command key changes you have made are not saved The unicap PAINT command keys are described near the end of this chapter The operation modes are described as follows 294 Inquire mode This lets you see the design of an existing screen form but not modify it When you finish viewing the screen press RETURN to erase the screen and redisplay the SCREEN prompt Add mode This lets you add new screen forms to the data dictionary and add modify and delete prompts and screen fields When you select a a blank screen form displays and the cursor waits at the thi
192. QL examples of every possible kind of query cannot be demonstrated Therefore refer to SQL Reference chapter 16 5 fora complete explanation of formal query syntax Help features Unify DataServer ELS SQL has three levels of help to make learning and using SQL easier e Help about the general syntax of SQL e Help about any specific keyword or keyword clause e Help about the valid table and field names for the database you are using To get help about the general syntax of SQL enter sql gt help at the SQL prompt SQL then lists the valid keywords about which you can obtain more information For more information about a specific keyword enter help followed by the keyword For example to find out more about the select clause enter sql gt help select at the SQL prompt SQL displays an explanation of how to use the select clause SQL Query DML language 353 354 Information is also available about the tables and fields of the database you are working with To see a list of the valid short table names in the current database enter sql gt tables at the SQL prompt SQL displays the table names you can use with the from clause Similarly to find out the field access names for any table enter fields followed by the name of the table For example to list the fields in the emp table enter sql gt fields emp at the SQL prompt SQL displays the field access names for this table The following examples show the short ta
193. RIC FLOAT AMOUNT Date field data types DATE LDATE Text field data types STRING TEXT Figure A 2 Compatible field data types and categories You can change field data types in a category but never outside it The examples of compatible data type conversions are AMOUNT to NUMERIC NUMERIC to FLOAT DATE to LDATE or STRING to TEXT However AMOUNT to DATE or STRING to FLOAT are not compatible data type conversions Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference If you change the data type from one format to an incompatible format the data is misinterpreted converted and stored by the system incorrectly Consequently the data for this field is damaged and unreadable Therefore to avoid loss of data when changing a field data type or display length consider the following rules 1 Only increase the field display length For example NUMERIC gt NUMERIC 4 AMOUNT 5 gt AMOUNT 7 STRING 20 gt STRING 50 2 Never decrease the internal length For example NUMERIC 7 long gt NUMERIC 3 short AMOUNT 10 double gt AMOUNT 7 long 3 Only change a field data type to a compatible data type For example DATE gt LDATE NUMERIC gt AMOUNT NUMERIC gt FLOAT AMOUNT gt FLOAT STRING gt TEXT The following outline is a guide to changing field data types and lengths Safe changes mean no data loss should occur Unsafe changes can cause damage to data Refer to the table in figure A 1 when using the followin
194. SQL screens can be placed on menus the same as executables programs and ENTER screens SQL Query DML language 413 Specifying parameters in SQL scripts 414 The SQL screen driver controls the SQL screen The screen driver displays the screen form and lets you enter data values for each screen field These data values will be used in the SQL script that produces the input file for the report After you indicate that the values are acceptable the SQL Report Options screen lets you specify the report format where to send the output and whether you want to wait for the results or continue working while the report runs An SQL screen lets you specify values to be substituted in SQL and RPT scripts at run time You do this by placing parameters in the scripts The values you enter on the SQL screen are then substituted for the parameters when the script is run A parameter is a place holder in the form n where n is a number from 1 through the number of parameters you want the user to supply You can place them throughout the text of a script The script itself may be an ordinary ASCII file and registered with a screen form The value entered for the first screen field is substituted for 1 the second for 2 and so on In general parameters in SQL scripts are used in where and having clauses to indicate what values to select For example to select records based on a user supplied date range you can use a where clause similar to the
195. SZ is changed to 0 If you answer Nand mmm is an acceptable value Write Database Backup displays the following prompt Change the number of blocks to mmm If you answer Y to this prompt the value of BUTAPESZ is changed to the number of blocks that actually fit on the backup volume gt gt gt Do you want to just try the replay program again Explanation An error occurred while replaying the transaction log This can indicate that the transaction log is bad and a replay cannot be made Correction If you want to try to rerun it without changes respond with a Y or y gt gt gt Do you want to read in a backup again Explanation An error occurred while reading the database backup file Correction If you want to try to read it in again respond with Y or y gt gt gt Duplicate xxxx statement Explanation A duplicate xxxx FYI ERROR or HELP statement is in a single field section Correction Remove one of the duplicate statements gt gt gt Duplicate field statement for xxxx field name Explanation The table section has two field statements for the same field name Correction Remove one of the duplicate field statements gt gt gt Duplicate value for B tree nnn record rrr Explanation The table being loaded has a no duplicates B tree index AND record number rrr in the input file contains a duplicate value for this B tree Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference index DBLOAD neither adds the recor
196. Section in unicap File All the command names can be associated with command keys of your choice As an example consider the following line in the unicap file that defines the command key to exit Unify DataServer ELS exit d The command name appears on the left exit while the command key appears on the right d CTRL D If you want to exit when you press CTRL W instead you change d to w The Menu Handler 43 44 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 4 Files and directories All database information and programs used in Unify DataServer ELS are stored in files Unify DataServer ELS identifies files by their file names File names usually have specific suffixes that tell Unify DataServer ELS what kind of information the files contain For example a q suffix tells Unify DataServer ELS that the file is a screen form file File names and suffixes are explained in below in Files To use files Unify DataServer ELS not only needs to know what kind of information the files contain but also where the files are located Unify DataServer ELS usually expects to find files in specific directories For example it looks for database help documentation in the hdoc directory below the user s root directory Directories explains the Unify DataServer ELS directory system 45 4 1 Files Unify DataServer ELS uses file naming conventions to identify the different kinds of files necessary to operate an applicatio
197. Soc_Sec_123 SSN SSN4S NUMERIC 2 Soc_Sec_45 SSN SSN6789 NUMERIC 4 Soc_Sec_6789 SSN Figure 7 2 Example COMB field Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 7 2 Refining the database design Organize your preliminary list of fields into tables Each table should contain fields that deal with a single subject such as inventory items or employees For each table determine which field or fields should be used as the primary key if a primary key is needed The primary key is the smallest set of fields that uniquely identifies one record in the table For example suppose you have a preliminary design for a warehouse application The warehouse stocks a number of items for sale each made by a particular manufacturer For each manufacturer you must know its ID number city and shipping status For each item you must know its manufacturer serial number and selling price Your preliminary design contains a table with the following fields manfitem manf_ID The ID number of the manufacturer city The city where the manufacturer is located status The relative ease of getting a shipment from a manufacturer ser_no The serial number of the item for sale price The price charged for the item Design 1 In Design 1 each item has only one manufacturer but each manufacturer can make several items so you might expect manf_ID to be the better choice for a primary key However in Design 1 manf_ID cannot be a primary key because it doesn t uni
198. TABLE FIELD REF TYPE LENGTH LONG NAME MANF 10 manufacturer mano NUMERIC 4 Manufacturer_ID mname STRING 35 Name madd STRING 30 Address mcity STRING 20 City Figure 11 1 Database design report Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 35 PAGE 1 DATA DICATIONARY REPORT Schema Listing TABLE FIELD REF TYPE LENGTH LONG NAME mstate STRING 2 State mzip STRING 5 Zip_Code model 50 model mokey COMB Model_Key monum NUMERIC 7 Model_Number momano mono NUMERIC 4 Manufacturer_ID mdes STRING 30 Description item 100 inventory_item sno NUMERIC 9 Serial_Number imodel mokey COMB Model_Key iad DATE Acquisition_Date isal AMOUNT 5 Sales_Price iorder onum NUMERIC 9 Order_Number ipamt AMOUNT 5 Purchase_Price customer 10 customer cnum NUMERIC 5 Customer_Number cname STRING 30 Name caddr STRING 30 Address ccity STRING 20 City cstate STRING 2 State czip STRING 5 Zip_Code cphone STRING 14 Phone_Number orders 100 order Figure 11 1 Database design report Data Dictionary reports 235 DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 35 PAGE 1 DATA DICATIONARY REPORT Schema Listing TABLE FIELD REF TYPE LENGTH LONG NAME onum NUMERIC 9 Order_Number odate DATE Date_Ordered ocust cnum NUMERIC 5 Customer_Number Figure 11 1 Database design report The column headings on the Schema Listing Report are described as follows
199. TE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT BINARY and COMB For more information on Database Field Types see chapter 7 Introduction to Database Design Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Changing a field data type can damage your data Before making any changes to field data type read Field and Internal Data Types in Appendix A Figure 8 11 Allowable Modifications to TYPE Entry If you want to Then Change a Field s Data Type 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to change the data type in the TYPE column If this field is a data type COMB you must first remove the component field relationships to the COMB field or delete the component fields altogether To change a COMB field relationship see the COMB FIELD section 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom 3 If this is a key or COMB key compnent run REBUILD the Hash Table rekey Figure 8 11 Allowable modification to TYPE entry LENGTH LENGTH controls the display length and internal storage size for the field You can change the display lengths for the following types of fields NUMERIC AMOUNT FLOAT STRING and TEXT Changing a display length for a field can damage your data Before making any changes to field lengths read Field and Internal Data Types in Appendix A If you want to Then Change a Field s Display 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to change the filed s Length display length in the LEN column 2 Run Reconfigu
200. The 0 command key can only be used with the PAINT command co10 go to column 0 Correction Change the PAINT command from 0 to another command key gt gt gt Do not use the same key for different Menu Handier commands Explanation A duplicate command key is used in the menu section of unicap Note the command table is displayed indicating the conflicting command names Correction Try modifying the unicap file gt gt gt Do not use the same key for different paint commands Explanation Each PAINT command definition must have unique command keys Correction Modify your unicap file to eliminate any duplicate command keys in the PAINT section gt gt gt Do you really want to exit YJes or N o Explanation You have entered the exit command Leaving PAINT this way does not allow you to save the current screen form Correction Answer y yes or n no gt gt gt Do you want to change the number of blocks per volume from nnn Explanation If the number of blocks that can be written on a tape or diskette is less than specified in BUTAPESZ this lets you change the effective value of the BUTAPESZ environment variable to the correct number of blocks Correction If you enter Y or y to change the number of blocks per volume Write Database Backup displays another prompt Change the number of blocks to 0 whatever will fit Unify DataServer ELS messages 613 614 If you answer Y the effective value of BUTAPE
201. The diagram in Figure 9 4 illustrates how a system with two disks can be configured using Unify DataServer ELS with device volumes DISK 1 DEVICE NAMES Root File System dev rp0 dev rrp0 j dev rp1 Swap Device Ideu pi Unify volume 0 dev rp3 offset 0 devrrp2 file Unify volume1 dev rp3 system offset 20000 dev rrp3 DISK 2 DEVICE NAMES Unify volume 2 dev rp8 offset 0 entire disk dev rrp8 Figure 9 4 Device volumes on two disks On the first disk device rp0 contains the root file system Device rp1 contains the swap area Device rp2 holds the root volume volume 0 of the Unify DataServer ELS database Unify DataServer ELS uses both the block device dev rp2 and the character device entries dev rrp2 The first part of device rp3 contains a file system It was created by running mkfs with the appropriate size parameter The second part of the device holds volume of the Unify DataServer ELS database The entire second disk dev rp8 is Unify DataServer ELS volume 2 of the Unify DataServer ELS database Unify DataServer ELS volume 2 contains the remainder of the Unify DataServer ELS database There can be any number of Unify DataServer ELS databases on a given computer system Some databases can be on raw devices and others in ordinary operating system files Use Define database Volumes to assign the devices to volumes of a Unify DataServer ELS database You should assign devices so coll
202. This command sets the width of the left margin number refers to the number of columns to be left blank in the left margin of each page The default left margin number is 2 length SYNTAX length number USE This command specifies the length of a report page number indicates the number of print lines on one page including top and bottom margins The default length number is 66 This assumes you are using line printer paper separator 522 SYNTAX separator character Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference USE This command describes the field separator character in the input file Separators are necessary to indicate the end of one field and the start of another The default separator is the vertical bar used by both RPT and SQL character can be any single character including nonprinting control characters sort SYNTAX sort expr desc expr desc USE This command determines the report output order If the sort command is not used the output is in no particular order By default sort arranges the output in ascending order by the specified expressions Each expression followed by desc is arranged in descending order by the sort The sort command can only appear once in a script The expressions listed first from left to right are major sort expressions The expressions listed last are minor sort expressions Sorting on minor expressions doesn t change the order of the major sort expressions Minor sort e
203. Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 1987 2000 2003 Unify Corporation All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written consent of Unify Corporation Unify Corporation makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents of this document and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Unify Corporation reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in its content without being obligated to notify any person of such revisions or changes The Software described in this document is furnished under a Software License Agreement The Software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license agreement It is against the law to copy the Software on tape disk or any other medium for any purpose other than that described in the license agreement The Unify Corporation Technical Publications Department values and appreciates any comments you may have concerning our products or this document Please address comments to Product Manager Unify Corporation 3927 Lennane Drive Sacramento CA 95834 1922 800 24 UNIFY e 916 928 6400 FAX 916 928 6401
204. Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference TABLE FIELD REF orders order_no order_dt order_cn cust_no where orders is the child table containing the reference field order_cn is the reference field and cust_no is the key field in the related table parent Figure 9 2 Table and fields from data dictionary report 3 Access the operating system shell by entering sh at the selection prompt See Running Operating System Commands from Unify DataServer ELS in chapter 2 4 Type the following command at the shell prompt using the unique short field names only you cannot use long field names REPOINT order_cn As REPOINT runs it prints the name of the current relationship s referencing field If REPOINT cannot relink all of the records it displays the following message after the field names WARNING All the records were not relinked You must manually relink them following the instructions given in the file repoint err You can give REPOINT a list of reference field names REPOINT rebuilds the relationship pointers for each field in the list and prints the field s name as it is being processed To run REPOINT for a list of reference field names use the following command line format REPOINT ref_field1 ref_field2 ref_field3 where ref_field1 ref_field2 and ref_field3 are the name of referencing fields Database maintenance utilities 199 9 5 Define database volumes volmnt Unify DataSer
205. Whittaker salesrep 2500 00 500 00 Total 5500 00 650 00 70 Finance Name Job Salary Commission Fiorella clerk sss 800 00 0 00 Moehr clerk 950 00 0 00 Total 1750 00 0 00 Grand Total 36600 00 8800 00 lt after report Figure 17 2 Example report The input file consists of a single line for each employee in the company Each line contains fields for the department number department name employee name job title salary and commission The report script that specifies the format of the output is described a step at a time in Basic Report Examples in this chapter Notice that the report is sorted by department number and employee name Each field you sort by is called a sort key An RPT sort key can be a simple database field or a complex expression composed of fields constants variables arithmetic operators and functions Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Sorting has two purposes 1 To arrange items with different sort keys in ascending or descending order e g employees with different names 2 To group items with the same sort key e g all employees in department 10 When the value of a sort key changes a control break occurs The control break separates groups of items with different sort keys For example when the employee department number changes from department 10 to department 20 a control break occurs RPT lets you specify printing and processing actions both before and after the control breaks that sepa
206. a engineer 1800 00 Dupre clerk 800 00 Bleriot programmer 1100 00 Moehr clerk 950 00 Fiorella clerk 800 00 SQL Query DML language 363 Set Inclusion Notation 364 In many queries you may want to compare a field to a list of values not just a single value For example suppose you want to select all the employees in departments 10 20 30 and 40 With the standard operators this becomes a sequence of equalities connected by ors such as the following Dept_No 10 or Dept_No 20 or Dept_No 30 As with ranges this can be awkward SQL has a set inclusion notation to make this kind of query easier To use set inclusion notation enclose a series of values separated by commas in angle brackets lt gt EXAMPLE List the name job and department number for employees in departments 20 30 and 40 sql gt select Name Job Dept_No sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No in lt 20 30 40 gt recognized query Name Job Dept_No Whittaker salesrep 20 Reilly salesrep 30 O Neil salesrep 20 Dugan salesrep 40 Klein salesrep 20 Kawasaki salesrep 30 Colucci salesrep 40 Amato salesrep 40 Set inclusion notation can also be used to group and expressions together This is useful if you want to select based on a combination of expressions Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For example you can select all clerks in department 10 and all programmers in department 60 Using standard notation this is e
207. a field preceded by the name of the table that contains the field If the table has been assigned a label or temporary name in the from clause then the label can be used in place of the table name You must precede a field name by a table name this way when you use a field name contained in two or more tables listed in the from clause Without this qualification it is not clear which table the field is from constant A constant value of type NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT LDATE TIME or STRING The type of constant depends on the type of field or expression compared with the constant STRING constants are enclosed in single quotes to distinguish them from field names expr An arithmetic expression composed of fields and constants connected by the operators and Parentheses can be used to change the order in which the operations are performed select This indicates that a query block can be used in this part of the clause lt constant gt This indicates that a constant tuple or literal tuple can be used instead of a single value when comparing for equality with the left side of a Boolean expression A literal tuple is a list of constants separated by commas and enclosed in angle brackets This kind of expression can be used as follows field is in lt c1 c2 c3 gt This is equivalent to the more cumbersome expression field c1 or field c2 or field c3 lt constant gt This indicates that a list of lit
208. a new empty database file with lower EXPECTED numbers remove file db and file dbr You can then enter the desired EXPECTED number gt gt gt The open on intermediate file xxxx failed Explanation RPT cannot open the file xxxx that it created previously Make sure the file still exists it may have been removed by another user gt gt gt The open on tag file xxxx failed Explanation RPT cannot open the tag file that it created previously Make sure the file still exists it may have been removed by another user gt gt gt The referred to sort expression is xxxx Explanation The sort expression referred to in the previous error message is listed as xxxx This message helps you locate the previous message s error in the report script 652 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt The size or type of the default is invalid for this field Explanation You are using another field s value as the default in the specified field statement but the data types or sizes of the two fields do not match Correction Make sure the field name is spelled correctly gt gt gt The standard Unify DataServer ELS menu mainmenu does not exist The menu usermenu will not be created for the data entry screens Explanation The Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu cannot be found in the data dictionary It may have been removed Correction Use Add Modify or Delete Menus to check for the Main Menu and add the menu back if nece
209. a value for a field and no record in the parent referenced table xxxx has this value The string xxxx is the long name of the table Correction Only enter values for this field that match existing values for its referenced field because of the fields explicit relationship gt gt gt on or about line nnn Explanation This message is sent to the standard error output when a syntax error is detected It indicates approximately where the syntax error occurs in the query or report script 636 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Only nnn blocks read from backup media Continue Explanation This message displays when the program cannot read the number of blocks specified in BUTAPESZ If you enter Y or y to continue Read Database Backup will prompt you to mount the next backup tape or diskette gt gt gt Only nnn blocks written to backup media Continue Explanation This message displays when Write Database Backup is unable to read the number of blocks specified in BUTAPESZ Correction To continue enter Y or y and the program will prompt you to mount the next backup volume gt gt gt Only date field types are valid for the today default Explanation The keyword today cannot be used in this field statement because the current field is not of type DATE or LDATE gt gt gt Only numeric field types length 5 9 are valid for the unique default Explanation The keyword unique cannot
210. abase Maintenance menu The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Define Database Volumes CHARACTE DEVICE data entry area Each line in the data entry area represents one volume of the database The prompts on this screen form are as follows Database maintenance utilities 205 206 AMD NAME RT TYP The current mode A dd M odify or D elete To add a volume move the cursor to an empty line and enter an a in this column To modify a volume move the cursor to the line for that volume and enter an m To delete a volume move the cursor to the line for that volume and enter a d To move to the next line press RETURN To move to the previous line press CRTL U Press RETURN on the last line to move to the first line Press CRTL U on the first line to exit the program NOTE Once you have defined a volume you cannot exit the program unless one volume is defined as the root or all volumes are deleted A unique four character name for the volume This name is used to order the volumes alphabetically on the screen and in the database header The order volumes appear on the screen is the order they are used to store data The volume name is also used to report errors An x in this column marks this as the root volume The root volume contains the database header which includes the hash table and database parameters You must define a root volume an
211. able This is the field whose attributes are being described The field cannot be a COMB type environment variable The name of any environment variable The variable must be set and its value exported table An optional name of the table that contains field2 if field2 is not in the current table field2 The access name usually the long name of a database field If this name is not preceded by a table name it is assumed to be in the current table This lets you specify a default value from another database field NOTE If field is from a different table a record in that table must be current when this record is added Otherwise it won t be possible to get the field value This is most useful when used with the Host Language Interface string A sequence of printable characters Strings used as default values are stored literally in the field You can use the single quote character ina string if you precede the quote character by a backslash character This also applies to the backslash character itself Database design utilities 169 When you define the legal values for a string field you can use Regular Expression Notation described under Field Section Statements in this section 8 6 constant A fixed value of type NUMERIC DATE LDATE TIME AMOUNT or FLOAT The data type of the constant must match the data type of the current field unique This sets the default value of the field to the current record number Use
212. able contains the department number name and location The taxes table contains a personal income tax schedule including the minimum and maximum compensation amounts the base tax and the marginal tax rate on income above the minimum amount Department listing example The following subsection introduces a simple report script and develops it in two steps to produce an example report similar to the previous Example Report Figures RPT Report processor 459 460 17 4 17 5 and 17 6 show three versions of the report from simplest to most elaborate Smith Jones Whittaker Reilly O Neil Dugan Schmidt Klein Scharf Lee Otsaka Kawasaki Dupre Bleriot Moehr Colucci Amato Fiorella Brown sapesrep clerk salesrep salesrep salesrep salesrep programmer salesrep clerk president engineer salesrep clerk programmer clerk salesrep salesrep clerk engineer Figure 17 4 Department Listing 1 1500 00 900 00 2500 00 2500 00 1500 00 1650 00 2500 00 1500 00 800 00 7500 00 1800 00 1800 00 800 00 1100 00 950 00 2500 00 2000 00 800 00 2000 00 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 1000 00 0 00 500 00 1500 00 150 00 900 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1000 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 3000 00 750 00 0 00 0 00 Employee Report Name Job Salary Commission Smith salesrep 18 000 00 1 000 00 Jones clerk 10 800 00 0 00 Whittaker salesrep 30 000 00 500 00 Reilly salesrep 30 000 00
213. able size is based on the Expected number of records Unify DataServer ELS s search performance is optimized when the hash table is no more than half full hash table size is twice the Expected number of records entered Therefore changing the Expected number of records to reflect a specific number of records can impact performance when hash table entries exceed 50 of total hash table size Using the previous example where the Expected number of records is 600 if you wanted your application database to have storage space for only 600 records you would use the equation 60 of 600 Actual Records 360 New Expected Number of Records You would then enter 360 as the Expected number of records Using the formula in Figure C 1 you would calculate the number of records per data segment as follows 360 60 records per data segment 6 This allocates 6 segments of 60 records each or 360 records plus 4 more segments of 60 records each or 240 records totaling 600 actual records NOTE If the nearest prime number of half of the Expected number of records is less than 100 then Unify DataServer ELS sets the hash table size to 100 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Reconfiguring the master data dictionary The following are steps for reconfiguring the master data dictionary After this procedure the master and application data dictionaries will be in sync Step1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 mainmenu Backup the Uni
214. about database volumes see Define Database Volumes section 9 5 The reconfigure process has four steps 1 Reconfigure locks out all database updates 2 Reconfigure copies the data dictionary Then if a fatal error occurs such as a disk or tape read write error the dictionary can be reset to its original state 3 Reconfigure compiles the database design and generates tables to translate records from the old format to the new 4 Reconfigure writes the database to a temporary file then reads the database back in its new format Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For reconfigure error messages see the end of this chapter Preparing to reconfigure 1 Make sure no one else uses this database during the reconfigure process This includes querying updating or adding records to the database or changing the data dictionary Back up the database See section 9 1 Write Database Backup If the database file is too large to reconfigure on the current disk Reconfigure Database will give you the option of using a diskette or tape as a temporary work area Reconfigure Database uses the device specified by the BUDEV environment variable If you use this option make sure the BUDEV environment variable is set For more information about setting the BUDEV environment variable see chapter 5 Reconfigure limits the actual number of fields and relationships to 300 per table If this number is exceeded Reconfigure stops process
215. ach screen field consists of a screen field name as well as a database field name a type and a length The database field name refers to a database field to input or display on the screen form The same database field can appear more than once with different screen field names This is an optional characteristic of a screen field The type and length refer to the data type and display length of the screen field If you do not enter a database field name you can enter a type and length for the screen field However if you enter a database field name the type and length of the screen field are the same as the type and length for the database field These are optional characteristics of a screen field To understand the differences between screen fields and database fields work with your own screen form The easiest way to start is to use Create Default Screen Form which designs basic forms for you automatically When you want to change a default form or design the form yourself you can use Paint Screen Forms or Check Screen Form Coordinates see chapter 14 Paint Screen Forms lets you move the cursor on the screen to enter prompts and screen fields where you want You can also add special display characteristics such as reverse video and underline The commands PAINT uses are similar to those of full screen text editors You can even customize the command keys Screen form development tools 287 To use the screen form development tools
216. additional environment variables control the amount of memory that SQL uses for several functions Setting the environment variables correctly may improve the processing time for these functions SQLPMEM EXAMPLE This environment variable sets the amount of memory used during an SQL sort to hold projected fields the fields in the select clause that are not part of the order by clause If this variable is set too low and the sort needs more memory for projected fields the overflow is stored in a disk file This slows down sort performance To determine how large SQLPMEM should be use the following calculation total size of projected fields number of expected records For example in the following query Job and Manager are projected fields select Dept_No Name Job Manager from emp org where Number Emp_No order by Dept_No Name Job is 10 bytes in size and Manager is 2 bytes for a total projected fields size of 12 bytes If you expect 300 records your equation is 12 300 SQL Query DML language 407 408 SQLSMEM TIMEM fora SQLPMEM setting of 3600 This environment variable sets the amount of memory used during an SQL sort to hold the sort keys If this variable is set too low and the sort needs more room for the sort keys the overflow is stored in a disk file This slows down performance To determine how large SQLSMEM should be use the following calculation 4 sort key size number
217. age Once the after command group containing an aggregate function has been processed the function is reset so the next group of values can be processed In the following after command group example city and price are report fields or expression names after city print count total 1 print avg price total price count NOTE The two values printed by the first print command are equal The same is true of the values printed by the second print command The table shown in figure 17 19 contains aggregate function expressions using city and price from the previous example EXPRESSION count avg price 2 avg price 1 75 min price max price 2 total price gt 5 00 and price lt 25 00 max price where price lt 500 00 min price where city New York count where price gt 500 00 RPT Report processor 507 avg price where price gt 9 00 Figure 17 19 Aggregate expression examples Remember the results of a comparison are 0 for FALSE and 1 for TRUE Note that one expression finds the lowest price in New York Another averages the prices over 9 00 Local functions 508 RPT comes with three built in local functions dow index and mdy You can also develop your own local functions to use with RPT A local function is a host language function that can be used with RPT to perform custom formatting calculating or database updating from within a report script For more information
218. ages at the end of section 16 5 The following is an example of how to add field values into specific fields in a table EXAMPLE Insert a new department using 80 for department number Collection for the name and Atlanta for the location sql gt insert into dept Number Name Location sql gt lt 80 Collection Atlanta gt recognized update 1 record s added A list of constants that describes values for specific fields in a record is a literal tuple The list of constants in a literal tuple is separated by commas and enclosed by angle brackets lt constant1 constant2 gt You can specify a list of literal tuples in the insert statement If you list the fields in a literal tuple in default field order and all the fields are present you can omit the field order list in parentheses You can obtain the default field order of a table using the fields keyword For example for the emp table you type fields emp SQL Query DML language 391 392 EXAMPLE Insert three new employees as emp records sql gt insert into emp sql gt lt 3000 Owens 80 clerk 3100 950 00 0 00 gt sql gt lt 3100 dark 80 c p a 2400 1800 00 0 00 gt sql gt lt 3200 Williams 80 clerk 3100 2500 00 0 00 gt recognized update 3 record s added The following example shows how you can use field value validation and default values defined by Advanced Field Attributes The example defines only on
219. ain If the problem persists contact Unify Corporation gt gt gt Unexpected type in intsize xxxx Explanation RPT has detected an internal error Correction Try running the report again If the problem persists contact Unify Corporation gt gt gt Unify DataServer ELS reserved words are not allowed as names Explanation Modify Database Design does not allow Unify DataServer ELS reserved words to be used as field or table names These reserved words are mostly RPT and SQL keywords Correction Check the spelling of your entry or use another name For a list of Unify DataServer ELS reserved words see Appendix B gt gt gt Unmount the transaction log Explanation Because you have set the log file to a device the current transaction log volume must be unmounted before the backup process can continue This assumes that you have only one backup device gt gt gt Unrecognized character x Explanation RPT has detected a character that it does not recognize This message can be the result of a missing single quote or an inserted invisible control character gt gt gt Unrecognized sql command Explanation SQL cannot recognize the first keyword of the command Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction Make sure you have spelled the keyword correctly gt gt gt usage DBLOAD n ul I s separator b lt database gt lt table gt lt file gt lt spec file gt Explanation You ha
220. al bar a null field is displayed as Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference NOTE text COMMAND text number To display an entire TEXT field not merely the field display length you must use lines 0 The text command specifies the number of TEXT field characters that display The default is the display length specified for the TEXT field in the database design unless the lines 0 command is entered If you enter the lines 0 command the entire TEXT field prints Arguments number A number that indicates how many characters to display for each text field separator COMMAND separator character Arguments character The separator command lets you change the field separator that SQL uses to indicate where one field ends and the next starts The default is the vertical bar A single character that is the new field separator This can be any character including nonprinting control characters If you want to load in an ASCII file using the insert statement the ASCII file must use the same field separator throughout Also SQL s field separator must match the one in the file you want to load Run operating system commands operating system command The command lets you run operating system commands Any command preceded by an exclamation point is passed to the operating system When the command has finished running SQL regains control SQL Query DML language 447 end COMMAND end The end comma
221. an expression SQL evaluates expressions containing logical operators in the following order of precedence not and or If an operator appears more than once in a query SQL evaluates the expressions containing it from left to right If you need to change the order of evaluation use square brackets to indicate which part of the expression to evaluate first EXAMPLE List the name job salary and department number for the employees in department 10 who are either clerks or earn less than or equal to 1200 SQL Query DML language 361 362 sql gt select Name Job Salary Dept_No sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 10 and sql gt Job clerk or Salary lt 1200 recognized query Name Job Salary Dept_No Jones clerk 900 00 10 Scharf clerk 800 00 10 Bleriot programmer 1100 00 10 Frequently you want to select records based on a range of values With the standard comparison operators this might be awkward For example if you want to find employees with monthly salaries between 1000 and 2000 you might use the following expression salary gt 1000 and salary lt 2000 SQL has a between operator that lets you express this easier EXAMPLE List the name salary and job of employees earning between 1500 and 2000 inclusive sql gt select Name Salary Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Salary between 1500 and 2000 recognized query Name Salary Job Smith 1500 0
222. an enter characters that print over existing characters on the screen form Existing characters do not shift right as in input mode but are replaced You cannot use replace mode to type over screen fields But you can use the non printing cursor motion command keys such as left_arrow to move the cursor on the screen escape Cancels input replace transfer and video modes and returns to command mode If you are using command mode escape resets the command repeat count to 0 delete character Removes the character under the cursor Characters to the right of the deleted character shift left If the cursor is on a screen field this command does not work You can delete more than one character at a time by specifying a command repeat count open above Opens a blank line directly above the current line on the screen and shifts lower lines down PAINT remains in command mode If text is on the bottom line of the screen the text is lost when the line above shifts down and replaces it If a screen field is located on the Screen form development tools 301 open below delete line transfer line VIDEO CONTROL bottom line a line cannot be inserted The screen field must be deleted from the bottom line before a line can be inserted Opens a blank line directly below the current line Otherwise this command works exactly like the open above command Deletes the current line and shifts the lines below it up one line If the curr
223. an occur when values for a field with a unique default attribute definition are entered manually or are loaded into a database from another database 1 The first problem occurs when you manually enter a value into a field that has a unique default definition This can result in a future duplicate value being generated for the field When this happens no more records can be added to the database until the duplicate value is changed to a unique value To avoid this problem either let the system enter the value for a field with an AFA unique default value definition or add an offset value to the AFA unique default value definition to reduce the chances of a duplicate For example suppose you have a field named keyfid with a unique default value definition You can add an offset of 10 000 to the unique value with the following statement keyfid unique 10000 Database design utilities 173 174 This means that all default values for keyfid would be unique numbers greater than 10 000 You would be able to manually enter unique values from 0 zero to 9 999 The second problem occurs when you dump records from one database table and reload them into another database table with a unique default value definition for one or more of its fields This can cause many duplicate field values To avoid this problem either only load records into tables without unique default value definitions or modify the AFA definition so the unique field uses
224. and uses a temporary file for the script The input file is also optional This argument is the name of an ASCII file containing the data to be formatted If you want to pipe the input file to RPT use the dash instead of the input file name If no input file is specified either by name or with the dash RPT compiles the RPT script file and prints a report This report lists the number of RPT internal table elements used by the script and the maximum number of elements in each table Each table size can be increased or decreased for scripts that use more elements from one table and less from another On computer hardware with limited data address space this enables you to reduce the table sizes and compensate for larger database designs To reset a table size use the corresponding RPT environment variable These variables and their corresponding tables are explained later in this chapter The following are sample command fines used to run RPT from the shell from a shell script or from a user program In all cases report output is sent to the standard output Syntax errors and table usage reports are sent to the standard error output The following command line compiles the script contained in rscript and prints the RPT Table Usage Information report RPT rscript The following command line formats the data in the file rinput according to the commands in the file rscript RPT rscript rinput RPT Report processor 545
225. ange manufacturer 0001 s city from Lynn to Revere without having to edit several records Yet if you examine Design 3 closely you should see that it still needs work Although the item table only contains information about inventory items the manf table shows a lack of independence among its non key fields For example the status field depends on the non key field city instead of on the key field manf_ID That is a manufacturer has a city and a city has a status But the status has no real relation to a manufacturer If the manufacturer s ID number changes the status is not affected However if a manufacturer s city changes the status changes as well This can cause problems These dependencies among the manf table s non key fields cause the following problems for adding deleting and modifying data 1 Adding You cannot add a record indicating a city s status unless you add a manufacturer for that city A primary key value is required to add a new record For example you cannot add the information that Houston has a status of 25 unless you also add a manufacturer located in Houston Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 2 Deleting If the only record for a particular manufacturer is deleted not only is the manufacturer s information deleted but also the status information for the city that manufacturer is located in For example if you delete the record for manufacturer 0005 you lose the information that San Diego
226. another Correction Before you can add another B tree index you must drop an existing B tree index gt gt gt The menu cannot be found in the data dictionary Explanation This menu has been recently deleted and cannot be found in the data dictionary gt gt gt The menu is now full The remaining screens will be created but not placed on the menu Explanation 16 screens have been created and placed on the Data Entry Menu usermenu No room is left to add the remaining screen forms However these screens will be created and registered with ENTER gt gt gt The new expected number must be at least nnn Explanation This message displays if a database file exists and you try to reduce the EXPECTED number below the maximum number of records existing at one time in this table Unify DataServer ELS messages 651 You cannot reduce the EXPECTED number below the value of nnn Notice that the value of nnn can be greater than the current number of records in the specified table This is because deleted record slots still take up space in the database file Correction To recover this space you must perform the following steps 1 Using SQL dump all records of the table you want to compress to an ASCII file 2 Add anew table with the same design as the table you want to compress Delete the existing table from the database design Reconfigure the database Load the data back into the new table DOV oP To create
227. any blocks of data from a file into an internal buffer until the buffer is filled A file is actually made up of blocks scattered over the disk The operating system keeps an index of each block s location When reading from or writing to a particular location in a file the operating system uses the index to determine which physical block of the disk to use Introduction to database design 115 Using the index to locate blocks is efficient for files up to one or two megabytes that are accessed randomly and created and deleted often Such files include text files program source code documents shell scripts or batch files and executable files However using an index to locate blocks is not efficient for many typical database files These database files are often larger than ten megabytes and they often must be accessed sequentially for reports and backups When a file gets this large the indexing structure binders performance To read the correct data block up to three index blocks must be read first This can slow down the read process considerably The solution for large files is to use the Express O file system often called a raw file A raw file is located in physically adjacent blocks so the indexing structure is not needed To create a raw file unmount one of the file systems use Define Database Volumes section 9 5 to tell Unify DataServer ELS about that disk partition and then perform a Create Database section 8 3
228. any records performing a join that forms the Cartesian product and then selects the records takes much too long and lists a lot of redundant information For example suppose you want to join two tables one with 5 000 records and one with 50 000 records The Cartesian product of these two tables is 250 000 000 records This would take days to process Unify DataServer ELS SQL however can perform joins and selections on files of this size in seconds To do this each query takes advantage of the available access methods including hashing explicit relationships and B tree indexes Multiple access methods improve the performance of your database application by adding or changing access methods so that forming the Cartesian product is not necessary Joining Tables without the where Clause A join query without a where clause lists every record in the Cartesian product of the joined tables The following query illustrates a Cartesian product with no selection You would probably never use such a query but it is included so you can see what happens NOTE If a field name is not unique it must be preceded by the name of the table Thus to list the employee name you must use emp Name because the dept table also has a field called Name Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE List the employee name and department location for the Cartesian product of the employee and department tables sql gt select emp Name Location
229. ap and Unicap 69 Termcap 70 Terminal functions 70 Optional terminal functions 73 Keyboard mapping 73 Setting up atermcap file 74 UNICAP 75 Character classes 75 The standard unicap file 79 Part Il Database design and maintenance 85 Chapter 7 Introduction to database design 87 Database elements 89 Field datatypes 89 Refining the database design 95 Eliminating multiple values in fields 95 Eliminating non key field dependencies 98 Database diagrams 104 Data access methods 106 Hashing primary key 107 Explicit relationships 108 B trees 110 Buffered sequential access 115 Chapter 8 Database design utilities 119 Database directory structure 120 Design and create a new database dbcreate Database tables 121 Database fields 124 Creating the database 131 Modify database design schent 136 Modifying values on the table entry form 137 Modifying values on the field entry form 140 Create database crdb 145 121 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Database files 145 Reconfigure database scom 148 Preparing to reconfigure 149 Reconfiguring 150 Finishing the reconfigure 152 Recovering corrupted hash table fields 153 Add drop B tree indexes idxmnt 156 Inquiring rebuilding and dropping B trees 159 Adding B tree indexes 161 Database field entry prompts 161 Processing B tree definitions 162 Advanced field attributes afa 164 AFA file structure 167 Command syntax 168 An example file 178 Chapter 9
230. argin is column 1 The database fields used in the following example are price and mrkdwn type amount icode type string length 3 and iname type string The example illustrates default spacing with the print command The following command print price mrkdwn icode iname prints this output 24 95 W26 Widget If you want to print a message starting in column 4 you can use any of these commands print SELL in Col 4 print SELL print 2 SELL print SELL NOTE Three print positions are left blank starting at the left margin The column option overrides default spacing You can use it to make sure two expressions print side by side In the following example the built in variable pageno prints print col Bil pageno col 33 using amp amp col 35 and pageno is automatically incremented by RPT after each page prints The resulting page numbers would look like 03 or 48 in columns 31 through 36 RPT Report processor 533 If you use the no newline option the next print command s output follows the current command s output on the same line When print commands contain the no newline option you can use the if command to vary the output on a single line If you use the centered option the entire print line is centered in the width of the report You can use this option to print centered titles The using option and format templates Numeric float an
231. ary and database are now invalid Unify DataServer ELS messages 609 610 Correction Any keyboard response returns you to the menu To recover you must either read the backup as a user who can create files in the database directory or change the access mode of the directory so you can create files gt gt gt Can t create xxxx Explanation SQL cannot create the ASCII or binary file named xxxx Correction Check the read and write permissions of the current directory Make sure the current user has write privileges for the directory gt gt gt Can t open database file BUDB Explanation The database file cannot be opened Any keyboard response returns you to the menu Correction Make sure you have read write privileges for the database file gt gt gt Can t open data dictionary Explanation The data dictionary cannot be opened Any keyboard response returns you to the menu Correction Make sure you have read write privileges for the data dictionary file gt gt gt Can t open specification file xxxx Explanation The specification file cannot be opened Correction Make sure the file name is spelled correctly and you have read privileges for the file gt gt gt Can t open volume xxxx readtemp Explanation The database volume file specified in Define Database Volumes volmnt cannot be opened Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction Check the file permissions of the volum
232. as been designed with Modify Database Design The general process consists of compiling the database design determining the type of file the database is to reside in and then writing the initial file These steps are done automatically by the program Because Create Database creates an empty database file certain precautions should be observed 1 Make sure that no one else is using the application before starting No one else should be using this Unify DataServer ELS application when Create Database is running 2 The database should not contain valuable data because the database is empty when Create Database finishes If you have valuable data dump it to an ASCII file using SQL and then load it back see SQL Extensions in section 16 3 when the create program is finished 3 Create Database also empties all existing B tree indexes If the data types or internal lengths of existing fields have been modified since the last Create Database run any B tree indexes associated with those fields are dropped 4 Raw databases cannot be created on a mounted file system Database files The default Unify DataServer ELS database file is an ordinary operating system file named file db in the current directory A Unify DataServer ELS database file can reside in either an ordinary or a special operating system file To define the type of file set the appropriate parameters with Define database volumes section 9 5 If a special file is used f
233. ase Design Print Menus Print Group Privileges Print Individual Privileges Print List of Programs Print Display Database Statistics Print Display B Tree Statistics Must contain the directory where the Unify DataServer ELS system programs are located In addition it can contain the directory where your application programs are located if you want to execute them from somewhere other than the current directory The standard PATH is set to bin usr bin The field separator for RPT SQL DBLOAD and BMTOFF The default separator is the pipe symbol BMTOFF is the program that interfaces ENTER to RPT The ID number to be used for the shared memory segment dedicated to the Lock Manager The default setting for SHMID is 4903 Use SHMID if you want to run an application that uses a different database with a different memory segment To prevent shared memory fragmentation assign a unique ID number to each database or specify separate segments for each database NOTE All applications that use the same database must use the same ID number The maximum size allowed for the shared memory segment Set this variable to a size appropriate for your operating system At the first call to the Lock Manager the Lock Manager tries to create a shared memory segment of the requested size If the requested size is larger than the size allowed by the operating system the Lock Manager cycles down in 2 K byte jumps until it successfully cr
234. asswords you can assign fields a security group for both the read and write permissions For a user program to add records to or delete records from a file the program must have write privileges for all the fields in that file However users can access password protected fields through ENTER and the database test driver sys920 Neither ENTER nor the database test driver recognizes field level security For more information on ENTER see chapter 15 for the database test driver see the UNIFY Data Server LES HLI Programmer s Manual Database security utilities 227 228 To start the program select Field security maintenance fidsec from the database Maintenance menu The following screen form displays fldsec Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Field Security Maintenance FIELD NAME EAD ONLY PASSWORD EAD ONLY GROUP RI RIT E PASSWORD E GROUP E M ODIFY D ELE The operation characteristics of this screen form are identical to an ENTER screen see chapter 15 The prompts on the screen form are described as follows A DD IINQUIRE MJODIFY DJELETE The operation prompt This prompt can vary depending on the user s access privileges FIELD NAME The name of the field for which you want to set password permissions READ ONLY PASSWORD The password that users must enter to read the field you specify in FIELD NAME If you do not set a write password as well
235. at must be satisfied for a record to be selected The selection criteria in the where clause can consist of simple or complex expressions combining the following types of operators and notation comparison operators logical operators e set inclusion notation The following examples illustrate how each type of operator or notation can be used in the where clause COMPARISON OPERATORS lt gt lt gt 358 Comparison operators are used in a where clause to compare a field with a constant or expression or with the results of another select clause Comparison operators sometimes called relational operators compare or relate the expression on the left side of the operator with the expression on the right The where clause can also compare two fields with each other using any of the standard comparison operators lt lt gt and gt However String fields can only be compared using the and operators NOTE Do not insert a space between the two characters in the operators gt Or lt Comparing Numbers The following example illustrates comparing a field with a numeric constant EXAMPLE List the name and location of department number 70 sql gt select Name Location sql gt from dept sql gt where Number 70 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference recognized query Name Location Finance Dallas EXAMPLE List the name job salary and commission for em
236. at contains the same value in its referenced field as the default value in the child record referencing field 2 Run Rebuild explicit relationships to establish the link between the parent and child records If you run Rebuild explicit relationship on a database for which explicit relationship fields have never been set the previous warning displays Your current directory might show a file called repoint err which lists the records that repoint can t fix The repoint err file contains the following information Table The name of the table that has the bad pointer It is the child table in the relationship Location A number indicating the relative location of the problem record in a set of records in the same table The table name and location number can be used with the database Test driver setloc function to find the record For information about setloc see database Test driver in the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Related Table The name of the related table It is the parent table in the relationship Reference Field The name of the explicit relationship field in the child table This is the field that needs to be updated to relink the record to the list for the parent This field can be updated using the database Test driver setloc function to find the record For more information on setloc and record relinking see database Test driver in the Unify DataServer ELS H
237. ata to at least one field to add the record The record is not added if it only contains default values If an AFA default value has been set for a referencing field and you skip the field while adding a record ENTER does not display the value from the referenced parent record However the reference is established and the value will display when the record is recalled ENTER and AFA messages Three types of AFA messages can be displayed on ENTER screens FYI ERROR and HELP messages 1 You can use AFA FYI messages to display the type of value to enter This reduces the need to rely on the default value for a valid field entry In both add and modify modes as you move the cursor from field to field on the screen the FYI message for the current field if any is displayed at the bottom of the screen You can use FYI messages to tell the user an error has been made ENTER validates each field value you enter If AFA legal values have been specified for the field the field value entered must match the AFA legal values specified for the field Otherwise the value must match the standard default value for the field s data type If you enter an invalid value and an AFA ERROR message has been specified for that field the message displays at the bottom of the screen The existing field value does not change until you enter a valid value If an AFA HELP file has been specified for a field you can display the help text by pressing
238. ates the initial cursor position for such commands as add field transfer field transfer line and reverse video The default marker character is the tilde Screen form development tools 311 312 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 14 Screen form maintenance utilities This chapter describes several screen form maintenance utilities Check screen form coordinates Display list of screens Test screens Compile screens and Restore screen to Data Dictionary These screen form maintenance utilities are all options on the Create or modify screen forms menu Check screen form coordinates is an alternative to PAINT Both programs let you create modify or view screen forms However when you use Check screen form coordinates you must specify the x y coordinates of prompts and screen fields Display list of screens lets you list existing screen forms Test screens lets you make sure screen field prompts and screen fields are where you want them to display on the screen form Compile screens and restore screen to Data Dictionary let you update the data dictionary to reflect any changes you have made to screen forms 313 14 1 Check screen form coordinates sfmaint Check screen form coordinates is an alternative method to PAINT that lets you inquire add modify and delete screen forms and screen fields Check screen form coordinates displays paged information about a specific screen form rather than the actual screen
239. ation The field named ffff exists in the database but is not in the table xxxx Correction Check the spelling of the field or table name gt gt gt Field is referenced Explanation You cannot delete a field referenced by another field in the database Correction You must first remove any reference to this field before it can be deleted gt gt gt Field limit exceeded Explanation This table already has 256 fields no more can be added This is an internal system error gt gt gt Field limit will be exceeded Explanation If you add another field to the table the field limit of 256 fields will be exceeded This field cannot be added gt gt gt Field must be a parent Explanation The field name entered as the combination field entry for the current field is not of the data type COMB Correction To make this field part of a COMB field you must specify a COMB field name in the current table in the COMB FIELD column Unify DataServer ELS messages 617 618 gt gt gt Field must reference a key Explanation You are trying to use a non key field as a reference field Only the primary key of another table can be used as a reference field Correction Check the entry for misspellings gt gt gt Field must reference another table Explanation You are trying to use a field in the current table as a reference field Only the primary key of another table can be used as a reference field Correction Ch
240. automatically places that name in the CHARACTER DEVICE column Offset The offset the number of 512 byte blocks from the start of the device where Unify DataServer ELS data storage begins You specify offsets only for device volumes File volumes always have an OFFSET of 0 For example the device can be a disk partition that is partitioned for more than one database volume If the first volume begins at location 0 and ends at 999 999 512 byte blocks its OFFSET would be 0 OFFSET for the second volume would be 1000 NOTE If you enter an x in RT OFFSET defaults to 0 and you cannot change it Database maintenance utilities 209 Length The length the number of 512 byte blocks of the volume If volume type is F the length you enter refers to the maximum size the file volume will grow before it is considered full If the volume type is D the length you enter refers to the current size of the device volume s disk area Length must include an allowance for the file system overhead needed to maintain the file volume such as indirect blocks After making changes to any of these definitions you must reconfigure the database in order for the changes to take effect 210 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Database maintenance utilities 211 212 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part Ill System administration Part Ill describes the options on the Security Maintenance and Data Dictionary Reports menus
241. ay your data ENTER overwrites it NOTE The following rule applies only if you use Check screen form coordinates to develop the screen form 6 You must specify both the database field coordinates FX and FY and the prompt coordinates PX and PY for all screen fields even if you do not specify a prompt ENTER uses the FX FY combination to clear data from the screens of terminals that do not have protected fields ENTER uses the PX PY combination to order the fields on the screen form and determine how the cursor moves from one field to another If you leave FX and FY at zero the top line of the screen erases when ENTER clears the screen If you leave PX and PY at zero the cursor moves erratically from one field to another 328 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 15 1 Register screen form with ENTER entmnt Before ENTER can use a screen form you must tell ENTER about the screen form and how it is to be used This is known as the registration process The registration process associates the screen form with a target table and a title You must specify the target table because fields from several secondary tables can also display on the screen form A screen form can also be registered with SQL chapter 16 but it may not be registered with both ENTER and SQL To confirm whether an existing screen form is registered with ENTER or SQL run Print list of programs section 11 7 When you register a screen form with ENTER
242. base volumes are not in the same directory as your application database files In addition to these environment variables Unify DataServer ELS has two sets of environment variables specific to SQL and RPT For information on SQL environment variables see Setting Internal SQL Table Sizes in section 16 3 For information on RPT environment variables see RPT Internal Tables and Setting RPT Environment Variables in section 17 10 Environment variables and Unify DataServer ELS programs You need not worry about setting the Unify DataServer ELS environment variables if you exit to the shell from a Unify DataServer ELS menu to run a program or execute programs by selecting them from a menu The Unify DataServer ELS environment variables are available to all unify programs The definitions of environment variables also have precedence ovei the configuration settings specified in a langcap file These are the Unify DataServer ELS programs you might want to execute like this Name Section Description DBLOAD 12 6 Database Load Lets you load data into a data base from an ASCII file LST 18 Listing Processor Lets you produce sorted file lists with totals and subtotals Figure 5 1 Unify DatsServer ELS Programs Environment variables 67 68 Name Section Description RPT 17 Report Processor Lets you produce sophisticated reports using a powerful nonprocedural language REPLAY 12 1 Transaction logging replay program Lets you apply the
243. bers addresses serial numbers TEXT 256 Variable length text descriptions such as annotated bibliographies or product specifications Note You can specify a display length up to 256 characters The actual length of the field is the length of the ASCII text stored in the field BINARY n a Binary data such as digitized photos and sounds graphic images telemetry data machine instructions and so on Note You cannot specify a display length The actual length is the length of the binary data stored in the field COMB n a Multi part and primary key fields This field s length is the total length of its components Figure 7 1 Field type reference table Field data type descriptions As you develop your list of fields also think about how you might want to display data Although each data type has a default display format you can set environment variables to control display formats for dates and amounts and to specify editors for text and binary fields For more information about setting environment variables see chapter 5 90 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Unify DataServer ELS recognizes several different data types each of which serves a specific purpose The following briefly explains the data types recognized by Unify DataServer ELS and gives suggestions on when to use each type NUMERIC This is an integer number with a display length up to 9 digits A null value is stored as 0 Use a NUMERIC data type for a qua
244. ble names and the field access names for the database used in this chapter sql gt tables emp dept taxes sql gt fields emp NAME TYPE LENGTH Number INTEGER 4 Name STRING 10 Dept_No INTEGER 2 Job STRING 10 Manager INTEGER Salary AMOUNT Commission AMOUNT sql gt fields dept NAME TYPE LENGTH Number INTEGER 2 Name STRING 15 Location STRING 15 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference sql gt fields taxes NAME TYPE LENGTH Min_Amount AMOUNT 5 Max_Amount AMOUNT 5 Base_Tax AMOUNT 5 Marginal_Rate FLOAT 42 select from CLAUSE The simplest SQL query includes both a select clause and a from clause The select clause lists the fields to be retrieved and the from clause tells which table or tables the fields are to come from The fields to be selected must be in the tables listed in the from clause EXAMPLE Select all the fields for each record of the emp table This displays the contents of all the emp records The is shorthand for all the fields sql gt select sql gt from emp recognized query Number Name 1000 Smith 2000 Jones 1100 Whittake 2100 Reilly 1200 O Neil 2200 Dugan 1300 Schmidt 2300 lein 1400 Scharf 2400 Lee 1500 Otsaka 2500 awasaki 1600 Dupre 2600 Bleriot SQL Query DML language 50 10 r 20 30 20 40 60 20 10 10 60 30 50 10 Dept_No Job salesrep clerk salesrep salesrep salesrep salesrep programmer salesrep clerk presi
245. cally grouped Therefore only the results of named sort expressions can cause control breaks Named sort expressions RPT supports control break processing by monitoring the sorted values that correspond to each named expression in a sort command If several expressions are sorted hierarchically the sort expression that changes least is the most major sort expression The following example sales report illustrates sort expression hierarchy NOTE The dots in the example sales report represent portions of the report not shown 514 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference SALES REPORT STATE CA CITY Los Angeles CUSTOMERS ORDER AMOUNT ABC Company Inc 98475 54 321 99 423485 238 67 54 560 66 Mom s Auto Repair Inc 348661 98 342 59 7856322 23 586 89 123456789 55 676 50 177 605 98 SALES Los Angles 232 166 64 CITY San Jose CUSTOMERS ORDER AMOUNT Fixit Yourself Company 385576 12 887 50 1849633 239 00 13 126 50 SALES San Jose 13 126 50 SALES CA 245 293 14 SALES NY 178 385 43 TOTAL SALES THIS REPORT 1 003 347 73 AVERAGE CUSTOMER ORDER 13 030 49 RPT Report processor 515 516 In the example sales report the sales input is sorted by state by city within state and by customer within city The expression named state is the most major sort expression because in the report script state is the first expression in the sort command The expression named customer is the most minor sort expression b
246. cates what should print at that position The special characters for numeric and amount fields are as follows If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a blank This pads a numeric field with blanks on the left amp If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a zero This pads a numeric field with zeros on the left j If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print an asterisk For example you can use this character when printing checks and you want the amounts padded with asterisks on the left If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a dollar sign If a dollar sign has been printed print a space You can use this character to print either a fixed or floating dollar sign If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a plus sign If a plus sign has been printed print a space If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise if this is a negative number print a minus sign If a minus sign has been printed print a space If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise if this is a negative number print a left parenthesis If a left parentheses has been printed print a space Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference If this is a negative number print a right parenthesis in this position If there is a digit to the left of this position
247. ced in a single B tree index and each field can be stored in either ascending or descending order All the fields must be contained in a single table You might put more than one field in a B tree index if you frequently use two or more fields in queries Note that you can also specify that a B tree index contain only unique values B tree index structure is detailed in the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual B trees must resde in SDBPATH However if your operating system supports symbolic links you may set up symbolic links to a raw partition to a different file system or to a different directory Before you use Add drop B tree Indexes make sure no one else is using the database To add or rebuild a B tree index or to drop an existing index select Add 156 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference drop B tree Indexes idxmnt from either the Database maintenance menu or Database design utilities menu The following screen form displays idxmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Add Drop B Tree Indexes With this program you can add drop or rebuild B tree indexes No one else should be using the database while this program is running Proceed Database design utilities 157 If you answer y yes the next screen form appears a n no terminates the program idxmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Add Drop B Tree Indexes EX ID NUMBE LICATES ALLOWED CMD ASC DSC FIEL
248. ch the expression This is equivalent to gt f1 AND lt f2 If1 f2 This expression matches all field values that are outside the range of entered values This is equivalent to lt f1 OR gt f2 You can specify search expressions for any number of fields on the screen form The search expression must begin in the first character position of the screen field The result is to AND all the expressions together to produce a query 342 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Using queries to modify delete or report After a set of records has been selected the first record in the set displays on the screen form The operation prompt displays the current valid operations you can choose Which operations are valid depend on the current mode The six possible operations are as follows NJEXT PIREVIOUS MJODIFY DJELETE RJEPORT S TOP NJEXT P IREVIOUS and S TOP display in all modes MJODIFY displays only in modify mode D JELETE displays only in delete mode And RJEPORT displays in inquire mode if a formatting program is associated with the ENTER screen The possible responses to the operation prompt are described as follows ENTER data entry query by forms Displays the next record in the set of selected records A RETURN also displays the next record Displays the previous record in the set of selected records Moves the cursor to the first screen field in the current record so you can modify the data If so
249. ck device for device volumes Correction Make sure the path name and spelling of the file name are correct Device volumes can be created using the mknod command gt gt gt The file xxxx is neither a character nor block special file Explanation volmnt only allows character or block files to be used as the CHARACTER DEVICE name for device volumes The file name entered is neither a valid character device file nor a valid block device file Correction Check the spelling of the file name Make sure the specified file is a character device file for the CHARACTER DEVICE field and a block device file for the BLOCK DEVICE field gt gt gt The file xxxx is not a block special file Explanation volmnt only allows a block file to be used as the BLOCK DEVICE name for device volumes The file name entered is neither a valid character device file nor a valid block device file Correction Check the file name spelling and file type Make sure the specified file is a block device file for the BLOCK DEVICE field gt gt gt The from clause is missing or invalid Explanation Queries must contain a from clause This can be caused by various errors For example the from clause is missing or its syntax is incorrect In the following invalid query the keyword from is misspelled Invalid Query select name form emp Unify DataServer ELS messages 649 650 Correction select name from emp gt gt gt The if clause
250. complete path name of the unicap file The default location of the unicap file is in the directory specified in Unify DataServer ELS Unify DataServer ELS contains the name of the Unify DataServer ELS system lib directory e UNIFYTMP contains the name of the temporary file directory used by Unify DataServer ELS The default value of UNIFYTMP is tmp e VOLPATH contains the complete path name for database volumes If VOLPATH is not set all database volumes are assumed to be in the current directory or in the directory specified in DBPATH Text editors The Unify DataServer ELS default text editor is vi the Berkeley visual editor However if you have a text editor you would rather use you can specify that text editor by setting the EDIT environment variable You can also specify a binary editor by setting the BINEDIT environment variable The print spooler The SPOOLER environment variable contains the name of your system s print spooler This variable is set to the standard spooler lpr The Ipr is a leftover from the days when all high speed printers were line printers Unify DataServer ELS and the operating system environment 29 When Unify DataServer ELS sends output to a printer the print spooler makes a temporary copy of the file The temporary spooler file is removed when printing is finished Running operating system commands from Unify DataServer ELS You can run operating system commands from Unify DataServer ELS in
251. converted to binary during a data dump and reload Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Arguments filename The name of the query output file If you use the binary option this file will contain binary data An error occurs if a file by the specified name exists If the file name contains such special characters as a dot or slash e g xxx oiit or data txt you must enclose the file name in single quotes DML statements and clauses An SQL data manipulation clause consists of an introductory keyword statement that indicates the update to be performed whether insert update or delete followed by the clauses that specify how to perform the update The following lists the DML statements and clauses e insert statement e update statement e delete statement e set clause As with query language statements DML statements must be ended with a slash Much of the power of query statements can be used in data manipulation which lets you operate on large sets of records with a single statement The following describes the syntax of each data manipulation statement insert Statement insert into table field from binary filename lt constant gt select The insert into clause lets you add records to a database You can use an ASCII file binary file literal tuples or the results of a query to obtain the data values for the new records SQL Query DML language 441 442 Arguments tab
252. creen field in programs you may write so it must be different from Screen form development tools 305 database field names However different screen forms can use the same screen field names You can have as many screen fields as available memory allows DATABASE FIELD The name of the database field to display for this screen field PAINT looks up the name in the data dictionary to validate it A COMB type field cannot be used directly you must enter each component of the COMB field separately If you leave the database field blank you must complete TYPE and LENGTH prompts You can clear the database field name by entering a space TYPE The type of the database field NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT or BINARY If you specify a database field name PAINT enters the type from the data dictionary and you cannot modify it LENGTH The display length of the database field If you specify a database field name PAINT gets the length from the data dictionary and you cannot modify it The RETURN key moves the cursor forward over a prompt and CTRL U moves the cursor backward If you press CTRL U at the DATABASE FIELD prompt in modify mode and a database field has been specified you return to command mode The last two lines of the screen redisplay and the screen is updated to reflect changes MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS Miscellaneous commands perform functions not directly related to creating or editin
253. cript Figure 17 4 shows a simple report script that produces a fist of the fields in the input file without formatting headings or totals Suppose you have an input file containing the name job salary and commission for each employee in the database The report script for Department Listing 1 Figure 17 4 is as follows input emp_name string 10 emp_job string 10 emp_salary amount 4 emp_commission amount 4 detail print emp_name emp_job emp_salary emp_commission end The input chapter tells RPT what the input file looks like The detail chapter tells RPT how to print each line And the end signals the completion of the report script The input chapter assigns a name to each field in the input file You use this name to refer to the field throughout the report script The field names in the list must be in the same order as the fields in the input file There are two ways to specify fields in the input chapter 1 By giving a name to the field followed by a type specification 2 By using the database field s access name To specify fields using a name and a type specification enclose the type in square brackets A type consists of a type spec followed by an optional length as shown name type length where the report field name can contain alphabetic characters and the underscore _ You cannot use Unify DataServer ELS keywords or reserved words as report field names Report field types and lengths are t
254. cter emitted when such non ASCII terminal keys as right arrow are pressed Different terminal types emit different sequences of octal codes when their keys are pressed For keys such as right arrow left arrow home cursor and FI function key 1 there are no standards For example VTIOO terminals emit the octal sequence 033 133 103 ESC for right arrow while TeleVideo 912 terminals emit a simple 014 CTRL L If you want to use one of these keys you must tell Unify DataServer ELS how to recognize which nonstandard key has been pressed To do this translate each character sequence emitted by the terminal s physical keys into a standard internal form that Unify DataServer ELS programs recognize The Standard internal form for each character sequence is referred to as an imaginary character Each imaginary character has a name that refers to it in the unicap file The maximum length of the imaginary character sequence is six characters NOTE Imaginary characters can be used as command keys in the unicap file only if their names are enclosed in the symbols lt and gt for example exit lt f8 gt The name and description of each imaginary character is shown in Figure 6 6 Name Description del_char This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s delete character key Figure 6 6 Imaginary character command keys Termcap and Unicap 77 Name Description del_line down_a
255. ction in an after name command group calculates the number of records processed since the last time that after name command group was run The syntax of an aggregate function is as follows function name expr where expr where the keyword where is an operator The where keyword indicates that the value of the expression preceding where cannot be considered unless the expression following where is TRUE or non zero Both expressions must return numeric results With or without the where operator the expression inside the parentheses is the aggregate function argument Local functions expression names fields and constants are valid arguments Variables and aggregate functions are not The following aggregate function calculates the average amount of all amounts greater than seventy seven dollars avg amount where amount gt 77 00 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference In the count function the expression preceding the where operator is replaced by an asterisk This is because the count function counts records The number of records is the same no matter which field in the record is counted The count function syntax is as follows count where expr For an aggregate function the argument expression is evaluated each time RPT evaluates a record The total function returns the sum of the resulting values The min and max functions give the smallest and largest of these values And the avg function gives their aver
256. ctionary which is called unify db and the application database file called file db The user s unify db is copied from the system prototype unify db the first time Unify DataServer ELS is started and file db is created with Create Database section 8 3 The user s database files are located in the database bin directory The prototype data dictionary is located in the system lib directory Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference dbr dbv err The raw database file named file dbr It is created by Create Database section 8 3 if you have used Define Database Volumes and have defined the root volume as a device volume The raw database file file dbr is linked to the character device file db is linked to the block device A file containing variable length database fields TEXT or BINARY type fields are stored in dbv files An error log file The most common file with this suffix is afa err This is the log for errors detected while using Advanced Field Attributes Two other error log files are repoint err and erriog An include file used with C source code Unify DataServer ELS creates two kinds of h files file h and screen h The file h file is the result of a Create Database section 8 3 or Reconfigure Database section 8 4 This file contains a list of table and field names used by C programs that access the database The screen b files are created by either Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 or Compile
257. d 64 bit doubles Field data types and lengths describe how field data displays For information on Data Base Field Types see Introduction to Data Base Design in chapter 7 Internal data types represent how much storage space the field data type uses internally 573 A 1 Changing field data types and lengths 574 When changing a field data type or display length you must consider the associated internal data type If you change the internal data type you are changing how much storage space is used for the field data If you make the internal data type smaller any data that exists in that field is forced to fit in a smaller storage space For example changing a NUMERIC 5 to a NUMERIC 4 converts data from an internal data type long to a short Similarly changing a STRING 100 to a STRING 10 takes data from in a 100 character storage space and stores it in a 10 character space Obviously either move can cause data loss Therefore it is safer to increase the size of a field or change its field data type so that the internal data type either increases or stays the same Another important consideration before changing a data field type is data type compatibility Two field data types are compatible if you can change the data type of the first field to the data type of the second field without losing data Figure A 2 shows the categories of compatible field data types Category Compatible data types Number field data types NUME
258. d Totals Current 6 Over 30 6 Over 60 5 Over 90 2 Total 19 Report Complete Figure 17 10 Purchase order status report totals page The title page excerpt displays the date range specified by the user and the day date and time of the report The detail page excerpt shows the format of the report A heading shows whether this page is for unshipped or shipped purchase orders Greater than symbols gt gt gt gt gt mark orders issued over 90 days ago and an aging summary prints for each vendor RPT Report processor 477 The report totals excerpt shows a final count of purchase orders in each aging category To develop this report you must start with the SQL query that extracts the data This query joins the six database tables by selecting purchase orders not yet received but issued between two dates specified by the user Therefore you must construct the query so the user can be prompted to enter the dates and the dates can be substituted when the query runs To accomplish this you place parameters in the query Then you connect a screen form to the query using Register Screen Form with SQL chapter 16 The user can then select the screen from a menu and enter the dates The dates are substituted in the query when it is run by SQL A parameter is a place holder in the form n where n is a number from through the number of parameters you want the user to supply Because you want two dates your two parameters are 1 and
259. d amount fields usually print in the following default field widths numeric 9 spaces wide amount 10 spaces wide float 16 spaces wide You can change the width of these fields with the using option and a format template The format template consists of special characters one for each position in the field width Each special character indicates what should print at that position The using option special characters The following describes the special characters for numeric and amount fields When you read the descriptions picture the field as formatted and printed from right to left If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a blank This pads a numeric field with blanks on the left amp If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a zero This pads a numeric field with zeros on the left a If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print an asterisk For example this is used 534 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference to print amounts on checks that are padded on the left with asterisks If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a dollar sign If a dollar sign has already been printed print a space This is used to print either a fixed or floating dollar sign If there is a digit in this position print the digit Otherwise print a plus sign If a plus sign has already been printed print a space
260. d employees without using the into keyword place the following query SQL Query DML language 399 select from emp into a file called emps Then from the operating system use the following command to send the results to the employees file SQL emps gt employees Eliminating the descriptive heading If you want to use RPT you probably don t want the descriptive heading You would probably also want to omit the heading if you are using standard text processing filters such as awk or sed You can eliminate the heading by using the keyword lines The lines setting controls the number of lines that print before a new heading prints Setting lines to 0 suppresses the heading entirely The default setting is 24 lines per page or the size of a standard CRT screen Consequently the following command turns off the heading sql gt lines 0 Specifying the field separator The field separator is the character that separates database fields in an SQL listing You can set the field separator character as follows sql gt separator The default field separator is the pipe symbol Any single character including tab and nonprinting characters is legal Loading data from external files Unify DataServer ELS SQL enables you to load data into the database from either ASCII or binary files You can use this feature to 1 Move data from one database to another 2 Move data from other application systems 3 Move data from one table
261. d if it is new nor updates the field if the record exists gt gt gt Edit command too long Explanation The complete edit command line is limited to 130 characters The command line is the sum of the current editor s name length plus the length of the file name argument gt gt gt Either desc or a named expression was expected Explanation Improper syntax was used in a sort command or in one of its expressions You may have included a comma at the end of the sort command line Invalid Script sort zip_code lt al a2 gt O_num d_num Correction sort zip_pode lt new_num gt O_num d_num gt gt gt Entere c orp Explanation The only valid responses to the operation prompt are e for edit c for compile and p for print Correction Re enter the appropriate command gt gt gt Environment variable DBNAME xxxx is an illegal value Explanation This message displays if the environment variable DBNAME is set to an illegal value Correction Make sure DBNAME is set to a valid name gt gt gt Error from B tree nnn Status is ddd This B tree should be rebuilt after the load Explanation A problem has occurred while updating B tree index nnn Correction Rebuild this B tree index after the database load Unify DataServer ELS messages 615 616 gt gt gt Error from B tree back out B tree nnn Status xxx Record rrr This B tree should be rebuilt after the load Explanation While recovering from
262. d in the result This keyword causes the query output to be sorted SQL Query DML language 429 table table field field constant count min expr max expr avg expr sum expr 430 The asterisk is a wildcard used to select all fields in all the tables named in the from clause If you use an asterisk no other fields or expressions can be included in the select clause The name of a table in the database followed by a period and an asterisk The result is to select all the fields from the indicated table The name of a field preceded by the name of the table that field is in If the table has been assigned a label or temporary name in the from clause then the label can be used in place of the table name You must precede the field name by the table name this way when you use a field name that occurs in two or more tables listed in the from clause Without this qualification it is not clear which table the field is in The name of a field in one of the tables listed in the from clause A constant value of type NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE TIME or STRING The type of constant depends on the type of field or expression compared with the constant Enclose STRING constants in single quotes to distinguish them from field names These are the built in SQL aggregate functions When you use an aggregate function it implies a group by should be performed If you haven t specified the group explicitly t
263. d it must have an offset of zero blocks Only one volume can be a root device Therefore you cannot enter an x in this column if another entry is marked as the root The root volume displays on the first line line 0 in the data entry area regardless of its volume name All other volumes are sorted by volume name The root volume is volume 0 the next is volume 1 and so forth The volume type Enter F or f for a file volume Enter D or d for a device volume You can have a mix of file and device volumes Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For device volumes If you enter D to TYP you must enter the name of an existing character or block device in the CHARACTER DEVICE column You must also enter the name of an existing block device in the BLOCK DEVICE column These devices should be in the dev directory For file volumes If you enter F to TYP to select a file volume the cursor skips to the BLOCK DEVICE column Enter the name of an existing regular file with or without the db suffix Because a file volume uses the same file for both the block and character devices the program automatically places the block device name in the CHARACTER DEVICE column If this volume is the root the program fills in the BLOCK DEVICE and CHARACTER DEVICE names Both names are either the default volume name file db or the name specified in DBNAME if it is set Character device The character device name for the volume For
264. d number of records is 3000 Custom message control 587 mpscrf fmtprog record field fldrel scffld volume fldsec btree btfld 588 Program screen intersections mpscrf describes which screens are used for ENTER and or SQL Each record corresponds to an ENTER SQL screen entry The default Expected number of records is 100 Formatting programs fmtprog contains the formatting programs used for ENTER and SQL screens 1 screen can correspond to a maximum of 8 fmtprog records The default Expected number of records is 400 Record types tables record contains information about the structure of a database table Each entry corresponds to one table The default Expected number of records is 152 the maximum allowed value is 252 Field types field contains information about the structure of a field Each entry corresponds to an individual field The default Expected number of records is 300 Reference intersections fldrel contains field reference information Each entry corresponds to 1 field reference The default Expected number of records is 400 Screen field to field intersections scffld contains the database name of a screen field That is scffld contains the database field name you enter in PAINT when defining a screen field The default Expected number of records is 1000 Database volumes volume is reserved for internal use only The Expected number of records is 8 Field level security fldsec co
265. d or modify individual privileges screen forms For example if you want users to have access to sh or edit you must explicitly specify those program names on the Add or modify group privileges and Add or modify individual privileges screen forms Database security utilities 221 10 3 Add or modify individual privileges empmnt This program enables you to maintain access privileges for individual users You can add new privileges or modify and delete existing privileges In addition you can maintain a list of the differences in access privileges of the individual versus those of the group Where an option or menu access item appears for an individual it supersedes the group item You can set access inquire add modify and delete privileges for Unify DataServer ELS programs menus screen forms SQL and the Unify DataServer ELS exit to the operating system command sh To start the program select Add or modify individual privileges empmnt from the Security maintenance menu The following screen form displays empmnt LOG GRO IN ID UP ID PASSWORD ACCE LN 222 SS LE VE LS ENU PROG M P A DD INQ ADD MOD DE access privilege data entry area Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Add or Modify Individual NAME NAME individual SYSTEM ENTRY POINT data entry area M ODIFY D ELE access privilege paging area Un
266. d the problem with the volume gt gt gt Unable to open file xxxx Explanation The ASCII file named xxxx cannot be opened or located Correction Make sure you have read permission for the file Also make sure the file exists and the file name is spelled correctly Unify DataServer ELS messages 677 678 gt gt gt Unable to open index file Explanation One of the B tree index files cannot be opened Correction Make sure your operating system user ID has read write privileges for all B tree index files These are the files with such names as bt001 idx gt gt gt Unable to open index information file Explanation The file field idx cannot be opened Correction Make sure you have read write privileges for this file gt gt gt Unable to open pipe Explanation RPT has detected an internal error Correction Try running the report again If the problem persists contact Unify Corporation gt gt gt Unable to open script file xxxx Explanation RPT cannot find or open the report script file xxxx Check for a misspelling of the report script file name or for incorrect file permission Invalid Script RPT rptsrpttt Correction RPT rptscript gt gt gt Unable to open specified input file xxxx Explanation RPT cannot find or open the input file named xxxx Check for a misspelling of the file name or for incorrect read permission Invalid Script RPT rptscript inppputfile Correction RPT rptscript in
267. database as an ordinary operating system file in the current directory After the process ends press RETURN at the final prompt to redisplay the system menu Database design utilities 147 8 4 Reconfigure database scom 148 A Unify DataServer ELS database must be reconfigured after you make changes to the database design Changes requiring the database to be reconfigured include e Adding Deleting or Modifying table definitions e Adding Deleting or Modifying field definitions For information about changing the database design see Modify Database Design schent section 8 2 For information about creating a new database see Create Database dbereate section 8 3 When you create or modify tables and fields the changes are recorded in the data dictionary file unify db Reconfigure Database then uses the data dictionary information to create or reformat your application database located in file db NOTE If you update a data dictionary that you use on several different machines and you want to apply the updated data dictionary to the other databases copy the updated data dictionary unify db to the other machines before reconfiguring Reconfigure each copy of the updated data dictionary separately to avoid database data dictionary mismatches You can also use Reconfigure Database to restore file system or volume information to file db You must do this when you move an existing database to raw files For more information
268. dent engineer salesrep clerk programmer Manager 2100 1300 2400 2400 1100 2400 2400 1100 2000 2400 1300 2100 1000 1300 Salary 1500 00 900 00 2500 00 2500 00 1500 00 1650 00 2500 00 1500 00 800 00 7500 00 1800 00 1800 00 800 00 1100 00 Commission 1000 00 0 00 500 00 1500 00 150 00 900 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1000 00 355 1700 Moehr 70 clerk 2400 950 00 0 00 2700 Colucci 40 salesrep 2200 2500 00 3000 00 1800 Amato 40 salesrep 2200 2000 000 750 00 2800 Fiorella 70 clerk 1700 800 00 0 00 1900 Brown 60 engineer 1300 2000 00 0 00 EXAMPLE Select all the fields for each record of the dept table sql gt select sql gt from dept recognized query Number Name Location 10 Administration Dallas 20 Eastern Sales New York 30 Central Sales Chicago 40 Western Sales Los Angeles 50 Marketing San Francisco 60 Research Dallas 70 Finance Dallas EXAMPLE Select all fields for each record of the taxes table sql gt select sql gt from taxes recognized query Min_Amount Max_Amount Base_Tax Marginal_Rate 3400 00 5500 00 0 00 0 12000 5500 00 7600 00 252 000 0 14000 7600 00 11600 00 546 00 0 16000 11900 00 16000 00 1234 00 0 19000 16000 00 20200 00 2013 00 0 22000 20200 00 24600 00 2937 00 0 25000 24600 00 29900 00 4037 00 0 29000 29900 00 35200 00 5574 00 0 33000 35200 00 45800 00 7323 00 0 3
269. deo mode on more than one line at a time Explanation PAINT can only change video mode for one line at a time Unify DataServer ELS messages 607 608 gt gt gt Cannot delete characters on a line ending with a wrap around field Explanation Because of a wraparound field s characteristics text cannot be deleted if it shifts the wraparound field to the left Correction To delete characters delete the wraparound field delete the characters and reenter the field gt gt gt Cannot delete combination Explanation A COMB field cannot be deleted until after its corresponding component fields have been deleted gt gt gt Cannot find or cannot display the help file Explanation The help file for the current field cannot be found or cannot be displayed Correction Make sure the help file name is spelled correctly in the Advanced Field Attributes file Make sure you have spelled the file name correctly and that the file is in the help documentation directory Help documentation should be in hdoc Make sure the help file has proper access permissions set for it to be read by ENTER gt gt gt Cannot insert in the middle of a field Explanation A field is a predefined area Screen text cannot be inserted in the middle of a field gt gt gt Cannot open a line below screen s last line Explanation You are at the last line of the screen s text entry area No more lines can be added Unify DataServer ELS Devel
270. desc recognized query Dept_No Name Job Salary Commission Commission 40 Colucci salesrep 5500 00 3000 00 20 Whittaker salesrep 3000 00 500 00 20 O Neil salesre 1650 00 150 00 20 Klein salesrep 1500 00 0 00 having CLAUSE The having clause lets you select some groups formed by a previous group by clause and reject others This is based on the results of another selection using one or more aggregate functions It is like using an aggregate function in a where clause which you cannot do For example you can use the having clause to select the departments where the average salary is over 2000 EXAMPLE List the department number and average salary for departments having an average salary over 2000 sql gt select Dept_No avg Salary sql gt from emp sql gt group by Dept_No sql gt having avg Salary gt 2000 recognized query Dept_No avg Salary 10 2575 00 30 2150 00 40 2050 00 60 2100 00 When a query contains both a having and a where clause SQL evaluates the query as follows 1 The where clause is applied to select qualifying records 2 The groups indicated by the group by clause are formed 3 The having clause is applied to select qualifying groups 378 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE List the department number and number of salesreps for each department with more than two salesreps sql gt select Dept_No count sql g
271. device volumes The device name can be up to 18 characters Of the 18 characters five are for the device prefix dev and 13 are for the device subdirectory path If the device name you enter does not begin with dev the prefix dev is inserted at the beginning of the device name The character device must exist in the dev directory It must be either a character or a block special file If the file name you enter doesn t exist or is of the wrong type you are requested to enter another device name Database maintenance utilities 207 208 If you want to use a file name that does not exist in dev you must use the super user ID and create the file with the mknod command before you define the database volume that uses it For file volumes This field is automatically filled in by the Define Database Volumes program This name is the same as the name you entered in the BLOCK DEVICE column The block device name for the volume For device volumes The device name can be up to 18 characters Of the 18 characters five are for the device prefix dev and 13 are for the device subdirectory path If the block device name you enter does not begin with dev the prefix dev is inserted at the beginning of the device name The block device must exist in the dev directory It must be a block special file If the file name you enter doesn t exist or is of the wrong type you are asked to enter another device name If you
272. ds for total tables allowed or total fields allowed Section C 2 explains what a data dictionary is as well as the difference between the master data dictionary and an application data dictionary This chapter also explains how to customize the master data dictionary calculate the Expected Number of Records in master data dictionary tables and reconfigure the master data dictionary after modifying it For information about changing the Expected number of records for an application database refer to section 8 2 What is a data dictionary 584 A data dictionary contains a schema describing the design of a database The schema includes the total number of records and fields allowed in the database how these records and fields relate to each other and the location of these records and fields The structure of Unify DataServer ELS is based on a schema contained in the Unify DataServer ELS master data dictionary When you create a data dictionary for an application Unify DataServer ELS uses the master data dictionary to create a template data dictionary file that Will contain the schema for the application Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The master data dictionary The Unify DataServer ELS master data dictionary file master dd is located in the Unify DataServer ELS library the lib directory The master data dictionary contains the following information about the structure and design of the Unify DataServer ELS database
273. e In Design 4 there is an explicit relationship between mcity in manf and city in cities The mcity field in manf points to or references the key field city in cities This is shown in Figure 7 8 on the following page and in Figure 7 9 in section 7 3 One city can be referenced by several manufacturers This is a one to many relationship One to many relationships are explained in section 7 3 Database Diagrams and in section 7 4 Data access methods under Explicit relationships Although Design 4 can be expanded it is a legal Unify DataServer ELS database design The design s tables fields and relationships are shown in the Unify DataServer ELS Database design report Figure 7 8 DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 35 Page 1 DATA DICTIONARY REPORTS Database Design TABLE FIELD REF TYPE LEN LONG NAME manf 10 manf manf_ID STRING 4 Manufacturer_ID mcities city STRING 20 City cities 6 cities city STRING 20 City status STRING 2 Status item 25 item item_ID COMB Item_ID imanf_ID manf_ID STRING 4 Manufacturer_ID ser_no STRING 3 Serial_Number price AMOUNT 3 Sales_Price Figure 7 8 Database design report For information about database design see the Unify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual or any book or article that discusses database design For a list of suggested sources see chapter 1 Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS Introduction to database design 103 7 3 Database diagrams After you have refined your da
274. e Debug is useful because it displays the scripts used with the argument substitution c Cancel the report request and return to the REPORT prompt The Report Options Screen may also display any of the following messages at run time lt EMPTY gt Explanation The output holding file has no data Complete Please enter RETURN to continue gt gt Explanation This part of the process is finished Display next page RETURN continues In terminates Explanation The output from the current process does not fit on one screen form RETURN displays the next screen of data while n ends the display and the process continues Unable to create output file please reenter filename SQL Query DML language 425 Explanation During the process the given filename FILENAME could not be created 426 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 16 5 SQL reference This subsection contains reference information for those who know how to use SQL and just need quick information It explains the reserved keywords used by SQL This subsection also contains diagrams of the formal language syntax of the complete Unify DataServer ELS SQL language These diagrams can show you how to construct any kind of SQL statement At the end of this subsection is a summary of the error messages and possible actions to correct problems Keyword summary The keywords listed in Figure 16 10 have specific meaning for SQL Therefore you cannot use keywords f
275. e 445 unlock COMMAND unlock table field password write table field password write The unlock command lets you access database fields that have been protected by Security Maintenance section 10 4 This command must be ended with a slash just like a query Arguments table field password lines COMMAND 446 lines number Arguments number The name of the database field you want to unlock the field name must be preceded by the name of the table that contains the field If the write keyword is not specified this is the read password entered in Field Security Maintenance If write is specified this is the write password The lines command changes the line number where a new heading is printed The default is set to 24 lines because that is the size of most CRT screens Thus a new header is printed every 24 lines A number between 0 and 32767 that indicates the line count where a new heading prints If the number is 0 no heading is printed Otherwise a heading is printed at the start and after every number lines of output You can use lines 0 to reduce the output to a minimum of characters for instance for input to a pipeline or to distinguish a null field from a field that is filled with blanks For any STRING field that is null or blank lines 0 prevents padding the field with spaces and instead displays the field in a condensed format For example if your separator character is a vertic
276. e a new value The example also illustrates the power of the where clause For more information on the where clause see the where clause description in section 16 1 EXAMPLE For each employee in department 70 calculate the tax bill based only on salary Store the tax bill in the Commission field sql gt update emp sql gt set Commission sql gt select Base_Tax sql gt Salary 12 Min_Amount Marginal_Rate sql gt from emp x taxes sql gt where Salary 12 sql gt between Min_Amount and Max_Amount and sql gt emp Number x Number sql gt where Dept_No 70 recognized update 2 record s updated delete statement 394 The DML delete statement lets you delete records from an existing table This statement consists of the delete keyword followed by the optional where clause The delete statement indicates the table containing the records to be deleted The where clause specifies which records to delete Otherwise all the records for the indicated table are deleted EXAMPLE Delete the employee named Owens sql gt delete emp sql gt where Name Owens recognized update 1 record s selected 1 record s deleted Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following example shows how the where statement can be used to specify the records to be deleted For more information on the where clause see the where clause description in section 16 1 EXAMPLE Delete all the employees who are
277. e correct hash_length value should be 692264 41984 3 650280 3 216760 At the SQL prompt update the hash_length field to its correct value update dbnode set hash_length value where value is the correct hash_length as calculated according to the formula Verify that the correct hash_length value now exists in the dbnode table select hash_start hash_length hash_end from dbnode The sample output should now be hash_start hash_length hash_end 41984 216760 692264 Exit SQL end Do not remove the unify db file Run the reconfiguration program scom again Since the hash_length value should no longer be zero the unify db file should no longer be corrupted However if you find that scom sets the hash_length back to zero please call Unify DataServer ELS Customer Support Database design utilities 155 8 5 Add drop B tree indexes idxmnt A B tree is an access method that uses a binary search method to find the rows that match a field value B tree indexes speed up random and sequential retrievals on large databases However B tree indexes make updates slower and use more disk space In general you should specify B tree indexes on fields that you use frequently in queries Although you could specify a B tree index on every field in a table it is not recommended This is because of disk space requirements and additional overhead imposed when updating the fields Up to eight fields can be pla
278. e environment variable You may need to reduce the size of another table to increase the size of this one The different tables and their maximum values are listed in the RPT Table Usage Information Report gt gt gt There are no B tree indexes to rebuild Explanation The data dictionary has no B tree index definitions gt gt gt There are no fields defined in the database design Explanation This message displays if a database design exists but contains tables with no fields For tables to be compiled they must have fields Correction Check your environment variables or current directory to make sure that you are referencing the correct database Use either Design and Create a New Database or Modify Database Design to correct your table definitions Unify DataServer ELS messages 657 658 gt gt gt There are no indexes for the given table Explanation The table name you have entered has no indexes defined Correction Make sure the table name is spelled correctly Use Print or Display B Tree Statistics to list the current B Tree index definitions gt gt gt There are no input records Explanation The input file has no data If you are using SQL to select the data try running the query by itself to make sure it produces results gt gt gt There are no more indexes in the set Explanation You have just deleted the last index for this table gt gt gt There are no screens defined Explanation You are
279. e file fields afa and send the output to the file unify afa You must recompile the source file each time after a database reconfiguration If any errors occur during the compile process error messages are sent to the file fields afa err The program re enters edit mode to let you view and modify both the error and source files p Print the Advanced field attributes source file fields afa Output is sent to the device specified by the SPOOLER environment variable or to the default print spooler device Ipr CTRL U Exit the Advanced field attributes program return to the current menu The Advanced field attributes afa compiler can also be run from the shell Use the following command syntax afac source file error file Where source file is the name of the file containing the Advanced field attribute definitions If you don t want error messages sent to the standard error device you can specify a file for error messages with the optional error file After you enter the afac command the compiler creates the unify afa file in the directory set by DBPATH or in the current directory if DBPATH is not set The maximum file size of unify afa is 64k bytes However machines with limited memory may not be able to accommodate a 64k byte unify afa file When Advanced field attributes are specified all programs that interface with AFA must be able to read the unify afa information into memory Programs that interface with AFA include ENTER
280. e file and confirm that the file exists gt gt gt Changing this parameter will turn transaction logging off Explanation If transaction logging is turned ON any changes to the transaction logging definition cause logging to be turned OFF until a backup is performed gt gt gt Column number must be between 0 and 79 Explanation On an 80 column terminal only columns 0 through 79 are valid x coordinates for the go to command gt gt gt Column number must be between 0 and 131 Explanation Ona 132 column terminal only columns 0 through 131 are valid x coordinates for the go to command gt gt gt COMB type fields are not allowed give their elements separately Explanation Only NUMERIC STRING DATE LDATE TIME FLOAT or AMOUNT fields can be used in an index definition gt gt gt Compilation complete Explanation The source file has been successfully compiled and the output placed in the file unify afa in the directory set by DBFATH gt gt gt Complete Please enter RETURN to continue Explanation This part of the Report Option process is finished gt gt gt Database is empty use Create Database Explanation There is no data in the database Correction Use Create Database to create the database Unify DataServer ELS messages 611 612 gt gt gt Data dictionary not updated Explanation The temporary file used for reconfiguration could not be created for some reason so the data dictionary wa
281. e functions are not allowed in the where clause Explanation Aggregate functions can only be used in the having and select clauses You must rewrite the query to use a having clause if you want to select records based on an aggregate function Invalid Query select job from emp where avg salary gt 1000 Correction select job from emp group by job having avg salary gt 1000 Unify DataServer ELS messages 601 602 gt gt gt Aggregate functions may not be nested without a group by clause Explanation Invalid Query Correction Because an aggregate function calculates a single value for a group of values SQL does not let you apply an aggregate to a single value This occurs when you try to nest aggregate functions without using a group by clause select sum avg salary from emp select sum avg salary from emp group by job gt gt gt Aggregate functions nested too deeply in the select clause Explanation Invalid Query Correction Aggregate functions can only be nested to two levels select max sum avg salary from emp select max sum salary from emp group by dept_no gt gt gt An aggregate function is required when using a group by clause Explanation Invalid Query Correction A group by clause can only be used to group records for the subsequent evaluation of an aggregate function SQL does not let you group records and not calculate an agg
282. e line number in the db suffix Except for the root volume files to be used as file volumes must exist before you define them on the Define database volumes screen Define database volumes verifies that these files exist For non root file volumes the program does not let you enter the name of a file that it cannot find in the directory specified in DBPATH the current directory if DBPATH is not set or the directories specified in VOLPATH The example in Figure 9 5 illustrates how a file system can be used to store a Unify DataServer ELS database with four file volumes u1 db1 spare DaT vol3 vol1 vol2 bin data db3 data db1 data db2 file db file dbr Figure 9 5 File system structure In this example the DBPATH and VOLPATH environment variables are set as follows BPATH ul dbl bin VOLPATH ul dbl voll ul dbl vol2 ul spare vol3 204 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Figure 9 6 summarizes the difference between file volumes and device volumes File volumes Device volumes are stored in a file system as are stored on raw disk space ordinary files can only be accessed using the can be accessed directly by the Unify access operating system file access routines without using the operating stem access runtiness routines Figure 9 6 Comparison of file versus device volumes Defining database volumes Start the program by selecting Define database volumes volmnt from the dat
283. e maintenance utilities This chapter describes the Unify DataServer ELS options available to ensure that your database can be recovered if it is damaged or lost These options let you write database backups read database backups rebuild the hash table rebuild explicit relationships and define database volumes It is recommended that you back up your database daily especially if it is updated frequently Then if a hardware failure destroys file system integrity or a bad block develops on the disk you can restore the database file to a recent state Write Database Backup lets you do this Unify DataServer ELS also has an option to log all transactions made between the database backups The Read database backup option reads in the latest backup and replays the transaction log By setting the transaction logging parameters with Transaction logging status a more accurate recovery of your database is ensured following a system crash For more information about Transaction logging see section 12 1 If a failure occurs and you suspect that database integrity has been disturbed Unify DataServer ELS lets you rebuild the database hash table and explicit relationships For example if you suddenly cannot access a record or group of records by key you can Rebuild the hash table section 9 3 Similarly if queries or programs that use explicit relationships begin to yield inconsistent results you can use Rebuild Explicit Relationships secti
284. e of a total of three fields contained in the dept table The dept table contains the fields Dept_No Dept_Name and Dept_Location SQL checks the undefined fields for Advanced Field Attribute default values and substitutes the appropriate field values In this example the name and location fields have AFA defaults defined as the string Miscellaneous EXAMPLE Add anew department named Miscellaneous Use 99 for the department number and allow the name and location fields to default to the string Miscellaneous sql gt insert into dept Dept_No lt 99 gt recognized update 1 record s added You can verify the update to the dept table sql gt select from dept where Dept_No 99 recognized query Dept_No Dept_Name Dept_Location 99 Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Besides using literal tuples an insert statement can use the results of a query statement to obtain its values Suppose there is a new table in the database named candidates which contains the fields Number Name Dept_No and Salary You can select people from the emp table and put them into this new table Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE Select all employees who have commissions larger than half their salaries Make corresponding entries in the candidates table sql gt insert into candidates sql gt select Number Name Dept_No Salary sql gt from cap sql gt where Commission gt 0 5 Salary recognized update
285. e prompt clears and the cursor moves to the data entry area directly under the FIELD column heading As in the table entry screen RETURN moves the cursor forward while CTRL U moves it backward Creating the database The second phase of Design and Create a New Database lets you choose to print the database design create an empty database create data entry screens and create a menu These operations can be performed in several combinations When you exit the design phase with a CTRL U at the paging prompt the following message displays dbcreat Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Design and Create a New Database ECTE LONG NAME ESCRITION manf manufacturer model model item inventory_item customer customer order orders You have now finished entering your database design If you would like to automatically print the design create the database data entry screens and a menu type y Type n to return to the menu Proceed Database design utilities 131 An n no answer ends Design and Create a New Database and redisplays the active menu A y yes answer causes the following prompts to display Print Database Design JB Create Database Create Data Entry Screens Create Menu Type y to select an option n to ignore one Move the cursor with RETURN to each prompt and enter either a y or an n to select your operations You must answer each prompt to continue
286. e replace transfer and video modes to edit screen field prompts Replace mode lets you replace existing characters with characters you type Transfer mode lets you move complete lines or screen fields to new locations on the screen form Video mode lets you reset the video attributes of screen text or prompts To remind you which mode you are using PAINT displays the current edit mode in the top left corner of the screen You can cancel any mode by pressing the escape command key PAINT treats each line separately You may notice this when insert line inserts a new line without switching to input mode and when input mode lets you enter new text on the current line but does not let you move to a new line The prompt editing commands are as follows Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference append input mode Switches from command mode to input mode so you can enter new text after the current cursor position As you enter characters existing screen fields and prompts shift right As the line shifts prompt characters in the right most column are lost However if a screen field is in the right most column you cannot enter new characters that would push the field off screen insert input mode Switches from command mode to input mode so you can enter new text before the current cursor position Otherwise this command works the same as the append input mode command replace mode Switches from command mode to replace mode so you c
287. e same time Furthermore all the updates performed by a single DML statement are treated as a logical transaction for database recovery when transaction logging is turned on insert statement 390 The DML insert statement lets you add records to the database This statement consists of the insert keyword followed by the into clause The into clause includes the name of the table to add records to followed by constant values or values returned as the result of a query The insert statement can also be used to add records from an external file For more information see Loading Data from External Files in section 16 3 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For information on the insert statement syntax see Formal Language Syntax in section 16 5 You can use field value validation and default value features of Advanced Field Attributes AFA with the insert statement For information on AFA or for field validation and default value warning messages see Advanced Field Attributes section 8 6 You can add specific field values to a record by listing the field names followed by the associated field values You must always specify primary key field names and values Other field values not specified or set to a predefined Advanced Field Attribute are set to the standard default values zeros for NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT and TIME fields null for STRING DATE LDATE TEXT and BINARY fields For insert error messages refer to Mess
288. eading The effect of a group by clause is to sort the selected rows by the indicated fields then perform the aggregate functions at each level break The output of this query is sorted also Use the group by clause only for queries that contain aggregate functions See how payroll is being allocated to the various departments EXAMPLE For each department list the department number employee count and total salary plus commission sql gt select Dept_No count sum Salary commission sql gt from emp sql gt group by Dept_No recognized query Dept_No count sum Salary Commission 10 4 10300 000 20 3 6150 000 30 2 6800 00 40 3 10800 00 50 2 3300 00 60 3 6300 00 70 2 1750 00 You can use more than one field in a group by clause resulting in more divisions in the calculation Find the average salary by job title in departments 10 20 and 30 This tells you what department pays the highest wage for a given job Find the average salary by job title in departments 10 20 and 30 This tells you what department pays the highest wage for a given job EXAMPLE List the department number job employee count and the average salary for each job title by department for departments 10 20 and 30 sql select Dept_No Job count avg Salary sql gt from emp SQL Query DML language 373 sql gt where Dept_No is in 10 20 30 gt sql gt group by Dept_No Job recognized query Dept_No Job count
289. ease enter a name CTRL U to backup Explanation The SCREEN prompt expects a valid screen name Correction If you want to return to the menu press CTRL U Unify DataServer ELS messages 639 640 gt gt gt Please enter a screen field name CTRL U to backup Explanation Correction To enter a screen field you must first enter a name for that screen field Press RETURN Then enter a screen field name gt gt gt Please enter a type CTRL U to backup Explanation Correction If you do not enter a database field name you must enter a field type for the screen field being added or modified Press RETURN Then enter a valid field type Or return to the previous prompt and enter a valid database field name gt gt gt Please mount backup media volume nnn Enter Y to continue N to abort Explanation Correction This prompt tells you to mount backup tape or diskette volume number nnn To continue mount the specified diskette or tape volume and press the volume will begin to read gt gt gt Prog menu unknown Explanation Correction The program or menu that you are trying to enter as a menu line cannot be found in the data dictionary Check for any spelling mistakes You can use Print Menus to get a list of menus and Print List of Programs to get a list of programs For more information see Sections 11 2 and 11 7 gt gt gt Read error BUDB Explanation There has been an
290. east one index was not rebuilt Explanation This message displays if the Rebuild B tree Indexes program cannot rebuild all the indexes Detailed error messages are sent to the file called errlog in your database application s bin directory Correction Exit this program Make sure the database file system has enough space Fix the problems described in the error log then try to rebuild the indexes gt gt gt B tree index xxxx is missing or has incorrect permissions Rebuild it if you want it to be used Explanation This message displays if the B tree index file has been removed or has incorrect access privileges Correction If the B tree index file exists make sure you have read and write privileges for the file If the B tree index file does not exist and you want to use this B tree with your database rebuild the B tree index gt gt gt Backup complete Explanation The backup has been successfully written Any keyboard response returns you to the menu gt gt gt Backup device is off line Retry Explanation The Read Database Backup device is either not turned on or is not on line Correction If you want to try again correct the problem and respond with a Y or y The backup volume will begin to read If you want to exit the program respond with CTRL U N orn Unify DataServer ELS messages 605 606 gt gt gt Backup device off line or not write enabled Try again Explanation Correction T
291. eates a shared memory segment The default setting for SHMMAX is 32767 63 SHMMIN SPOOLER SQLPMEM SQLSMEM The minimum shared memory segment size The Lock Manager uses SHMMIN with SHMMAX The Lock Manager must be able to find a shared memory segment equal to the setting of SHMMIN for Unify DataServer ELS to run The default setting for SHMMIN is 4096 bytes The name of your system s line printer spooler You should set this to the standard operating system spooler usually lpr If you want you can also specify options for the spooler For example if you want to get a mail message after the file is printed you can set SPOOLER as follows SPOOLER lpr m This environment variable must be set so that output can be piped or redirected to SPOOLER using one of the following syntax forms cat filename SSPOOLER SSPOOLER lt filename SSPOOLER filename filename2 If however you would prefer to send output to an ordinary ASCII file instead of to a printer you can set SPOOLER as follows SPOOLER l1prf where lprf is an executable shell script as follows cat gt lprf out The amount of memory used during an SQL sort to hold projected fields the fields in the select clause that are not part of the order by clause If this variable is set too low and the sort needs more memory for projected fields the overflow is stored in a disk file This slows down sort performance The default value is 0 For
292. ecause in the report script customer is the last expression name in the sort command state city and customer are report fields in the example A report field is the simplest and most common type of named expression The value of a report field is the value of the corresponding data element in the current line of the input file The field s default name is the actual name of the field More complex expressions composed of several fields operators and functions can be assigned a name in the sort command Then the expression can be referred to by this name throughout of the report The following report script contains most of the commands used to produce the example report It shows the commands necessary for Control break processing sort state city customer state city customer orderno and price are database fields before state print STATE state z1 before city print CITY in column 6 city before customer need 4 print CUSTOMERS col 10 ORDER col 38 AMOUNT col 54 print 9 col 36 11 col 51 print customer in col 10 detail print orderno col 36 price col 52 using S SS SS amp amp amp after customer need 2 print 11 in column 51 print total price column 51 using SSSS SS amp amp amp skip I Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference after city need 2 print SALES in column 6 city total price column 49 using S S SS SS amp am
293. ecification file Each record in the file consists of fields delimited by separators and ends with a newline character DBLOAD ignores extra blanks in the field but if STRING fields are shorter than their database design definitions DBLOAD completes the STRING fields with blanks before loading them in the database Figure 12 3 illustrates the free format of specification and input files INPUT FILE Moehr 70 clerk 6400 950 00 0 00 5700 Colucci 40 salesrep 2200 2500 00 3000 00 6700 Amato 40 salesrep 6200 2000 00 750 00 5800 Fiorella 70 clerk 5700 800 00 0 00 68000 Brown 60 engineer 1300 6000 00 0 00 5900 SPECIFICATION FILE Name Dept_No Job Manager Salary Commission Number Figure 12 3 DBLOAD Input and Specification File Formats In these examples the record key is the last field not the first If they have been defined for the fields in the input file advanced field attributes can be used with DBLOAD because DBLOAD also interfaces with Advanced field attributes AFA This lets DBLOAD validate field entries for new and existing records and set default field values for new records When inserting records DBLOAD fills in AFA defaults if the fields are NOT specified in the DBLOAD specification file and they have AFA defaults defined For more information about Advanced Field Attributes see section 8 6 Miscellaneous utilities 279 12 7 Program loading Ifilegen The Program loading Ifi
294. eck the entry for misspellings gt gt gt Field unknown Explanation The field name that is being entered as a reference field or combination field cannot be found Correction Check the spelling of the field name to be entered gt gt gt Fields can t have table names Explanation The name you are trying to enter as a field name is already used as a table name Correction Use a different field name gt gt gt Illegal field type Explanation Fields must be of type NUMERIC AMOUNT FLOAT DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT or BINARY gt gt gt _ Illegal field type COMB Explanation COMB field types cannot be used directly Correction Enter each component of the COMB field separately Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt llegal use of variable xxxx Explanation A variable cannot be used in this context This error can be the result of a misspelled function keyword variable or field name Invalid Script sort czip x before report set x to 0 Correction sort czip x amount before report set x to 0 gt gt gt Input field xxxx ffff does not have its type specified and it is not a Unify DataServer ELS field Explanation RPT cannot find field ffff in the database table xxxx If this input field is an arbitrary name there may be no data type and length specification When using the syntax table fieldname make sure the input field name ffff is the access or long name for
295. eckref keyword can be used in the clause The data type and length of field must be identical to the referenced key field s data type and length You can use table to specify the table containing the key field to be referenced if field1 does not have an explicit relationship with a key field defined in the database design The table in Figure 8 17 describes the uses of the checkreference clause When field1 Then table has an explicit relationship with a key field may be entered or another table entered if its defined in the database design key field has the same data type and length does not have an explicit relationship with a key must be entered field defined in the database design Figure 8 17 Uses of the checkreference clause Database design utilities 171 An example file later in this chapter shows how to use the checkreference clause not This keyword negates all the legal values that follow it The value entered can be anything except the values listed filename The name of an ASCII file that contains the help documentation for the current field This file must be located in the hdoc directory relative to the DBPATH environment variable or relative to the current directory if DBPATH is not set FIELD SECTION STATEMENTS 172 The field section consists of the following statements e field statement FYI message statement error message statement help statement The Field statement Use the field
296. ect This can be caused by various errors The problem in the following invalid query is that the having clause needs a Boolean expression using a comparison operator such as lt or gt Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Invalid Query select dept_no from emp group by dept_no having max avg salary Correction select dept_no from emp group by dept_no having avg salary select max avg salary from emp group by dept_no gt gt gt Invalid help selection Explanation You are trying to select help by menu line number as in help nnn where nnn is not a valid selection for this menu gt gt gt Invalid length Explanation The value entered for this field s length is invalid The maximum display lengths for the various field types are as follows NUMERIC 9 FLOAT 179 AMOUNT 11 DATE n a defaults to 8 LDATE n a defaults to TIME n a defaults to 5 STRING 256 TEXT 256 BINARY n a COMB n a computed by system Unify DataServer ELS messages 625 626 gt gt gt Invalid query block Explanation SQL cannot recognize the query expression This can be caused by various errors such as a character or space after the final slash The problem in the following invalid query is that the keyword select is misspelled Invalid Query sellect name from emp Correction select name from emp gt gt gt Invalid range for field ffff record nnn Explanation The
297. ect group write permission for the user gt gt gt The create on tag file xxxx failed Explanation The RPT tag file named xxxx cannot be created This can be because the directory does not have enough space or the user does not have the correct group write permission gt gt gt The database field is not in the same table Explanation The field name you have entered is a valid database field name but it is not in the same table as the other fields in the index Correction Check the FIELD NAME entry You can list all tables and their valid field names using Print Database Design gt gt gt The database field name is not valid Explanation The field name you have entered is not in the data dictionary Correction Check the FIELD NAME entry You can list all tables and their valid field names using Print Database Design gt gt gt The database has been reconfigured To restart transaction logging backup the database Explanation The database has been recently reconfigured This caused transaction logging to be turned OFF Correction To turn transaction logging ON back up the database gt gt gt The field ffff is not in table xxxx Explanation The field you specified is a valid database field but it is not in the table XXXX Unify DataServer ELS messages 647 648 Invalid Query select emp location from emp Correction select dept location from dept gt gt gt The field name ffff is no
298. ectory name Suppose for example the program name is or 100 uld looks in src ord for the archive containing ord 100 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 12 4 Create or modify help documentation enthdoc The Create or modify help documentation program lets you develop help text to be associated with a menu option This help documentation displays on the screen when you enter help and the menu option name at the SELECTION prompt You can also send help text files to the printer using print help documentation section 11 6 To start this program select Create or modify help documentation enthdoc from the System administration menu The screen form for this option displays with the following prompt enthdoc Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Create or Modify Help Documentation ENU PROGRAM W The prompt on this screen is described as follows MENU PROGRAM Enter the system name of a menu program ENTER screen or SQL screen This system name is passed to the editor when it starts and is used for the help documentation file name The help documentation file is named in the following way DBPATH hdoc xxxx n where DBPATH is the directory path specified in the DBPATH environment variable and xxxx is the system name of the menu program ENTER screen or SQL screen you specified at the MENU PROGRAM prompt Miscellaneous utilities 273 274 If a file by the specified name exists it is opened for modifica
299. ecutes a Menu Handler operation The command name gives you an idea of what will happen when you press the command key Each command key set is displayed in the following format command key command name COMMAND NAMEACTION NAME COMMAND KEY select highlighted option select ESC FA move menu pointer up up U UP ARROW K move menu pointer down down RETURN DOWN ARROW J LINE FEED go to home menu home X HOME F2 go to pervious menu previous P F3 Figure 3 1 Unify DataServer ELS command key default settings Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference COMMAND NAMEACTION NAME COMMAND KEY clear selection line clear Z DELETE F4 exit Unify DataServer ELS exit D F5 display general Menu Handler help help F6 display more command keys more F10 display information about info TAB the highlighted menu line F6 A redraw screen redraw R F8 toggle command key line toggle AT on off F9 Figure 3 1 Unify DataServer ELS command key default settings In the previous table the symbol represents the CTRL key X means CTRL X You produce CTRL X by holding down the CTRL key and pressing the X key In other words you use the CTRL key just like the SHIFT key You can customize the command key definitions by modifying your unicap file See section 3 1 Customizing Menu Handler Cammands Looking at the Main Menu you initially have seven options to choose from You can make a selection in one of three ways by selection nu
300. ed Unify DataServer ELS before start by reviewing the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual It gives examples and step by step instructions for using Unify DataServer ELS tools to develop an application system For more information on designing and managing an RDBMS or on managing transactions locking and recovery the following sources are suggested Bernstein Philip A Vassos Hadzilacos and Nathan Goodman Concurrency Control and Recovery in Database Systems Reading Mass Addison Wesley 1987 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chamberlin Donald D Relational Data Base Management Systems Computing Surveys 8 March 1976 Date C J An Introduction to Database Systems 3rd ed Reading Mass Addison Wesley 1982 Martin James Computer Data Base Organization 2nd ed Englewood Cliffs N J Prentice Hall 1975 Salzberg Betty An Introduction to database Design Academic Press 1986 Salzberg Betty Third Normal Form Made Easy SIGMOD Record 15 No 4 December 1986 Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS 25 26 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 2 Unify DataServer ELS and the operating system environment In developing your Unify DataServer ELS application you sometimes have to deal directly with your computer s operating system Consequently the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Manual often refers to shell commands or operating system commands The
301. een entered to this table reload the external file data in the new table See Loading Data From External Files in section 16 3 or Database Load in section 12 6 Add a Field At the Field Entry screen form use add mode to enter the new field definition If a Field Exists or a Fields can t have table names message appears a Choose another name or b If you recently deleted a table or field name you want to use run Reconfigure Database scom and try again 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom If the added field is a key or COMB key component Run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey At the Field Entry screen form use add mode to delete the field definition 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom 3 If the deleted field is a key or COMB key component Run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey oo Delete a Field Figure 8 8 Allowable modifications to FIELD entry KEY A primary key is marked by the key indicator in the KEY column A primary key that contains more than one field is a combination key A combination key begins with the field type COMB marked with the key indicator followed by its component fields Deleting a field deletes existing data in the field Database design utilities 141 142 Figure 8 9 Allowable Modifications to KEY Entry If you want to Then Change an existing Key Field to a Non Key Field Change an Existing Non Key Field to a Key Field Add a Key Field Delete a
302. eep the screen form the same Enter ror CTRL U to resume editing the screen form exit Returns immediately to the menu and drops all changes made since the last save Customizing PAINT commands 308 In PAINT commands are entered with keystrokes command keys described in the PAINT section of the unicap file The PAINT section of the unicap file associates commands with specific keystrokes When you enter keystrokes associated with particular commands PAINT performs those commands You can easily change command definitions to use different command keystrokes by editing the unicap file See section 6 2 for a general description of unicap The internal command name and action of each PAINT command in the unicap file are shown in Figure 13 6 Name Action addfld add screen field app start append input mode bot move to last line co10 move to column 0 cpdisp toggle cursor position display ON OFF delch delete current character delfld delete current screen field delln delete current line down move cursor down endin move to end of line escape escape end current mode exit exit to the Menu Handler goto go to screen coordinates x y help print PAINT help home move cursor to home position ins start insert input mode Figure 13 6 PAINT command names and actions Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Name Action left modfld nrmion nxtin nxtw oplna oplnb prvw quit redraw rep right rvon rvulon screen
303. el the entry without changing the database ENTER redisplays the old data to verify that it has not changed However if you press RETURN after entering the field data CTRL U does not cancel the entry You can edit all fields in the target table this way except TEXT and BINARY fields ENTER can interface with a text editor and a binary editor to edit TEXT and BINARY fields Entering data in a text type field 336 To enter data to a TEXT field on a data entry screen place the cursor on the first character of the TEXT field display Then press CTRL V to start the TEXT field editor If the EDIT environment variable has been set the specified editor is used Otherwise the default text editor vi is used Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Enter data in a binary type field Before you can edit a BINARY field you must set the BINEDIT environment variable to specify a binary editor There is no default binary editor To edit a BINARY field on a data entry screen place the cursor on the position reserved for the BINARY field This is the same position that would be represented by a B on the screen form in PAINT Then press CTRL V to start editing the field with the editor specified in BINEDIT Changing data in a secondary table To change the data in a secondary table you must define another ENTER screen with that secondary table as the target Otherwise use a host language program to manage the screen form ENTER data
304. eld will never contain more than one value for each record A possible solution is the table shown in Figure 7 5 manfitem Primary Key manf_ID city 0001 Lynn 0001 Lynn 0001 Lynn 0001 Lynn 0001 Lynn 0001 Lynn 0002 Reston 0002 Reston 0003 Reston 0004 Lynn 0004 Lynn 0004 Lynn status 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 10 10 10 ser_no price 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 102 102 104 105 3 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 4 00 2 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 Figure 7 5 Database Design 2 manfitem table This refinement however means the table now needs both the manufacturer ID and the item serial number to uniquely identify one record For the record to be unique the primary key must contain both the manf_ID and ser_no fields This condition creates a combination primary key To determine whether Design 2 is a good relational database design consider how the design affects the three basic database operations of adding deleting and modifying Introduction to database design 97 1 Adding Can you add a new record if you don t yet know what items that manufacturer will supply No because a combination primary key requires values in each component field A new manufacturer cannot be added until that manufacturer supplies at least one item You need both a manufacturer ID and an item serial number to add a record for a new manufacturer For example you can t add a record for manufacturer 0008 l
305. elds displayed on the SQL screen correspond to SQL or RPT script parameters These fields are assigned the default display values shown in Figure 16 9 If the field data type is Then the default display value is NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE TIME STRING 0 0 0 00 wajar jer napanyee 00 00 BLANK Figure 16 9 Standard default display formats To specify a parameter value enter a valid SQL expression The expression will be substituted into the SQL script registered with this screen form Unify DataServer ELS SQL string constants can contain any combination of the special characters and which are used as follows The wildcard character The question mark matches a single character Thus if you want to find all the Smiths but don t know whether the spelling is Smith or Smyth you can use the specification Sm th The wildcard string The asterisk matches a string of characters of any length including zero length strings or null strings The character class The character class matches a single character that is a member of the class Ranges of characters can be specified by separating two characters with a dash For example all upper case letters can be represented by the class ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ or more conveniently as A Z All upper and lower case letters can be represented as A Za z Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Using the SQL report option screen
306. elephone numbers And A Z 0 9 A Z A C can be used to test for legal values of an inventory number of the general form A1B9999C Set all non STRING legal values by specifying a constant or a value greater than gt greater than or equal to gt less than lt less than or equal to lt Or specify the legal values as a range of constants FYI message statement Use the FYI message statement to specify the message you want displayed when the cursor is on this field of an ENTER screen This statement must begin with the FYI keyword The message displays on the bottom line of the screen and can be up to 74 characters long Error message statement Use the error message statement to specify text that displays if the value entered for a field does not match a legal value This statement must begin with the ERROR keyword The message displays on the bottom line of the screen and can be up to 74 characters long Help statement Use the help statement to identify the file that displays when the user asks for help documentation on this field You can display this file on an ENTER screen form by pressing CTRL U or TAB while the cursor is at this field This statement must begin with the HELP keyword followed by the name of the ASCII file Unify DataServer ELS looks for this file in the directory ndoc relative to the Database design utilities 177 DBPATH environment variable Text displays on the screen exactly
307. em administrator can set up the Unify DataServer ELS startup program unify as the shell When users log into the operating system they will see the Unify DataServer ELS login screen instead of the standard shell Or the system administrator can arrange to bypass the Unify DataServer ELS login screen entirely and have users see their first Unify DataServer ELS menu upon logging into the operating system The startup file for the Menu Handler is named unify This is the command that you enter to display the Unify DataServer ELS login screen and begin to run a Unify DataServer ELS application The unify file also sets the appropriate environment variables exports them and starts the Unify DataServer ELS shell script Unify DataServer ELS is in the Unify DataServer ELS bin directory and actually displays the menus and controls security To define unify as the shell for a user first set the appropriate entry in the operating system password file Then set up the login or profile file to establish the correct environment and run unify The Menu Handler 41 If you do not use the DBPATH environment variable the user home directory must be the application bin directory see Directories section 4 2 Customizing Menu Handler commands 42 In the standard version of the Menu Handler each command is invoked by using the keystroke command key described in the unicap file The key emits a character or character sequence that the Menu Hand
308. ename STRING 30 Name depno NUMERIC 9 Dept_No dept 3 department dnum NUMERIC 9 Number dloc STRING 30 Location Figure 8 20 Example file database design The database also has the Advanced field attributes file shown in figure 8 21 record type emp Number unique 200 Name FYI Pleas nter th mployer s full name Dept_No 20 checkreference dept HELP dept help ERROR This is an invalid department number reenter number record type dept Number 20 20 30 40 55 60 69 72 80 85 88 90 L03 105 lt TL0 120 ELP dept help RROR This is an invalid department number reenter number Location BLOC Chicago New York Bismark Portland San Francisco Miami Dallas Denver Salt Lake City Phoenix Lexington ELP location help RROR This is not a legal location display help if you need a listing Figure 8 21 Example file advanced field attributes file Fa Aa Note that the checkreference keyword is entered in the Dept_No field statement of the emp table Database design utilities 179 Consequently the only values that can be entered for Dept_No are existing values of NUMBER In this example a table is entered for the Dept_No checkreference definition because the field depno does not have an explicit relationship defined with the key field dnum 180 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 9 Databas
309. ent field If you delete a field any B tree index associated with this field is dropped when the database is created or reconfigured Renumber the current field as shown and then reorder the fields on the screen form You cannot renumber the primary key field Also you cannot renumber component subfields of a COMB field except by renumbering the COMB field Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference FIELD KEY REF TYPE q Redisplay the operation prompt at the bottom of the screen A unique field name of up to 8 characters The field name can contain only letters upper and lower case numbers and the underscore character _ It must begin with a letter This name is used to reference the field in several Unify DataServer ELS options While entering data a CTRL U in the field definition entry area under FIELD ends data entry mode The primary key marker An asterisk in this column marks the current field as the primary key of the table NOTE TEXT and BINARY type fields cannot be used as primary keys The name of the primary key of another table It establishes an explicit relationship to another table The data type of the field For all data types except TEXT type specify a data type by entering the first character of the type in upper or lower case Specify a TEXT data type by entering x or te in upper or lower case The table in Figure 8 1 summarizes the valid data types comparing their display and inter
310. ent line contains a screen field the screen field must be deleted with the delete screen field command Transfers the current line to a new position on the screen form The line can contain both prompts and screen fields To move a line press the transfer key to start the transfer command move the cursor to a new position and press the transfer command key again The line is then moved from its old position and to the new position You can use such nonprinting cursor motion command keys as left arrow to move the cursor The transfer command can be canceled at any time with the escape command You can set video display attributes with the normal reverse underline and reverse underline video commands normal video Displays characters in normal intensity bright characters on a dark background reverse video Displays characters in reverse video dark characters on a light background underline video Underlines characters reverse underline video 302 Displays characters in reverse video and underlined Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The video control commands work as follows 1 Move the cursor to one end of the area where you want to change the video attribute 2 Enter the appropriate video command key to cause a mark character to display 3 Move the cursor to the other end of the area either to the right or the left of the mark character You can use any of the cursor motion commands that do
311. entered skip 2 print cnumber name state in column 18 Correction input cnumber number 8 name string 30 state string 2 width 35 detail print This is a listing of customers centered skip 2 638 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference print cnumber state in column 3 print name gt gt gt Parent must be of the same table Explanation You are trying to use a field in another table as the COMB FIELD entry for a field The entry must be the name of a combined field in the current table Correction Check the entry for misspellings gt gt gt Please enter or space Explanation Valid entries for the KEY column are either an asterisk which marks the current field as the primary key for the table or a space for all other fields You might be in the wrong column gt gt gt Please enter a database field name CTRL U to backup Explanation If you want to build a relationship between the screen field and a database field you must enter the name of a valid field in this database If you want this screen field to accept values only i e as in an SQL screen you can skip this database field prompt But you must enter valid type and length values gt gt gt Please enter a length CTRL U to backup Explanation After entering a field type you must enter a valid length Correction Press CTRL U to return to the field edit prompt Then enter a database field name gt gt gt Pl
312. ents in a 50 character wide column starting at column 20 use the following print statement print text_field using 50r col 20 set SYNTAX set variable to expr USE This command sets a variable to the result of an expression expr is any expression that is valid in the current command group The set command is valid in every command group There must be at least one set command for every variable used in a script For more information see Variables in section 17 5 skip SYNTAX skip number USE This command leaves number of lines blank before printing continues If you omit number 1 is assumed Only lines available for printing in the current context are counted For example the top and bottom margins are always ignored 540 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 17 10 Using RPT with other Unify DataServer ELS tools Unify DataServer ELS provides built in interfaces to RPT from SQL and ENTER to simplify application building RPT can also read any ASCII input file It then can be used from the shell and by custom user programs SQL Screen form report interface section 16 4 describes the SQL RPT interface as it affects SQL Similarly the Register screen form with ENTER section 15 1 and Using ENTER screens for query by forms section 15 4 describe how the ENTER RPT interface affects ENTER section 17 10 describes what kind of RPT scripts you can write and how to write them using this interface This chapter also describ
313. er ELS database To do this first analyze the types of queries and updates you 87 88 want to perform Then compare what you want to do with your database to the Unify DataServer ELS access methods to select the best approach Unify DataServer ELS provides four access methods hashing explicit relationships B tree indexes and buffered sequential access The decision on which method to use is based on how often an item is modified or queried update speed versus query speed and the size and complexity of the database The Data Access Methods subsection describes the Unify DataServer ELS access methods in terms of the functions they best support Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 7 1 Database elements The first step in database design is to develop a preliminary list of the elements you need to include in the database These will become the fields in your database tables To develop a preliminary list of fields talk to the prospective users of the database application Determine what information users need to maintain and report Make a list of definitions and common terms you can use For example in companies where some people refer to parts as items and some refer to parts as products users must agree on the term the database will use to refer to parts Do not apply any constraints at this stage of database development Your goal in this step is to make a list that is as complete as possible In later steps
314. er x You see this message and the utility ends User requested exit sh If you want to escape to the operating system enter sh You see this message Pushing shell Type exit to return To return to this step in the licensing process enter exit at the operating system prompt If you do not specify a product to license unify you are prompted for a product choice Select one of the following products to license UNIFY database ACCEWIDS Runtime ACCELL IDS Development election 1 2 3 S 1 The licensing procedure continues Check the status of your release s licensing by using the prlcinf utility Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide unsup pricinf bin executable_name See the table at the beginning of this appendix for a list of executable names Licensing during installation To license your software release during the product installation process complete these steps Step 1 If you are licensing a release for the first time select an appropriate licensing option from this menu A licensing key has not been entered in the file install license key Select one of the following licensing options 1 Enter license key now 2 Continue installation and license the release later 3 Terminate installation Selection Enter license key If you select 1 you can enter your license key code when the utility prompts you with this message
315. er group a Add mode This lets you add a user group and its access privileges m Modify mode This lets you change the access privileges of a user group d Delete mode This lets you delete a user group and its access privileges GROUP ID A code of up to four characters to identify the user group NAME A name of up to 30 characters used for user group identification and documentation only SYSTEM ENTRY PT The system name of the menu that users in this group see after they log into Unify DataServer ELS if they do not have a different individual entry point specified N ext page P rev page A dd line or number The paging prompt This prompt lets you choose the operation mode for the paging area The meaning of each selection is as follows n Displays the next page of access privileges p Displays the previous page of access privileges Database security utilities 219 220 a Moves the cursor to the access privilege data entry area so you can add access privileges 1 999 Accesses the privilege on line nnn and positions the cursor at that line so that you can modify or delete it column to the left of LN LN MENU PROG M P Because of space restrictions there is no name for this column But it is the same column as the CMD column on the table entry screen This is where you enter operation commands for the current access privilege The cursor position marks the current access privilege In the paging area
316. er or load data into database tables To enter or load data in database tables you can use either of two methods e use the database Load DBLOAD program to load records from an ordinary ASCII file e use an ENTER screen for data entry Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS 23 References 24 For more information about how to enter data see Section 12 6 Database Load or Section 15 2 Using ENTER for Data Entry Create screens scripts or reports as needed You will want to provide a way for users to view data Depending on the type of information needed use one or more of the following methods for displaying data e Create screen forms for viewing or querying records interactively from the screen For detailed information see chapter 13 Screen Form Development Tools e Create SQL scripts for querying the database and printing simple lists of data For detailed information see chapter 16 SQLQuery DML Language e Create RPT scripts for running routine reports with customized formats For detailed information see chapter 17 RPT Report Processor Set up security and add users to the database To set up database security and add users to the database you must determine how much of the database you want users to be able to access and which operations you want to allow these users to perform For general information about database security see chapter 10 database Security Utilities If you have never us
317. er screen form name Press CTRL U to return to the Create or modify screen forms menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part V Data entry and retrieval Part V Data entry and retrieval contains chapters 15 and 16 Chapter 15 ENTER data entry query by forms describes how you can use ENTER screens to query the database add or modify data and print reports Chapter 16 SQL query dml language describes the Unify DataServer ELS query language SQL and Unify DataServer ELS data manipulation language DML 323 324 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 15 ENTER data entry query by forms This chapter explains ENTER and how it can be used ENTER is a general purpose program that enables you to develop data entry and inquiry screen forms without writing a custom program It lets you add data to a database quickly and efficiently and provides a powerful and easy to use query interface This interface enables you to find and display data using a screen form Once the data is selected you can update delete or summarize it in a report This chapter describes the features that make ENTER so powerful and easy to use 1 You can register a screen form with ENTER and associate the screen form with RPT report scripts and custom programs For more information about RPT see chapter 17 For more information about custom programs see the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual You can then use the
318. er the string constant matches remaining right end spaces The character class The character class matches a single character that is a member of the class For example all upper case letters can be represented by the character class ABCDEFGHIJKLKNOPORS TUVWXYZ You can specify a range of characters by separating two characters with a dash Consequently a more convenient way to represent all upper case letters is by A Z The character class that represents all upper and lower case letters is A Za z You can construct other classes similarly The character class specifier is basically a wildcard character with a defined replacement set It is often used with the question mark or the asterisk to define a range or set of possible results Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following string constant matches the state codes from A through F such as AZ CA and FL The GKHI string constant matches the state codes beginning with the indicated letters A F IGKHI Consider the effect of replacing the question marks with asterisks You can tell RPT to ignore the meaning of the special characters and in a single quoted string constant by preceding them with the backslash character This also applies to the single quote character and the backslash character itself String operators Character strings can be manipulated with the three Unify DataServer ELS string operators
319. eral tuples can be used when comparing SQL Query DML language 433 434 for equality with the left side of a Boolean expression Each tuple list is constructed with commas separating the tuples and with parentheses enclosing the list as follows lt f1 f2 gt is in lt c1 C2 gt lt c3 c4 gt This is equivalent to the more cumbersome expression f1 cl and f2 c2 or 1 c3 and f2 c4 gt gt The comparison operators In order they are equal not equal greater lt lt than greater than or equal to less than and less than or equal to in These two operators are equivalent to the equal sign They are is in provided so queries involving literal tuples read naturally You can use either these operators or the equal sign between and This is a single operator that makes ranges easier to specify The normal way to specify a range in a query language is as follows field lt c1 and field gt c2 Using this operator the expression reads field between c1 and c2 This is a more natural way to specify ranges and The conjunction operator Two simple Boolean expressions can be connected with and to form a compound Boolean expression The compound expression is true if both simple expressions are true It is false if either simple expression is false or The disjunction operator Two simple Boolean expressions can be connected with or to form a compound Boolean expression The Unify DataServer ELS
320. ere N is chosen on the basis of the data to be searched the length of the fields to be indexed and the disk block size The search is most efficient when each of the N categories contains an equal number of search objects B trees are designed to keep an equal number of entries in each category They are balanced Unify DataServer ELS lets you build up to 255 B trees containing up to eight fields each within a database You can create B trees using the option Add Drop B Tree Indexes B trees excel in three types of queries 1 Retrieving records in sequence sorted by the values in the indexed fields 2 Locating records when the exact value is not known but the beginning of the value is known For example a B tree can quickly locate all people whose last names begin with Joh as in John Johnson and Johnston However a B tree cannot locate people whose last names end with son as in Ellison Johnson and Thompson 3 Locating records in a given range such as all amounts between 5 00 and 10 00 or all dates between January and January 31 B trees can also be used to speed up joins when you don t want to use an explicit relationship For example suppose you have customer and order tables and the customer number is stored in the order You can build a non unique B tree on the customer number in the order table and find all orders for a specific customer by searching for the customer number Unify DataServer ELS Devel
321. eries that exceed one table but barely use another Usually you don t have to change the SQL internal table sizes You will have to change the internal table size if SQL displays an error message that says one of the tables is too small On computer hardware with limited data address space you can reduce the SQL table sizes and make room for larger database designs You reset a table size by setting an SQL environment variable SQL internal tables and environment variables The following is an explanation of each internal SQL table with its environment variable The table name is printed in boldface and the corresponding environment variable name is in italics In each explanation a query refers to a complete query from select through the terminating slash Expression Nodes SQLNODECNT This table sets the number of expression nodes allowed in a query Each expression used in a query requires one expression node The default number of expression nodes is 100 SQL expressions are described in Query Facilities in section 16 1 SQL Query DML language 405 406 Fields SQLFLDCNT This table sets the total number of fields allowed in a query The default number of fields per query is 100 Constants SQLCONCNT This table sets the total number of constants allowed in a query The SQL constant table includes STRING NUMERIC DATE LDATE TIME and AMOUNT constants The default number of constants per query is 100 Constants and their
322. erneath the other starting after the longest prompt The screen form s heading is the target table s long or regular name followed by the word Maintenance Any underscore characters are changed to spaces and appropriate letters are capitalized The prompts align in one two or three columns A field s prompt is its access name which is either the field s long name or the field s regular or implicit name In either case all underscore characters are replaced with spaces An implicit name consists of a field s regular name followed by the regular name of the field it references The referenced field can also reference another field thereby adding to the implicit name The component fields of a COMB field have separate prompts If a field references a COMB field a separate prompt is created for each referenced component field For example suppose you want to create a default screen form for the customer table in the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual Figure 13 1 shows the customer table design Table field Ref Type Len Long name customer 20 customer cnum NUMERIC 5 Customer_Number cname STRING 30 Name caddr STRING 30 Address Figure 13 1 customer table design Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Table field Ref Type Len Long name ccity STRING 20 City cstate STRING State czip STRING Zip _Code cphone STRING 14 Phone_Number Figure 13 1 customer table design Select Create default screen form cd
323. error reading the database or data dictionary Any keyboard response returns you to the menu This usually happens only if someone else is updating the database at the same time you are writing the backup Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction Make sure no one is using the database and restart the backup NOTE Another reason for this error can be a bad disk block in the database and the operating system can no longer read the disk In this case you must reformat the disk to remove the bad block then recover the database froma previous backup gt gt gt Record not deleted due to related records Explanation Other records in the database also reference this record Therefore this record cannot be deleted Correction You must delete the related records before you can delete this record gt gt gt Record nnn attempt to modify the key of a record with children Explanation Record nnn of the input file specifies an update to the key field of a database record that has explicit relationships with other records The record has not been updated gt gt gt Record nnnn is a duplicate key Explanation The record number nnn of the input file has a key value that exists in the database This is an error if you are inserting new records but it is not an error if you are updating existing records gt gt gt Record too large Explanation The record being added is too large to fit in ENTER s 2K byte buffer
324. ers are represented by their normal printed form Caret backslash and less than have special meanings in their normal printed forms so they must be represented as escape characters escape character A representation of a nonprinting special character character This Termcap and Unicap 75 76 includes caret backslash and less than Escape characters are represented as shown in Figure 6 4 Representation Figure 6 4 Escape characters control character Meaning Escape New line Return Tap Back Space Form Feed Caret Backslash Less Than A representation of a possible control key character Control characters are represented as illustrated in Figure 6 5 Representation Meaning any I AN AN A A Figure 6 5 Control characters octal character letter from A Z CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL_ A representation of a nonprinting character that character cannot be represented any other way or a printing character that has a special meaning when represented as itself Octal characters are composed of a backslash followed by three octal digits octal digits range from 0 to 7 000 is not a valid octal character The space character must be Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference represented as an octal character because literal spaces are ignored in the unicap file Its octal representation is 040 imaginary character A representation of nonstandard character sequences chara
325. erver ELS Developer s Reference delete screen field Deletes the current screen field The current screen field name displays in the top right corner of the screen beside F Current screen field means the cursor is positioned on that field transfer screen field Transfers the current screen field to a new position After you enter the command move the cursor to an appropriate position and press the transfer field command key again You can use any cursor motion commands to move the cursor If the field does not fit in the new position PAINT lets you position the cursor again The transfer command can be canceled at any time with the escape command add screen field Switches from command mode to screen field edit mode To add a screen field position the cursor on a blank area where there is enough space for the field When you enter this command the last two lines on the screen are erased and the field edit prompts display modify screen field Switches from command mode to screen field edit mode To modify a screen field position the cursor on an existing screen field When you enter this command the last two lines on the screen are erased and the field edit prompts display FIELD EDIT PROMPTS The field edit prompts that display at the bottom of the screen when you enter the add screen field or modify screen are used as follows SCREEN FIELD A unique 8 character screen field name The name is used to refer to the s
326. es The following query uses the tables emp and mgr The name mgr is only a temporary name assigned to the emp table 386 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE List the employees names and salaries and their managers names and salaries for employees who earn more than their managers sql gt select emp Name emp Salary mgr Name agr Salary sql gt from emp emp agr sql gt where emp Salary gt mgr Salary and sql gt emp Manager mgr Number recognized query emp Namel lemp Salary mgr Name mgr Salary Lee 7500 00 Lee 7500 00 Colucci 2500 00 Dugan 1650 00 Amato 2000 00 Dugan 1650 00 You can join many different temporary tables not just two Suppose you discover that when managers are in the same location as their subordinates employee relations are improved and productivity increases 50 You would naturally want to know which employees are in a location other than their managers so you could correct the situation Conceptually this query requires joining four tables one for employees one for employees departments one for managers and one for managers departments EXAMPLE List the employees names and locations and their managers names and locations for those employees who are in locations other than their managers sql gt select emp Name dept Location mgr Name agr_dept Location sql gt from emp dept emp mgr dept mgr_dept
327. es how to run RPT from the shell and how you can use RPT in programs you write using the host language interface SQL by forms and RPT A convenient feature of SQL by forms section 16 4 is the ability to format the results of an SQL query using RPT However for the SQL query and the RPT script to communicate with each other the fields and expressions you select with SQL must match the input section of the RPT script The fields in the select clause of the SQL query and the fields in the input section of the RPT script must be in the same order and of the same data type One way to make sure SQL and RPT fields and expressions match is to use the corresponding table field name in the RPT script for simple fields you select Use a name followed by a data type and length for fields that are the result of an expression or aggregate function Another way to make sure SQL and RPT fields and expressions match is to print the user supplied selection parameters of the report For example suppose you have a report that accepts a date range and a status code from the user You want a title page on the report to show what has been entered You can use parameters in the RPT script to do this RPT Report processor 541 542 Parameters are place holders that mark where the corresponding values from the screen form should be substituted You can use parameters throughout an RPT script provided the script is still syntactically correct after the va
328. es of UNIFY and HLI programs stored on disk that are used by the Menu Handler The HLI program names are entered using execmnt The default Expected number of records is 100 Menu and program names mprec contains menu names and the actual names used to invoke an HLI program entered through execmnt The disk file names are contained in coreld Execmnt updates this table The default Expected number of records is 200 Menu line items mline contains information about menu line items The default Expected number of records is 300 Security groups groups contains information about each security group The default Expected number of records is 20 Employee Users employ contains information about each user entry The default Expected number of records is 50 Employee user access empacc contains permission information for users that are not defined in the groups table Each access information entry corresponds to 1 program per employee The default Expected number of records is 500 Group access grpacc contains group access information for programs or screens Each record corresponds to 1 program or screen per group ID The default Expected number of records is 1000 Screen definitions screen contains screen definition information Each record corresponds to 1 screen The default Expected number of records is 100 Screen fields scfield field information for each screen Each entry corresponds to 1 screen field The default Expecte
329. es the table later in the query Labels are temporary names used in self join and variable queries For more information see General Join in section 16 1 SQL Query DML language 431 where CLAUSE 432 where not field field and table field table field or constant gt constant expr gt expr lt select 7 lt lt CONStaANt eae in lt GonsStant St ar E iei is in field between field and field table field table field table field constant constant constant expr expr expr lt field yee gt fin select Ez table field is in lt constant gt CONST ANES 24 5 Dyer nee The where clause lets you specify selection criteria to select reject records in the query result The syntax shows that a where clause can consist of one or more Boolean expressions connected with and or or Each Boolean expression can have one of the following three forms 1 Using the comparison operators 2 Using the between and operators 3 Using the set equality operators If a where clause contains multiple Boolean expressions connecte with either and or or square brackets can be used to indicate th expression to evaluate first Otherwise the default order is and expressions then or expressions from left to right Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Arguments field The name of a field in one of the tables listed in the from clause table field The name of
330. ess the command groups associated with the state values because the state sort expression is more major than the control break being processed 518 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference At a control break before command groups are processed according to the sort hierarchy beginning with the command group associated with the most major sort expression The after command groups are processed in reverse order before AND after report If no sorted values change during the entire report process two control breaks still occur at the beginning and at the end of the report These control breaks are processed differently from control breaks in the body of the report Because there is no detail information preceding the control break at the beginning of the report the before report command group is processed first Then existing before name commanda groups are processed before any detail information is considered for output You can use the before report control break to print a descriptive heading identifying the report The after report command group is processed at the end of the report It usually consists of final totals or overall results When all after name command groups have been processed the after report command group is processed There is no detail information to follow so no before command groups are processed RPT Report processor 519 17 7 Non command groups The non command group commands can be used once in a repor
331. essing CTRL U or RETURN The valid operation commands are as follows m Modify the ACCESS INQ ADD MOD or DEL settings for the current access privilege d Delete the current access privilege 224 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference LN MENU PROG M P ACCESS INQ ADD MOD DEL q Quit the current operation mode and redisplay the paging prompt The system generates this line number Use it to refer to the access privilege you want to modify The name of a menu or program that the individual can access differently from other users in the group This is a display only field that indicates the type of MENU PROG entry The definitions for the character codes are as follows M A menu P A program E An ENTER screen S An SSQL screen A Y in this column indicates that this individual can access the named option An N indicates this user cannot A Y in this column indicates that this individual can use inquire mode with the named option An N indicates this user cannot A Y in this column indicates that this individual can use add mode with the named option An N indicates this user cannot A Y in this column indicates that this individual car use modify mode with the named option An N indicates this user cannot A Y in this column indicates that this individual car use delete mode with the named option An N indicates this user cannot If you have specified group or individual access privileges for users
332. ession The compound expression is true if either simple expression is true It is false if both simple expressions are false SQL Query DML language 439 order by CLAUSE order by field asc table field The order by clause lets you sort the output of a query You can specify ascending or descending sorts on each field If you omit the specification the default sort order is ascending Arguments field table field asc desc into CLAUSE The name of a field in one of the tables listed in the from clause The name of a field preceded by the name of the table that contains the field If the table has been assigned a label or temporary name in the from clause that label can be used in place of the table name You must qualify a field this way when you use a field name that occurs in two or more tables listed in the from clause Without this qualification it is not clear which table the field is from These keywords indicate the order in which the preceding field is to be sorted If you want ascending order use asc and if you want descending order use desc into binary filename 440 The into clause lets you send the results of the query to an ASCII or a binary file instead of the CRT screen This is useful if you want to use the data in another program or load it back in another database The binary file option can increase performance by not requiring that data be converted to ASCII and then re
333. execmnt This program lets you inquire about add modify and delete executable programs and programs within executable programs Executable programs are usually referred to as executables in Unify DataServer ELS Executables can contain one or more programs For example some executables such as Display hash table statistics hts are single programs They each perform a single task Other executables may perform several tasks These executables are often custom programs that consist of several procedures or programs Each procedure or program is called by the main program in the executable Before asking UNIFY to run your executables you must describe each executable and its programs to the Unify DataServer ELS system using Describe program to system Miscellaneous utilities 269 To start this program select Describe program to system execmnt from the System administration menu The following screen form displays execmnt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Describe Program to System executable data entry area EXECUTABLE S NAME USES SYSRECEV PROGRAMS amd NAME EADING SCREEN DIRECTORY a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 program data entry area The prompts on the screen form are described as follows INJQUIRE A DD MJODIFY DJELETE The operation prompt The following are the operation modes you can select i Inquire mode This lets you view information ab
334. expression name for its name option For a database field the default expression name is the field name When a control break occurs the appropriate before name command groups are processed in the order the named expressions appear in the sort command For more information about sort expressions see sort in section 17 7 All command group commands are valid in a before name command group SYNTAX detail command group commands USE This command group is processed for every line in the input file You can use these commands to print the detail lines of a report and to perform detail calculations This command group can only appear in a script once All command group commands are valid in the detail command group footer SYNTAX footer command group commands USE This command group s output is printed at the bottom of each page just above the bottom margin The number of output lines printed can vary if the if command appears in this command group However for a given report the footer begins on the same output line on each page This line is chosen to ensure Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference header SYNTAX header command group commands USE RPT Report processor that the maximum number of footer output lines print just above the bottom margin This command group can only appear in a script once All command group commands except page and need are valid in the footer command group This command gro
335. f 1024 using no more than 10 decisions Compared to a sequential search which requires an average of 512 decisions to locate one value in 1024 A binary search is very efficient Even so some simple modifications can improve the binary search technique For example suppose that each decision is a one of three comparison That is it identifies which third of the search space holds the record you want to find Figure 7 17 locates the two names that sit on the first and second one third boundaries in the telephone directory example Aa Su Ling 1 3 of all entries 1st Boundary Kilmer Jordan 1 3 of all entries Rodgers Miriam 1 3 of all entries Yergens Fred 2nd Boundary Figure 7 17 A one of three decision Introduction to database design 113 114 The one of three decision depends on finding which of the following statements is true 1 The record is after Abbott Alfred and before Kilmer Jordan 2 The record is after Kilmer Jordan and before Rodgers Miriam With this one of three modification the records can be located much faster For example a search of 1024 records takes no more than seven decisions instead of the ten decisions required for a binary search If a one of three search is faster than a binary search a one of four search is faster yet Similarly the search gets faster as the N of one of N gets larger The Unify DataServer ELS B tree access method uses a one of N search wh
336. f this backup Explanation The mounted tape or diskette is a volume from a different backup Correction Replace the mounted volume with the correct tape or diskette gt gt gt Mounted media is not a backup volume Explanation The tape or diskette in the backup device is not a backup volume Correction Replace the tape or diskette with the correct volume and retry gt gt gt nnn blocks on backup media volume mmm Explanation This message reports the number of blocks read from or written to the backup tape or diskette You can use this information to make sure the same number of blocks is read from the media as is written to it This lets you watch for errors not detected by the program Unify DataServer ELS messages 633 634 gt gt gt Names must start with a letter and have only letters digits and _ s Explanation You can only use alphabetic or numeric characters and underscores in Unify DataServer ELS name entries The name must also start with a letter Correction Re enter the name gt gt gt No help documentation file is available Explanation PAINT cannot find the file paint dflt in the help documentation directory Correction Make sure you have read permission for the UNIFY hdoc directory and make sure the file paint dflt is present gt gt gt No help is available on this subject Explanation The help file for the keyword you specified does not exist or cannot be read Correction Ma
337. facturer_ID mname STRING 35 Name madd STRING 30 Address mcity STRING 20 City mstate STRING State mzip STRING Zip_Code model 50 model mokey COMB Model_Key monum NUMERIC 7 Model_Number momano mano NUMERIC 4 Manufacterer_ID mdes STRING 30 Description Figure 15 1 Database design with explicit relationship 2 If a combination field in the target table has an explicit relationship to a secondary table ENTER validates all components of the combination field before storing the combination field in the database ENTER data entry query by forms 327 That is ENTER makes sure values entered to combination field components match existing values in referenced fields When individual components of a combination field are on the screen form each component is entered in sequence Therefore all the components of a combination field should be together on a screen form so the cursor can move from one to the next without jumping around 3 In ADD mode the target key field must be entered before any other fields If the target key is a combination field all its components must be entered and validated Therefore you should make sure the target key is the first field on the screen form 4 Screen fields must have corresponding database fields ENTER ignores screen fields that lack database fields 5 ENTER uses the last three lines of the screen form to display information prompts and error messages If you use lines 21 22 or 23 to displ
338. fe Changes 576 Appendix b Unify DataServer ELS reserved words 579 Appendix c Custom message control 581 Custom message control 582 10 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Formatting currency and date displays 583 Reconfigure data dictionary 584 What is a data dictionary 584 Customizing the data dictionary 586 Appendix D Unify DataServer ELS messages 597 Appendix E The licprod utility 685 Licensing after installation 685 Licensing during installation 687 Appendix F Tuning your operating system 691 Contents 11 12 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference About this manual This is the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Manual The manual provides specific information on how to use each Unify DataServer ELS tool The index at the back of the manual is particularly useful for locating a specific subject While some chapters in this manual give examples of use the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual provides more examples of how most Unify DataServer ELS tools are used to develop an application system It is the best place to start if you have never used Unify DataServer ELS before The Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Manual assumes the following e You know how to use your computer s operating system e You know what a database management system is If you are already familiar with database systems and want to see how to program using Unify DataServer ELS refer to the U
339. ference where the variable xxxx is the name of the current table for which a default screen and menu entry is being made Database design utilities 135 8 2 Modify database design schent This chapter describes the use of the interactive database design option You can use this option either to enter an entirely new design or to modify the design of an existing Unify DataServer ELS database The database design is stored in the Unify DataServer ELS data dictionary This data dictionary is a Unify DataServer ELS database file that contains the system menus screen forms programs users and access privileges Changes to the data dictionary are made through the Table Entry and Field Entry screen forms of Modify Database Design schent These are the same two screen forms used by Design and Create a New Database The Table Entry screen form accepts general information about the tables in the database design The Field Entry screen form accepts field definitions for each of the tables The Table Entry and Field Entry screen forms are only a work area Any changes made using these screen forms will not be seen in the application until Reconfigure Database is run For more information on Reconfigure Database see section 8 4 Before making any changes to the database design 1 Make a backup of your database A backup is needed in case you want to restore the original database after modifying the database design See Write Database Back
340. file If unify db is given to opendb then unify db is used else if DBNAME is set to a valid file name then the file named in DBNAME is used else file db is used If the database file name is not unify db the name of the raw database file is obtained by appendng an r to the database file name The complete path name for the application database files This includes the files file db unify db all idx files and all q files For example Unify DataServer ELS expects to find any user help documentation in the DBPATH ndoc directory When you set the DBPATH variable all your application data files must be located in their respective directories or they cannot be found If DBPATH is not set Unify DataServer ELS assumes all your application data files are in the current directory For help Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DEFSIZE EDIT FLTFMT LDATEFMT Environment variables documentation the usual location is in ndoc Set DBPATH before running Unify DataServer ELS or you won t be able to use the application data files The default process size used when NSEGS is 0 to calculate the shared memory attach address The default value for DEFSIZE is IM You can set DEFSIZE to another multiple of IMDEFSIZE must be set to a multiple of IM The following example sets DEFSIZE to IM DEFSIZE 1048576 NOTE If DEFSIZE is set too high you may run into a range of addresses used by the stack
341. file used for the incomplete transaction group report The default name is replay not Transaction logging status txconf The Transaction logging status txconf program enables you to set and display the current transaction logging parameters You can set transaction logging ON or OFF name a log file that records all transactions specify the size of the log file and name a file that records transaction logging errors 262 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference To run this program select Transaction logging status txconf from the System Administration menu The following screen form displays txconf Unify RDBMS 30 apr 1999 Transaction Logging Status LOGGING STATUS ESTED LOGGING STATUS on off E OF LOG FILE EVICE E txlogfile E OF LOG FILE file device file IS LOGGING MEDIA REMOVABLE SIZE OF LOG FILE 512b bloc 4000 E OF ERROR REPORTING FILE txerrorfile The prompts are described as follows CURRENT LOGGING STATUS A display only field that shows the current status of transaction logging If the transaction logging status is ON database updates are recorded in the transaction log If the transaction logging status is OFF database updates are not recorded in the transaction log REQUESTED LOGGING STATUS on off This field lets you set the transaction logging status Enter OFF to set the flag to OFF and stop t
342. following where Hire_Date between 1 and 2 Or to select departments with an average salary greater than a user supplied value you can use a having clause similar to the following having avg Salary gt 1 You can use as many parameters in your script as there is room on the screen form However the number of parameters in the SQL script must equal the number of screen fields on the form Otherwise the screen driver cannot recognize the extra values Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For example if you have three screen fields on a form and two parameters in the script the screen driver can ignore the extra value It is probable however that either the screen form or the script design is incorrect Conversely if you only have one screen field and there is no value to fill in for the second parameter you get a syntax error when SQL processes the script For these reasons the screen driver reports an error if the number of screen fields does not match the number of parameters in the SQL script The screen driver substitutes parameters in the scripts just as you enter them on the screen Thus if you want to use a string parameter you must enclose the parameter in single quotes For example suppose you want to select records based on State_Code a string field of length 2 The where clause is as follows where State_Code 1 If you omit the quotes SQL gives you a syntax error when it processes the script
343. formation about the using option see the description of the print command in section 17 9 In the after report chapter commands are processed after all lines in the input file are printed In this example RPT skips one line and prints the message Report Complete Department listing 3 report script 466 The third report script produces the Department Listing shown in Figure 17 6 This report script uses control break processing to print page headings column headings totals and other statistical information It sorts the input file by department number in ascending order and by name in descending order Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following is the report script for Department Listing 3 input dept_no numeric 2 dept_name string 15 name string 10 job string 10 salary amount 4 commission amount 4 width 80 sort dept_no name desc header print DE PARTMENT LIS TIN G centered print for World Wide Sales Inc centered skip E footer skip print in column 31 pageno using amp amp before report print DE PARTMENT LIS TIN G centered E print for World Wide Sales Inc centered skip before dept_no need 5 print dept_no using d in column 1 dept_name skip print Name in column 1 Job in column 12 Salary in column 32 Commission in column 44 print 54 in column 1 detail print name in column 1 job in column 12
344. fy or delete privileges for the option 248 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 6 Print help documentation prthdoc The Print help documentation program prints the help text associated with a menu option To print the report select Print help documentation prthdoc from the Data Dictionary reports menu Figure 11 10 shows an example of the help documentation report Inventory Item Overview This report lists items in inventory grouped by description and manufacturer There is a group count of each identical item in stock made by the same manufacturer The report also gives the average sales price of the item grouping Figure 11 10 Help documentation report You can also display help documentation on the screen by entering help and the menu option name at the SELECTION prompt Data Dictionary reports 249 11 7 Print list of programs lexec 250 The Print list of programs option prints the Executable listing report This report lists all the executables in the data dictionary as well as the programs in each executable To run this report select print list of programs lexec from the Data Dictionary reports menu This program has no options for you to select The report is 93 columns wide but has been reduced for this document Gl m DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Executable Listing EXECUTABLE SYSFLAG
345. fy DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 9 3 Rebuild the hash table rekey This option completely rebuilds the hash table Use this option when you cannot access a record by its primary key but you can find the record by scanning the database table or by using a B tree index This can happen if you change the internal data type of a key field using Modify database Design and then reconfigure the database Examples of modifying the internal data type are changing a NUMERIC 3 field to NUMERIC 9 from short to long or changing an AMOUNT 2 to AMOUNT 12 from long to double This maintenance option zeros the hash table index then reads the database making an entry for each key it finds The program displays neither selection options nor other output Database maintenance utilities 191 Start the program by selecting Rebuild the Hash Table rekey from the database Maintenance Menu You see the following screen form Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Rebuild the Hash Table This program rebuilds the database hash table index No one else should be using the database while this program is running 192 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Respond to the prompt with Y or y to start the program or CRTL U N or n to exit to the menu When the program is finished it displays the following screen and message Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Rebuild the Hash Table Total records nnn Completed records nnn Total tables
346. fy DataServer ELS database is to reside on a raw file system This yields substantial performance improvements over using an ordinary ASCII file Full screen data entry is provided by ENTER as described in chapter 15 ENTER Data Entry Query by Forms ENTER performs many edit checks including type length date and time formats dollar amount formats and table lookup You can also add your own functions to customize data entry As with the previous programs ENTER uses the screen forms that you create and modify Using SQL you can interactively add modify delete and query information in your database The features of SQL are described in chapter 16 SQL Query DML Language Unify DataServer ELS also includes some additions and extensions to SQL worth noting For example you can connect a screen form to an SQL query script then format the results of the query with the primary Unify DataServer ELS report writer RPT This interface called SQL By Forms is described in SQL Screen Form Report Interface section 16 4 For simpler queries often more than half of the queries performed Unify DataServer ELS offers Query By Forms With QBF you first fill in search values on a screen form and Unify DataServer ELS then uses these values to find the records that match Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference You can look at the selected records one at a time on the form or you can send the results to either of the Unify DataServer ELS
347. fy DataServer ELS lib directory and the application database s you want to convert Set the environment variable PATH to the Unify DataServer ELS bin directory Set the environment variable Unify DataServer ELS to the Unify DataServer ELS lib directory Start the Reconfigure data dictionary option Type recondd This brings up the following menu 4 0 Data Dictionary Master 31 Dec 1999 UNIFY Main Menu 1 Master Data Dictionary Modification 2 Convert Application Data Dictionary Custom message control 591 Step 5 Select the Master data dictionary modification option This option creates a temporary work directory UNIFY ddwork and displays the following menu mainmenu 4 0 Data Dictionary Master 31 Dec 1999 UNIFY Main Menu Master Data Dictionary Modification Convert Application Data Dictionary Build Master Data Dictionary Install Master Data Dictionary Step 6 To change any of the system screen prompts select the Modify system screens option This is very useful for applications displaying screens in non English languages Normally you do not need to change the system screen prompts WARNING Change only screen field prompts Never move screen fields on the screen If you move screen fields you will no longer be able to use your screen 592 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference mainmenu LN CMD TABLE Select the Customize Master Data Dictionary option to begin customizing the maste
348. g screen forms These commands are described as follows 306 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference help Displays a summary of the available commands Two help screens display the default unicap settings for prompt editing screen field editing miscellaneous and cursor motion commands To view the second help screen press RETURN To return to the screen form you are editing press RETURN at the second help screen If you do not want to view the second help screen enter an n at the prompt display screen name Displays the name of the current screen form at the bottom of the screen toggle cursor Turns the cursor coordinate indicators ON and OFF position display When ON the column coordinate displays after the C prompt and the line coordinate after the L prompt When OFF neither the C and L prompts nor the column and line coordinates display redraw screen Clears the edit area and displays the screen as PAINT currently defines it If words are writing over each other and lines are not where they should be on the screen this command should adjust the screen display quit In command mode terminates current screen form edit When you enter this command the following prompt displays S ave D on t save R esume editing Enter s to save your changes in the data dictionary and process the screen form to produce updated q and h files Screen form development tools 307 Enter d to drop the changes and k
349. g 10 salary amount 4 commission amount 4 before report print Employee Report in column 23 skip print Name in column 1 Job in column 12 Salary in column 32 Commission in column 44 print 53 in column 1 detail print name in column 1 RPT Report processor 465 job in column 12 salary 12 in column 32 using S S S amp amp amp commission in column 44 using S5S SS amp amp amp after report skip print report Complete in column 23 end The commands in the before report chapter are processed before any detail lines are printed In the before report chapter the print command enables you to print character strings position output explicitly in columns and print strings of repeating characters In this case the repeating characters are 53 dashes The skip command leaves blank lines The default is one blank line To skip a specified number of blank lines use the following syntax skip nnn where nnn is the number of lines you want RPT to skip In the detail chapter the fields are positioned under the column headings printed in the before report chapter The print command lets you print an expression with a using format specification In this case the expression is salary 12 The using format specification using amp amp amp prints the salary as an amount with a floating dollar sign a decimal point and two digits of precision For more in
350. g guide Safe Changes Changes in format compatible data types Safe changes make sure the internal data type is increased in length or stays the same AMOUNT long gt AMOUNT long AMOUNT long gt AMOUNT double Field and internal data types 575 AMOUNT long gt AMOUNT long gt AMOUNT double gt FLOAT double gt FLOAT double gt NUMERIC short gt NUMERIC short gt NUMERIC short gt NUMERIC short gt NUMERIC long gt NUMERIC long gt NUMERIC long gt DATE short gt STRING char n gt STRING char n gt TEXT unlimited gt where NUMERIC long FLOAT double FLOAT double AMOUNT double FLOAT double NUMERIC short NUMERIC long AMOUNT double FLOAT double AMOUNT long AMOUNT double FLOAT double LDATE long STRING char n or gt n TEXT unlimited TEXT unlimited n total number of characters gt n greater than n Unsafe Changes 576 Changes that move data from larger internal storage spaces to smaller ones AMOUNT double gt AMOUNT double gt AMOUNT double gt FLOAT double gt FLOAT double gt FLOAT double gt NUMERIC long gt LDATE long gt NUMERIC short NUMERIC long AMOUNT long NUMERIC short NUMERIC long AMOUNT long NUMERIC short DATE short Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference STRING char n gt STRING charf lt n TEXT unlimited
351. g of the footer command group at the bottom of the current page The no header option suppresses processing of the header command group at the top of the next page and allows other output to be printed in the heading area This command is not valid in the header or footer command groups print SYNTAX print expr fin col umn number using format expr in colfumn number using format no newline centered USE This command controls the printing of output All output is printed using the print command An expression is evaluated then its result is printed Each print command describes one output line or less see the no newline option The print command is valid only when used in a command group If the print keyword is used alone a blank line is printed Blank lines can also be inserted with the skip command If the length of an output line exceeds the limit defined by the width command the line is truncated 532 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Many reports do not require complicated print commands For this reason default spacing and formatting are provided Expressions can be printed by listing them in a print command If no column numbers are included the default spacing ensures that at least one space is left between adjacent expressions You can use column numbers for absolute positioning Use either variable names or numbers to specify column numbers The print position next to the left m
352. g system file protection scheme can prevent users from accessing the database contents through the shell The following chapters explain how to use these features The last of these chapters describes how to use the Unify DataServer ELS security system with file protection 215 10 1 Modify system parameters amp security parmnt This program maintains basic parameters for the menu system You can change information about the super user the system title and mnemonic codes for the months of the year You can also set the system entry point and login screen display Because this option can be used to change the super user ID and password and the system login screen you should use Add or modify individual privileges to restrict who may access it Section 10 3 To run this program select Modify system parameters amp security parmnt from the Security maintenance menu The screen form displays as follows parmnt SUP SYST MON ER USI PASSWORD ENTRY POINT EM H EADING H MN EMONICS LOGINFLAG T F JANFEBMARAPRMAYJENJULAGUSEPOCTNOVDE Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Modify System Parameters amp Security mainmenu UNIFY RDBMS The entries on the screen are system parameters you can change The system parameter prompts are described as follows 216 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference SUPER USER ID The login ID of the super user
353. gt STRING charf lt n where n total number of characters lt n less than n Changes in field data type to a non compatible format number lt gt DATE TIME LDATE STRING TEXT BINARY DATE LDATE gt number TIME STRING TEXT BINARY TIME gt number DATE LDATE STRING TEXT BINARY STRING gt number DATE LDATE TIME BINARY TEXT gt number DATE LDATE TIME BINARY BINARY gt number DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT where number number data types AMOUNT NUMERIC FLOAT Field and internal data types 577 578 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Appendix B Unify DataServer ELS reserved words The following keywords have specific meaning for Unify DataServer ELS Therefore you cannot use keywords for table or field names after amount begin between col column desc detail float footer help hour into is margin max not numeric print report skip sort sum tables today top where width and binary comb edit from if Idate min or restart sorted text total write asc bottom count else group in left need order select start then unique avg by date end having input length newline page separator string time unlock Figure B 1 Unify DataServer ELS reserved words before centered delete fields header insert lines no pageno set substr to using Likewise the names of Direct HLI functions cannot be used for table or field names
354. gure 6 7 shows part of the standard unicap file SECTION menus menu handler ignoremiss FALSE report missing command definitions more lt f 10 gt select E lt fl1 gt up u lt up_arrow gt k down r j n lt down_arrow gt home x lt home gt lt f2 gt previous p lt f3 gt lear Sze NITI X lt 4 gt exit d lt f5 gt help lt f6 gt LAE Ss Ai lt f 7 gt redraw r lt f8 gt toggle t lt f8 gt Figure 6 7 Standard unicap file excerpt Termcap and Unicap 79 The unicap file is organized into sections each describing a group of related characteristics A section begins with the line SECTION keyword The keyword can be one of the following e system e menus e paint a terminal type Each terminal type defined in termcap should have a corresponding terminal type section in unicap These unicap sections define the sequence of characters to expect when each key is pressed and what imaginary character to associate with that sequence Note that the sequence can consist of a single character as in the case of the TeleVideo 912 The following explains the four sections of the unicap file SECTION system This section describes overall system characteristics The only valid command name that can be used in this section is ndelaypad ndelaypad n where n is a positive integer For fast bauds in relation to the processor speed t
355. h A query block is described as follows 1 It starts with a select clause that specifies the fields or expressions to be retrieved 2 It continues with a from clause that specifies the tables containing the fields to be retrieved 3 It can include one or more optional clauses Although optional clauses may be omitted in a specific query the statements and clauses in an SQL query block must be entered in the following order select from where group by having order by PSnton wee If 428 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The dots represent the continuation of the clause This subsection describes the syntax and options for each of the following query statements and clauses e select Statement e from Clause e where Clause group by Clause e having Clause e order by Clause e into Clause select SATEMENT select unique table r table 7 table field table field field field constant constant count count min expr min expr max expr max expr sum expr sum expr avg expr avg expr expr expr The select statement lets you specify what fields or expressions to retrieve from your database Every query must start with a select clause Arguments unique The unique keyword is used to eliminate duplicate records from the query result If every column in two or more records matches only one row is displaye
356. h The file is created with a unique name based on the process ID and is stored in the temporary work area UNIFYTMP The default editor vi is normally used But you can specify a different editor with the EDIT environment variable See chapter 5 for information about this and other Unify DataServer ELS environment variables In the editor you can modify the current query type in a new query read ina completely different query from a text file or write the query out to a text file Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference When you exit the editor you can run the query in the buffer by entering restart at the SQL prompt as follows sql gt restart Creating and running SQL scripts Every application has a standard set of often used queries Thus the ability to store queries and run them later is important Such stored queries are called SQL scripts You can create an SQL script in several ways 1 Create a query interactively using SQL and then use edit to save it as a script 2 Use your favorite editor outside of SQL to create the query 3 Select Edit SQL or RPT Command Files from the Main Menu enter the query and save it In each case the result is a text file containing the script You can include any valid SQL command except start in a stored query Thus a script can contain shell commands and SQL data manipulation commands A script cannot contain the start command because start lets you run other stored queries
357. h groups of information belong together This section describes the principles of database design emphasizing features and access methods specific to Unify DataServer ELS The principles of database design are outlined as follows 1 Develop a preliminary list of the elements or fields you want to store in the database To develop this preliminary list you should begin by talking to the prospective users of the database to establish their needs Database fields each have a name a length and a data type such as STRING NUMERIC AMOUNT or DATE Field data types are described in Field Types in the Database Elements subsection and in Appendix A A relational database contains a collection of tables each consisting of a group of related fields Organize the preliminary list of fields into tables Then subject the tables to a series of refinements You refine tables by determining key fields and the dependencies among fields and by eliminating unnecessary redundancies Refining database designs is explained in Refining the Database Design Create a diagram of the database This diagram should show each table and its relationships with other tables A database diagram can often give you insight into the structure and dependencies among the major elements of the database you are building The Database Diagrams subsection explains how to create a database diagram Determine the best way to store and access the tables in a Unify DataServ
358. hat is locked If either number is 0 it has meaning as shown in the following table State Meaning both rid and tid 0 This database is locked only rid 0 There is a resource lock and tid is the ASCII value for the type of lock See lock_r in the DBMS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual only tid 0 There is a table lock and the rid number is the number of the table that is locked See Data Dictionary Report Table List SLK or XLK The type lock held on this object SLK represents shared locks and XLK represents exclusive locks 282 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part IV Screen form development and maintenance Part IV Screen form development and maintenance contains chapters13 and 14 Chapter 13 Screen form development utilities describes the tools you can use to develop screens for data entry and inquiry These tools include the Create Default Screen Forms program and PAINT a full screen editor for customizing screen forms Chapter 14 Screen form maintenance utilities describes additional tools to help you manage screen forms These tools let you check the row and column coordinates of prompts and fields on screen forms change prompts and field positions and contents display a list of screen forms compile screens and restore a damaged screen to the data dictionary 283 284 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 13 Screen form development tools This chapter describes screen forms and
359. he unique specification will be ignored Explanation The unique specification cannot be used with the aggregate functions min max sum avg or count SQL runs the query but does not eliminate duplicate rows gt gt gt Write error BUDB Explanation An error has occurred while writing the backup diskette or tape Any keyboard response returns you to the menu Correction Make sure the number of blocks per volume is set correctly The number may be too large depending on the hardware Use Modify System Parameters amp Security to reduce the number of blocks If this error has occurred the tape or diskette has probably been damaged Start the backup over again using a new tape or diskette gt gt gt Write error REDB Explanation An error has occurred while writing the backup to the disk The database and data dictionary are now invalid You probably have run out of space on the disk Correction Make sure you have enough space on the disk Then try reading the backup again Any keyboard response returns you to the menu gt gt gt You are not allowed to execute any options on that menu Explanation Even though you have access privileges to the selected menu you do not have access privileges to the options listed on that menu 684 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Appendix E The licprod utility This appendix explains how to perform licensing in two conditions e after installation e during
360. he given screen in the form table field You can use this input section directly in your report script The following is a sample input section generated by rip input customer oustomer_number custoner name customer address custoner city customer state stomer zip_code s tomer phone_number cu cu USE This command can be used from the A text editor when creating an RPT script Use the editor command followed by rip and the name of the screen form to be associated with the report vi runs the program and directs the output to the edit buffer The correct command line in A is as follows rip screen name User programs and RPT To use RPT from the shell or with user programs the appropriate Unify DataServer ELS environment variables must be set For more information see section S Using RPT from the shell requires two files an input file and an RPT script file The input file contains the data you want to format An input file can come from several 544 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference sources and can either be entered as a file name or piped to RPT The command syntax for running RPT is as follows RPT OSET Seript input_file where script is required The RPT script file contains the report processor commands to do the report formatting The optional r flag tells RPT to remove the script file when the report is complete This flag is primarily used by SQL By Forms which creates
361. he application database file file db This can impact disk 138 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference space However making the expected number less makes the hash table and file db smaller This also decreases the number of record entries you can store If you want to Then Change the expected number 1 At the Table Entry screen form use modify mode to access and of records change the Expected Number 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Answer y or Y to Rebuild Hash Index prompt Figure 8 6 Allowable modifications to EXPECTED entry LONG NAME Long Name is the name Unify DataServer ELS uses to refer to a table If you want to Then Change a Table s Long Name 1 At the Table Entry screen form use modify mode to access and change the Long Name 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Figure 8 7 Allowable modifications to LONG NAME entry DESCRIPTION Description is used as a comment field If you want to Then Change a Table s Description 1 At the Table Entry screen form use modify mode ato access and change the Description 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Figure 8 7 Allowable modifications to DESCRIPTION entry Database design utilities 139 Modifying values on the field entry form The Field Entry screen form is used to enter and modify the field definitions Fields for tables may be added modified and deleted on this screen form schent Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Modify Database Design
362. he class For example matches any character except the right bracket and the dash and JA G matches the right bracket or A through G inclusively A period matches any character An asterisk matches the previous regular expression zero or more times The following examples show how the period and asterisk are used The period and asterisk match a string of 0 or more characters John matches any string starting with John such as Johnny or John Smith a matches null strings or the strings a aa or aaa A plus symbol matches the previous regular expression one or more times This feature is supplied to Unify DataServer ELS through the operating system you will not be able to use this notation if your operating system does not support this type of regular expression For example fa z matches a z a z any alphabetic string Braces indicate repetition of the previous regular expression This feature is supplied to Unify DataServer ELS through the operating system you will not be able to use this notation if your operating system does not support this type of regular expression Database design utilities 175 m An integer in braces matches the previous regular expression m times The integer must be less than 255 For example a 3 matches a three times which matches only the string aaa m An integer and a comma in braces match the previous regular expression m or m
363. he default clause Explanation A constant in the default clause either doesn t match the current field s data type or isn t a valid value for the data type Correction Check the data type of the field named in the field statement and check the constant for a possible mistake in entry gt gt gt An integer constant was expected Explanation The syntax for the command requires an integer Invalid Script bottom margin 7e Correction bottom margin 7 gt gt gt An internal system error has occurred Explanation Read Database Backup or Write Database Backup has encountered an internal error it cannot work around Correction For more information about the error see the errlog file Correct the error and try again gt gt gt An Internal system error has occurred Try creating the database screens and menus manually Explanation An unexpected error has occurred Correction Try creating the database screen forms and the menus with the appropriate options gt gt gt Are you sure you want to abort Explanation You have requested that the Read Database Backup or Write Database Backup procedure stop You must confirm the request For example this message displays when you answer N to the Please mount backup media volume nnn message Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction If you answer Y or y to confirm the procedure stops If you answer N or n the procedure continues gt gt gt At l
364. he entire query result is treated as a single group Using an aggregate function also implies that you have selected only fields or expressions whose values are common to all records in the group The count function counts the number of records in each group that matched the query selection criteria Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The min max and avg functions calculate the minimum maximum and average values of the indicated expression for the records in each group that matched the query selection criteria The sum function totals the indicated expression for the records in each group that matched the query selection criteria Aggregate functions can be applied to fields of type NUMERIC AMOUNT FLOAT DATE LDATE and TIME although the results on DATE LDATE and TIME fields can be meaningless Also aggregate functions can be nested two levels to achieve such expressions as avg count or min avg salary expr An arithmetic expression containing fields constants and aggregate functions connected by the operators and Parentheses can be used to change the order in which the operations are performed from CLAUSE from table label The from clause lets you specify the tables to be used in the query You can list any number of tables in any order SQL determines the best way to retrieve the data Arguments table The name of a table in the current database label A label that identifi
365. he integer should be small and for slow bauds it should be high It tells how many no delay reads to perform to get each character from the terminal When set correctly Unify DataServer ELS recognizes character sequences from function keys arrow keys etc as a single keystroke If 71 is too small Unify DataServer ELS responds as if the characters have been entered individually Therefore Unify DataServer ELS cannot recognize these imaginary characters correctly Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference At 9600 baud n is usually 0 while at 110 baud it is usually 4 On some systems the settings can be 50 and 200 SECTION terminal type You can have as many terminal type sections as you have terminals to support This section is composed of lines associating the imaginary characters with the character sequences emitted by the nonstandard keys If you don t want to use nonstandard keys then you can omit the section The terminal type must match the value of the TERM environment variable section 5 For example if TERM vt100 is the current environment then you must have a SECTION vt100 that describes the real to imaginary character mapping for VT100 terminals The entries in this section have the following form imaginary character name command key where you choose the imaginary character name from those listed in the previous imaginary character description Each command key represents the character sequence em
366. he order they appear in the table from top to bottom The prompts and fields are lined up one underneath the other in one two or three columns The fields start after the longest prompt Any underscore characters are changed to spaces and appropriate letters are capitalized You can modify a default screen form using Check Screen Form Coordinates or Paint Screen Forms You can also change the heading by using Register Screen Form with ENTER If you choose not to use this option you can create screen forms for the database tables individually with Create Default Screen Form Check Screen Form Coordinates and Paint Screen Forms For more information see the named sections This message appears for every table Creating data entry screen for xxxx where the variable xxxx is the name of the current table for which a default screen form is being made dbcreate only allows this option if the Create Data Entry Screens if you select this option This option creates a menu titled Data Entry Screens with the name usermenu and adds it as the last menu line of the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu This menu contains a line for each of the default screen forms The Data Entry Screens menu is recreated each time you select the option Therefore any changes made to usermenu using Add Modify or Delete Menus are lost This message appears for every table Creating data entry screen and menu entry for xxxx Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Re
367. he query by forms capability of ENTER e By using a custom program The selection file produced by each of these three methods contains record references to the selected table The selected table is used by the listing processor to produce the final output Running the selection processor You can run the selection processor from the Menu Handler You can also run the selection processor from the shell or a shell script When run interactively from the Menu Handler or the shell the selection processor displays the prompt for you to enter commands It continues to accept commands until you enter the end command When run from a shell script the selection processor processes the commands in the query script file until it reaches the end of the file To run the selection processor non interactively use the following syntax LST query script Selection processor commands The following describes the syntax and use of the Selection Processor commands These commands are as follows e select e remove e call 560 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference e copy e list e unlock e report select SYNTAX select subset into string where expr end filename USE The select command selects part of a file or a current subset The results of the selection are placed in a subset that can be passed to the listing processor a program or used in a subsequent select If the name following select is not a selected subset the selecti
368. he same as the simple database field types and lengths Valid types are numeric float amount date Idate time string and text RPT Report processor 463 464 NOTE binary and comb report fields are not allowed However you can use the component fields of a comb field individually A length is not required for a date Idate or time field but is required for other types text fields are restricted to their display length up to 256 characters For more information about the length for each field type see Database Fields in section 8 1 To specify fields by access name use the database field s ong name or implicit name and omit the type specification as shown table field name RPT then determines the type and length from the data dictionary The short table name must precede the field access name You can abbreviate the report field name to just its database access name in other RPT chapters if no other fields in the RPT script have the same access name The database field s access name is usually the long field name from the database design However for a field that references a COMB field in another table each implied field has a separate access name The implied field s access name is a compound of the referencing field s short database name and the short name of the component field referenced in the other table The following is the report script for Department Listing 1 rewritten with database field names input
369. her access method Consider the linkage between the manf and item tables from Design 4 shown in Figure 7 10 Figure 7 10 Explicit relationship between item and manf Each manf record has a set of related item records A linkage exists between two manf and item records if the manufacturer makes the item In this relationship the 108 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference manf table is the parent and the item table is the child Figure 7 11 illustrates this relationship item imanf_ID ser_no Price 0001 101 3 00 manf ae 0001 102 2 00 manf_ID city 0001 a 103 4 00 0001 lt 104 2 00 x 0001 105 1 00 x 0001 106 1 00 0002 101 3 00 0002 102 4 00 Figure 7 11 Parent child relationships between manf and item Besides functioning as a data access method an explicit relationship also automatically enforces referential integrity If an explicit relationship exists between two tables Unify DataServer ELS only lets you store existing parent key values in the child table Unify DataServer ELS does not let you delete a parent record whose key is referenced by child records Explicit relationships save storage space and processing time when compared to a B tree This is important because a relational database often consists of many small tables Unify DataServer ELS must join these tables frequently to process queries Explicit relationships are the fastest method for this In the database design to declare an exp
370. his can be one of several problems The Write Database Backup device is not turned on It is not on line The diskette or tape is not write enabled Or your operating system user ID does not have read write privileges for the backup device If you want to try again fix the problem and answer y or Y The backup volume will begin to write If you want to exit the program answer n N or CTRL U gt gt gt Backup media block size is nnn Explanation Read Database Backup has determined that the backup media volumes were written with a block size of nnn The program will use this block size to read the backup tapes or diskettes This message only displays if nnn is different from the block size specified in BUBLK gt gt gt Backup media volume nnn was mounted Explanation Correction This message informs you that volume nnn is mounted instead of the volume requested in the Please mount backup media volume nnn message Replace volume nnn with the correct volume gt gt gt Bad media unable to read write header block Explanation Correction In trying to Read or Write Database Backup the first read from or write to the backup tape or diskette failed For Read this is probably not a backup volume Make sure the tape or diskette is a backup volume then retry For Write this could be because the media is damaged Replace the backup tape or diskette and try again Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Refe
371. his lets you use the full power of I O redirection and pipes to load your data SQL also interfaces with this option making it easier to load data and manipulate it in a Unify DataServer ELS application Refer to SQL extensions section 16 3 for information on how to dump data from SQL to operating system files and how to load the data back to the database To use DBLOAD from the shell you must make sure the PATH and Unify DataServer ELS environment variables are set correctly For more information on environment variables see chapter 5 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DBLOAD expects four parameters when called from the shell To start the program use the following command syntax DBLOAD nl u 1 s separator b database table input file spec tile For a typical database load the optional parameters are not needed DBLOAD will automatically insert new records and update existing records The optional DBLOAD parameters are described as follows Parameter N Miscellaneous utilities Description New record mode Use this parameter when you want to insert records that have no key and where you do not want to verify uniqueness If a record key in file matches a record key in the database DBLOAD displays a warning message about duplicate record keys DBLOAD does not update that database record If no key is defined for the table DBLOAD inserts all records or Update mode The first field of each line i
372. housands with a decimal point and two decimal digits For example if CURR is not set 100 thousand dollars displays as follows 100 000 00 And if CURR is set to Wes 2 gt xexx then 100 thousand dollars displays as 100000 OOxxx The format in which to accept and display dates from 1 January 1900 to 31 December 2077 This environment variable can also be used to change all brackets that display on menus and screen forms to parentheses The default date format is MM DD YY where M stands for month D stands for day and Y stands for year The default format also displays brackets on menus and screen forms The valid values for DATETP are the following 57 58 DBNAME DBPATH AM American format MM DD YY and brackets EU European format DD MM YY and parentheses IN International format YY MM DD and parentheses US United States format MM DD YY and parentheses If you need to format long dates four digit year from 1 October 1752 through 31 December 9999 use the LDATEFMT environment variable also described in this section The name of the database file This variable need not be set if the default file name file db is suitable for your system To set the database file to something other than the default use an ordinary file name not a path name Therefore the value of DBNAME cannot contain slashes or backslashes Unify DataServer ELS uses the following logic to determine the name of the database
373. how they are developed in Unify DataServer ELS A screen form is the basic tool for entering and viewing data in the database Paint screen forms or PAINT is a full screen forms editor that makes designing and modifying screen forms quick and easy PAINT is the major tool used to design and modify forms Another Unify DataServer ELS screen form development tool is Create default screen form described in this chapter Create default screen form uses data dictionary information to build a default screen form for the specified table You can then modify the screen form using PAINT or Check screen form coordinates described in section 14 1 Check screen form coordinates displays pages of screen form information whereas PAINT displays fields where they appear on the screen form A screen form can be used in one of three ways 1 The general purpose data entry driver ENTER can be used with a screen to perform simple kinds of data entry and query applications See chapter 15 for a description of the screen design requirements for ENTER 2 A screen can be associated with an SQL script to let you enter parameters to be substituted in the script before it is run This use of screen forms with SQL called SQL by forms is described in SQL screen form report interface section 16 4 3 For complete control over screen form processing a set of functions can be called by custom host language programs to display or erase screen forms and accept
374. icate a stacked multiple line heading You should probably use print in LST scripts named as the formatting parameters for ENTER screen reports so the reports will print with headings For more information about parameters and ENTER screen reports see chapter 15 in this manual and chapter 11 in the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual nohead The nohead command run before a go command suppresses column headings on the output This can be used to dump data from the database to ASCII files without extraneous header information unlock field password The unlock command reads a field protected by field level security Either the read or write password can be specified to unlock a field If an attempt is made to access a protected field in a report without using this command an error message displays 571 572 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Appendix A Field and internal data types Figure A 1 illustrates Unify DataServer ELS field data types and their possible internal types Field Internal Data Type Display Length Data Type Storage length NUMERIC 1 4 DATE n a short TIME n a NUMERIC 5 9 AMOUNT 1 7 long LDATE n a FLOAT 199 double AMOUNT 8 11 STRING 256 char 1 256 TEXT 1 256 char unlimited BINARY n a char unlimited COMB n a n a Figure A 1 Table of valid field data types Internal storage lengths are machine dependent Many machines use 16 bit shorts 32 bit longs an
375. ication list or the same as the default field order for the table being loaded Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference select update statement This indicates that a query block can be used in this part of the statement The order of the fields returned from the query must either be the same as the field specification list or the same as the default field order for the table being loaded For more information about query blocks refer to Query Statements and Clauses earlier in this chapter update table set where The update statement modifies the specified fields in all records that meet the selection criteria in the where clause If the where clause is omitted every record is updated Arguments table set where delete statement The name of a table in the current database A set clause is inserted here For more details refer to the set description following this update description An optional where clause can be placed here to specify the records to be updated For more information refer to the where clause description in Query Statements and Clauses earlier in this chapter delete table where The delete statement lets you delete specific records in a table based on the results of a where clause If you omit the where clause every record in the table is deleted Arguments table where The name of a table in the current database An optional where clause can be placed here to
376. if neither n or u are given Explanation The default mode for DBLOAD doesn t use flags This however requires the table to have a key Correction If the table does not have a key use the n option gt gt gt Tables can t have field names Explanation You are trying to enter a table name that is already used as a field name in this database A table name must be unique in the database Correction Enter another name for this table gt gt gt Target record key is missing or incomplete Explanation All the elements of the target table s key must display on the screen form Correction Make sure you have specified the right target table If you have you may have to modify the screen form design gt gt gt Termcap entry too long Explanation There is not enough memory to load your terminal s termcap description Correction Split the terminal description in your termcap file into two or more physical teminal entries using the following command tc terminal_type For more information see your Operating System Manual termcap description gt gt gt Terminal screen is too big not enough memory Explanation There is not enough memory to display the screen form Unify DataServer ELS messages 645 646 Correction Change the number of lines and columns specified for your terminal in your termcap file gt gt gt TEXT and BINARY fields cannot be keys Explanation You are trying to specify a TEXT or BINARY
377. if you enter something other than F f D ord as the volume type in Define Database Volumes Correction Re enter the volume type with a valid value gt gt gt Invalid usage use afac srcfile errfile Explanation The compile command you have entered is wrong Correction Enter the compiler name afac followed by the name of the Advanced Field Attributes file srcfile If you don t want error messages sent to the standard error output you can specify a file to receive error messages errfile Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Invalid value for field ffff record nnn Explanation The field named ffff has an explicit relationship with another field in the database AND the value for ffff in record number nnn of the input file doesn t match its reference file Correction Either insert a record in the reference file that matches the value of the field or change the value so it matches an existing record gt gt gt Invalid where clause Explantation The syntax of the where clause is incorrect This can be caused by various errors The problem in the following invalid query is that the clause lacks the Boolean expression needed to perform a comparison Invalid Query select name from emp where salary Correction select name from emp where salary gt commission gt gt gt ffff is an invalid field name for table xxxx Explanation The field name you specified in the unlock command is not in
378. ify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference When you enter access privileges on this screen you can specify differences in privileges between the user and the group The privileges of the group determine the basic privileges for the user You can override the group privileges if you use this program to specify personal privileges for the individual The screen form has an individual data entry area where you enter the individual an access privilege data entry area where you enter the access privileges and an access paging area where the screen form lists access privileges The screen form prompts and column headings are described as follows IINQUIRE A DD MJODIFY D JELETE The operation prompt The meaning of each selection is as follows i Inquire mode This lets you view the access privileges for a user a Add mode This lets you add a user and the user s access privileges m Modify mode This lets you add modify and delete access privileges for an user d Delete mode This lets you delete a user and the user s access privileges LOGIN ID A code of up to four characters to identify the individual The user enters this code to log in to Unify DataServer ELS at the login screen NAME A string of up to 30 characters for the individual s name This is for documentation and identification only GROUP ID A code of up to four characters to identify the individual s group NAME A display only field that shows the name of the ind
379. ign utilities 161 q Quit add mode and return to the DUPLICATES ALLOWED prompt ASC DSC a Specifies that the field values are to be stored in the index in ascending order d Specifies that the field values are to be stored in the index in descending order You must enter a or d for each field specified in the Database Field Entry section FIELD NAME The name of an existing database field that is or will be in the current B tree index definition The field cannot be a COMB TEXT or BINARY field All field names must be in the same table Any field used in a B tree definition is indexed as defined INTERNAL LENGTH A display only field This value describes the length of the field s value when stored in the B tree index The system computes the internal length Processing B tree definitions When you add or rebuild a B tree index definition the following message displays below the second line THE SUM OF INTERNAL LENGTHS FOR ALL THE FIELDS CANNOT EXCEED nnn The value nnn is determined by the configuration of the operating system on which Unify DataServer ELS is running You may have to reduce your index definition to fit in this size limit After you add an index or modify an existing one you see the following prompt The B tree index will now be created Continue 162 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference This means that the entries you have made in the index definition are
380. ile dbr is set to point at the raw device that the data file is on Therefore file dor has meaning only if a special file is being used Database design utilities 145 146 If the expected size of the data file exceeds one megabyte creating the database as a special operating system file can increase system speed and efficiency significantly This allows programs to use the raw device for input and output and bypass the operating system file indexing and buffering database designs Refer to Define Database Volumes section 9 5 to see how to create special files To create an empty database select Create Database crdb from the Database Design Utilities menu The Create Database crdb screen form displays Unify RDBMS Create Database This program creates a new empty base If you have information in an existing database it will be lost No one else should be using the database while this program is running Proceed W Note that if a database exists it is emptied so that it contains no records Answer Y to start the database creation process N or CTRL U to stop and return to the Database Design Utilities menu The program displays the messages shown on the following screen as the process continues Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Create Database xPhase I xPhase II Phase III Process complete Back up the data gt gt Create Database creates the
381. iles the database file and other supporting files required at run time The hdoc directory contains custom help documentation for the programs in bin The build directory contains the command files necessary to create the custom executable files The def directory contains the files that are included in the custom program source code These files contain system wide data definitions and parameters The src directory contains the source code for the programs For large systems that contain multiple modules the src directory should have module subdirectories Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 8 1 Design and create a new database dbcreate This Unify DataServer ELS program is extremely useful in the development of a new database application The functions performed by design and create a new database are similar to the following Unify DataServer ELS programs Modify database design Create database Print database design Create default screen form Add modify or delete menus This chapter explains the two phases of design and create a new database the database design phase and the database create phase The database design phase lets you design the database structure To do this you first define the tables using the table entry screen After a table has been entered the program displays the field entry screen You then define the fields for the current table When done with field entries you return to the table entry sc
382. in with a letter The name should consist of letters digits and underscores e The name should not be an RPT keyword For a list of RPT keywords see section 17 11 You can name an expression consisting of one report field to make the report script more readable However you don t have to name the expression because the field name is the name of the expression by default Each field has a type that describes the data it contains The valid report field types are the same as the database field types numeric float date Idate time amount string and text Binary and Combination type report fields are not allowed However you can define separate report fields for the component fields that make up a COMB field RPT Report processor 493 Generally fields fall into two categories numbers and strings Because numeric float date time and amount fields contain numeric values they can be manipulated using the numeric operators string fields can be manipulated using the concatenation operators and and the substring operator substr Numbers dates and times In section 17 4 all the available types of constants are listed in the table defining the syntax of an expression Constants are explicitly defined numbers dates and times such as 45 30 12 25 84 and 12 00 Their syntax is consistent throughout Unify DataServer ELS The following describes the comparison of dates and times as well as the use of the operat
383. inations are controlled by Register screen form with ENTER earlier in this chapter 344 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference In inquire mode if you have registered a report with ENTER for the current ENTER screen enter r at the operation prompt to display the Report options screen The following is an example of an ENTER Report options screen sitm100 Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 I NQUIRE Item Maintenance EPORT TO SCREEN PRINT FILE Item and Customer Report Item Listing Default Report Format EPORT W The prompts on the Report options screen are as follows REPORT You can enter any listed report number to choose a report RETURN defaults to the first report From this prompt you can also escape to the operating system shell or to a text editor by entering edit This is useful when you want to modify formatting scripts with an editor or you want to look at output that has been redirected to a file REPORT The title of the report to be produced when you select this option This string derives from TITLE on the Register screen form with ENTER screen TO Output can be directed to the following three destinations ENTER data entry query by forms 345 346 SCREEN The terminal screen PRINT The print spooler FILE A file with name FILENAME Enter an x between the brackets to select the corresponding output destination for the current report Any combi
384. information in a query result The unique keyword also causes the query results to be sorted so duplicate information can be grouped and easily deleted For example the emp table has many clerk and programmer records If you list the job titles by just selecting all the records in the table several titles will be duplicates You can use the unique keyword so the query selects only one record for each Job title EXAMPLE List the different job titles in the company sql gt select unique Job sql gt from emp recognized query Job clerk engineer president programmer salesrep The following two examples demonstrate the differences in query results when the unique keyword is omitted and when it is used EXAMPLE List the department number and job classifications of employees in departments 10 20 and 30 or employees who make more than 2000 Note that this query produces duplicate information sql gt select Dept_No Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No in lt 10 20 30 gt or Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference sql gt Salary gt 2000 recognized query Dept_No 20 30 20 60 20 10 10 30 10 40 EXAMPLE Job salesrep salesrep salesrep programmer salesrep clerk president salesrep programmer salesrep results are sorted sql gt select unique Dept_No Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No in lt 10 20 30 gt or sql gt Salary gt 2000 recognized query
385. ing For example the following are substrings of the string AEIOU EI IOU At m AETOU Every string contains at least two substrings the string itself and the null string However the null string contains only one substring that is the null string itself The following is the syntax of the substring operation string substr start end where the operator is substr start end specifies a part of string start is the starting character position in string indexed from 1 and end is the ending character position end must be greater than or equal to start 504 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Figure 17 18 contains example substring operations and their results Expression Result AEIOU substr 1 3 AEl AEIOU substr 3 5 10U AEIOU substr 3 9 IOU AEIOU substr 6 99 null string AEIOU substr 2 2 E AEIOU substr 1 6 AEIOU AEIOU substr 1 61 AEIOU AEIOU substr 6 107 T Figure 17 18 Substring expression results ALPHA BET and AEIOU in the previous examples are constants But you can use the and substr operators with all types of string expressions The following list shows the string expressions you can use with string operators e Report field of type string e Single quoted string constant e Repeated character constant String variable String local function String expression name e Expressions with combinations of these and the
386. ing and displays an error message Database design utilities 149 Reconfiguring Select Reconfigure Database scom from the Database Design Utilities menu The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Reconfigure Database This program reformats the database to reflect any changes in structure you have made using Modify Database Design You should make a backup copy of the database on diskettes or tape with write Database Backup budb before using this program In addition no one else should be using the database while this program is running Proceed B Enter y or Y at the PROCEED prompt to start the reconfigure process An n or N ora CTRL U stops the process and returns to the menu 150 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference If you need to rebuild the database hash table the following messages also display Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Reconfigue Database xPhase I AR xPhase II Nominal hash table loading factor New load factor without rebuilding EBUILD HASH INDEX If you changed the expected number of records for any table in the database you should rebuild the hash table The hash table is rebuilt using Rebuild the Hash Table rckey Answer y or Y at the prompt to rebuild the hash table Answer n or N to leave the hash table as is Database design utilities 151 Reconfigure continues with the following display and prompt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Reconfigure
387. ins the numeric value 0 Expression Result fielda lt 21 and fielda gt 0 TRUE not fieldb 0 FALSE flelda gt 21 or fieldb lt 0 FALSE fielda gt 21 or not fieldb lt 0 TRUE not fieldb 0 or fielda lt 21 TRUE and fielda gt 0 Figure 17 14 Comparison expression results 492 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 17 5 Expression components This subsection describes the fields variables and constants used in RPT expressions Valid expressions are formed by using these components with the appropriate operators described in the previous subsection Report fields A report field or field is an RPT expression The field is a name that refers to a particular data field in the input file You can specify field as table field where table is the name of a table in the database and field is the name of a field within that table Or you can specify field as an arbitrary name followed by a type specification A field can be used wherever the term expr appears in the RPT syntax The exception is that a report field or an expression containing a report field cannot be used in commands appearing in the after report command group unless it appears in an argument to an aggregate function This is because all input lines have been processed at the end of the report and fields have undefined values To ensure that a field in an RPT script is named correctly remember the following rules The name should beg
388. ion to database design 105 7 4 Data access methods 106 Refining the database design forces you to ask questions about the functional dependencies in an application From an initial list of table and fields and with a recognition of which fields are sensitive to or cause changes in other fields you refine your design until you have a logically consistent database design As you refine your design you ask questions about how the database will be used what functions it must support and what reports and types of queries will be run The answers to these questions determine which Unify DataServer ELS access methods must be used Generally Unify DataServer ELS uses the optimum access method for performance depending on the type of query or operation being performed You don t actually have to tell Unify DataServer ELS to use a specific access method each time it searches for information in your database But you must design your database so Unify DataServer ELS has available the most efficient access method for the query or operation The Unify DataServer ELS access methods and the operations they are best suited for are as follows Hashing This method is used to access records randomly by an exact key The table must have a primary key If the primary key is a combination key all parts of the key must be specified exactly Explicit Relationships This method is used to join tables that reference one another A relationship exists whe
389. ipes are stored in the directory specified in DBPATH The maximum number of B tree files that may be open at one time If MAXOPNBTS is not set the default maximum number of open B trees is 5 When MAXOPNBTS is set the size of MAXOPNBTS affects B tree performance in the following ways If MAXOPNBTS is set to a number greater than 5 B tree index searches may be faster than at the default However fewer file descriptors are available for user programs e If MAXOPNBTS is set to a number less than 5 B tree searches are slower because ACCELL must repeatedly open B trees However more file descriptors are available for user programs Controls the display of progress messages while data dictionary report programs run The progress messages include Selecting Sorting and Formatting If the variable NOUMSGS is set to T True the progress messages do not display The default value for NOUMSGS is F False The following programs display progress messages when NOUMSGS is set to F Print Individual Privileges Print List of Programs Print Group Privileges Print Menus 61 62 NSEGS PAGELN Print Database Design Print Screens Indicates whether Unify DataServer ELS can use a system default attach address for shared memory Possible values are 0 or 1 The default for NSEGS is 0 which is appropriate for most computer systems When NSEGS is set to zero 0 Unify DataServer ELS calculates an attach address based on the D
390. ironment variables will be set automatically for you when you log in Refer to login or profile in your operating system documentation for more information Environment variables enable you to change the standard directories for executable programs and other supporting files And by setting DBPATH PATH and UNIFY correctly you can execute your Unify DataServer ELS application in any directory The Unify DataServer ELS installation procedure builds the Unify DataServer ELS startup program unify in usr bin with the basic Unify DataServer ELS environment variables set and exported PATH UNIFY and BUDEV Because usr bin is part of the default PATH list you can type unify from any directory and begin using Unify DataServer ELS through its built in menu system Unify DataServer ELS environment variables The following are the names and descriptions of the Unify DataServer ELS environment variables 54 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference BINEDIT BUBLK BUDEV BUDRVR BUTAPESZ Environment variables The name of a binary editor This editor is used in ENTER for editing binary fields To edit a binary field in ENTER press CTRL U when the cursor is on the position reserved for a binary field The size in bytes of a block used by the backup device If this variable is not set the block size defaults to 4096 bytes The complete path name of the system backup device This is a diskette drive a cartridge tape drive or
391. isions are prevented Database maintenance utilities 201 If you specify no devices Create database creates the file for the root volume as an ordinary file The default name for this file is file db If you want to name this file something else you can specify a different name for the file with the Unify DataServer ELS environment variable DBNAME chapter 5 If you specify device volumes Create database and reconfigure database create file db and file dbr as special files In this case file db is the block device and file dbr is the character device for the root database volume Using a raw disk partition 202 To convert an existing database stored in an ordinary file to one stored on a raw partition take the following steps 1 2 Log in as the operating system super user Select a file system large enough to hold the current file db When you convert to a raw partition the entire database file db must initially fit on one volume Later the database can expand to additional volumes If the selected file system is mounted you must unmount it If the mount command is in the etc rc command script you must also remove the mount command for this partition Make sure that the dev directory contains the special files for the partitions you want to use If the device files don t exist create them using mknod Make sure that the owner is root and that its mode is 666 Log in to your database as the Unify DataServer ELS su
392. ith the innermost query and work your way out EXAMPLE List the department number name job and salary plus commission of the person with the second highest earnings sql gt select Dept_No Name Job Salary Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Salary Commission sql gt select max Salary Commission sql gt from emp sql gt select Name sql gt from emp sql gt where Salary Commission sql gt select max Salary Commission sql gt from emp recognized query Dept_No Name Job Salary Commission 40 Colucci salesrep 5500 00 You can include nested queries in more complex expressions In this case the inner query must end with a semicolon so SQL can determine where the nested query ends and the rest of the Boolean expression begins The following query compares the top salesrep in the company with all salesreps in department 20 EXAMPLE List the department number name job total earnings and commission for the salesrep with the maximum total earnings and for all the salesreps in department 20 Sort the result by salary within commission in descending order so the high earners come first sql gt select Dept_No Name Job Salary Commission Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Salary commission sql gt select max Salary Commission sql gt from emp SQL Query DML language 377 sql gt where Job salesrep sql gt order by commission desc Salary
393. itle to orders not yet shipped header print pg_title in column 1 before dt if shipped then begin set pg_title to Orders already shipped page end RPT provides additional string operations Suppose you want to print string variables report fields or constants next to each other without spaces between them Because RPT normally prints a default space between fields you can use the direct concatenation operator to suppress the default space between fields Assuming you have report fields for state and Zip codes the following print statement positions the state code leaves two spaces then positions the zip code in column 11 print State Zip_Code in column 11 The direct concatenation operator does not remove trailing blanks from a field However this can be inconvenient when you are printing addresses and you want to eliminate spaces between parts of the address For example in an address you usually print the city a comma a space the state code two spaces and the Zip code as follows Sacramento CA 95825 RPT Report processor 481 482 NOTE The concatenation operators join strings Therefore Zip Code must be defined as a STRING in the database design for the purchase order tracking system In the database City is a field of fixed length 25 characters Using the direct concatenation operator to print an address line leaves a 25 character wide field for the city
394. itted by the key that you want to equate with the character name Equate only one sequence with each imaginary character SECTION menus This section describes the relationship between the Menu Handler commands and the keyboard The list of internal command names used by the Menu Handler in the unicap file is shown in Figure 6 8 Name Action ignoremiss report missing command definitions display more more command key sets at the bottom of the screen select run the highlighted menu line up move menu pointer up down move menu pointer down home go to home menu previous go to previous menu clear clear selection line Figure 6 8 Menu Handler commands Termcap and Unicap 81 Name Action exit help info redraw toggle exit Unify DataServer ELS display general Menu Handler help display information about the highlighted menu line redraw screen toggle command key line on off Figure 6 8 Menu Handler commands Menu Handler commands are also discussed in section 3 The Menu Handler section SECTION paint This section describes the relationship between PAINT commands and the keyboard The list of internal command names used by PAINT in the unicap file is shown in Figure 6 9 Name Aldfld Action add screen field app bot co10 cpdisp delch delfld delln down endin escape exit goto help home ins left Figure 6 9 Paint commands 82 start append input mode move to last line move to col
395. ividual s group PASSWORD A password code of up to eight characters that the user must enter at the login screen to access the Unify DataServer ELS system The password does not display when you define it or when the user enters it Unify DataServer ELS encrypts the password before storing it in the Database security utilities 223 data dictionary or before searching for a matching user password in the data dictionary SYSTEM ENTRY FT The name of the first menu the individual sees after login It defaults to the System entry point of the group but it can be changed for the individual N ext page P rev page A dd line or number The paging prompt This prompt lets you choose the operation mode for the paging area The meaning of each selection is as follows n Displays the next page of access privileges p Displays the previous page of access privileges a Moves the cursor to the access privilege data entry area so you can add access privileges 1 999 Accesses the privilege on line nnn and positions the cursor at that line so you can modify or delete it column to the left of LN Because of space restrictions this column has no name But this column is the same as the CMD column on the table entry screen This is where you enter operation commands for the current access privilege The current access privilege is indicated by the position of the cursor In the paging area you can move the cursor up or down this column by pr
396. ize of the variable s that needs more room For more information about Unify DataServer ELS environment variables see chapter 5 412 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 16 4 SQL Screen Form Report interface This chapter explains the following topics e SQL By Forms e Registering a Screen Form with SQL e Using an SQL Screen e Using the SQL Report Options Screen These topics describe the interface between screen forms SQL queries and the RPT report writer The SQL screen form report interface lets you substitute parameter values in stored queries at run time then send the results of the query to a report script for more sophisticated formatting SQL by forms ssq In application systems you usually have reports that you must run regularly Although the format of the report remains the same you may want to run the report for the current period for certain customers or for certain zip codes SQL By Forms gives you the ability to connect a screen form an SQL query and up to eight optional RPT scripts or custom programs to run such reports SQL By Forms consists of two parts e Register Screen Form with SQL e The SQL screen driver Register Screen Form with SQL section 15 1 and 16 4 following lets you associate a screen form with query and report scripts and specify where the user can send the output of the report The registration process creates an entry in the data dictionary referred to as an SQL screen
397. ized to a value using a set command at least once To set a variable to an initial value use the following two guidelines 1 If the variable only needs to be initialized once place the initializing set command in the before report command group 2 If the variable must be initialized before groups of detail information are processed place the initializing set command in an appropriate before name command group For more information on the order in which command groups are processed see Control Break Processing section 17 6 All variables are initialized to null values before the first command group begins processing The table in Figure 17 22 shows the default null initializations DISPLAY MEANING 0 zero if numeric Figure 17 22 Default null initlalizations Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DISPLAY MEANING a null date or Idate 00 00 midnight null string Figure 17 22 Default null initlalizations Expression validity table The expression validity table in Figure 17 23 summarizes the kinds of expressions recognized by RPT and where the expressions can be used in the report script Expression Validity Table An RPT report script can use 2 2 O x v E S Bs l SoL n 5 0 E 0 gt 24 SB 5 2 2 c 0 w L 38 8e2 5 amp 8 l o 6 gt S the sort command Y Y YU KYU KY Y an expression following the name syntax YU wo U A the header command group Y Y YU
398. job salesrep sql gt select Job avg Salary Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Job salesrep recognized query Jobl avg Salary Commission salesrep 2916 67 EXAMPLE Compute how much the company is paying engineers and programmers yearly This requires selecting all engineers and programmers multiplying their monthly salaries by 12 adding in their commissions presumably zero and adding the total sql gt select sum Salary 12 Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Job engineer or Job programmer recognized query sum Salary 12 Commission 88800 00 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference order by CLAUSE The results of the previous queries are in SQL determined order Although the unique operator sorts the output you cannot control the order of output The order by clause lets you specify the sequence of the rows that result from a query You can specify ascending order A Z using asc or descending order Z A using desc The default sort sequence is ascending with STRING fields sorted alphabetically EXAMPLE sql gt select Number Name Job List every employee s number name and job sorted by employee number sql gt from emp sql gt order by Num recognized query ber Number Name Job 1000 Smith salesrep 1100 Whittaker salesrep 1200 O Neil salesrep 1300 Schmidt programmer 1400 Scharf clerk 1500 Otsaka engineer 600
399. ke sure you have correctly spelled the keyword you want help about Otherwise make sure the environment variable UNIFY is set correctly so the help directory can be found gt gt gt No more pages Explanation This is the last or only page of this table or field list The next page command cannot work gt gt gt No more records Explanation This is the only or last record selected The selection file contains no more records gt gt gt No previous page Explanation This is the first or only page of this table or field list The previous page command cannot work Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt No previous record Explanation The previous record command cannot work because you are at the first record in the selection file gt gt gt No space for video control spaces Explanation Some terminals require a blank character position to turn video control ON and OFF PAINT does not allow these character positions to be shifted off the screen Therefore with the current screen form design you cannot set this video mode Correction Create more space around the area where you want to set video attributes gt gt gt No table statement found for lt ffff gt field Explanation The field ffff as defined in the field statement on the specified line does not have an associated table statement Correction Place all field statements in a table section gt gt gt Not enough memory Exp
400. lanation The query is too long or is nested too deeply for the hardware you are using Correction Simplify the query or divide it into smaller queries You can use the results of each small query to form the next query Otherwise you can try adjusting the SQL internal table sizes to accommodate the query For information on SQL internal table sizes and environment variables refer to Section 16 3 gt gt gt Not enough memory field not added Explanation This is an internal error There is not enough memory to perform the indicated operation Correction Reduce the number of screen fields or the amount of prompt text Unify DataServer ELS messages 635 gt gt gt Not enough memory PAINT will terminate Explanation This is an internal error There is not enough memory to perform the indicated operation Correction Reduce the number of screen fields or the amount of prompt text gt gt gt Not enough memory for all the fields in this screen Explanation This is an internal error There is not enough memory to perform the indicated operation Correction Reduce the number of screen fields or the amount of prompt text gt gt gt Not enough memory to process saved screen Explanation This is an internal error There is not enough memory to perform the indicated operation Correction Reduce the number of screen fields or the amount of prompt text gt gt gt XXXX not found Explanation You are trying to enter
401. le field filename lt constant The name of a table in the current database The optional field specification list It consists of a comma separated list of field names enclosed in parentheses The list defines which fields are to be loaded and the order they occur in the input stream whether that stream comes from an ASCII file literal tuples or from a query statement If you omit the list the input stream is assumed to contain all fields in the same order as would be returned from the following query select from table This is the default field order for a table The name of a file that contains data to be loaded into the database The keyword from must be used in this clause The file can be either an ASCII or a binary file To specify a binary file you must use the binary keyword option Using a binary file can increase performance because the data does not have to be converted from ASCII If the file name contains special characters such as a dot or slash then it must be enclosed in single quotes e g xxx out The order of fields in the file must either be the same as the field specification list or the same as the default field order for the table being loaded Site This indicates that a constant tuple or literal tuple can be used to specify the values for the fields in the field specification list The order of fields in the literal tuples must either be the same as the field specif
402. legen program is used to load custom programs you have registered with the Menu Handler using Describe program to system execmnit Because this program only relates to C programs it is described in the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual 280 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 12 8 Monitoring locks Impeek With Impeek you can monitor the number and type of locks at a specific time You can determine if table locks are being obtained or if large numbers of locks are not being released To use Impeek enter the following command at the shell prompt Impeek The following figure shows an example of Impeek s output unify Impeek cit SOS3 2 il cloiels IS02Z7 2077 rea L ereh SLK Total 22408 Busy 3156 Free 19252 Figure 1 Example of Impeek output The information displayed by Impeek can be interpreted as follows trx Transaction information consisting of three parts The process ID number The number of times this process has started a new transaction The number of locks held by the process now dbid Database information consisting of two parts The inode number of file db e The device number that file db resides on The device number is calculated by multiplying the major device number by 256 and adding the result to the minor device number Miscellaneous utilities 281 rid and tid Normally rid and tid refer to the relation table number and tuple record number t
403. ler recognizes as being associated with a particular command You can change any command definition to use a different command key by editing the menu section of the unicap file For more information about unicap see section 6 1 The list of internal command names used by the Menu Handler in the unicap file is shown in Figure 3 2 following Name Action ignoremiss report missiong command definitions more display more command key sets at the bottom of the screen select run the highlight menu line up move menu pointer up down move menu pointer up home go to home menu previous go to previous menu clear clear selection line exit exit UNIFY help display general Menu Handler help info display information about the highlighted menu line redraw redraw screen toggle toggle command key line on off Figure 3 2 UNIFY Menu Handler Commands Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Figure 3 3 is an example of the standard Menu Handler section in the unicap file SECTION menu menu handler ignoremiss FALSE report missing command definitions more lt f 10 gt select E lt fl gt up u lt up_arrow gt k down r j n lt down_arrow gt home lt home gt lt f 2 gt previous p lt f3 gt clear z 177 lt f 4 gt exit d lt f5 gt help lt f 6 gt info i lt f 7 gt redraw r lt f8 gt toggl e t lt f 9 gt Figure 3 3 Menu Handler
404. leted An ENTER screen form can display related information from fields in secondary tables but these fields are display only and cannot be edited ENTER can only display information from secondary tables if there is an explicit relationship between the target and the secondary table The basic rules for developing screen forms you want to use with ENTER are as follows 1 An ENTER screen can update the designated target table only The target table is defined with Register Screen Form with ENTER Only target table records can be added or deleted Fields from secondary tables are display only A secondary table field can be displayed only when the previous target table field on the screen form has an explicit relationship to a field in the secondary table 326 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference In the following example the manufacturer name only displays on the model screen form because it is preceded by the manufacturer ID number paint Command mode Model Number Manufacturer Description ID Unify RDBMS Paint Screen Forms NNNNNNN NNNN SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 30 APR 1999 Li2 gt cg manufacturer name The manufacturer ID number is an explicit reference from the model to the manufacturer This is indicated in the database design for model with a reference to mano in the REF column as shown in Figure 15 1 Table field REF Type Len Long name manf 10 manufacturer mano NUMERIC 4 Manu
405. letter example 469 Advanced report techniques 475 RPT expression syntax 486 Named expressions 488 Logical expressions 489 Expression components 493 Report fields 493 Numbers dates andtimes 494 Strings 499 Functions 505 Variables 510 Expression validity table 513 Control break processing 514 Named sort expressions 514 Control breaks 517 Control break processing command groups 518 Non command groups 520 bottom margin 520 end 520 input 521 left margin 522 length 522 separator 522 sort 523 top margin 524 width 524 Command groups 525 after report 525 aftername 526 before report 527 before name 527 detail 528 header 529 Command group commands 530 if 530 need 531 page 532 Contents print 532 set 540 skip 540 Using RPT with other Unify DataServer ELS tools 541 SQL by forms and RPT 541 ENTER and RPT 543 rip 544 User programs and RPT 544 RPT table usage information report 546 RPT reference summary 552 RPT keywords 552 Overview of commands and command groups 552 Chapter 18 LST Listing processor 557 LST Syntax conventions 558 Expressions 558 Selecting records 560 Running the selection processor 560 Selection processor commands 560 Listing records 564 Running the listing processor 564 Listing processor commands 564 sort 568 total 569 go 570 print 570 nohead 571 unlock 571 Appendix A Field and internal data types 573 Changing field data types and lengths 574 Safe Changes 575 Unsa
406. library the lib directory after you install Unify DataServer ELS The Unify DataServer ELS library is the directory specified in the Unify DataServer ELS environment variable For more information about setting the Unify DataServer ELS environment variable see chapter 5 You can edit the ASCII text messages in unifymsgs and localmsgs using a text editor such as vi Find the lines that contain the messages you want to change and replace the existing messages with the new ones A message can be up to 140 characters long Enter the message on a single line without wrapping The message can include special characters such as t for a tab or n for a new line You can also include control characters in the message For example you can use a CTRL G to ring the bell when the message displays IWARNING Edit only the text messages in unifymsgs and localmsgs Do not change the numbers preceding the messages Unify DataServer ELS uses these numbers to access the messages Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Formatting currency and date displays In addition to changing messages you can set the CURR DATETP and LDATEFMT environment variables to display currencies dates and times in the correct format For more information about the CURR DATETP and LDATEFMT environment variables see chapter 5 The following is a brief description of these three environment variables CURR DATETP LDATEFMT The display format for amounts
407. lication directory is shown in the tutorial directory Figure 4 2 This directory structure follows the Unify DataServer ELS directory conventions tutorial hdoc ai T src help Id A programs documentation files files d sf file db aF nee Order Maintenance Custom file dbr C 0 and a files ENTER file dbov C 0 and unify db ae q files 50 other system files Figure 4 2 Unify DataServer ELS tutorial Directory Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Files and directories A typical application directory structure looks like the diagram in Figure 4 3 In this figure xxx and yyy are the names of src subdirectories user root directory bin hdoc build def src help Id a programs documentation files files file db a T c 0 and a files C 0 and file dbr a files file dbv idx files unify db q files other system files Figure 4 3 Example Application Directory Structure 51 52 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 5 Environment variables Using environment variables The standard operating system gives you a convenient way of setting up parameters that can be accessed by shell scripts or batch files and programs These parameters called environment variables can then adapt shell scripts or batch files and programs that reference the parameters to the local environment Environment variables take the form name value where both name and value are arbitrary st
408. licit relationship between two tables reference the parent primary key in the REF column of the dependent child field For example to declare an explicit relationship between manf and item place manf_ID the key for manf in the REF column for imanf_ID in the item table Figure 7 12 Introduction to database design 109 illustrates this with an excerpt from the Database Design report for Design 4 TABLE FIELD REF TYPE LEN LONG NAME item 25 item item_ID COMB item_ID imanf_ID manf_ID STRING 4 Manufacturer_ID ser_no STRING 3 Serial_ Number price AMOUNT 3 Sales_Price Figure 7 12 Excerpt from report for database design 4 The major advantages of explicit relationships are 1 Explicit relationships take less disk space and less time to process than do B trees 2 Referential integrity is automatically enforced 3 Given a parent key value finding and processing each child record is fast and efficient 4 Given a child record accessing information about its parent record is fast and efficient The major disadvantages of explicit relationships are 1 Relationship pointer chains are maintained in a LIFO last in first out order only so records cannot be retrieved in a specified sequence without a sort 2 If you want to add or drop an explicit relationship you must change the database design and then reconfigure the database Properly used explicit relationships can dramatically improve query performance ata relatively low
409. lid times 0 0 23 75 9 8 30 12 00 The following are not valid times 24 00 23 60 0 99 29 30 The time refers to a time of day not the elapsed number of hours and minutes Times cannot be negative Nor can they be added However you may substract one time from another to obtain the difference between them measured in hours minutes RPT has a built in variable hour that contains the current hour and minutes in the format HH MM The following is an example of how the hour variable is used in a print statement print Printed at col 10 hour Comparing dates and times You can compare two dates or two times using comparison operators A date cannot be compared with anything other than a date A time cannot be compared with anything other than a time RPT Report processor 497 A number of days can be added to or subtracted from a date The result is a date provided it is in the accepted range and the result can be compared with another date A number of minutes can be added to or subtracted from a time For example you can add a number to a time to obtain a new time as follows 100 60 2700 You can also subtract one time from another to obtain the difference in hour minutes Numeric operations 498 Expressions can include the following arithmetic operators multiplication division modulo addition subtraction When two numeric type integers are divided the result is also an integer The frac
410. limits the number of expression nodes allowed in a report script Each expression in a script uses one expression node The default number of expression nodes is 400 For more information about expressions see sections 17 4 and 17 5 Variables RPTFLDCNT This table limits the number of different variables allowed in a report script The default number of variables is 150 For more information about variables see section 17 5 Constants RPTCONCNT This table limits the number of constants allowed in a report script The RPT constant table includes numeric float amount date Idate time string and text constants The default number of constants is 250 For more information about constants see section 17 5 Commands RPTNCOM This table limits the number of statements such as sort after detail print and if allowed in a report script The default number of commands is 256 print statements RPTNPRINT This table limits the number of print statements allowed in a report script The default number of print statements is 125 Print items RPTNPITM This table limits the number of print items allowed in a report script Each comma separated expression in a print statement uses one print item The default number of print items is 256 Sort items RPTNSITM This table limits the number of sort items allowed in a report script Each comma separated expression in a sort statement uses one sort item The default number of sort items is
411. located in Atlanta sql gt delete emp sql gt where Dept_No select Number sql gt from dept sql gt where Location Atlanta recognized update 2 record s selected 2 record s deleted SQL Query DML language 395 16 3 Unify DataServer ELS SQL extensions Unify DataServer ELS SQL has several extensions to the basic language that adapt it to interactive query development in the operating system environment The most important extension for interactive querying of a database is the ability to edit the last query To make this easier the Unify DataServer ELS SQL editor interface lets you edit SQL queries using your own editor without having to exit from SQL e Often you need to repeat queries SQL lets you save queries in SQL script files so you can run the queries later without re entering them e You can run operating system commands from within SQL without having to exit Because of the many text processing programs available you may sometimes want to dump data into an external file and then load it back in the database This section describes how you can use these features in SQL Editing queries 396 SQL stores the last query you entered in a buffer You can edit the query to correct mistakes save it in a file to run later or read in an entirely new query To edit the current query buffer type edit at the SQL prompt as follows sql gt edit If the buffer is empty you get an empty file to work wit
412. logical transaction active at a time Replay errors On the line below this prompt are error counters The counters increment when add record delete record and change field errors occur An error that occurs during the replay process is placed in the replay error file The default error file name is replay err After the transaction log has been replayed you can back up the rebuilt database clear the transaction log file and restart transaction logging The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Read Database Backup The transaction log has been successfully replayed and the database is in a consistent state It is a good idea to make a backup of the database at this point If transaction logging is ON you will now have the option to backup the database and restart transaction logging If you do not choose to do this transaction logging will be turned OFF until the next time you backup the database Do you want to back up the database and restart transaction logging E Database maintenance utilities 189 A n no answer turns transaction logging OFF and ends the program A y yes answer calls Write database backup so you can write a new backup After the backup is complete transaction logging is turned ON NOTE After Read database backup is complete be sure to exit Unify DataServer ELS and login again This step causes Unify DataServer ELS to open the restored data dictionary 190 Uni
413. lues are substituted This example is illustrated by the following screen form sreport Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Sample Report ER STATUS ERS ISSUE Parameters are numbered from 1 through the highest screen field number Note that you are not required to use a particular parameter in a script You can use all some or no parameters In this example the parameter for the status code is 1 the starting date is 2 and the ending date is 3 To print the title page you can use a before report section similar to the following before report print CUSTOMER STATUS 1 skip print FOR ORDERS ISSUED print BETWEEN 2 AND 3 You can use the same parameters more than once in a script If you want to print the information at the top of each page you can include statements similar to the following in a header section header print STATUS 1 FROM 2 TO 3 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The previous example shows you how to use parameters in string constants You can also use parameters in calculations Suppose you want to design an aged accounts receivable report that calculates the aging based on a date entered by the user You can use a series of statements to determine the age of each receivable as in the following if ar_date gt 1 30 then receivable is current else begin if ar_date gt 1 60 then receivable is 31 to 60 days
414. m of the Unify DataServer ELS system architecture Menu Handler Query B Host SOL y by Enter database Language Forms Utilities Interface Report Writer Unitrieve database Kernal Data database Dictionary Volume Figure 1 1 Unify DataServer ELS system architecture The primary user interface to the Unify DataServer ELS system is the Menu Handler The system administrator can select any Unify DataServer ELS program from a 21 22 menu while also controlling security to permit other users access only to certain menus and programs Unify DataServer ELS comes with a set of built in menus ready for you to use in developing your application See chapter 3 The Menu Handler for a complete description of how to use menus You can also create your own menus For more information see Add Modify or Delete Menus section 12 1 Before you design your own database application you should review the concepts of database design and access methods explained in Introduction to database Design chapter 7 Chapter 9 Database Design Utilities and chapter 10 database Maintenance Utilities describe the options to create and maintain a database These include programs to enter and modify the database design create or reconfigure the database add or drop indexes read and write backup tapes or removable disks and repair corrupted databases You can also specify that a Uni
415. mands n 300 Print n 125 Statements Print Items n 256 Sort Items n 15 Input Items n 40 Command Groups n Zo Set Statements n 100 If Statements n 50 Aggregates n 50 Function Calls n 50 Arguments n 100 RPT Report processor 551 17 11 RPT reference summary With examples the previous chapters describe how you can use RPT This chapter summarizes RPT information for quick reference It lists the reserved keywords used by RPT summarizes the syntax of commands and command groups and explains the error messages produced by RPT RPT keywords The keywords listed in figure 17 30 have specific meaning to RPT and cannot be used for table or field names after amount and avg before begin binary bottom centered col column comb count date desc detail else end float footer header hour if in input idate left length max margin min need newline no not numeric or page pageno print report set separator skip sort sorted string substr then time to today top total using where width Figure 17 30 RPT reserved keywords Report scripts that use these words as field names cause syntax errors Overview of commands and command groups The following is an overview of RPT commands and command groups This overview can be used as a quick reference to the commands command groups and Control break processing 552 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The non command group commands input through sort and the command groups are as follows
416. mands such as add field transfer field transfer line and reverse video The string is a single print character The default marker character is See Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 for more information on how to use PAINT command names Termcap and Unicap 83 84 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part Il Database design and maintenance Part Il contains three sections that describe how to create and maintain a database Chapter 7 Introduction to database design explains the principles of database design Unify DataServer ELS database field types and the access methods used to retrieve data from a Unify DataServer ELS database Chapter 8 Database design utilities explains the Unify DataServer ELS tools for creating and modifying a database reconfiguring a database using B tree indexes and specifying Advanced Field Attributes for database fields Chapter 9 Database maintenance utilities explains the Unify DataServer ELS tools for reading and writing database backups rebuilding the hash table rebuilding explicit relationships between fields and defining database volumes 85 86 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 7 Introduction to database design As a database designer you want to create a design that faithfully models a real world situation can be updated accurately and efficiently and is easy to modify You must determine what information to store in the database and whic
417. mber by select or by system name The following explains how to use each selection method 1 Enter a selection number and press RETURN to run the associated option 2 Press the select command key to run the option highlighted by the menu pointer the current menu selection 3 Enter the system name for a program option or menu Then press RETURN to run that program option or menu These system names are assigned by Unify DataServer ELS or by you when you create menus ENTER or SQL screens or custom programs Registered options can be run from any menu by entering the system name at the selection prompt For example at the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu you can go The Menu Handler 37 38 directly to Print Help Documentation by typing prthdoc This is a major time saving feature for experienced users To experiment with these selection methods start by entering screens at the selection prompt The Create or Modify Screen Forms menu displays as follows screens Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Create or Modify Screen Forms Paint Screen Forms Register Screen Form with ENTE Register Screen Form with SQ Check Screen Form Coordinates Display List of Screens Test Screens Compile Screens Restore Screen to Data Dictionary Create Default Screen Form Te 26 3 4 Si 6 Tes 8 9 ESC select U up RET down X home P previous Z clear D exit At the Create or Modify Screen For
418. mber between 0 and 79 for 80 column screens and 0 131 on 132 column screens The y coordinate row of the database field on the screen form It is a number between 0 and 23 The text to be displayed on the screen form to indicate what data is being entered or displayed You can enter literal text Or if your terminal supports special video modes you can enter escape characters that indicate the prompt should be displayed in a special video mode Escape characters consist of the tilde followed by a single character specifying the video mode These are the same escape characters described for the termcap file in section 6 1 To display a prompt in a special video mode enter the correct escape characters before and after the prompt The table in Figure 14 1 summarizes the escape characters that specify special video modes Screen form maintenance utilities 317 When you want to Then enter start reverse video r end reverse video S start underline u end underline y start reverse underline video y end revere underline video X Figure 14 1 Special video mode escape characters If you start a special video mode for a prompt you must be sure to use the appropriate escape character to end that video mode Otherwise your screen form will not display correctly If you created the original screen form with Create default screen form the database field s access name is used as the field prompt For most fields the access
419. mber of expected records Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 10 Print display B tree statistics btstats The B tree statistics report lists all B tree indexes sorted by table and index ID number Each section of the report lists the index file name size database fields sort order ID number and whether duplicates are allowed The report is 79 columns wide To run this report select Print display B tree statistics btstats from the database maintenance menu DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE T Gl pit Database REPORT B Tree Statistics Table 1 manf Record count 10 Index ID Number 1 Duplicates are NOT allowed Index file name btOOl idx Index file size 728 bytes Orde Field Name A mnumber A mstate Index ID Number 2 Duplicates are allowed Index file name bt004 idx Index file size 0 bytes Index file is EMPTY Index must be REBUILT Order Field Name A mstate D mzip Figure 11 13 B tree statistics report Data Dictionary reports 257 258 The prompt P rint or D isplay Statistics lets you choose whether you want to send the report to the printer or to the screen If you want to send the report to the printer answer P at this prompt If you want to display the report on the screen answer D The headings that display on the B tree statistics report are described as follows Table The number in the data dictionary that identifies the table containing
420. mbol in the using format template must be a single regardless of the number of characters specified for the currency symbol in CURR Figure 17 28 illustrates with an example amount of 340 USD s IF CURRis ce the using template THEN the output is 25USD FAR BRS 340 00USD Figure 17 28 Currency Symbol Substitution using and string fields You can also format string fields and constants with the using option Normally these are printed their full length across the page If you want to format a long string field or constant in a column narrower than its length you can use a format to specify the width of the output column The string will be broken between necessary words fit it in the specified column width The format in this case is nr where n is the width of the output column The r option specifies a ragged right margin For example there is a string field named long_string of length 80 You want to fit the field in a column 20 characters wide starting at column 40 You must use the following print statement RPT Report processor 539 print long_string using 20r col 40 using and text fields You can print the contents of a text field with a using clause RPT treats text fields like string fields As for string fields if you want to format a text field in a report you can specify a using format for the width of the report column For example suppose there is a text field named text field To print its cont
421. mcap file and move the terminal function entries you need to the top of the file This is because the termcap file is searched linearly for a specified terminal type The search is considerably faster if you reduce the amount of data to be passed 74 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 6 2 UNICAP The basic element of the unicap file is a line Lines have the following form command name command key list comment where valid command names are those recognized by Unify DataServer ELS and the command key list takes one of the forms discussed in the next paragraph Comments are optional A command key list is composed of either a single command key or several command keys separated by vertical bars Each command key is composed of character representations from one or more of the following character classes print characters escape characters control characters octal characters and imaginary characters Some command names allow only a single command key Command keys cannot contain internal spaces or tabs except as explained in the following character class descriptions This allows spaces and tabs to be used in the command key list to improve readability Character classes The following describes the character classes print character Any printable ASCII character upper and lower character case letters digits and special characters excluding the space caret backslash and less than lt These charact
422. me editing the screen form PAINT uses its own algorithms to divide the screen form into data dictionary elements Consequently there may be slight differences between the q and h files produced by Check screen form coordinates and Compile screens sections 14 1 and 14 4 If you are using custom programs to drive your screen forms use either PAINT or Check screen form coordinates but not both to create and modify screen forms Screen editing commands PAINT screen editing commands can be divided into four different groups cursor motion prompt editing screen field editing and miscellaneous Although screen editing commands have default settings they can be associated with different keystrokes Customizing PAINT commands later in this chapter describes how to associate screen editing commands with specific keys Screen form development tools 295 296 The tables in Figures 13 2a through 13 5 summarize the standard screen editing commands Cursor motion commands When you want to move the cursor Then use left right up down to the next line to the next word to the previous word left_arrow back space h CTRLH right_arrow space up_arrow k down_arrow J CTRL J RETURN w b Figure 13 2a Cursor motion command summary Cursor motion commands When you want to move the cursor Then use to home position line 2 col 0 H to the bottom of screen line 22 col 0
423. me of a field in one of the tables listed in the from clause The name of a field preceded by the name of the table that contains the field If the table has been assigned a label or temporary name in the from clause then the label can be used in place of the table name You must qualify a field this way when you use a field name that is duplicated in two or more tables listed in the from clause For example both the emp and the dept tables contain a field called Number If you do not specify the table SQL cannot determine which Number field you want A constant value of type NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT LDATE TIME or STRING The type of constant depends on the type of the field or expression compared with the constant STRING constants are enclosed in single quotes to distinguish them from field names An arithmetic expression composed of fields constants and aggregate functions connected by the operators and Parentheses can be used to change the order in which the operations are performed The subtraction operator must be surrounded by spaces to distinguish it from the minus sign These are the built in SQL aggregate functions When you use an aggregate function it implies a group by should be performed With a having clause you must specify the group explicitly Using an aggregate function also implies that you have selected only fields or expressions whose values are common to all records in the group SQL
424. meone else is modifying or deleting this record you cannot modify the record Deletes the current record from the database If someone else is modifying or deleting this record you cannot delete the record Displays the ENTER Report Options Screen if formatting programs are associated with the current ENTER screen Up to eight different formatting programs can be associated with a screen form 343 Reports are generated for the current set of selected records For more information about ENTER and reports see ENTER report options screen later in this chapter S Clears the current set of selected records and erases the screen so you can perform another query A CTRL U also clears the selection and erases the screen When records are selected using ENTER query by forms the selected count registers display below the operation prompt The selected count registers are described as follows searched nnn Shows the number of records nnn ENTER examined to satisfy the query selected nnn Shows the number of records nnn ENTER selected current nnn Shows the number of the record nnn currently displayed on the screen The number ranges from 1 to the number of selected records Enter report options screen After you have selected a set of records using ENTER query by forms you can use the ENTER report options screen to choose a report and specify where to send its output The available reports and their valid output dest
425. mes Before an empty database is created you are again asked to verify that you really want to create an empty database A new empty database is about to be created If you have information in an existing database it will be lost No one else should be using the database at this time PROCEED After the database has been created the screen looks like this xPhase I EE x kPhase II xk xPhase III The database file has been created Hit RETURN to continue gt gt Create Data Entry Screens This option creates processes and registers with ENTER a data entry screen form for each table The unique eight character data dictionary name is used as the name of the screen All existing screen forms with the same names as these tables are first deleted The screen heading is Table Long Name followed by Maintenance The screen prompt for each field in the table is taken from the field s access name usually the field s long name If there is no long name the field s implicit data dictionary name is used as the access name The screen prompt for a field that references a COMB type field is a combination of the referencing field s short database name and the short name of the referenced component field For more information Database design utilities 133 134 Create Menu see this sections description of the LONG NAME column on the field entry screen Generally the fields display on the finished screen in t
426. messagts by responding to the error message with gt gt gt Type and length are incomplete Delete Explanation A valid field name is present but no value is set for the field s data type or length These two parameters must be set for a field to be valid Correction Either enter the values for this field description or answer y yes and delete the current field Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Type conversion error Left type is LLLL right type is RRRR operator is xxxx Explanation The data types of the two sides of a Boolean expression do not match They cannot be converted into compatible data types You may have used the wrong field name Invalid Query select name from emp where name 2000 Correction select name from emp where salary 2000 Explanation The data types of the operands cannot be converted so the data types match This error message is followed by more debugging information gt gt gt Unable to create output file please reenter filename Explanation During the Report Option process the given file name FILENAME could not be created Correction Make sure you have spelled the file name correctly Or Make sure you have write permission for the file and directory gt gt gt Unable to create the unify conf configuration file Explanation The transaction logging program cannot create the file named unify conf This file stores the Unify DataServer ELS tran
427. mployees earn more than 25 of the total paid to everyone else with the same job works the same way 1 The outer query chooses the current employee if that person s job category has at least four employees in it 2 The inner query uses that employee s job and number to exclude the employee from the calculation of total salary plus commission for that job category The total is multiplied by 0 25 4 Then if the current employee s salary exceeds that number the employee is chosen This type of query is called a variable query or a correlated query because the inner query varies depending on a table in the outer query 388 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference In the following example you join the emp table to itself and must give the emp in the outer query a temporary name so it is apparent in the inner query which emp table you are referring to EXAMPLE List the name job and salary plus commission for each employee who holds the same job as at least three other employees and who earns more than 25 of the total salary plus commission of the others with the same job sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt sql gt recognized query select Name from emp x where Job is and Salary Job Salary Commission in select Job from emp group by Job having count Commission gt select sum Salary Commission from emp where emp Job x Job
428. ms menu you can move to the fifth menu line with the down key Use the select command key to select Display List of Screens When Display List of Screens is finished the Create or Modify Screen Forms menu redisplays To return to a previous menu press the previous command key If you are at your home menu an error message displays at the bottom of the screen to tell you there is no previous menu If you are at the Create or Modify Screen Forms menu the previous command key causes the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu to redisplay Notice that the menu pointer highlights the last selection you made Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Unify DataServer ELS users see only the menus and programs that match their security privileges These security privileges are set by the system administrator using Add or Modify Group Privileges and Add or Modify Individual Privileges The Menu Handler also prevents users from accessing programs or menus by name for which they have no privilege chapter 10 Database Security Utilities describes how this works Users Entry to the Unify DataServer ELS system can be controlled with one of two different login modes The first mode allows access to the database without a login screen this is the default mode This method does not enforce Unify DataServer ELS security Users have access to all programs menus and options The second mode uses a login screen that requires the user to enter a user ID and a pass
429. ms such as Design and create a new database Modify database design Write database backup Read database backup Transaction logging status and Reconfigure database to another user ID This minimizes the need to distribute the super user ID and password to other users 3 Assign access to Add or modify group privileges and Add or modify individual privileges with care For example you can limit access to these programs to the super user 4 Verify the procedures used in any program before the program is made known to the menu system This involves the Describe program to system program As described you can establish operating system security in such a way that programs can access the database via Unify DataServer ELS only For example an employee may have read privilege on the paycheck file But this doesn t mean the same employee must be able to register a check printing program Database security utilities 231 5 Establish a special operating system user ID to prevent access to the database by unauthorized user programs This user ID should own all the system files for the database such as unify db file db file dor and upasswd Only the owner should be able to read and write these files Move the program Unify DataServer ELS to its own directory with all other Unify DataServer ELS executables The executables must be owned by this special user Then turn on the set user ID bit For more information see chmod in your opera
430. n The total function at the end of a report calculates a sum or grand total of the lines in the input file e The other aggregate functions are used at the end of this example as well to show how they re used These are avg average min minimum max maximum and count line count Form letter example The following example shows how you can use RPT to develop a form letter It also shows you how to use variables and print conditions to print information based on the data in the input file The example report is a form letter from the president to the regional sales offices regarding their sales results for the first quarter of the year The input file must contain only employees in the regional sales offices The SQL query must create this file correctly The president s form letter lists and congratulates the salesreps who met or exceeded quota Then if all salesreps in the office met quota another compliment is printed If some of the salesreps in the office fell short the memo suggests the salesreps increase their efforts to meet quota for the next quarter RPT Report processor 469 The total sales amount is computed from the commission field The company pays a 5 commission so the total sales amount is commission 05 The form letters produced by the report script are as follows TO Central Sales FROM Mr Lee SUBJECT Sales quotas for 1st quarter 1998 As you know our sales goal for the 1st quarter of
431. n Figure 11 8 Group access listing report The column headings on the Print group privileges report are described as follows ID The code that identifies each group that has access to the Unify DataServer ELS system NAME The user group name that further identifies and documents the group ENTRY PT The short name of the initial menu the group sees on login to Unify DataServer ELS MENU PROG The name of each menu program or screen that the group can access Each name is followed by a single character that indicates the option s type Data Dictionary reports 245 M A menu P A program E An ENTER screen S An SQL screen INQ ADD MOD DEL A single character in each of these columns indicates whether the group has that access mode INQUIRE ADD MODIFY or DELETE for each menu program or screen y The group can use that access mode with the menu program or screen n The group cannot use that access mode with the menu program or screen 246 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 5 Individual access listing lemp The Individual access listing report lists all the users in the data dictionary by user login ID After each individual s name the report lists the programs that the user can access differently from other users in the group To print this report select Print individual privileges lemp from the menu This program has no options for you to select The report is 132 characters wide but its size ha
432. n File names have the form name suffix where both the name and the suffix are variable length The suffix indicates the type of file as with the usual operating system file naming conventions The following is a list of Unify DataServer ELS file name suffixes their meanings and a description of significant files with that suffix Unify DataServer ELS files are usually located in a particular directory which is noted here The Directories section describes the directory layout in more detail The following are the file name suffixes recognized by Unify DataServer ELS a afa db 46 An archive file created with the operating system command ar that contains relocatable binary files in a form suitable for loading using the Id command Unify DataServer ELS has some system archives that are in the system lib directory The application developer can also create archive files usually in a src subdirectory An Advanced Field Attributes file Unify DataServer ELS uses two attribute files unify afa and fields afa The file fields afa is the Advanced Field Attributes ASCII source file The file unify afa is the compiled version of fields afa The Advanced Fields Attributes option is explained in the section Advanced Field Attributes A C source code file This kind of file is created by the application developer and is typically located in an src subdirectory A database file Every application has two database files the data di
433. n a database table references the primary key of another table B trees This method is used when a query must find records based on ranges of values or partial inexact matches B trees are defined using a Unify DataServer ELS utility Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Buffered Sequential Access This method is used to access every record in the table starting with the first record and proceeding one by one to the last This method is usually used with raw files The following describes each of the Unify DataServer ELS data access methods and their advantages and disadvantages Hashing primary key Unify DataServer ELS uses a hash index to search by primary key A table cannot have more than one primary key and that primary key must be unique In Unify DataServer ELS a primary key has two purposes in addition to uniquely identifying a record e To let you perform a fast random access hashing e To give you something on which to base an explicit relationship However if you don t need to uniquely identify a record access by hash table or specify an explicit relationship a primary key is optional If you need fast random access use as many fields as necessary to get a unique key But remember that users must enter every component of the key exactly to find a record For this reason primary keys should be short single fields whenever possible If users specify an inexact match or range of values Unify DataServer
434. n a salary equal to the average salary of all employees you must use a nested query similar to the following one select name salary from emp where salary select avg salary from emp This query asks two questions 1 The inner query asks What is the average salary for all employees 2 The outer query asks What employees make that salary For more information on nested queries see Query Facilities at the beginning of section 16 1 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part VI Report generators Part VI Report Generators describes the two ways you can produce reports in Unify DataServer ELS using RPT and using LST Chapter 17 RPT Report processor describes RPT RPT is a report generator with a powerful non procedural language you can use to format customized reports Chapter 18 LST Listing processor describes LST LST is a simpler tool you can use to produce quick reports without writing an RPT script 451 452 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 17 RPT Report processor This chapter describes the Unify DataServer ELS Report processor RPT The first part of this chapter introduces the concepts of report writing and briefly describes how RPT fits in with the rest of Unify DataServer ELS The second part contains tutorial type examples that illustrate the features of RPT The remainder of the chapter is reference material describing RPT syntax keywords and error messages 453 17
435. n an archive file q a Unify DataServer ELS screen form file read at run time Figure 2 2 File name suffixes recognized by Unify DataServer ELS Directories and path names 28 Unify DataServer ELS has several environment variables you can set to specify directories and path names The list on the following page introduces these environment variables For more information about Unify DataServer ELS environment variables see chapter 5 Before setting environment variables you should know which environment you are working on for example Bourne Shell or C Shell You should also be familiar with environment variable settings in the login or profile file If you need more information about environment variables on your operating system refer to your operating system user s manual or one of the source books listed at the end of this chapter Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference e DBPATH contains the complete path name for application database files If DBPATH is not set all application database files are assumed to be in the current directory e LOCKDIR contains the name of the named pipes directory If LOCK DIR is not set the default named pipes directory is tmp e PATH contains the name of the directory where Unify DataServer ELS system programs are located e TERM CAP contains the complete path name of the termcap file The default location of the termcap file is in the etc termcap directory e UNICAP contains the
436. n each record Also make sure no records have indexed fields that are blank Default values or blank fields in more than one record would be duplicates Unify DataServer ELS messages 669 670 gt gt gt This field is too big for the B tree key as defined Its internal length is nnn and only mmm more will fit Explanation You are trying to add another field with length nnn to the B tree index key but there are only mmm bytes left The maximum length is shown at the end of the prompt THE SUM OF INTERNAL LENGTHS gt gt gt This field is write protected Its value cannot be changed Explanation You cannot change this field because it is write protected Correction You must provide the write password for this field before you can change its value gt gt gt This is the current menu Explanation You are trying to select your current menu gt gt gt This is your home menu Explanation The home command key cannot work because you are at your home menu gt gt gt This record already exists Explanation You are trying to enter a primary key value that exists in the database Primary key field values must be unique Correction Use another value for this field entry gt gt gt This record has been deleted Explanation Since the time you selected this record the record has been deleted by another process Correction Even though the record is listed in your selection file it is no longer in the database
437. n file must contain a physical record address not a key DBLOAD updates the database record at this location with the values of the remaining fields See setloc in the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual This option is provided for compatibility with Release 3 2 only and is not intended for use with general applications Don t log transactions For best performance use this flag to prevent entries in the transaction log The separator It is necessary to indicate the end of one field and the start of the next Use the pipe or vertical bar whenever possible Do not use a letter a digit or an underscore Indicates that the input file is in binary format 277 278 The following DBLOAD parameters are required database The name of the database file to load This is either file db if you are loading data in the application database or the name of your unique db file table The name of the database table to load the data into input file The name of the ASCII input file that contains the data to load If this is a dash the standard input is used Thus DBLOAD can be used at the end of a pipeline spec file The name of another ASCII file that contains the list of fields in the table that DBLOAD should update The fields are in the order listed in the input file You can use the default mode both n and u missing only if a key is defined for the table This mode adds a new database record if the current
438. n fit on the backup media and to verify correct handling of the end of media condition take the following steps 1 Back up the database without setting BUTAPESZ BUDB will display the number of blocks on the media while backing up the 55 database Make a note of how many blocks were written on each tape 2 Set the BUTAPESZ environment variable to approximately 25 less than the number of blocks written to the first tape For example if budb indicates that 45654 blocks were written to the first tape you would set BUTAPESZ to 45629 3 Back up the database again using the smaller BUTAPESZ This is a safety copy of your database 4 Unset the BUTAPESZ environment variable you can unset BUTAPESZ by logging out 5 Because restoring the database is a risky operation ona production system you may wish to make additional backups prior to running redb by using tar or cpio for regular files and dd for raw partition database volumes 6 Using redb try to restore the backup created in step 1 If this fails your operating system may not correctly handle end of tape You should then use the media created in step 3 to restore your database and always remember to set UTAPESZ before starting your backup An alternate technique is to calculate and set BUTAPESZ for all backups It can be calculated by taking the capacity of the tape in kilobytes and dividing by 4 reduce this number by 5 to 10 percent to allow for interrecord gaps Then
439. n form is to be displayed when a program begins execution Standard Unify DataServer ELS menus A menu is a set of Unify DataServer ELS options displayed for selection Your initial empty data dictionary contains only the Unify DataServer ELS programs menus and a user ID You can use the Add Modify or Delete Menus program to create custom menus for the application and arrange the menus in a hierarchical menu system On the next page is a diagram of the standard menus that come with Unify DataServer ELS 33 34 Menu Map NOahaANs Design and Create a New Database Create of modify Screen Forms SQL Query DML Language Edit SQL or RPT Command Files Add Modify or Delete Menus Data Base Design Utilities System Administration AOO BON 2 Create or Modify Screen Forms Paint Screen Forms Register Screen Form with ENTER Register Screen Form with SQL Check Screen Form Coordinates Display List of Screens Test Screens Compile Screens Restore Screen to Data Dictionary Create Default Screen Form 6 Database Design Utilities IOT eO N Modify Database Design Print Database Design Create Database Write Database Backup Reconfigure Database Add Drop B Tree Indexes Advanced Field Attributes 7 System Administration NOapoONnN gt Transaction Logging Status Database Maintenance Security Maintenance Create or Modify Help Documentation Describe Program to System Program
440. n headings are described as follows N ext page P rev page A dd line or number The operation prompt This prompt lets you choose the operation mode for the field entry area The purpose of each selection is as follows n Displays the next page of fields for the current table p Displays the previous page of fields for the current table a Moves the cursor to the field data entry area to let you add new fields Database design utilities 125 126 TABLE LN CMD 1 256 CTRL U Displays the page that contains the indicated field and positions the cursor at that field to let you modify or delete it as explained in the CMD column description Ends the field entry screen and redisplays the table entry screen A display only prompt that shows you the name of the table you are adding or modifying fields for A line number assigned by the system It is used to reference the line you want to modify The area used to enter a command to perform an operation on the current line When the cursor is in this column it moves up and down as you press CTR U and RETURN The position of the cursor marks the current line Valid commands are as follows m NOTE NOTE 1 256 NOTE Modify KEY REF TYPE LEN LONG NAME or COMB FIELD for the current field If you modify a field s type or internal length any B tree index associated with this field is dropped when the database is created or reconfigured Delete the curr
441. n is a combination of comparison operators logical operators and values that RPT interprets as TRUE or FALSE The values can be logical arithmetic and string expressions RPT assigns the value 1 to TRUE logical expressions and the value 0 to FALSE logical expressions The difference between logical and arithmetic expressions is subtle An expression s type is determined by the operation performed ast when RPT evaluates the expression The expression type is logical when the last operation is either logical and or or not or a comparison lt gt lt or gt The expression type is arithmetic when the last operation is numeric A simple logical expression consists of two values connected by a comparison operator The following are examples of simple logical expressions state_code CA Compound logical expressions consist of simple logical expressions connected by the logical operators The following are examples of compound logical expressions state_code CA or state_code NY a bandx 2 lt y 3 RPT Report processor 489 Logical expressions are used most often in if commands If the result of the expression is TRUE RPT processes the group of commands following the then command If the result is FALSE RPT processes the group of commands following the else command For example consider the following if commands if 1 1 then if 1 0 then print TRUE print TRUE else else print FALSE
442. n or subexpression can be enclosed in parentheses to change the order of evaluation Without parentheses the expression operators are evaluated from highest to lowest as follows not Ey substr S ee Oe Dne A N and or Operators at the same level are evaluated from left to right RPT Report processor 487 An expression can be named then represented by its name in subsequent expressions Named expressions appearing in a sort command can be used for Control break processing Expressions using the comparison operators lt gt lt and gt yield the logical values TRUE or FALSE These logical values are represented numerically as 1 or 0 The and or and not operators are used to form compound logical expressions For information on the use of numbers dates times and the numeric operators and in expressions see Expression Components section 17 5 That section also describes character string constants the comparison of strings and the string operators substr RPT recognizes two kinds of functions aggregate and local Aggregate functions perform such operations as total or avg for a group of data values or expressions Local function results generally depend on the arguments passed to the functions You can assign the result of an expression to a variable using the set command This variable can then be used in subsequent commands where its value is needed Named expres
443. n t move the cursor to another line 4 Type the same video command key again The characters from the mark character to the cursor display in the selected video attribute You can cancel these commands at any time with the escape command NOTE You must have the appropriate video entries defined in the termcap file see section 6 1 The default mark character is set to the tilde Some terminal types such as the TeleVideo 912 920 or similar types use extra character positions on screen to mark the start and end of reverse and underline video attributes These attribute characters look like ordinary spaces on the screen but must be treated different from normal spaces PAINT doesn t allow attribute characters to be shifted off the screen deleted or replaced This would change the video display attributes of the area because it would no longer be marked You can however delete attribute characters by setting the video display attribute to normal Also these terminals can t display two reverse or underline areas separated by a single normal video space You need to enter at least two spaces between areas with the same video attributes Therefore if you are using one of these types of terminals you must leave enough space between areas displayed in reverse or underline video SCREEN FIELD EDITING Screen field editing commands let you add modify and delete fields on a screen form Screen fields are the windows to the databa
444. n the same level are evaluated from left to right You can enclose expressions in parentheses to change the evaluation order The direct concatenation operator can be used to concatenate or join two string type elements Otherwise only the relational operators and substr can be used with string expressions The substr operator extracts a part of a string Every string contains at least two substrings the string itself and the null string length 0 The following is the syntax of the substr operator string substr start end where the operator is substr start end specifies a part of a string where start is the starting position in the string indexed from 1 and end is the ending character position For example to specify the first 10 characters of a string field named Emp_Number you enter the following Emp_Number substr 1 10 For an expression containing a ref field or reference field use the following syntax field field rcs Reference fields specify fields in tables other than the selected table The first field must be of the same data type and length as the key of the table containing the second field and so on Each field is used to access the next field up to the final field that is the value of the element LST Listing processor 559 18 1 Selecting records To create an LST report select the appropriate records You can select records in three ways e By using the selection processor e By using t
445. nables the file output option N Disables the debug option no debug DEFAULT is enable debug Lower case entries are converted to upper case Duplicate entries are ignored ENTER data entry query by forms 333 334 CMD Running the report in debug mode displays any error messages the report scripts used and runtime results When debug mode is enabled you can verify the report script and see syntax errors The area under this text prompt is called the display area The first line of each registered report displays here in the order it appears on the ENTER Report Options Screen Although you add and modify individual reports in the update area you delete reports directly from this area The control commands you can enter for a line under CMD are as follows NOTE Stop the current mode and leave the display area This command can be entered on any line Delete the current report from this screen form s ENTER registration Add a report The new report is to be associated with this screen form s ENTER registration You can only enter an a on a blank line at the end of the display area A number from ton where n is the number of reports registered with this screen form The current item is moved to the specified line number and all reports are renumbered after the move Modify fields Lets you modify all fields associated with the current report If you change NAME to a blank all existing parameter fields are era
446. nal lengths Data types Symbol Name Display lenath Internal length ae and type n NUMERIC 1 4 d DATE n a short t TIME n a n NUMERIC 5 9 a AMOUNT 1 7 long l LDATE n a f FLOAT any a AMOUNT 8 11 double Figure 8 1 Tabl Database design utilities e of valid field data types 127 128 Data types Symbol Name Display length Internal length and type s STRING 1 256 char n string te x TEXT 1 256 limited only by system b BINARY n a limited only by system c COMB n a n a Figure 8 1 Table of valid field data types LEN The default display length of the field on screen forms and reports For NUMERIC and STRING fields LEN is exactly the display length For FLOAT fields LEN has the form nnd where nn indicates the total number of display positions including the decimal point and d the number of digits to the right of the decimal point For example a FLOAT field with a LEN of 123 has a default format of nnnnnnnn nnn A FLOAT field with a LEN of 100 has a default format of nnnnnnnnnn Note that there is no decimal point so the format here has 10 digits For AMOUNT fields LEN indicates the number of digits to the left of the decimal point and assumes 2 digits to the right of the decimal point The total display length of AMOUNT fields is LEN 3 space required for commas For example an AMOUNT field with a LEN of 11 has the following default display format on screen forms and reports nn nnn nnn nnn nn If
447. nation of available destinations is valid When you choose a FILE output destination you must enter the output filename after this prompt If the filename exists the following message displays File already exists destroy it Respond with a Y or y to overwrite the file Respond with a N or n to enter a new file name When you choose a report at the REPORT prompt the requested report line is highlighted and the cursor moves to the first allowed output destination prompt After you choose the appropriate destinations return to the first output prompt with CTRL U or RETURN Enter CTRL U to display the process mode prompt If the chosen report has only one valid output destination that option is automatically requested The process mode prompt then displays on the REPORT line as follows Proceed in F oreground B ackground D ebug or C ancel This prompt lets you choose the process mode for the report The option D ebug does not display if the nodebug mode N has been set with ENTER Screen Registration The B ackground option is not allowed if SCREEN has been chosen as an output destination The possible options are as follows f Process the report in foreground mode while you wait b Process the report in background mode while you work on something else Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference d Process the report in foreground mode and display the report scripts run time results and error messages Debug is
448. nd lets you exit SQL and return to either the Menu Handler or the operating system depending on where you started from Enter end at the SQL prompt HELP commands An SQL help command consists of one or two keywords the second indicating the subject of the help information Help information is a short reminder on the syntax of any particular statement or command SQL has the following three help commands e help e tables e fields Once you are familiar with SQL you can use the online help as a quick reference instead of returning to the manual The following describes how to use SQL help help COMMAND 448 help keyword The help command displays help information on the use of SQL If you enter help you see a general message about how to use the help features If you enter help keyword you see help information about that keyword Arguments keyword A keyword used by SQL If there is help documentation about that keyword it displays Keywords are listed in Keyword Summary at the beginning of the SQL Reference chapter Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference tables COMMAND tables The tables command lists the names of the tables you can use in constructing SQL statements This command has no options fields COMMAND fields table The fields command lists the fields for the indicated table with their data types and lengths Fields are listed in the order specified by field_number in the field table of unify db
449. ng system ID and password for your application s system administrator and make sure all system files are owned by this ID For more information about Unify DataServer ELS system security and how to use it with your operating system security see chapter 10 If you need more information about your operating system refer to your operating system user s manual or one of the following sources Bell Telephone Laboratories Inc UNIX Programmer s Manual New York Holt Rinehart and Winston 1983 McOilton Henry and Rachel Morgan Introducing the UNIX System New York McOraw Hill 1983 Thomas Rebecca and Jean Yates A User Guide to the UNIX System New York Osbome McOraw Hill 1985 Unify DataServer ELS and the operating system environment 31 32 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 3 The Menu Handler The Menu Handler provides a complete user friendly environment for the Unify DataServer ELS system You use menus to develop a project to create an application and to operate the finished application All application development and operations are menu driven Several different Unify DataServer ELS options let you update the data dictionary to keep track of the menus application functions ENTER screens and users of an application system You can also store information about where to find the archives for each application program what programs are loaded together in a single executable core load and what scree
450. nify DataServer ELS Direct HLI Programmer s Manual Reference Manual Organization The Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Manual consists of 18 chapters grouped in six parts followed by four appendices Part 1 The Unify DataServer ELS Environment contains six chapters These chapters explain the environment that Unify DataServer ELS operates in Chapter 1 Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS is an introduction to the Unify DataServer ELS Relational Database Management System Chapter 2 Unify DataServer ELS and the Operating System Environment explains how Unify DataServer ELS works on your computer amp operating system 13 14 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 The Menu Handler discusses the Unify DataServer ELS user friendly menu driven system The Menu Handler has all the options you need for application development and operations Files and Directories explains the kinds of files you work with in Unify DataServer ELS and the file naming conventions you use to identify them It also outlines the directories these Unify DataServer ELS files reside in system directories and application or user directories Environment Variables explains how to specify parameters to use with Unify DataServer ELS and your database application Environment Variables let you set such things as path names date display format and a text editor or word processor Termcap and Unicap has information to help you set up your
451. ns for an advanced report It describes how to connect a screen form to an SQL query and RPT script And it shows the complete text of the RPT script necessary to produce the report The purchase order database contains the following tables and fields vendor Number Name Address City State Zip_Codd vr vendor representative Number Vendor_Num Name Location person Number Name po purchase order Number V_Num P_Num_ Ordered Shipped Arrived Order_Time pol Purchase order line PO_Num Line_Number Quantity Item_Num item Number Figure 17 7 Purchase order database tables RPT Report processor 475 476 The tables in the purchase order database track the vendors the vendors representatives the persons placing the orders and the purchase orders Each purchase order consists of a number of lines and each line refers to an item that is ordered regularly The report prints outstanding purchase orders issued within a user specified date range The report is divided into two sections The first section lists the orders not yet shipped by the vendor The second section lists the orders shipped but not yet received The orders in each group are sorted by line number purchase order number and vendor number For each vendor totals are calculated according to when the purchase order was issued This can be more than 90 days 60 to 90 days 30 to 60 days or less than 30 days past
452. nt version tags Explanation This error occurs if the transaction log and the database appear to be different versions You are trying to replay the wrong transaction log gt gt gt The transaction log is now 100 full Transaction logging is now off Explanation The transaction logging file has reached is maximum size No room is left to record changes to the database Therefore transaction logging has been turned OFF Correction Perform no more updates and back up the database Transaction logging can only be restarted by running Write Database Backup gt gt gt The transaction log is now nnn full Explanation This message displays as the transaction logging file fills up updating for 50 80 and 90 percent Transaction logging is turned off at 100 gt gt gt The value of variable xxxx is never set Explanation The value of xxxx has not been initialized with the set command Or xxxx has not been included as a report field in the input section Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Otherwise xxxx can be misspelled or it can be a heading without the required quotes Invalid Script input name string 30 number numeric 5 before report print Customers detail print name number end Correction input name string 30 number numeric 5 before report print Customers detail print name number end gt gt gt The variable type is vvvv and the expression type is xxxx Explanation Y
453. ntains field password information The default Expected number of records is 300 B tree structures btree is reserved for internal use only The Expected number of records is 155 B tree fields btfld contains B tree field information The default Expected number of records is 500 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Calculating the expected number of records The following procedure allows you to increase the Expected number of records in the master data dictionary A data dictionary table s data space is allocated in segments Each table has a maximum of 10 data segments The size of a segment depends upon the number of table records stored in the segment Unify DataServer ELS uses the Expected number of records parameter to calculate the number of records per data segment Unify DataServer ELS uses the formula shown in Figure C 1 to determine the data segment size for a table Expected Number of Records Number of Records per Data 6 Segment Figure C 1 Data segment size formula The formula in Figure C 1 ensures that the Expected number of records requires only 6 of the 10 data segments The remaining 4 segments are available as overflow storage For example if you enter 600 as the Expected number of records for a table the number of records per data segment would be 100 OY 00 100 Records per Data Segment i According to the formula in Figure C 1 if there are 100 records stored in each data segment
454. ntity age or other set of discrete units that you want to count or maintain statistics on If you need to display codes that have leading zeros or embedded dashes use a STRING data type instead For example if you try to enter 0801 in a NUMERIC field the 0801 converts to 801 If you try to enter something like 541 321 Unify DataServer ELS won t let you enter the dash You can enter only a positive or a negative integer e g 541 or 321 FLOAT This is a real number with a display length up to 20 digits including decimal point A null value is stored as 0 0 For example a FLOAT field display length of 170 specifies 17 integer digits to the left of an implied decimal point A FLOAT field length of 179 specifies nine digits to the right of the decimal point a decimal point and seven digits to the left of the decimal point for a total display length of 17 characters Use a FLOAT data type when you need to store a large integer number or need to store to several decimal places as in a scientific measurement AMOUNT This is a number used to record a monetary amount An AMOUNT field s display length can be up to II integer digits Unify DataServer ELS adds a decimal point and two decimal digits A null value is stored as 00 You can specify how AMOUNT fields display by setting the CURR environment variable This lets you specify the following Thousands separator comma period or blank Decimal point or comma
455. number is called the command repeat count If the cursor is in column 0 it stays there Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference cursor right Moves the cursor one column to the right You can move more than one column at a time by entering a number before the command If the cursor is in the last column it stays there cursor up Moves the cursor up one line in the same column You can move more than one line at a time by entering a number before the command If the cursor is on line 2 it stays there cursor down Moves the cursor down one line in the same column You can move more than one line at a time by entering a number before the command If the cursor is on line 22 it stays there next line Moves the cursor to the first blank column of the next line next word Moves the cursor to the first character of the next word A word is defined as any sequence of characters with spaces around it previous word Moves the cursor to the first character of the previous word Alternatively you can use the back word command home cursor Moves the cursor to the top left corner of the edit area line 2 column 0 last line Moves the cursor to the bottom left corner of the edit area line 22 column 0 go to Moves the cursor to a specific location within the editing area When you press the go to command key the cursor moves to the line coordinate indicator L at the top right corner of the screen Enter a line number from 2 22 if
456. ocated in Houston unless you have at least one serial number for an item supplied by manufacturer 0008 2 Deleting Can you delete an item that is the only item for a particular manufacturer and leave the manufacturer No you cannot delete the item information without also deleting information for the manufacturer s ID city and status For example if you delete item number 102 for manufacturer 0003 you also delete the information that manufacturer 0003 is located in Reston 3 Modifying Can you change the location of a manufacturer to a different city Not easily because the city for a manufacturer appears in many records This can cause problems when you are modifying records For example if manufacturer 0001 moves from Lynn to Revere you must find every record for manufacturer 0001 and change Lynn to Revere If you miss even one record you have manufacturer 0001 located in both Lynn and Revere The problem with Design 2 is that too many different kinds of information depend on each other For example manufacturer information depends on item information You should be able to modify manufacturer information without affecting item records and item information without affecting manufacturer records These dependencies need to be eliminated Eliminating non key field dependencies The database in Design 2 obviously needs further refining Manufacturer information should be separate from item information To separate the two type
457. ocation taxes _ Min Amount Max Amount Base Tax Marginal_Rate Figure 16 1 database Tables Used in SOL Examples The emp table describes employees giving the employee number name department number job manager number monthly salary and yearly commission The dept table 349 describes departments giving the department number name and location The taxes table describes a personal income tax schedule giving the minimum and maximum compensation amounts base tax and the marginal tax rate on income above the minimum amount 350 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 16 1 Query facilities A query is a question about your database enabling you to retrieve or update database information SQL lets you specify queries of varying degrees of complexity An SQL query consists of statements and clauses Statements are commands They are the verbs that specify what the query is to do for example select update delete or insert records Clauses are the phrases that specify how a query should be done for example select Emp_Name Emp_Number from employees or order by Dept_No Each clause is preceded by a keyword which is either a statement or a modifier that further specifies how the query should be done Statements and clauses are made up of keywords Keywords have specific meanings in SQL and so cannot be used as database table or field names For a list of the SQL reserved keywords
458. ode This lets you add new screen forms and associated screen fields Modify mode This lets you add modify and delete screen fields for an existing screen form Delete mode This lets you delete an existing screen form and all its screen fields Deleting a screen form also removes all references to the screen form in menus in Register Screen Form with ENTER and Register Screen Form with SQL A unique 8 character screen form name This name is used to refer to the screen form throughout the system N ext page P rev page A dd line or number Screen form maintenance utilities The paging prompt This displays in modify mode after you specify a screen form at the SCREEN prompt The paging prompt lets you 315 316 LN choose the operational mode for the screen field paging area The meaning of each selection is as follows n Displays the next page of 12 screen fields p Displays the previous page of 12 screen fields a Lets you add screen fields The cursor moves to the screen field data entry area so you can add a field 1 99 Displays the page containing the indicated screen field and positions the cursor at that screen field to let you modify or delete it A line number assigned by the system Use this number to refer to a line you want to modify column between LN and SFIELD SFIELD Because of space restrictions there is no name for this column But it is the same column as the CMD column on the table ent
459. of expected records EXAMPLE For example in the following query Dept_No and Name are the sort keys select Dept_No Name Job Manager from emp org where Number Emp_No order by Dept_No Name Dept_No is 2 bytes in size and Name is 10 bytes for a total sort key size of 12 bytes If you expect 300 records your equation is 4 12 300 for a SQLSMEM setting of 4800 This environment variable sets the maximum amount of memory used as a buffer for a temporary index If this variable is set too low and the temporary index requires more memory the overflow is stored in one or two disk files If the temporary index uses less memory than specified in TIMEM only the smaller amount is used There are three ways to calculate the amount of memory needed for a temporary index because temporary indexes are used differently for each of the following SQL operations Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference e sub queries e duplicate joins e no duplicate joins After you calculate the value using each method set TIMEM to the largest of the three values Determining TIMEM for Sub queries To determine the amount of memory needed by SQL to store temporary indexes for sub queries use the following calculation number of expected records total size of conditional fields 4 2 EXAMPLE For example the following query contains sub queries select Name Job Salary Dept_No Number from emp org where Number
460. of the report page The footer section is processed at the bottom of each page You can use the built in variable pageno in the footer section The page_no variable contains the number of the current page The before dept_no section is a new section The commands in the before dept_no section are processed before each new group of employees with the same department number The need number command lets you make sure there are at least number lines left on the current page If fewer than number lines remain a new page is started In the report script for Department Listing 3 the need number command verifies that there Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference are at least five lines left on the page This is enough to print the column headings and one detail line The department number is printed using the d format This format means print a two byte left justified integer The detail section is the same as in the report script for Department Listing 2 The after dept_no section however lets you print subtotals for each department This section is processed after each group of employees with the same department number The total aggregate function calculates the sum of its expression by adding up the appropriate field or expression for each line in the previous group For this reason aggregate functions can only be used in after command groups The after report section has been expanded since the Department Listing 2 versio
461. old else begin if_ar date gt 1 90 then receivable is 61 to 90 days old else begin receivable is over 90 days old end end end Another way to determine the age of each receivable is to assign the parameter to a variable as follows age_date 1 You then can use the variable throughout the script ENTER and RPT ENTER screens enable you to format the results of a query by forms query with an RPT script If you specify a particular report is to be formatted by RPT ENTER produces an input file for RPT containing the fields on the screen form This input file is directed to RPT which reads the file as its standard input To write RPT scripts for this input file you need to know the order and type of the fields so you can construct the input section Unify DataServer ELS provides a command that uses a screen form and writes the corresponding input section for you The command is called rip As with other Unify DataServer ELS commands rip requires the correct environment variables to be set For more information about setting environment variables see chapter 5 RPT Report processor 543 rip NAME rip report input section creator SYNTAX rip screen name DESCRIPTION This command creates the RPT input section for a report script to be run with an ENTER screen For information about the input section see Non Command Groups section 17 7 rip prints the correct input section containing the report fields for t
462. on 9 4 to restore the relationships If these methods fail you can dump the data using SQL Dumping data to external files section 16 3 run Create database section 8 3 and then load the data back in using database load section 12 6 181 9 1 Write database backup budb 182 This program writes a backup tape or checkpoint of the Unify DataServer ELS database file file dbv the B tree index file and the data dictionary First the program locates the database file Then it determines whether the file is an ordinary operating system file or spreads across several raw devices Write database Backup reads the size of the database from the file to calculate the number of blocks to write It can perform multiple volume backups on large database files Write database Backup determines the name of the backup device a diskette drive a cartridge or a 9 track tape drive from the BUDEV environment variable Write database Backup uses three additional environment variables BUBLK BUTAPESZ and BUDRVR Set the BUBLK environment variable to specify the size of a block on the backup device Set the BUTAPESZ environment variable to specify the number of blocks that fit on one tape or diskette of the backup device If you do not set BUTAPESZ or set it to zero Write database Backup writes data until it runs out of storage space on the current diskette or tape Set the BUDRVR environment variable to specify a custom version of the backup
463. on did not appear in a list statement the name can be used to give the expression a column heading A slash can be included in the name to indicate that the heading continues on a new line Any number of slashes can be included in a name If no name is specified and the expression consists of a single field the default heading is the field name Otherwise there is no default heading If the expression was not named in a previous list statement the using syntax can be used to define the output format go The go command displays the list on the standard output usually the screen The output stops every 23 lines for user input The column headings are reprinted after each page unless the nohead command was previously issued You should probably use print in LST scripts named as the formatting parameters for ENTER screen reports section IS Otherwise the specified report will print without a heading print report heading The print command sends the list to the standard output device usually the printer The output includes page numbers date time and report heading as well as the specified column headings The report heading is printed on every page Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference nohead SYNTAX USE unlock SYNTAX USE LST Listing processor A slash can be included in the report heading to continue the heading Qn a new line Any number of slashes can be included in the report heading to ind
464. on is made from the entire set of records in the specified file Otherwise the selection is made from the specified subset A record is selected when the result of the expression is non zero for that record By default the results are placed in a subset with the same name as the originating subset or file If the into syntax is used the output subset name is specified by string remove SYNTAX remove subset USE The remove command removes a selected subset Because select LST Listing processor only selects from a file if there is no subset by the same name you should remove subsets after using them Alternatively you can use call to change the subset name 561 call SYNTAX USE copy SYNTAX USE list SYNTAX USE unlock SYNTAX USE 562 call subset string The call command changes the name of an existing subset The specified subset is renamed to string The renamed subset retains all the characteristics of the original subset copy subset string The copy command copies an existing subset It can be used to perform a reselect while retaining the results of the first selection The named subset is copied to a new subset with the name string The copy retains all the characteristics of the original subset list generic subset name The list command lists the existing subsets The generic subset name has the characteristics of the file specification in the operating system list command In generic subset name matches
465. oper s Reference gt gt gt Cannot open a line in the middle of a wrap around field Explanation Wraparound fields must be displayed on consecutive lines You cannot open a new line if it would split the wraparound field gt gt gt Cannot open xxxx file for input Explanation The compiler cannot open the field attributes file named xxxx Correction Check the spelling of the name and make sure write privileges are set for the file gt gt gt Cannot open the unify afa file for output Explanation The compiler cannot open or create the file unify afa This file stores the compiled field attribute specifications Correction If the file exists make sure you have write privileges for the directory and for the file unify afa gt gt gt Cannot transfer a line into the middle of a wrap around field Explanation Wraparound fields must be displayed on consecutive lines You cannot transfer a line to where it would split a wraparound field gt gt gt Cannot transfer a line starting or ending with a wrap around field Explanation Because of a wraparound field s characteristics you cannot move a line containing a wraparound field Correction To move the line move each field separately and rearrange the prompts or delete the wraparound field s move the line and reenter the field s gt gt gt Can t create data dictionary Explanation The data dictionary and database file cannot be recovered The data diction
466. oper s Reference gt gt gt There is an invalid column clause Explanation An integer constant or variable must follow the in column clause This error message often occurs when a single special character is detected in the column value field or a column value has been omitted Invalid Script print zip code in column Correction set zip_column to 20 print zip_code in column zip_column gt gt gt There Is an invalid function argument list Explanation The arguments for a function have incorrect syntax Such syntax errors include a missing parenthesis a missing comma or no matching single quote Invalid Script input employ_num numeric 8 employ_code numeric 1 set level_num to lt l_num gt index employ_code levl lev2 lev3 Correction input employ_num numeric 8 employ_code numeric 1 set level_num to lt 1l_num gt index employ_code levl lev2 lev3 Unify DataServer ELS messages 663 664 gt gt gt There is an invalid input item Explanation Invalid Script Correction RPT does not recognize a report field name in the input command section RPT keywords or function names cannot be used as input report field names This error can also be caused by including a comma after the last input item RPT then reads the next line as part of the input section input order_num numeric 9 total amount 8 input order_num numeric 9 order_total amount 8
467. oper s Reference The major advantages of B trees are 1 B trees permit ordered access to all records in a given table based on the values of the indexed fields When you must access large numbers of records in sorted order very quickly use B trees 2 B trees speed up queries involving inexact matches ranges of values or begins with searches B trees can be used on any field to create a secondary key complementing or replacing the primary key 3 B trees can be added or dropped without reconfiguring the database The major disadvantages of B trees are 1 B trees use more disk space than other Unify DataServer ELS access methods 2 Access by B trees is slower than by hashing or explicit relationships because B trees use fairly complex algorithms for searching and balancing In most cases the advantages of B trees outweigh their disadvantages However because of their disk space requirements and processing time you should establish a clear need before using them Used correctly explicit relationships can be used to perform joins much more efficiently Buffered sequential access The most basic access method is sequential access which scans every record ina table one by one Unify DataServer ELS uses two types of sequential access buffered and nonbuffered For nonbuffered sequential access the operating system reads data from a file one disk block at a time For buffered sequential access the operating system reads m
468. or down in the menu line data entry area by pressing CTRL U or RETURN The valid operation commands are as follows a Add a line to the menu This response is valid only on an empty line in the menu line data entry area m Modify LINE or MENU PROG for the current menu line d Delete the current menu line q Leave the menu line data entry area and position the cursor at the HEADING prompt 267 LINE The position of the current menu line on the menu You can enter any number between one and 16 The menu lines will be resorted in the new sequence when you enter CTRL U from this column MENU PROG The name of the menu program ENTER screen or SQL screen that starts when you select this menu line M P A display only field that indicates the type of the MENU PROG entry The characters that can appear in this column are defined as follows M A menu P A program E An ENTER screen S An SSQL screen PROMPT A display only field that indicates what text displays on the menu for the current menu line The table in figure 12 1 shows where the PROMPT comes from When the current entry is Then prompt comes from a menu Add modify or delete menus this Program a program Describe program to system execmnt an ENTER screen Register screen form with ENTER entmnt SSQL screen Register screen form with SQL ssqimnt Figure 12 1 Sources of menu prompt 268 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 12 3 Describe program to system
469. or executable When the licensing is complete you see this message Licensing procedure successful Continue installation If you select 2 you see these messages Not installing license A license may be obtained by contacting unify Client Services Installation continuing Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide You will not be able to use Unify DataServer ELS DBMS until you license it You can license the software after the release installation is finished by using the licprod utility described in licensing After Installation Terminate installation If you select 3 you see this message Installation interrupted by user The installation program ends You cannot use ACCELL Unify DataServer ELS DBMS until you rerun Install install and license the software Step 2 If you are installing the Unify DataServer ELS DBMS software with the install install utility continue the installation by returning to step 18 Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide 689 690 Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide Appendix F Tuning your operating system You should review your operating system configuration to determine if this configuration can be optimized for greater performance The optimization involves editing the operating system configuration file that sets system parameters System parameters are initially set according to recommendations of your operating system manuals You will need to check the system parame
470. or table or field names Queries using these keywords as table or field names result in syntax errors SQL KEYWORDS and asc avg between binary by count delete desc edit end fields from group having help in insert into is lines max min not or order restart select separator set start sum tables text unique unlock update where write Figure 16 10 SQL Keywords Formal language syntax Unify DataServer ELS SQL consists of four basic parts e The query language T The data manipulation language The command language SQL Query DML language 427 e SQL help The query language is the largest part It lets you form questions about the information in your database by asking what and letting SQL determine how to get the information The data manipulation language or DML lets you modify the database by inserting updating and deleting records The command language has different capabilities that make the interactive development and execution of query and DML statements easier These capabilities include editing the current SQL statement starting and restarting queries from script files unlocking fields protected by field level security and executing operating system commands SQL help lets you quickly review how a particular command is used and lets you list the valid table and field names in the current database Query statements and clauses An SQL query consists of one or more query blocks and is terminated by a slas
471. ord In the example an average of 1 5 probes are necessary to find a record The actual number can be less because the table is stored in the hash table and consecutive slots might be filled with entries from a different table This number should be 6 or less Longest Chain Length The longest sequence of consecutive slots that are filled This gives a gross measure of the worst case access time Starting Address The address of the first slot of the longest chain This is where you look in the hash table if you want to see what the longest chain looks like Number of Chains of Length The number of sequences of consecutive filled slots of each length This shows the distribution of chain lengths You can use hash table statistics to diagnose overall system performance A decline in system performance may be caused by a full database or clustering of hash table entries Database performance is best when Per cent filled is 75 or less Likewise the best performance is given when chains are length 6 or less and where the average chain length is under 2 5 higher numbers indicate that clustering is occurring If the hash table statistics exceed these ranges run the rekey program then check the statistics again If the problem has not been corrected you can improve performance by increasing the size of the hash table To increase the hash table size increase the expected number of records Or create an empty table with a larger nu
472. ore times For example b 1 matches b one or more times which matches the strings b bb and bbb m n An integer comma and another integer in braces match the previous regular expression at least m but not more than n times Both integers must be less than 255 For example c 1 2 matches c at least one but not more than two times which matches the strings c or cc 0 A zero and a comma in braces have the same effect as using the asterisk For example d 0 matches d zero or more times And hi 1 2 matches either hi or hii 1 A one and a comma in braces have the same effect as using the plus symbol For example e 1 matches e one or more times Parentheses are used for grouping Grouping allows repetition operators to work on each character or an entire subexpression For example the regular expression ab 1 2 matches the strings ab and abab And hi 1 2 matches either hi or hihi 176 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Enclose expressions using regular expression notation in single quotes as with STRING field legal values for example A Z or Mac Additional examples using Regular Expression Notation include the following 0 9 0 9 2 matches a digit followed by any single character then two non digit characters 0 9 3 0 9 4 matches three digits followed by a hyphen four digits then 0 or more blanks This notation can be used to test for legal t
473. orm The separator can be a slash dash or period The maximum number of locks allowed on a database object before it is promoted to a like lock of the next higher object for example from a record to a table The Lock Manager uses LMPROMO to conserve memory If conflicting locks exist lock promotion may be postponed until a subsequent lock call The default maximum number of locks is 50 You can set LAPROMO to a number from up to the maximum integer value allowed by your computer system A larger setting increases multi user access ability but uses more memory A smaller setting decreases multi user access ability but uses memory better The Lock Manager promotes the locks if there are no conflicting locks A premature promotion causes other transactions to be locked out NOTE LMPROMO is only used when a Lock Manager shared memory partition is created If LMPROMO is changed Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference LOCKDIR MAXOPNBTS NOUMSGS Environment variables you must remove the shared memory partition and restart the application The named pipes directory The nonshared version of the Lock Manager creates special files called named pipes or sockets for inter process communication Named pipes have p suffixes If LOCKDIR is set the named pipes are stored in the specified directory Otherwise the named pipes are stored in the default directory usr tmp If usr tmp does not exist the named p
474. orm cdsf to create a default screen form See sections 13 1 13 2 and 14 1 Often screens do not need to be modified but they do need to be reprocessed To reprocess screens use Compile screens sfproc with the all option See section 14 4 4 Reconfigure drops any B tree indexes and definitions associated with fields that have been deleted or fields whose internal data type or length has been changed See Add drop B tree Indexes section 8 5 5 Custom programs that access modified tables and fields must be recompiled and reloaded If you are using Advanced field attributes you must recompile the afa source file field afa 6 Reconfigure turns off transaction logging To restart transaction logging back up the database with Write database backup See section 9 1 7 Verify that the changes to the database are correct If the new design and resulting data have converted correctly back up the new database with Write database backup See section 9 1 If you want to restore the original database read in the original database backup you made with Read database backup See section 9 2 Recovering corrupted hash table fields The dbnode record of the data dictionary unify db can become corrupted if crdb is started but is aborted before completion For example if crdb is started on one terminal but then killed from another after it had begun processing the unify db file can be left in an inconsistent state Database design u
475. ormation in these chapters is a little more demanding To understand this information you should know something about programming principles You should be familiar with directories the shell and for the chapter on termcap and unicap be familiar with how CRT terminals operate from a programming viewpoint The chapters in Part contain information about miscellaneous items not discussed elsewhere in the manual However this information may help make your Unify DataServer ELS run smoothly Because Part addresses most of the system in some way it includes many references to other sections of the manual If you are not yet too familiar with Unify DataServer ELS don t worry about whether you completely understand this part It is still a good idea to read Part as an orientation and then to use the system When you are more familiar with Unify DataServer ELS review this part and its information will be much clearer 19 20 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 1 Introduction to Unify DataServer ELS This chapter introduces the Unify DataServer ELS Relational Database Management System Any database management system is more than a single program unlike word processors or spread sheet packages that generally are just single programs Unify DataServer ELS is a collection of over 20 different programs integrated to let you create and modify application systems that store and retrieve data Figure 1 1 shows a diagra
476. ors and in numeric expressions Numeric constants 494 There are two categories of numeric constants numbers without a decimal point and numbers with a decimal point The following is an overview of the syntax of the two categories of numeric constants Number without a decimal point Optional preceding minus sign Up to 9 significant digits Number with a decimal point Optional preceding minus sign Up to 16 significant digits A number that does not contain a decimal point is an integer It can have up to nine digits To indicate a negative number precede it with a minus sign The following print command shows an expression containing two numeric constants and a field print 9 fielda 123555789 in column 52 If a number contains a decimal point such as a dollar amount or a value with a fractional part the number can have up to 16 digits Up to nine digits can appear to Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference the right of the decimal point A preceding minus sign can be used to make the number negative The following are examples of negative and positive numeric constants containing decimal points 1234567 123456789 987664321 50 49 99 53 999898334 50000 0 0 00 RPT can interpret a numeric constant as a numeric amount or float type if you append the letter n a or f to the constant This pertains to the explanation of Variable Type Determination later in this chapter Date constants
477. ou cannot assign a new value to a variable that has been set if the values data types are not compatible Invalid Script set z_variable to 4 89 set z_variable to abc def Correction set z_variable to 4 89 set new_variable to abc def Unify DataServer ELS messages 655 656 gt gt gt The volume type D needs a block special file as its block device Explanation Correction This message displays after a device volume definition is completed when the volume s block device is not a block special file in the dev directory Change the block device name to an existing block device in the dev directory gt gt gt The volume type D needs a special file as its character device Explanation Correction This message displays after a device volume definition is completed when the volume s character device is neither a block nor a character special file in the dev directory Change the character device name to an existing block or character device in the dev directory gt gt gt The volume type F must have matching block and character devices Explanation Correction This message displays after a file volume definition is completed if the files specified for block and character devices do not match Change the block device name and make sure the same name appears as the character device name gt gt gt The volume type F needs a regular file as its block device
478. ou cannot update the record When the other user finishes with the record you can try again Moving the cursor on the ENTER screen After a record has been added or located the cursor moves to the next field prompt on the screen Press RETURN to move the cursor down the screen and CTRL U to move it up the screen ENTER data entry query by forms 335 Note that the cursor skips fields from tables other than the target table because they are display only When you reach the last prompt press RETURN to loop the cursor back to the first field prompt Press CTRL U at the first field prompt to clear the screen form for the next operation In add or modify mode this saves the record to the database If you press CTRL U again the operation prompt IJNQUIRE A DD MJODIFY DJELETE redisplays At any time you can press CTRL X to immediately return to the Menu Handler Adding or changing field data To add or change field data in the target table press RETURN until the cursor is at the prompt for the field you want to edit Then enter the new data and press RETURN to complete the field edit If the new data is accepted it is stored in the database and the cursor moves to the next prompt If the data is not accepted an error message displays at the bottom of the screen and the database is not updated Press RETURN to acknowledge the error and try again If you start to enter data to a field and change your mind press CTRL U to canc
479. ous step Check the parameter that controls the maximum number of entries In the process table This parameter controls the maximum number of active processes that the system will support at one time Optimization Calculate this parameter as follows Step 4 parameter num_dev 10 num_users 5 where num_dev is the average number of simultaneous developers and num_users is the average number of simultaneous end users Check the parameter that controls the maximum number of processes allowed for any one user This parameter controls the maximum number of processes that one user Can run at one time Optimization Set this parameter equal to Step 5 parameter max_proc_tab 9 where max_proc_tab is the maximum number of processes in the process table This value was determined in the previous step Check the parameter that controls the maximum size of a shared memory segment Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide The Lock Manager uses shared memory The size of the shared memory segment used by the lock manager directory affects the granularity of the locks held A smaller segment holds fewer lock entries and therefore would mean an earlier promotion of locks from record to table This parameter controls the amount of contention when obtaining locks The effect of the smaller segment and earlier promotion is a greater amount of contention the chance of running into another user s lock increases
480. out an executable registered with the Menu Handler a Add mode This lets you register an executable with the Menu Handler 270 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference m Modify mode This lets you modify HEADING SCREEN and DIRECTORY for programs in an executable and add modify and delete programs d Delete mode This lets you delete the an executable and its associated programs EXECUTABLE S NAME A string of up to eight characters that is the name of the file containing the executable This file name is passed to the shell when you select a program in the executable USES SYSRECEV amd Miscellaneous utilities A Y answer tells the Menu Handler to pass the standard argument list to the executable see the Unify DataServer ELS Programmer s Manual for a description of the arguments An N tells the Menu Handler to pass no arguments to this executable The sysrecev function usually interprets this argument list but any program or shell script can request that these arguments be passed The column where you enter an operation command for the current program The cursor marks the current program You can move the cursor up or down in the program data entry area of the screen form by pressing CTRL U or RETURN The operation commands are as follows a Add a program to the executable This response is valid only on an empty line in the program data entry area m Modify HEADING SCREEN or DIRECTORY for the curren
481. p amp print 56 column 6 skip 1 after state need 2 print SALES state total price column 49 using S S SS SS amp amp amp print 61 _ skip 1 after report need 4 print TOTAL SALES THIS REPORT total price col 49 using SS S SS SS amp amp amp print AVERAGE CUSTOMER ORDER avg price col 52 using S S SS amp amp amp print 61 print 61 Control breaks As RPT processes the sorted values corresponding to named sort expressions each expression is checked for change in value When a value is different from the preceding value a control break occurs In the example sales report a minor control break occurs when all sales to a given customer have been printed and the next customer is ready to be processed A more major control break occurs when the city or state changes When the state changes the city and customer change also When a more major sort expression value changes minor sort expression values also change It is not unusual to print only during control breaks Many reports require detail information to be processed but not printed Instead summary information is printed at control breaks RPT Report processor 517 Control break processing command groups Output such as group headings or totals can be printed during control breaks in a report The before and after command groups are used for this purpose Before command groups
482. pare for equality with the left side of a Boolean expression A tuple list is constructed with commas separating the tuples and with parentheses enclosing the list of tuples Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Literal tuple lists can be used as follows lt f1 f2 gt is in lt c1 c2 gt lt c3 c4 gt This is equivalent to the more cumbersome expression lt lt is in between and f1 c1 and f2 c2 or f1 c3 and f2 c4 These are the comparison operators In order they are equal not equal greater than greater than or equal to less than and less than or equal to These two operators are equivalent to the equal sign They are provided so queries involving literal tuples read naturally You can use the equal sign for exactly the same effect This is a single operator that makes ranges easier to specify The usual way of specifying a range in a query language is as follows field lt c1 and field gt c2 Using the between and operator the expression reads field between c1 and c2 This is a more natural way to specify ranges and or The conjunction operator Two simple Boolean expressions can be connected with and to form a compound Boolean expression The compound expression is true if both simple expressions are true It is false if either simple expression is false The disjunction operator Two simple Boolean expressions can be connected with or to form a compound Boolean expr
483. per user Use Define database volumes volmnt to define the database volumes Include volume names offsets and lengths and device names Back up the database using Write database backup section 9 1 This backs up the new volume information Run Create database section 8 3 This sets up file db and file dor as special files pointing to the device defined by DBPATH for the root database volume Escape to the shell and use chmod chown and chgrp to set correct read and write file permissions for the volume devices specified in Step 5 Also set the appropriate permissions for file db and file dbr Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 9 Restore the database Use Read database backup section 9 2 to read in the backup created in Step 6 10 While still logged in as the super user run Reconfigure database section 8 4 This stores the new volume information in the file do header so additional volumes can be used as the database expands To display information about a raw database volume run the database Statistics report dbstats Using ordinary operating system files Unify DataServer ELS lets you use ordinary operating system files for database storage There are two ways to do this with no database volumes defined or with database file volumes When you use ordinary files without database volumes defined the database is created as an ordinary ASCII file The default name for this file is file db However if you
484. plays the previous page of database tables Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference a Moves the cursor to the table entry area to let you add new database tables 1 256 Displays the page that contains the indicated database table and positions the cursor at that table to let you modify or delete it as explained in the CMD column description CTRL U Ends the database design phase and starts the database create phase LN A line number assigned by the system Use it to refer to the table you want to modify CMD The area used to enter a command to perform an operation on the current line When the cursor is in this column it moves up and down as you press CTRL U and RETURN The position of the cursor marks the current line Valid commands are as follows f Modify the fields for the current table by going to the second page of the screen form m Modify EXPECTED LONG NAME or DESCRIPTION for the current table d Delete the current table 1 256 Renumber the current table as shown and reorder the tables on the screen form q Redisplay the operation prompt at the bottom of the screen TABLE A unique table name of up to 8 characters The table name can contain only letters upper and lower case numbers and the underscore character _ It must begin with a letter This name is used to reference the table throughout the system While entering data a CTRL U in this column terminates table entry mode and redisplays the operation prom
485. plete file where the following are the replay parameters C Check the transaction log This is an optional parameter to check the transaction log for incomplete logical transaction groups without replaying transactions Running replay with this parameter creates the incomplete transaction group summary file described under the i option and the date of the last valid transaction group The incomplete summary file contains the comments from and number of each incomplete group The incomplete summary file is also created when tranactions are replayed n Omit the incomplete transaction group report Miscellaneous utilities 261 V Use this parameter to check the transaction log or replay transactions without creating the incomplete transaction group report Read in the transaction log from the backup device Use this parameter to read the transaction log from the backup device specified by the environment variable BUDEV instead of from the standard transaction logging device List every transaction in the incomplete groups verbose list Use this parameter to list each group s incomplete transactions in the incomplete transaction group summary file Name the error file Use this option followed by an error file name to change the name of the error file The default name is replay err Name the incomplete transaction group summary file Use this option followed by the new incomplete file name to change the name of the
486. ployees whose commission exceeds their salary sql gt select Name Job Salary Commission sql gt from emp sql gt where Commission gt Salary recognized query Name Job Salary Commission Colucci salesrep 2500 00 3000 00 Comparing Strings Suppose you want to find all the departments in Dallas This requires comparing the Location field with the string constant Dallas Unify DataServer ELS SQL string constants can contain a combination of alphanumeric characters and the special characters and The special characters are described as follows The wildcard character The question mark matches any single character Thus if you want to find all the Smiths and don t know if they are spelled Smith or Smyth you can use the specification Sm th The wildcard string The asterisk matches any string of characters of any length including zero length strings or null strings ee A character class The character class matches any single character that is a member of the class You can specify a range of characters by separating two characters with a dash For example you can specify the range of all upper case letters by the class ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ SQL Query DML language 359 360 or more conveniently by A Z You can specify the range of all upper and lower case letters by a zA Z You can construct other classes similarly NOTE String constants must be enclosed in single quo
487. point err When you run REPOINT from the shell it returns an exit status to indicate whether it completed successfully REPOINT returns a 0 if it completes successfully If REPOINT returns a non zero exit status check the error log for messages NOTE REPOINT keeps the database locked while running If you run REPOINT from the shell no other process can update the database until REPOINT finishes Rebuilding selected explicit relationships 198 If you change an existing ordinary field to an explicit relationship or if an explicit relationship has been damaged you must rebuild the corresponding pointer lists You do not always need to rebuild all the explicit relationships in the database And for very large applications you may not be able to rebuild all relationships because of the time required For these reasons you can have REPOINT selectively rebuild only specified explicit relationships To rebuild selected explicit relationships run REPOINT from the operating system shell giving the referencing field names as command line arguments The following simple example illustrates the steps involved 1 Print a database design report This report lists the current database design including a list of table and field names See Print database Design in section 11 1 2 Note the Table and the reference field names from the Schema listing section of the Data dictionary report Figure 9 2 shows an example Data dictionary report
488. print a comma Otherwise print a space Print a decimal point in this position For float type fields LST uses a print specification exactly like the C language printf function For more information about printf refer to any C Programmer s Manual The print specification has the following format minimum field width precision f e g where the percent sign is required Items enclosed in square brackets are optional The list of items separated by the vertical bar indicates that you must choose one of the items in the list These items f e and g are the conversion characters The optional minus sign before the conversion specification indicates that the result is to be left justified in the field width The minimum field width option specifies the minimum number of print positions in the result If the result has fewer characters it is padded to fill the field width The precision option specifies the number of digits that appear after the decimal point If precision is 0 no digits print after the decimal point If there is no decimal point the number before the conversion character is assumed to be the precision The conversion characters are described as follows f The field is converted to decimal notation in the format ddd ddd where the number of digits after the decimal point is equal to the precision specification If the precision is missing 6 digits are output If the precision i
489. prompt DUPLICATES ALLOWED If you answer N no at this prompt you set a flag indicating that fields listed in the current table s index definition cannot have duplicate values All fields making up a B tree index are a set The no duplicate condition is tested on those field values as a set Therefore all field values of that set must match another record s value set before the new record is rejected as a duplicate A CTRL U at the DUPLICATES ALLOWED prompt ends the mode and adds the current B tree index NOTE Default values of any field type are duplicates just like other values Therefore if you don t want a B tree index to have duplicates at least one field in the index set must be given unique values If one field in the set is always unique the set is unique The middle section of the screen form is where you enter the database fields to be included in the current B tree index Remember fields used in a B tree index definition must come from the same table Database field entry prompts The following describes the prompts in the Database field entry section CMD The column where you enter an operation command for the current line The position of the cursor marks the current line The cursor moves up or down in this column when you press CTRL U or RETURN Valid commands in this column are follows a Add a database field name to the current index definition d Delete the current field name from the definition Database des
490. pt Database design utilities 123 EXPECTED The expected number of records in this table Unify DataServer ELS lets you exceed this number by 66 then you must increase it before adding more records In some cases it is easier to increase the expected number than to decrease it If you do want to decrease this number and are having problems see the steps that accompany the resulting error message at the end of this chapter LONG NAME A more descriptive table name of up to 16 characters that is used by ENTER to display error messages It can contain only letters upper and lower case numbers and the underscore character _ It must begin with a letter DESCRIPTION A comment field where you can enter a description of the table While in the data entry area a RETURN gets you to the field entry screen Database fields The field entry screen like the table entry screen enforces the rules of database design as you make entries This screen form is used to enter or modify a database field description 124 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The field entry screen displays as follows dbcreate Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Design and Create a New Database a field definition TABLE Table name display area entry area LN CMD FIEL F EF TYPE LEN LONG NAME Wan FIELD N ext page P rev page A dd line or number j definition paging area The screen prompts and colum
491. putfile Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Unable to open the configuration file Explanation This error occurs if the configuration file cannot be found or read The replay program needs the information in this file to work Correction Check your file permission modes on unify conf in the database bin directory gt gt gt Unable to open the incomplete Itg file Explanation The incomplete transaction group summary file cannot be created Correction Check your permission modes on the file or directory gt gt gt Unable to open the replay error file Explanation The replay error file cannot be created Correction Check your permission modes on the file or directory gt gt gt Unable to open the termcap file Explanation The termcap file could not be opened Correction If you have the TERMCAP environment variable set make sure that the specified file exists and is readable If you don t have TERMCAP set make sure etc termcap exists and is readable gt gt gt Unable to open the transaction logging device Explanation Transaction logging is set to ON and ENTER cannot open the transaction logging device specified in Transaction Logging Status to record transactions Correction Make sure the device is online or the log file exists Also make sure you have proper permissions access modes to write to the device or file Unify DataServer ELS messages 679 680 gt gt gt Unable to p
492. quely identify one record in the table The same manf_ID appears once for every item the manufacturer makes Eliminating multiple values in fields The first step in refining the database design is to make sure no table contains fields that can have more than one value In the first design for the example table manfitem Introduction to database design 95 a manufacturer may make up to six items identified by serial numbers as shown in Figure 7 3 manfitem Manf_ID city status ser_no price 0001 Lynn 10 101 102 103 104 105 106 2 00 0002 Reston 20 101 102 0003 Reston 20 102 0004 Lynn 10 102 104 105 Figure 7 3 Multiple valued fields in manfitem design 1 Because ser_no may contain more than one value this table does not follow the rules of relational database design To follow the rules of relational database design tables should be set up so each field contains a discrete piece of information Visualize each table as rows records and columns fields as shown in Figure 7 4 Each row contains one item per column AM 0001 Row Record 0002 manfitem manf_id city status ser_no price 0001 Lynn 10 101 3 00 Lynn 10 102 2 00 Reston 20 101 3 00 0003 Reston 20 102 2 00 0004 Lynn 10 105 4 00 NA A Columns Fields Figure 7 4 Database table visualization 96 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Therefore to refine the database the table in Design 1 must be redesigned so the serial number fi
493. r data dictionary The following menu displays 4 0 Data Dictionary Master 31 Dec 1999 UNIFY Main Menu EXPECTED LONG NAME DESCRIPTION dbnode coreld mprec mline groups employ empacc grpacc screen scfield mpscrf Step 7 IWARNING to ko Step 8 Custom message control data_base_node node record coreload individual core load menu_program menu or program record menu_line menu line item employee_group security group employee employee records employee_access group access record group_access group access record screen screen definitions screen_field screen filed definition program_screen program screen intersect Using the Data dictionary table section as a guide you can make changes to the EXPECTED and the DESCRIPTION columns This screen works the same as Modify database design schent Do not decrease the size of the application data dictionary unify db for an existing application If you decease the expected number below the actual number of entries in unify db any entry above the new expected number is destroyed Therefore only decrease the Expected number of records in the data dictionary before you actually start creating a database design for your application When you have finished making the necessary changes CTRL U to exit the Customize master data dictionary menu Select the Build master data dictionary option in the Master data dictionary modification menu dbdesign This take
494. r the exit key D is used for some other Menu Handler command Define an exit command key OR change the command definition that currently uses D Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Unable to start the compiler Explanation The compiler cannot begin Correction Make sure the compiler afac is on your PATH gt gt gt Unable to start up the editor Explanation The editor cannot begin Correction Check that the editor is on your PATH or make sure you have set the EDIT environment variable correctly gt gt gt Unable to write the transaction log Explanation ENTER cannot write to the transaction log because of a permission access mode problem Correction Change the permission so you can write to the file gt gt gt Undefined return from pfield Explanation This is an internal system error Correction Call Unify Corporation gt gt gt Unexpected command type xxxx docom Explanation RPT has detected an internal error Correction Try running the report again If the problem persists contact Unify Corporation gt gt gt Unexpected string operator xxxx oexwdth Explanation RPT has detected an internal error Correction Try running the report again If the problem persists contact Unify Corporation Unify DataServer ELS messages 681 682 gt gt gt Unexpected type comptyp XXXX Explanation RPT has detected an internal error Correction Try running the report ag
495. ransaction logging The default is OFF Miscellaneous utilities 263 264 Enter ON to set the flag back to ON and process transaction logging only if the database has not been changed since the last backup If the database has been changed logging starts only after the database has been backed up NAME OF LOG FILE OR DEVICE NAME The name of the file or device name that records all transactions while transaction logging is on The default name is txlogfile You can specify a log file or device name in one of three ways 1 By a file name In this case the file is located in the directory set by DBPATH or in the current directory if DBPATH is not set 2 By acomplete path name beginning with a In this case the file is located exactly where you have specified 3 By a device name In this case the name must refer to an ordinary blocked disk or diskette device it cannot refer to a tape device TYPE OF LOG FILE file device A keyword you enter to specify whether the transaction log is an ASCII file or a hardware device You can enter either the file or device keyword The default setting is file IS LOGGING MEDIA REMOVABLE Only applicable if the transaction log is a hardware device This field indicates whether the media is removable If the media is removable and you want to be prompted when to mount and unmount the transaction log enter y yes at this prompt The default is n no SIZE OF LOG FILE 512b
496. rate groups of items For example suppose the control break from department 10 to department 20 occurs After the department 10 group you want to print the totals for department 10 Before the department 20 group you want to print the department number name and column headings for the items that follow A control break also occurs in the transition from no data to data as for the first department in the report There are five other kinds of control breaks detail before and after and header and footer The detail control break occurs every time a new line is read from the input file This is the lowest level break Use it to print a line or add a number to a total The before report and after report control breaks always occur at the beginning and end of the report Use the before report break to print report headings or titles Use the after report break to print a report grand total The header and footer control breaks occur at the top and bottom of each report page Use the header control break to print a running title date time or page number Use the footer control break to print page numbers or a brief note The report script sections that describe control break commands are processed in the following sequence before report before sort key n before sort key 1 RPT Report processor 457 detail after sort key 1 after sort key n after report The header and footer control breaks are not included in this hierarch
497. rd line for you to enter a PAINT command Modify mode This lets you add modify and delete prompts and screen fields for existing screen forms When you select m the specified screen form displays and the cursor waits at the third line for you to enter a PAINT command Delete mode This lets you delete an existing screen form and all its prompts and screen fields from the data dictionary When you select d the specified screen form displays as well as the prompt Delete You must confirm the delete request Respond with a y to delete the screen form Respond with an nor a CTRL U to cancel the delete request and retain the screen form Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Deleting a screen form also removes all references to the screen form on menus in Register Screen Form with ENTER and in Register Screen Form with SQL Other prompts that display on the top line of the PAINT screen are F The current screen field s name L The cursor s current line position C The cursor s current column position When you are finished editing the current screen form press q the quit command to exit The following prompt displays S ave D on t save R esume editing If you enter s the changes you have made are saved in the data dictionary and the screen form is processed to produce updated q and h files If you enter d your changes are not saved The screen form remains the same If you enter r or CTRL U you can resu
498. re Database scom 3 If this is a key or COMB key component run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey Figure 8 12 Allowable Modifications to LENGTH Entry Database design utilities 143 144 LONG NAME The field long name is the field name Unify DataServer ELS uses to refer to a field If you want to Then Change a Field s Long Name 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to change the filed s long name in the Long Name column Be sure that the new name is unique 2 Run Reconfigure Database scom Figure 8 13 Allowable modifications to LONG NAME entry COMB FIELD You can add or remove a COMB component field relationship in the COMB FIELD column If you want to Then Add or Remove a COMB 1 At the Field Entry screen form use modify mode to access the Component Relationship COMB FIELD column 2 To add the field to an existing COMB Field enter the COMB field name into the COMB FIELD column To remove a COMB component field enter spaces with the space bar to the COMB FIELD column 3 Run Reconfigure Database scom 4 If this is a key or COMB key component run Rebuild the Hash Table rekey Figure 8 14 Allowable modifications to COMB FIELD entry Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 8 3 Create database crdb This program is used to create an initial database file from the database design in the data dictionary Create Database is most commonly used to create a database that h
499. re occurs any transactions still in progress cannot be completed In the transaction log each incomplete transaction has a start transaction entry with no corresponding end transaction entry Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference However the completed transactions in the transaction log contain all the updates that have been made except those in incomplete transactions If you have had a hardware or software failure and you suspect the database has been damaged you can use roll forward recovery to restore logical database integrity with a minimal loss of information The most common method of roll forward recovery is to use the Read Database Backup program see Read database backup in Database maintenance utilities This program guides you through the following steps to recover the database 1 Read in the latest logically consistent copy of the database Note that this copy may be several hours or even days old 2 Read in the transaction log to find the IDs of the incomplete transactions 3 Read in the transaction log again to update the database with completed transactions 4 Manually re enter the updates lost because they were incomplete transactions Another method of roll forward recovery is to restore the updates from the transaction log using the replay program The replay program is run from the shell Use the following command syntax to run the program REPLAY c n b v e error file i incom
500. recev displays before the program is started DIRECTORY For acustom program the name of the directory where the source code is located Data Dictionary reports 251 11 8 Print display database statistics dbstats 252 The database statistics report lists statistics for various database parameters To run this report select Print display database statistics dbstats from the database maintenance menu The following prompt lets you select the output destination for the report P rint or D isplay Statistics If you want to send the report to the printer answer P at the prompt If you want to display the report on the screen answer D The database statistics report is 79 characters wide and has been reduced for this document DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE 1 DATA BASE REPORT Data Base Statistics TABLE ADJUSTED TOTAL NAME USED EXPECTED ALLOCATED DELETED AVAILABLE manf 6 12 5040 20 30 0 0 14 model 15 54 27 8 90 16 7 0 75 item 14 102 13 7 180 wee W 166 VOL TYP CHAR DEV BLOCKED DEV SIZE MAX 0 F 39 file db TOTAL DATA BASE SIZE 39 Figure 11 12 Database statistics report The column headings on the database statistics report are described as follows TABLE NAME The name of the table USED The total number of slots that have been used including the spaces formerl
501. reen to enter the next table The database create phase lets you print the new database design create an empty database from the new database design create default data entry screens for each table and create a Data Entry Screens menu Database tables The table entry screen in the Design and Create a New database program enforces the rules of database design as you make entries It reports errors immediately and skips any invalid attributes If you want to enter an attribute and cannot you might have to change another attribute of the field to complete the entry Database design utilities 121 122 The table entry screen displays as follows dbcreat Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Design and Create a New Database table data entry area LN CMD TABLE F F ED LONG NAME ESCRITION N ext page P rev page A dd line or number W table paging area Table information is added in the table data entry area of this screen In the table paging area below the data entry area existing entries can be modified deleted or moved All tables display in a paged format with Il descriptions per page The screen prompts and column headings are described as follows N ext page P rev page A dd line or number The operation prompt This prompt lets you choose the operation mode for the table entry screen The purpose of each selection is as follows n Displays the next page of database tables p Dis
502. regate function select job salary from emp group by job select job min salary from emp group by job Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt An ascending descending code was not entered Try again Explanation Every index key field must be specified assorted in ascending or descending order Correction Enter an a for ascending or d for descending sort A no answer at this prompt discards the current line gt gt gt An error occurred while writing the compiled output file Explanation This is an internal system error Correction Contact Unify Corporation Customer Support gt gt gt An error was encountered while writing the B tree index file Explanation This write error can occur when you add or rebuild an index Correction Before you add or rebuild another index make sure the database file system has enough space gt gt gt An expression cannot be compared with a literal tuple list Explanation An expression yields a single value but a literal tuple contains several values SQL cannot determine what to do with the extra values in the comparison Invalid Query select name from emp where salary commission is in lt 2500 salesman gt lt 800 clerk gt lt 1100 programmer gt Correction select name from emp where salary commission is in lt 2500 800 1100 gt Unify DataServer ELS messages 603 604 gt gt gt An illegal literal was used for t
503. rence gt gt gt BINARY type fields are not allowed Explanation Only NUMERIC STRING DATE LDATE TIME FLOAT or AMOUNT fields can be used in an index definition gt gt gt Blocksize too big decrease the value of the BUBLK environment variable Explanation There is no data block size to match the block size specified in BUBLK Correction Decrease the size of the BUBLK environment variable to match the data block For more information about setting environment variables see Section 5 gt gt gt Blocksize too small increase the value of the BUBLK environment variable Explanation For Read Database Backup the block size specified in BUBLK is smaller than the block size on the backup tape or diskette For Write Database Backup the block size specified in BUBLK is too small to store the data in Correction Increase the size of the BUBLK environment variable to a larger value For more information about setting environment variables see Section 5 gt gt gt Cannot add characters to a line ending with a wrap around field Explanation Because of a wraparound field s characteristics text cannot be added to the line if it shifts the wraparound field to the right Correction To add characters delete the wraparound field add the characters and reenter the field gt gt gt Cannot change video mode of a field Explanation Screen fields can only be displayed in normal video mode gt gt gt Cannot change vi
504. report writers RPT powerful or LST easy to use QBF is described in ENTER Data Entry Query By Forms chapter 15 RPT in chapter 17 LST commands for formatting reports in chapter 18 and the way to combine these functions in Register Screen Form with ENTER chapter 15 1 Building a Unify DataServer ELS database application Building a Unify DataServer ELS database application requires seven basic steps The following paragraphs briefly describe each step and how you can find the information you need to complete it 1 Develop a logical database design To develop your database s logical design you must analyze your database application requirements You need to determine the types of information the database must store and how it should organize that information Install the Unify DataServer ELS software Instructions for installing the database software are given in the Unify DataServer ELS Installation Guide Set up the database environment To set up the environment for your database application you configure the operating system environment so your application runs as efficiently and smoothly as possible For information about the database and operating system environments see chapters 1 through 5 of this manual Create the database You create the database by defining the database tables and the fields for each table For information about creating a new database see chapter 8 Database Design Utilities Ent
505. rings A good example of the use of environment variables is the way the operating system determines which directories to search to find programs The environment variable named PATH specifies the order in which directories must be searched to find the Unify DataServer ELS programs The default value for PATH is bin usr bin or usr ucb Therefore the shell searches for programs only in the current directory and in the directories bin and usr bin or usr ucb Setting environment variables Suppose on your system the Unify DataServer ELS programs are in usr unify om You need to add this directory to the PATH list of directories that are searched Bourne Shell To set the PATH environment variable using the Bourne shell sh use the following syntax PATH pathname 53 Before the new PATH can take effect in subshells you must export the name You do this using the following syntax export PATH For example if you are using the Bourne shell you could set the PATH environment variable as follows PATH bin usr bin usr unify bin export PATH C Shell To set the PATH environment variable using the C shell csh use the following syntax setenv variable name value For example if you are using the C shell you could set the PATH environment variable as follows setenv PATH bin usr bin usr unify bin You can include environment variable settings and export commands in your profile or login file Then the env
506. rocess screen Screen q and h files not writeable Explanation Correction You are trying to save a screen form which exists but you don t have permission to overwrite the existing q and h files Correct the file permissions before trying again gt gt gt Unable to rebuild the index It must be dropped or successfully rebuilt before the database table involved can be accessed Explanation Correction The most common reason the index cannot be rebuilt is the file system has run out of space Otherwise you may have incorrect permissions for the database directory specified in DBPATH or the idxmnt program cannot run the BLDBI executable Either drop the index or fix the problem and try again If you want to try again write down the definition and drop the index and then fix the problem You can quickly add the index back later To determine the problem check to see how much file system space is left If this is the problem you can gain more space by deleting unwanted files Otherwise make sure you have read and write privileges for the files in the database directory Or make sure the executable BLDBI is located in the unify bin directory gt gt gt Unable to set an exit command key due to a conflict with another command Explanation Correction You must have an exit command key defined or you can t exit from Unify DataServer ELS No exit command key is defined in the unicap file AND the default value fo
507. rom emp sql gt group by Dept_No recognized query avg count 2 71429 EXAMPLE List the maximum average monthly salary for all jobs except president Note that you must use a nested query to see what job this is sql gt select max avg salary sql gt from emp sql gt where Job president sql gt group by Job recognized query Max avg Salary 1938 89 Nested queries Nested queries enable you to ask questions that cannot be answered using the previous SQL queries Nesting lets you use the results of one query as input to another so you can use the results of one question to answer another Suppose for example you want to find the name of the employee who earns the most Using the capabilities presented so far you could find the maximum amount made by any employee as follows select max Salary Commission from emp Or you could find the employee who earns any constant amount such as over 2500 select Name from emp where Salary Commission gt 2500 SQL Query DML language 375 376 But the only way to determine who earns the most is to perform the first query then use the resulting value of salary plus commission as the constant value in the second query You can do this with nesting EXAMPLE Find the name and job of the employee who earns the maximum salary plus commission sql gt select Name Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Salary Commission sql gt select max Salary
508. rrow fO f2 f20 help home ins_char ins_line left_arrow next_pg Prev_pg right_arrow up_arrow This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s delete line key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal key labeled with an arrow pointing down These characters should be mapped to the sequences produced by the terminal s function keys There are 21 imaginary function key characters with names from fO through f20 This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal key labeled HELP if your terminal has this key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal key labeled HOME or HOME CURSOR This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s insert character key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s insert line key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal key labeled with an arrow pointing left This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s next page key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the terminal s previous page key This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the command key labeled with an arrow pointing right This character should be mapped to the sequence produced by the command key labeled with an arrow pointing up
509. rt processor 525 after name 526 SYNTAX after name command group commands USE report command group can only appear in a script once The processing of this command group is triggered during the last control break when all after name command groups have been processed Generally only expressions containing aggregate functions local functions variables and constants can be used in after report command group commands Expressions can t be named in the after report command group All command group commands are valid in the after report command group This command group is processed after a group of detail information is printed You can use these commands to print group totals or summaries name is the name of an expression that appears in the sort command If an expression is not assigned a name in the sort command and it is not a database field the expression cannot be associated with an after name command group Each after name command group must have a different expression name for its name option For a database field the field name is the default expression name When a control break occurs the appropriate after name command groups are processed in reverse order of the named expressions in the sort command that is from the most minor to the most major sort expression For more information on sort expressions see sort in section 17 7 All command group commands are valid in an after name command group Unif
510. rts without a file name letting you wait to name the file when you save it If the EDIT environment variable has been set the specified editor is used If EDIT has not been set the default editor vi is used When you exit the editor the active menu redisplays Miscellaneous utilities 275 12 6 Database load DBLOAD 276 The Database load DBLOAD program lets you load new records and update existing records in a Unify DataServer ELS database from an ordinary ASCII file If the ASCII file contains Then DBLOAD new primary key values inserts the records the primary key values of existing updates the fields in those records records with the information from the ASCII file Figure 12 2 DBLOAD updates You can create the ASCII file to use with DBLOAD in the following ways 1 By dumping data from an existing non Unify DataServer ELS application using the tools that application provides 2 By using a text editor 3 By using SQL section 16 3 to dump data from an existing Unify DataServer ELS database The only requirement is the format of the file must match what the load program expects If you have a file in another format you must edit the file to match the expected format For example you can use a text processing program such as sed or awk to change the format of the file Because ASCII files are usually created at the shell this program is designed to run from the shell instead of from the Menu Handler T
511. ry name followed by a type specification A database access name is usually the database field s long name It is the field name returned by the SQL commana fields table RPT Report processor name table field name table field numeric length amount length float length string length text length date Idate time numeric length amount length float length string length text length date Idate time The type specification after an arbitrary name must be enclosed in square brackets A type specification is the field type numeric float amount date Idate time string or text followed by the length The exceptions are date Idate and time field types which have default lengths Valid values for length are the same as field lengths in the database design If you use the database field access name you need not include a type specification But you must precede the access name with the name of the table containing the field RPT looks up the type and length in the data dictionary Make sure that a report field is not of type COMB To use COMB field information use each component subfield of the COMB field separately The sorted option indicates that some input fields are presorted The environment variable RPTNSITM must be set to the exact number of incoming presorted fields For examples of the input section see Basic Report Examples section 17 2 left margin SYNTAX left margin number USE
512. ry screen This is where you enter operation commands for the current screen field The cursor position marks the current screen field In the paging area you can move the cursor up and down by pressing CTRL U and RETURN in this column Valid commands in this column are as follows m Modify DFIELD TP LEN FX FY PROMPT PX or PY for the current screen field d Delete the current screen field q Redisplay the paging prompt at the bottom of the page A unique 8 character screen field name This name is used to refer to the screen field in custom programs so it should be different from database field names However different screen forms can use the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference DFIELD TP LEN FX FY PROMPT same screen field names You can have as many screen fields as the buffer and screen can support The name of the database field to display for this screen field If it is left blank you must fill in the TP and LEN prompts The program validates the name in the data dictionary COMB type fields cannot be used directly you must enter each component of the field separately The type of the database field This is filled in from the data dictionary if a database field name has been specified The display length of the database field This is filled in from the data dictionary if a database field name has been specified The x coordinate column of the database field on the screen form It is a nu
513. s Your unicap file can be set differently Move the cursor to the end of the area you want to underline and press the underline command key again Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Too few blocks per media increase value of BUTAPESZ environment variable Explanation So few blocks are specified in the BUTAPESZ environment variable that no data can be read from or written to the backup tape or diskette Correction Reset the BUTAPESZ environment variable to the number of blocks on the backup tape or diskette and try again gt gt gt Too few blocks per media increase value of BUTAPESZ environment variable Explanation The number of blocks specified in the BUTAPESZ environment variable is less than the number of blocks on the tape or diskette volume Correction Reset the BUTAPESZ environment variable to match the number of blocks on the backup media and try again gt gt gt Transaction logging has just been turned on Explanation Transaction logging is now active because a new backup has been made The transaction log file has been reset and transaction logging has been turned on gt gt gt Transaction logging is currently off Explanation Transaction logging has not been turned on because either a new backup has not been made or the requested logging mode is set to OFF gt gt gt Transaction logging is now off Backup the data bass to restart it Explanation If you are using the
514. s selection number displays on the Report Options Screen The allowed destinations for report output and the optional debug mode Output can be routed to one or more destinations per run The four accepted characters are shown in Figure 16 7 When you want to Then enter enable the screen output option DEFAULT S enable the printer output option P enable the file output option F disable the debug option nodebug N DEFAULT enable Figure 16 7 Valid report output destinations Lower case entries are accepted and then converted to upper case Duplicate occurrences of a character are ignored Running the report in debug mode displays any error messages the scripts used and run time results Having debug mode enabled lets you verify the actual script being used Syntax errors display to help you correct program or script errors The area under this text prompt is the report definition paging area The first line of each registered report displays here in the order the report appears on the SQL Report Options Screen Individual reports are added and modified in the report entry area However reports are deleted directly from this area Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Control commands for a line are entered under CMD as shown in Figure 16 8 When you want to Then enter leave the display area q quit delete the current report from this SQL screen d delete registration add a report to this SQL screen
515. s 671 672 NOTE To transfer the field highlighted by the mark character make sure there is enough space move the cursor to the new position and press the transfer field command key again You cannot move lines that contain wraparound screen fields gt gt gt To set normal video position the cursor and hit the NORMAL VIDEO key Explanation Correction The standard PAINT command key for this operation is n Your unicap file can be set differently Move the cursor to the end of the area you want to display in normal video and press the normal video command key again gt gt gt To set reverse video position the cursor and hit the REVERSE VIDEO key Explanation Correction The standard PAINT command key for this operation is Your unicap file can be set differently Move the cursor to the end of the area you want to display in reverse video and press the reverse video command key again gt gt gt To set rv ul video position the cursor and hit the RV UL VIDEO key Explanation Correction The standard PAINT command key for this operation is Your unicap file can be set differently Move the cursor to the end of the area you want to display in reverse underline video mode and press the reverse underline video command key again gt gt gt To set ul video position the cursor and hit the UNDERLINE VIDEO key Explanation Correction The standard PAINT command key for this operation i
516. s a collection of users with similar access privileges You can assign a default set of privileges to the group and then set individual differences for each user if necessary For example data entry clerks may be entered as a group because for the most part they need access to the same programs Likewise warehouse workers may need their own set of programs A new employee however may temporarily need some of the more sensitive programs restricted In addition the new employee may only have inquire privileges for some programs A supervisor may have access to more programs and be given the addition of delete privileges Finally there is a special super user in the Unify DataServer ELS system This user automatically has access to all options The super user ID password and entry point are all entered with Modify System Parameters amp Security By default the ID and password are both su and the entry menu is the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu mainmenu Help documentation 40 Unify DataServer ELS allows help documentation to be associated with every program screen and menu Your release of Unify DataServer ELS has help documentation for all options and SQL commands Help text for custom programs and screens can be entered using Create or Modify Help Documentation You can display help documentation from a menu in the following ways 1 Press the help command key Displays general information about how to use the Menu Handler 2
517. s are explained as follows INDEX ID NUMBER The B tree index identification number This ID number is assigned by Unify DataServer ELS when an index is added to identify the index until it is deleted Index identification numbers are from 1 to 255 You can only search and select on one ID number at a time TABLE The name of the table associated with the B tree index This prompt does not display in add mode until the first database field has been entered All fields listed in the current B tree index definition must be in this table Search and selection can be performed for all indexes associated with a single table When a table with more than one index is selected the following prompt displays N ext index P revious index D rop S top This paging prompt lets you step through the B tree index definitions selected in inquire drop and rebuild modes n List the next index definition RETURN also advances to the next definition p List the previous index definition d Drop the current index definition This option displays only in delete mode S Stop the search selection display mode Rebuilding B trees is not necessary after a database reconfiguration However if you have deleted records from a B tree you can rebuild the B tree so as to reduce its size and improve performance 160 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Adding B tree indexes When you add a new B tree index you must respond to the following
518. s been reduced for this manual DATE 04 30 99 IME 11 29 46 PAGE 1 DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Print Individual Privileges SPECIAL ACCESS PRIVILEGES ID NAME GROUP ENTRY MENU PROG INQ ADD MOD DEL jhd John H Doe DEC fmatmen gt sss Sam S DEC entmenu smanl00 E y y y y Spade smod100 E y sitm100 E y sql P y man3000 P y fmntmen M y acqlist S y Figure 11 9 Individual access listing The column headings on the Individual access listing report are described as follows ID A code that identifies an individual who has access to the Unify DataServer ELS system NAME The 30 character name that further identifies and documents the individual GROUP The code that identifies the group to which the individual belongs Data Dictionary reports 247 ENTRY PT The short name of the initial menu the individual sees on login to Unify DataServer ELS MENU PROG The names of the menus programs or screens that the individual can access Each name is followed by a single character that indicates whether it is a menu program or screen M A menu P A program E An ENTER screen S An SQL screen ACC INQ ADD MOD DEL The access modes the individual has for each menu program or screen A y or an n in the ACC column indicates whether the individual has access to the option A y or an n in the INQ ADD MOD or DEL column indicates whether the individual has inquire add modi
519. s entry uppercase letters other than H J or M can be used The control characters beginning with E are used to set control keys for ENTER When you use ENTER a message tells you which keys are understood The defaults for search clear and exit are CTRL E CTRL Z and CTRL X respectively These defaults are used if the termcap entries are incorrect or not in the termcap file for your terminal A Uf control code indicates that another control key will perform the same function as carriage return does in Unify DataServer ELS This gives you a separate next field key in addition to the usual carriage return For example if you add Uf A to your termcap file CTRL A acts just like carriage return when you are using Unify DataServer ELS screen forms The Ui control code is used to display the help file associated with the current field Help files are assigned using the Advanced Field Attributes option The default value is l See Advanced Field Attributes Section 8 6 for more information on assigning help documentation to fields The Ub control code is used to assign a different value for the control key to return to the previous field or prompt The default is CTRL U but the Ub parameter lets you change it Setting up a termcap file If you are on a system that does not come with a ternicap file you should set up a file that contains only entries for terminal types currently used on your system Start with the Unify DataServer ELS ter
520. s explicitly 0 no decimal point is printed e The field is converted in the format d ddde dd where there is one digit before the decimal point The number of digits after the decimal point is equal to the precision specification If the precision is missing LST Listing processor 567 sort 568 6 digits are output If the precision is explicitly 0 no decimal point is printed The field is converted in the format of f or e whichever gives full precision in minimum space The examples in Figure 18 1 illustrate how templates can affect output Format Value Result HHH 123 423 HHH HE 0 k 7 HHHHE 8S 0 00 H 23456 23 456 mano BR 23456 78 23 456 78 amp 8 2345 67 2 345 67 amp amp amp 2345 00 2 345 00 amp 8 amp amp 2345 67 2 345 67 SHH H amp amp amp 1234 1 234 00 gan Hee gg 123 G13 00 10 2 12 3 12 30 10 2f 123 456 123 46 12 4e 123 456 1 2346e 02 10 4g 123 456 123 4560 8 49g 123456789 1 23e 08 Figure 18 1 Format Template Examples SYNTAX sort reverse uniquely name expr name expr end Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference USE total SYNTAX The sort command determines the output order If the sort command is not used the output not ordered By default sort arranges the output in ascending order according to the specified expressions If the reverse syntax is used
521. s local function accepts a report field constant or variable of the type DATE or LDATE and returns an integer indicating the day of the week for example 0 Sunday 6 Saturday NOTE dow returns 0 Sunday for null Idate expressions and date constants which are treated as Idates The dow function is used with the index local function to print ASCII names for days of the week For example to print the day of the week for 1 1 99 use the following expression index dow 1 1 99 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday index SYNTAX index number string stringn USE This local function accepts a number followed by a series of constant strings or string expressions It returns the string indexed by the number starting from 0 For example the following call to index returns the string def index 1 abc def ghi mdy SYNTAX mdy date number USE This local function accepts a report field constant or variable of the type DATE or LDATE followed by a number It returns an integer RPT Report processor 509 signifying the month day or year of the date according to number This is explained in the table shown in Figure 17 20 Number Meaning 0 Month number where 1 means January 2 means February etc 1 Day number where 1 means the first day of the month 2 means the second day of the month etc 2 The calendar year e g 1987 2260 1865 etc Figure
522. s not updated Correction If you are using diskettes or tape for the temporary file check your backup device to be sure it is on line or write enabled Or if you are using the disk as the temporary file check that you have write permission on the current directory gt gt gt DBLOAD Unable to open xxxx Explanation The ASCII input file cannot be opened for reading Correction Check the spelling of the name and make sure you have read privileges for the file gt gt gt DBLOAD Insufficient memory Explanation There is not enough memory for DBLOAD to finish initializing Correction Try increasing the amount of memory allowed for initialization This can require an operating system regeneration gt gt gt Deadlock detected from system locking Explanation Either this record is being accessed at another terminal or a lockfile may be present LOCKd in your DBPATH directory Correction If aLOCKd is present you must remove it before you can continue Be sure no one is using the file locking facility before you remove LOCKd gt gt gt Display next page RETURN continues n terminates Explanation The output from the current Report Option process does not fit on one screen Correction Press RETURN to display the next screen of data Press n to end the report process and resume the program Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Do not use 0 to invoke the paint command Explanation
523. s of information 98 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference you can divide the manfitem table into two tables manf and item as shown in Figure 7 6 Manf Primary Key manf_ID_ city 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 item Lynn Reston Reston Lynn San Diego Primary Key ee imanf_ID ser_no price 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0002 0002 0003 0004 0004 0004 Figure 7 6 Database Design 3 manf and item tables Introduction to database design 101 3 00 102 2 00 103 4 00 104 2 00 105 1 00 106 1 00 101 3 00 102 4 00 102 2 00 102 2 00 104 3 00 105 4 00 99 100 This revised design overcomes some of the problems involving manf_ID and city in Design 2 The information has not changed but the design shows some improvements 1 Anew manufacturer can be added even though it does not yet supply any items to the inventory For example manufacturer 0005 doesn t yet supply an item but you can add the information that manufacturer 0005 is located in San Diego 2 The record for an item can be deleted without losing information about the manufacturer For example the record for manufacturer 0003 and item serial number 102 can be deleted and the database still has the information that manufacturer 0003 is located in Reston 3 The location of a manufacturer appears only once in the design Changing the location of a manufacturer requires only one record update For example you can ch
524. s print after the decimal point If there is no decimal point the number before the conversion character is assumed to be the precision The conversion characters are f e and g They have the following meanings f The field is converted to decimal notation in the format Jddd ddd where the number of digits after the decimal point is equal to the precision specification If the precision is omitted 6 digits are output If the precision is explicitly 0 no decimal point is printed e The field is converted in the format d ddde dd where there is one digit before the decimal point and the number of digits after is equal to the precision specification If the precision is omitted 6 digits are output If the precision is explicitly 0 no decimal point is printed g The field is converted in format f or e depending on what provides full precision in minimum space Variations of the float format include d for a left justified integer and ld for a long signed decimal integer Format template examples 536 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The table in figure 17 25 illustrates how templates affect output Format Value Result HHAHY 123 423 HHHH HE 0 A p HHHHH amp amp 0 x 00 H 23456 423 456 amp amp 23456 78 23 456 78 amp amp 2345 67 2 345 67 amp amp amp 2345 00 2 345 00 amp amp amp 2345 67 2 345 67 SHH HH amp amp amp
525. s the changes you 593 594 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 vo ko made to the master data dictionary and builds a new master data dictionary in the temporary work directory Answer Y to the Proceed prompt When the master data dictionary has been built successfully select the Install Master data dictionary option from the dbdesign menu This step moves the new master data dictionary created in the temporary directory and replaces the original masterdata dictionary in the Unify DataServer ELS lib directory Answer Y to the Proceed prompt No one should be using the database while installing a new master data dictionary in xxxxx Proceed y n Once the master data dictionary has been installed successfully return to the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu mainmenu CTRL P or mainmenu Select the Convert application data dictionary option to convert your application data dictionary unify db using the new master data dictionary information Enter the directory location of the data dictionary you want to convert or press RETURN to the following prompt DBPATH is set to xxxxx Enter new DBPATH or lt cr gt to continue Answer Y to the following prompt No one should be using the database in xxxxx while installing a new data dictionary Proceed y n NOTE If you have multiple databases you want to convert repeat this step for each application data base Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Step 12 Once
526. saction logging configuration The program exits to the active menu Correction Check the write privileges for files in the database directory gt gt gt Unable to execute FNDFLD nnn Explanation Make sure the PATH and Unify DataServer ELS environment variables are set correctly and exported if necessary Section 5 Unify DataServer ELS messages 675 676 gt gt gt Unable to execute the database back up program Explanation This is an internal system error Correction Make sure the database backup program has not been deleted or moved to a different directory or had its file permission modes changed gt gt gt Unable to execute the replay program Explanation This is an internal system error Correction Make sure the database backup program has not been deleted or moved to a different directory or had its file permission modes changed gt gt gt Unable to execute the sort command Explanation Make sure the PATH and Unify DataServer ELS environment variables are set correctly and exported if necessary Section 5 gt gt gt Unable to find help documentation for this topic Explanation There is no help text file available for the current menu gt gt gt Unable to open xxxx Explanation SQL was started from the shell command line to run the script named xxxx You cannot access this file Correction Make sure you have correct access privileges to read the file gt gt gt Unable to open x
527. salary 12 in column 30 using S SS S S amp amp amp commission in column 46 using S5S SS amp amp amp after dept_no need 2 skip print Total in column 22 total salary 12 in column 29 using S 5S5S5 SS56 amp amp amp total commission in column 46 using S5 SS amp amp amp skip RPT Report processor 467 468 after report need 7 skip print Grand Total in column 16 total salary 12 in column 28 using S S SS SS amp amp amp total commission in column 45 using SSS SS amp amp amp skip print Average Salary in column 1 Minimum Salary in column 19 Maximum Salary in column 36 print avg salary 12 column 1 using S SS SS amp amp amp min salary 12 column 18 using S8 S amp amp amp max salary 12 column 36 using SSS SS amp amp amp skip print Total Employees in column 28 print count column 28 skip print Report Complete centered end The sort command specifies the fields to sort by and the order the field are sorted RPT performs sorting before processing other report commands The default sort order is ascending or lowest to highest You can change the order to descending or highest to lowest with the desc keyword The header section is processed at the top of each page You can also use the print option centered in the header section This option centers the entire print string in the width
528. screen For more information about the Report options screen see chapter 15 The first prompt in the update area below FORMATTING PROGRAMS You can specify an 8 character name for the executable formatting program that is used to produce the report You can associate up to eight different formatting programs with each screen registration The formatting program can be the listing processor LST the report processor RPT a custom program or a blank LST and RPT must be in upper case letters A Unify DataServer ELS executable name other than RPT or LST is not accepted If you enter a blank no formatting program will be used The report will list all fields on the screen form in a tabular format 80 characters wide If the length of all the fields in a record exceeds 80 characters extra characters wrap to the next line This field is edited so that only the characters before a blank remain When you press RETURN the string is left justified Leading spaces and extra characters are deleted PARAMETERS Four 14 character strings that can be passed as parameters to the formatting program The formatting program must interpret the meaning of the parameters Parameters are entered one string per row next to each hyphen The type of formatting program determines the number of parameters allowed Figure 15 2 shows the number of parameters allowed for each type of formatting program When the FORMATTING PROGRAM is Then the maximum n
529. screen form for data entry and inquiry ENTER interfaces with Advanced field attributes section 8 6 If you use Advanced field attributes ENTER can e Validate values for records as they are added or modified e Assign default values for fields e Display a custom error message for invalid values e Display an information message and a help file for each field You can use ENTER query by forms to select database records that you want to inquire about modify or delete ENTER interfaces with RPT chapter 17 When you register a screen form with ENTER you can associate the screen form with report scripts You can then print the reports for records selected with query by forms 325 6 ENTER screens interface with the Menu Handler chapter 3 Therefore program level security can be applied to these screens as well Before you can use these features with ENTER you should understand the rules that ENTER is guided by The Rules of Using ENTER ENTER is guided by rules that determine what order fields are accepted and validated on the screen form The rules also determine whether or not ENTER can work with the screen form It is entirely possible to define screen forms that ENTER cannot use In this case you can write a host language program to use the screen form Normally an ENTER screen form works with a single target table A target table is the table that the screen form maintains the one inquired added modified or de
530. se of an internal error a start logical transaction entry has not been recorded for the present transaction process gt gt gt There is no more room in the database for records of this type Delete some records or increase the expected number and reconfigure Explanation You have reached the maximum number of records you can add to this table given the existing expected number setting Correction To add more records you must either delete some records from this table or using Modify Database Design increase the EXPECTED value for this table gt gt gt There is no more space for this table There were nnn record s added mmm record s updated Explanation The database has no space left to add records to the current table This occurs when the database has 66 more records than expected by the database design Correction Either delete some records or use Modify Database Design to increase the expected number of records in the table Then reconfigure the database gt gt gt There is no more space on the standard Unify DataServer ELS menu mainmenu The menu usermenu will not be created for the data entry screens Explanation The Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu already contains 16 selections No room remains to add the Data Entry Screens menu Correction If you want a Data Entry Screen use Add Modify or Delete Menus to reorganize the Main Menu and free a menu line gt gt gt There is no previous menu
531. se that let you view the data values of the current record Screen form development tools 303 304 Screen fields have a screen field name a database field name a type a length and display coordinates When you specify the screen field name and the database field name PAINT determines the type length and display coordinates To add or modify screen fields switch from command mode to screen field edit mode In this mode the bottom two lines of the screen form are replaced with the field edit prompts SCREEN FIE DATA BASE where SCREEN FIELD and DATABASE FIELD are where you enter the screen field and database field names The screen form redisplays when you finish the entry Screen fields must not overlap each other or prompts You must not add or move screen fields so they overlap Examples of the display formats for different types of screen fields are as follows NUMERIC NNNNNN AMOUNT AAAA AA FLOAT FFFFFF FFF DATE MM DD YY LDATE DD AAA YYY TIME HH MM STRING SSSSSS TEXT XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BINARY B The display length of the database field determines the number of characters displayed for the screen field If the underline video attribute is defined in the termcap file screen fields are underlined on PAINT screen forms However if a terminal requires the ug 1 entry in termcap screen fields are not underlined The screen field editing commands are as follows Unify DataS
532. sed If you change NAME to a Unify DataServer ELS supplied formatting program all fields except the first are erased Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 15 2 Using ENTER for data entry Data entry is the process of adding data to a database or modifying existing data ENTER can be best understood by example rather than by description For an example of how to use a specific ENTER screen see the Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Tutorial Manual An ENTER screen has four operation modes inquire add modify and delete One or more of the modes may be disallowed depending on your access privileges defined with Add or Modify Group or Individual Privileges A typical ENTER screen works in the following way Entering the primary key field In add mode The cursor moves first to the key field You must enter the key before you can move the cursor down the screen If the key is a COMB field that has several parts you must enter all parts After you enter the key the record is added to the database and locked so other users cannot modify or delete it You can then enter the remaining target table fields on the screen form In modify mode NOTE The cursor also moves first to the key field The difference is that you can use Query By Forms to locate records After the records are located the screen operates as in add mode If another user is modifying or deleting a record you are trying to modify an error message displays Y
533. see SQL Reference section 16 5 Required and optional clauses Some clauses are required and some are optional The required SQL clauses are select some data a list of field names from some place a list of tables The optional SQL clauses are where a condition a true false statement group by some data a list of field names having a group condition a true false statement order by some data a list of field names into a file SQL Query DML language 351 Identifying tables and fields in queries Identify each table and field you want to use in selections and calculations by the table s short name and the database field s access name The access name for a field is usually the ong field name from the Unify DataServer ELS database design However for a field that references a combination COMB field each of its implied fields has a separate access name In this case the implied field s access name is a compound of the referencing field s short database name and the short name of the component field it references in the COMB field A long field name need not be unique throughout the database as a short field name must A long name is just unique in a specific table If you give the same long name to different fields and you want to use both fields in the same query you must qualify each long field name with the name of the table This is described in General Joins later in this chapter The rules for valid long field
534. sf from the Create or modify screen forms menu and enter the table name customer at the TABLE prompt You see processing messages as the screen form is created processed and registered with ENTER When the process is complete the screen form displays as follows ABLE Created Unify RDBMS Create Default Screen Form customer Processed Registered with E The screen will be named customer 30 APR 1999 The screen can now be used for data entry gt gt Screen form development tools 291 Press CTRL U to return to the Create or Modify Screen Forms menu and enter customer at the selection prompt You see the following screen form ready for data entry customer Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Customer Maintenance Customer Number Name Address City State Zip Code Phone Number I INQUIRE 292 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 13 2 Paint screen forms paint The Paint screen forms option paint is designed for creating modifying and viewing screen forms PAINT stores and accesses the screen forms using the Unify DataServer ELS data dictionary After you have specified a screen form name you can move the cursor and add modify and delete prompts and screen fields The standard commands PAINT uses are described in this chapter You can change these if you wish using the information described in Customizing PAINT Commands When you select the
535. sions 488 An expression containing report field names constants local functions and other expression names can be assigned a name using the following syntax lt name gt expr You can use an expression name any place in the RPT script where the expr syntax can be used Each expression name must begin with a letter Letters digits and underscores can follow to assign a name up to 32 characters Suppose item price and discount are report fields The following example illustrates that once an expression is named the name can be used in subsequent expressions as if it were another field sort item lt cost gt price discount detail print item lt amount gt cost cost 0 06 in col 30 print CHECK AMOUNT LESS PRICE IS amount price Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Expressions are named for two reasons 1 Named expressions appearing in the sort command can be associated with before name and after name command groups For more information see the Control break processing subsection 2 Expressions can be assigned meaningful names so subsequent commands are concise and easier to read An expression consisting of one report field can be named but it isn t necessary A report field is a named expression The field name is the expression s name by default Therefore sorted report fields can be associated with before name and after name command groups Logical expressions A logical expressio
536. size of the application unify db Customizing the data dictionary The following describes each of the tables contained in the master data dictionary followed by step by step master data dictionary modification and installation instructions Be sure you understand the consequences of what you are changing before you modify the master data dictionary Otherwise disastrous effects might ensue The master data dictionary tables 586 The master data dictionary sunify db contains the following tables dbnode mprec groups empacc screen mpscrf record fldrel volume btree coreld mline employ grpacc scfield fmtprog field scffld fldsec btfld You can change only the Expected number of records and the table descriptions NOTE The tables dbnode btree and volume are for internal use only and the Expected Number of Records should not be changed The volume and btree tables are limited in size by Unify DataServer ELS to 8 and 155 respectively Each table description also contains the default Expected number of records This is the number of records set in the master data dictionary when Unify DataServer ELS is first installed Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference dbnode coreld mprec mline groups employ empacc grpacc screen scfield Database node record dbnode is reserved for internal use only The Expected number of records is 1 The individual core load coreld contains the nam
537. ssary gt gt gt The String table has overflowed Explanation The capacity of the string constant table has been exceeded Correction Reduce the number or size of the string constants in the script or increase the size of the RPTCONCNT environment variable gt gt gt The table xxxx is not in the data dictionary Explanation The specified table xxxx is not in the data dictionary Correction Make sure the table name is spelled correctly gt gt gt The table is not valid Explanation The table name you have entered is not in the data dictionary Correction Recheck the TABLE entry for misspellings You can list all tables using Print Database Design gt gt gt The TERM environment variable is not set Explanation The TERM variable has not been set There isn t a default value for this variable Unify DataServer ELS messages 653 654 Correction Set the TERM variable for your terminal type gt gt gt The terminal type xxxx is not in the termcap file Explanation The terminal type set by your TERM environment variable cannot be found in the termcap file named by TERMCAP Correction Check for correct representation of your terminal s type gt gt gt The transaction journal could not be opened Explanation The transaction logging file or device cannot be opened Correction Make sure you have read and write privileges for the file gt gt gt The transaction log and the database have differe
538. ssor tells you how to use the Unify DataServer ELS Report Writer RPT to print reports With RPT you use a non procedural language to specify the format of multiple level tabular reports The data for these reports can come from an SQL or Query By Forms query a user program or any ASCII file LST Listing Processor explains LST a selection and formatting language that produces sorted listings of totals and subtotals from a database LST is a simple alternative to SQL and RPT when you don t need the full power of those two tools LST has two major components the selection processor which lets you choose records based on selection criteria and the listing processor which lets you sort format and total the selected records Appendices A through D contain supplementary information Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Field and Internal Data Types explains field data types display lengths and internal lengths as well as legal changes you can make to field types and lengths Reserved Words contains a list of words that have specific meaning to Unify DataServer ELS You cannot use these reserved words for table and field names Customizing Your Application describes ways to tailor your Unify DataServer ELS database application to your needs Custom Message Control and a Reconfigurable Data Dictionary enable you to personalize screen messages and prompts You can also set the CURR DATETP and LDATEFMT environment
539. start the recovery process To start the option select Read database Backup redb from the database Maintenance Menu The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Read Database Backup This program restores a copy of the database and data dictionary from diskettes or tape No one else should be using the database while this program is running If you have been using transaction logging you will have the opportunity to replay the log after the database has been restored If you are using a device as the transaction logging file and want to use Read database Backup proceed as follows 1 Unmount the transaction log 2 Mount the first backup diskette or tape 3 Make sure the backup device is on line and ready 4 Then respond with a Y to start the recovery process To exit the program and return to the menu respond with CRTL U N or n You can exit the program at various points after it has started However if you have read in one or more volumes when you exit the database will be invalid You must then completely recover another backup before using the database Database maintenance utilities 185 Replaying the transaction log After the backup file has been successfully read you can replay the current transaction log You see the following screen form and prompt Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Read Database Backup The database and data dictionary have been restored from the backup device If
540. stem defined order If you need the records in a particular order you must sort them If you update most of the records in a table you negate the advantages of buffering Each record must be searched for stored in a buffer and written to the disk Nonbuffered sequential access or hashing is more suitable depending on your needs Buffered sequential access is designed for reading forward through the file Although you can read backward using the previous option this is much less efficient because of how the buffering scheme works 117 118 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 8 Database design utilities The Database Design Utilities chapter describes the tools you can use to design a Unify DataServer ELS database These database design tools are programs that display as options on Unify DataServer ELS menus The first program described in this chapter is listed on the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu while the other programs described in this chapter are found on the Database Design Utilities menu These Unify DataServer ELS database design tools are desribed in the following sections Section 8 1 Design and create a new database Section 8 2 Modify database design Section 8 3 Create database Section 8 4 Reconfigure database Section 8 5 Add drop B tree Indexes Section 8 6 Advanced field attributes Design and create a new database dbcreate enables you to specify tables and fields for an initial database You can
541. string operators Functions Using a function in an expression is similar to using an expression name The result of the function replaces the function name in the expression RPT has two kinds of functions aggregate functions and local functions Aggregate functions calculate results using the value of an expression from many lines of the input file including results from two or more control break levels in a report RPT Report processor 505 Local functions calculate results using the values of arguments passed to them They can only use values that are local to the command group where they appear as arguments not values accumulated or monitored during several control break levels Aggregate functions 506 The aggregate functions are count total min max and avg These functions can only be used in after name or after report command groups Aggregate functions can be used by themselves or as part of an expression Several aggregates can be used in one expression and the same aggregate can appear several times RPT processes an after name or after report command group when the associated control break occurs section 17 6 The value of an aggregate function is calculated using the group of data values corresponding to the after command group containing the function For example a count function in the after report command group calculates the total number of records or lines in the input file that are processed The same fun
542. t stln endin nxtw w pryw b home H bot L nextln n r rvon ulon rvulon nrmion n screen S cursor right cursor up cursor down start of line end of line next word previous word cursor home cursor bottom next line reverse video on underling on reverse video underlining on normal video on screen name Figure 13 7 Standard unicap PAINT section Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference All PAINT command names can be associated with command keys of you choice For example the following line in the unicap file defines the command key to enter insert input mode ins i where ins is the command name and i is the command key If you want insert input mode to start when you press E instead change the i to an e The restrictions that apply to assigning command keys to commands are as follows 1 Digits cannot be assigned as command keys This is because digits indicate the command repeat count The exception is 0 which can only be assigned to the column 0 command 2 ignoremiss TRUE Without this line PAINT prints a message for each command not assigned to a key With this line PAINT suppresses the messages Commands not assigned to keys cannot be performed The exceptions are the escape and quit commands which are by default ESC and q respectively 3 mrkchar string where string is one print character This line lets you change the mark character that indic
543. t Any combination of available options is valid When the FILE output destination option is chosen the output file name must follow this prompt If a file with that name exists the following message displays File already exists destroy it Answer Y to write over the existing file or answer N tc enter a new file name When you choose a valid report item with REPORT the requested item line is highlighted and the cursor moves to the firs allowed output destination prompt After you choose the appropriate destinations return to the first output prompt with CTRL U or RETURN Enter CTRL U to continue to the process mode prompt If the chosen report has only one valid output destination that option is automatically requested The process mode prompt then displays on the REPORT line Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Proceed in F oreground B ackground D ebug or C ancel This prompt lets you choose the process mode for the report The D ebug option does not display if nodebug mode N has been set with SQL Screen Registration The B ackground option is not allowed if SCREEN is chosen as an output destination The possible selections are as follows f Process the report in foreground mode while you wait b Process the report in background mode while you continue working on something else d Process the report in foreground mode and display the scripts run time results and error messages if applicabl
544. t from emp sql gt where Job salesrep sql gt group by Dept_No sql gt having count gt 2 recognized query Dept_No count 20 3 40 3 You have previously selected individual salesreps whose commissions are below par Using a having clause that compares the results of two aggregate functions for each department you can find the departments where the average commissions are above or below par This is useful to confirm how the sales managers are performing EXAMPLE List the department number average salary average commission and target commission level equal to half the salary plus 100 for departments whose average commission is at or above the target level sql gt select Dept_No avg Salary avg Comaission sql gt avg Salary 0 5 100 sql gt from emp sql gt where Job salesrep sql gt group by Dept_No sql gt having avg Commission gt avg Salary 0 5 100 recognized query Dept_No avg Salary avg Commission avg Salary 0 5 100 30 2150 00 1250 00 1175 00 40 2050 00 1550 00 1125 00 50 1500 00 1000 00 850 00 You can use nested queries in the having clause SQL evaluates a query nested in a having clause the same as a query nested in a where clause This query lets you ask such questions as what departments have an average salary less than the average for all departments SQL Query DML language 379 380 EXAMPLE List the department number
545. t gt gt There is insufficient memory for the input fields Explanation Correction There is not enough memory to process your report Increase the size of the input buffer using the RPTINBUFSZ environment variable You may need to decrease another table size as well Or reduce the total memory requirements by decreasing the lengths of output strings and report fields decreasing the number of variables or reducing the complexity of the report script gt gt gt There is insufficient memory for the output line buffer Explanation Correction There is not enough memory left for the buffer to print an output line Use the width command to decrease the output width if possible The default width is 132 characters Or reset the RPT environment variables to decrease the amount of memory allocated for the various tables gt gt gt There is insufficient memory to hold variables Explanation Correction There is not enough internal memory left to store all the variable values Increase the number of variables allowed by using the RPTFLDCNT environment variable Or reduce total memory requirements by decreasing the lengths of output strings and report fields decreasing the number of variables or reducing the complexity of the report script Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt There is insufficient memory to store the constants Explanation There is not enough internal memory left to
546. t in the data dictionary Explanation The field name ffff specified as the default value is not in the data dictionary Correction Make sure the field name is spelled correctly gt gt gt The field would not fit in the new position Explanation You are trying to transfer a screen field to a blank area that does not accommodate the field s length gt gt gt The field would not fit on the screen Explanation You are trying to add a screen field in a position that cannot accommodate its length This usually occurs when you try to add a screen field at the beginning or middle of a line gt gt gt The file xxxx already exists Explanation The into clause in the query directs its output into an existing ASCII or binary file SQL does not overwrite an existing file Correction Either remove the file or direct the output to a file with a different name gt gt gt The file xxxx does not exist Explanation This message displays if volmnt cannot find the specified input ordinary file for file volumes Correction Make sure the path name the settings of DBPATH and VOLPATH and spelling of the file name are correct Also make sure the file suffix Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference matches the file you created File volumes can be created using the cat command gt gt gt The file xxxx does not exist in dev Explanation This message displays if volmnt cannot find the specified input character or blo
547. t in variables today and hour in the before report section to do this Parameters can be used in the script wherever you want the user to enter a value to be substituted provided the script still is syntactically correct To group the purchase orders in unshipped and shipped orders you can use sort as in the following expression sort lt dt gt Shipped The Shipped field is filled in when the vendor says the order has been shipped So if the date is null as shown in the expression the order hasn t been shipped The RPT Report processor 479 480 comparison in this expression returns the value 0 false if the order hasn t been shipped and the value 1 true if the order has been shipped Because the value is 0 all unshipped orders are grouped before all shipped orders The entire expression is given a name dt so you can refer to the control break that occurs with the transition from unshipped orders to shipped orders later in the report You can use local functions to perform specialized custom processing For example RPT has three built in local functions that let you print the name of the month and weekday for a date One of these functions extracts the month number from today s date for example 1 for January and 2 for February Then another function translates the number to the appropriate string The same can be done for the weekday The local functions mdy and dow extract the month and day of the week numbers
548. t program When you want to modify NAME you must delete the line and add the name again d Delete the current program 271 272 NAME HEADING SCREEN DIRECTORY q Leave the program data entry area and position the cursor at the USES SYSRECEV prompt A string of up to eight characters that is the system name for a program in the executable You can enter this name at the menu SELECTION prompt to run the program If the executable is a custom program and uses a host language function to call this program this name must be the same as the Host Language function name for the program UNIFY has Host Language Interfaces for C and RM COBOL A string of up to 34 characters that displays on the second line of the screen form when the program is running and on menus where this program is a selection option This is the name of the screen form to be displayed by sysrecev before the user program starts This is an optional entry For a custom program the name of the system directory where the program source code is located See the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual for more information The Unify DataServer ELS program loading shell script uld expects the archive containing the program to be in this directory When you enter the directory name here the relative path src is added as a prefix to the name If you do not enter the directory name uld uses the first three characters of the program name as the dir
549. t search expressions for inexact matching The wildcard character The question mark matches a single character For example if you want to find all the Smiths but don t know whether they are spelled Smith or Smyth you can use the specification Sm th The wildcard string The asterisk matches a string of characters of any length including zero length strings or null strings A character class The character class matches a single character that is a member of the class ENTER data entry query by forms 341 You can specify ranges of characters by separating two characters with a dash For example you can specify all upper case letters by the class ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ or more conveniently by A Z You can specify all upper and lower case letters by a zA Z You can specify other classes similarly Inexact matching on non string fields You can also specify inexact matches on non string fields with the following set of expressions The values you supply are f1 and f2 gt ft The greater than expression All fields with values greater than the entered value match the expression lt f1 The less than expression All fields with values less than the entered value match the expression If The logical not expression All fields that do not match the entered value match the expression f1 f2 The range expression All field values that match the entered values or are between the entered values mat
550. t to set up basic report parameters These report parameters include the input file description sorting specifications paper length and report width and margins Non command group commands are external to command groups They usually appear near the beginning of the report script after the input section They can appear anywhere in the report script except in the input section or within a command group If a non command group command follows a command group that command group is terminated The next command must be either another non command group command or the first command in a new command group bottom margin SYNTAX USE end SYNTAX USE 520 bottom margin number This command sets the size of the bottom margin number refers to the number of print lines to omit at the bottom of each page The default bottom margin is 2 end This command indicates the end of the RPT script RPT ignores all commands after end Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference input SYNTAXs USE sorted input This command describes the format of each line in the input file The report script must have an input section Each field in the input file must match a corresponding entry in the input section That is the first field in the input file must be described by the entry in the input section the second field by the second entry and so on An input section entry can take one of two forms a database field access name or an arbitra
551. t90 tot_over90 using skip 2 print Report Complete in column 32 end RPT Report processor 485 17 4 RPT expression syntax 486 RPT uses the term expr to refer to a combination of report fields constants variables functions and operators A report field is a name that refers to a particular data field in the input file You can identify a report field in two ways e As table field Asname followed by a type specification In the first method table is the name of a table in the database and field is the name of a field in that table In the second method name is an arbitrary name and the type specification is a valid data type and length enclosed in square brackets For more information on report fields see Expression Components section 17 5 Expressions tell RPT what to sort compute and print The following is the syntax referred to by expr Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference report field numeric constant date constant ldate constant time constant string constant function variable lt name gt expr name expr report field gt report field numeric constant 9 numeric constant date constant z date constant ldate constant ldate constant time constant p time constant string constant substr string constant function oor substr spec variable function lt name gt expr na variable name ra lt name gt expr expr S name sf expr lt lt and or not An expressio
552. tabase design you should draw a diagram showing the tables and the relationships among them This diagram does not change the definitions of your tables It merely clarifies the relationships among tables by representing them graphically instead of on several pages of lists Relationships can be one to one one to many or many to many For example in Design 4 one city can be the location of several manufacturers and one manufacturer can make several items The tables cities and manf have a one to many relationship and the tables manf and item have a one to many relationship These relationships can be diagrammed as shown in Figure 7 9 a Figure 7 9 Database diagram showing explicit relationships In Figure 7 9 the double headed arrow indicates many and the single headed arrow indicates one Therefore relationships can be represented using the following symbols lt gt indicates a one to many relationship lt lt indicates a many to many relationship lt denotes a one to one relationship An example of a many to many relationship is a database for scheduling school courses Each student can have several teachers and each teacher can have several students 104 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The purpose of creating a database diagram is to clarify both your and the users understanding of the database A diagram is an easy way to represent your database s major elements and their relationships Introduct
553. te Joins To determine the memory needed for no duplicate joins use this calculation number of expected records total size of conditional fields 4 2 EXAMPLE For example the following query yields a no duplicate join select emp Name dept Name from emp org dept where emp Number Emp_No and Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference dept Number Dept_No and emp Number gt 12000 The conditional fields are Emp_No and Dept_No for a total conditional fields size of 4 bytes If the expected number of records is 30 the equation is 30 4 4 2 for a result of 480 Setting internal SQL table size To set an SQL environment variable use the following syntax depending on your system C shell csh setenv variable value Bourne Shell variable value export variable For example to set the Selection Items table to 20 and the Expression Nodes table to 150 using the Bourne shell you enter SQLNODECNT 150 SQLSELCNT 20 export SQLNODECNT SQLSELCNT After you set these environment variables you can run the SQL script again Any changed table maximums are sent to the standard error device for SQL output The results of the changed environment variables would be reported as follows SQL Query DML language 411 SQL SQLNODECNT set to 150 SQL SQLSELCNT set to 20 In general if you are running out of memory on a query you must decrease the size of one or more variables to increase the s
554. te Menus Describe Programs to the System Edit SQL or RPT Scripts use DBLOAD and do Transaction Logging Transaction Logging records database updates so that if the system crashes you can restore all changes made since the last checkpoint Part IV Screen Form Development and Maintenance contains two chapters Chapter 13 Screen Form Development Utilities and Screen Chapter 14 Form Maintenance Utilities have information to help you use screen forms These chapters tell you how to create default screen forms for data entry and database inquiries then customize those screen forms for your application These chapters also discuss the tools you can use to maintain the forms after you ve created and customized them Part V Data Entry and Retrieval also contains two chapters Chapter 15 ENTER Data Entry Query By Forms describes ENTER This is a general purpose data entry program that you can use to drive screen forms You can also use ENTER as a query by forms interface to your database or as the basis for your own custom data entry screens Chapter 16 SQL Query DML Language explains how to use the Unify DataServer ELS query language SQL to extract information from your database in a meaningful format SQL is a subset of the IBM standard relational query and data manipulation language SEQUEL 2 About this manual 15 16 Part VI Report Generators contains the last two chapters Chapter 17 Chapter 18 RPT Report Proce
555. ter another table name CTRL U returns you to the Menu Handler while RETURN has no effect If all the fields for the table cannot fit on the default screen form the following message displays There is not enough room on the screen for all of the fields gt gt If you enter a Y yes at the Continue prompt the default screen form is generated with the fields that fit If you enter a N no the screen form is not generated and you return to the TABLE prompt The following is the last message that displays before you enter the name of another table The screen can now be used for data entry gt gt To use the screen form enter its name at the selection prompt on any menu Screen form development tools 289 290 Because the screen form has been registered with ENTER it can be added to any menu s list of selections You can do this using the Add modify or delete menus option found on the Unify DataServer ELS Main menu section 12 2 You can modify or delete a default screen form with either Paint Screen Forms section 13 2 or Check Screen Form Coordinates section 14 1 You can also change the heading by using Register Screen Form with ENTER section 15 1 NOTE When a screen form is deleted its registration with ENTER is canceled Any references on menus are removed as well In general fields display on the finished screen form from top to bottom as they appear in the database design The fields line up one und
556. ter values in your system configuration file to determine whether any of these parameters can be optimized Increasing the value of most of these parameters reserves more memory for the system and therefore leaves less memory for the run time combination of user programs A good general rule calls for sufficient user memory to support at least 60 to 70 of the maximum load When the system load exceeds this amount of memory swapping and paging will occur Consider resetting the parameters that control the following system features Step 1 Check the parameter that controls the maximum number of i node tabl ntries This parameter controls the maximum number of files in use at the same time A file could be a directory an ordinary file a device special file or a mount point special file Optimization Calculate your expected maximum usage as follows parameter num_dev 20 num_users 10 where num_dev is the average number of simultaneous developers and num_users is the average number of simultaneous end users 692 Step 2 Check the parameter that controls the maximum number of open file tabl ntries This parameter controls the maximum number of files that can be open at the same time A file could be a directory an ordinary file a device special file or a mount point special file Optimization Set this parameter equal to the maximum number of i node tables Step 3 entries found in the previ
557. tes to distinguish them from field names EXAMPLE List the names and locations of all departments in Dallas sql gt select Name Location sql gt from dept sql gt where Location Dallas recognized query Name Location Administration Dallas Research Dallas Finance Dallas EXAMPLE List the names and jobs of all employees whose names begin with the letters A through M sql gt select Name Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Name A M recognized query Name Job Jones clerk Dugan salesrep Klein salesrep Lee president Kawasaki salesrep Dupre clerk Bleriot programmer Moehr clerk Colucci salesrep Amato salesrep Fiorella clerk Brown engineer Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference EXAMPLE List the names and jobs of all employees whose names have 5 or less nonblank characters sql gt select Name Job sql gt from emp sql gt where Name recognized query Name Job Smith salesrep Jones clerk Dugan salesrep Klein salesrep Lee president Dupre clerk Moehr clerk Amato salesrep Brown engineer Logical Operators and or not The where clause can also contain complex Boolean expressions composed of selection criteria connected by and and or operators Precedence can be established by using square brackets You can use the standard Boolean operators and and orto connect simple comparisons to form complex expressions Use the not operator to negate
558. that has been changed CHANGE A single character indicating the change that has been made to the field A The field has been added to the table M The field has been modified D The field has been deleted from the table 240 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 11 2 Print menus Imenu The Print menus program produces a report of all menus in the database s data dictionary The report is 79 columns wide and lists menu names and headings by name with menu selection options by number beneath each menu title To print the report select Print Menus Imenu from the Data Dictionary reports menu This program has no options to select DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Print Menus MENU HEADING PROMPT MENU PROG P entmenu Unify Main Menu 1 File Maintenance Menu fmntmen 2 Report Menu rptmenu 3 SQL _ Query DML Language sql P 4 Create or Modify Screen screens Forms fmntmen File Maintenance Menu 1 Manufacturer Maintenance sman100 E 2 Model Maintenance smod100 E 3 Item Maintenance sitm100 E rptmenu Report Menu I Inventory Item Overview invitmo P 2 Inventory Aging Report aging P 3 Purchase Acquisitions acqlist S Figure 11 7 Menu list report Data Dictionary reports 241 242 PI Oy DATE 04 30 99 TIME 11 29 46 PAGE DATA DICTIONARY REPORT Print Menus MENU HEADING PROMPT MENU PROG M P screen Create or Modify
559. that you can index on and search through for specific references BINARY This is binary data You can store field information in binary files The display length of a BINARY field is zero 0 but the internal field length is the length of the binary data The internal length of a BINARY field is limited only by hardware considerations such as disk size A BINARY field s internal length grows or shrinks as data is added or deleted The minimum length of a BINARY field is 64 bytes For more information about editing BINARY fields see Entering Data in a Binary Type Field in section 15 2 Use BINARY data types to store data such as bit maps for graphic screen displays digitized photos sounds instrument readings machine instructions and so on Introduction to database design 93 94 COMB is a special type of database field that is made by combining one or more other fields Each of its component fields has a data type specified A COMB field is merely a reference and does not contain or accept input data Data is accessed by the name of each component field You can use a COMB field type to build a single primary key for a table that needs a key made up of two or more smaller fields You can also use a COMB field to divide a field into subfields For example the field SSN Social Security Number can be set up as shown in Figure 7 2 Field Key Ref Type Len Long Name Comb Field SSN COMB Soc_Sec_Number SSN123 NUMERIC 3
560. the B tree indexes The table number is followed by the table s short name Record count The number of records the table is expected to contain Index ID Number The number that identifies the B tree index This is the number you enter to modify or delete a B tree index in Add Drop B Tree Indexes Index file name The system name of the file that contains the B tree index Index file size The size in bytes of the index file Order A single character that indicates the order in which each field s values are sorted in the B tree index A Ascending order D Descending order Field Name The name of each field in the B tree index The report may display additional information about each B tree This information includes whether duplicates are allowed in the index whether the index file is empty and whether the index needs rebuilt Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 12 Miscellaneous utilities This chapter describes programs you can use to manage transactions menus help documentation and executables in the data dictionary It also tells you how to load binary executable files using the standard Unify DataServer ELS load macro how to log transactions and how to use the Unify DataServer ELS editing features 259 12 1 Transaction logging This chapter describes how transaction logging works in Unify DataServer ELS and how to set and display transaction logging parameters How transaction logging works
561. the CURR environment variable is set the amount field displays in the specified format Space is reserved for commas or other thousands separator even if no commas are specified in CURR Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE TIME STRING TEXT BINARY COMB LONG NAME model mokey monum monano mdes item sno imodel iad isal iorder Maximum LEN s for the various field types are as follows 9 179 11 n a defaults to 8 n a defaults to 11 n a defaults to 5 256 256 n a n a computed by system A more descriptive field name of up to 16 characters It can contain only letters upper and lower case numbers and the underscore character _ It must begin with a letter The long name need not be unique throughout the database as the field name must be However it must be unique to this table The long name may be identical to the field name If you do not specify a long name you will not be able to use SQL on your database The long names of most database fields are used to generate their access names For example two database tables have the fields shown in Figure 8 2 model COMB Model_Key NUMERIC 7 Model_Number mano NUMBERIC 4 Manufacturer_ID STRING 30 Description inventory_item NUMERIC 9 Serial_ Number mokey COMB Model_ID DATE Acquisition_Date AMOUNT 5 Sales Price onum NUMERIC 9 Order_Number Database design utilities ipamt AMOUNT 5 Purchase_Price
562. the listing processor in three ways 1 By using the report command in the selection processor to run the listing processor interactively Run this way the listing processor displays the prompt waiting for you to enter commands When you are finished enter the end command to stop the listing processor 2 By naming the listing processor as a prewritten program to register it with an ENTER screen To run the listing processor this way place the listing commands in a file Then register the file name with the ENTER screen using Register Screen Form with ENTER section 15 1 3 By running the listing processor directly from the shell or from a shell script To run the listing processor from a shell script use the following syntax LST r selection file report script The listing processor processes each command in the report script file in sequence until it reaches the end of the file Listing processor commands The following describes the syntax and use of the Listing Processor commands These commands are as follows e list 564 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference e sort total e go e print nohead e unlock list SYNTAX list column number line number name expr using format E name expr using format under name end USE The list command prints a series of expressions You can enter any LST Listing processor number of list commands The expressions in the list command
563. the name of a help file with additional information on the field When you specify default or legal values for a field ENTER and SQL use the values to initialize the fields in newly added records and to validate proposed field updates When you specify FYI For Your Information error and help messages ENTER displays them when the user needs help or correction filling out the screen form These attributes are also available from the Host Language Interface Unify DataServer ELS has a menu option Advanced field attributes that enables you to create edit compile and print an Advanced field attributes source file To run the option select Advanced field attributes afa from the Database design utilities menu Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Advanced Field Attributes E dit C ompile P rint J The only prompt on this screen form is the operation prompt E dit C ompile P rint The valid responses to the operation prompt are e Edit the Advanced field attributes source file fields afa This command can be used to create or modify an attributes file Each time you modify the attributes source file you must compile it so changes can be used by ENTER and SQL The default editor is UC Berkeley vi You can change the editor by setting the EDIT environment variable Database design utilities 165 166 c Compile the Advanced field attributes sourc
564. the process After you enter your selections you are asked to verify the entries Are these choices ok The selection prompts are described as follows Print Database Design This option lists the tables fields and their relationships as well as an alphabetical cross reference of fields and database size parameters The report is 79 characters wide See Print Database Design section 11 1 for an output example The following message displays The database design is being formatted for printing Create Database This option creates an empty database file from the design in the data dictionary If you enter n no for this option the last two selection options are skipped Because an empty database file is created each time you select the Create Database option you should take these precautions 1 Make sure that no one else is using the application before starting 2 The database should not contain valuable data because the database will be emptied If you have valuable data dump it to an ASCII file using SQL Create the empty database and load the data back with SQL section 16 3 It may be best to use 132 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Reconfigure Database if you have valuable data in your database 3 Raw databases cannot be created on a mounted file system For more information about raw databases see chapter 7 Introduction to Database Design and Access Methods and section 9 5 Define Database Volu
565. tilities 153 154 If this has occurred scom displays the following message after the Proceed prompt An internal error has occurred Please check th rror log This message creates the following error log entry in the error log file erriog Program scom Calling function error Offending function See notes Status 0 Errno 0 Notes The dbnode has table field in unify db are corrupted Please report this error to Unify Customer Support To correct this problem you need to check the value of the hash_length field in the dbnode table of the Unify DataServer ELS data dictionary unify db If it has become corrupted the hash_table field is zero 0 when the hash_start and hash_end fields indicate that the hash table should have a nonzero length To check the value of hash_length perform the following steps Restore your database from a backup Set the DBNAME environment variable to unify db DBNAME unify db export DBNAME Start up SQL SQL At the SQL prompt get the values of the fields hash_start hash_length and hash_end from the table dbnode select hash_start hast_length hash_end from dbnode A sample output is hash_start hash_length hash_end 41984 0 692264 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 9 Compute the correct value for the hash_length field using the following formula hash_end hash_start 3 hash_length For example using the previous sample output th
566. ting processor LST is a selecting and formatting language that produces sorted lists with totals and subtotals from a Unify DataServer ELS database LST is an alternative when the full power of SQL and RPT is not required LST has two major components the selection processor and the listing processor The selection processor lets you choose records from a file based on selection criteria The listing processor lets you sort format and total the selected records The selection processor is a relational query language you can easily use to inquire about a Unify DataServer ELS database You can join multiple tables with one query The syntax of the query does not depend on the specific access methods defined for a Unify DataServer ELS database This means that queries can remain the same when the physical or logical database description is changed The result of a selection processor query is a selection file or subset The selection file contains the relative record numbers of all the records that satisfy the selection criteria You can use the listing processor to format the selection file for output Alternatively you can use a custom program to format the selection file The listing processor is a convenient way to format selection lists because it has default values for almost every format option Although it is easy to use it is also powerful enough to satisfy most output needs At the simplest level you specify the fields to list
567. ting system Programmer s Manual NOTE Unify DataServer ELS creates files using its own permission modes Any use of umask in custom programs is ignored If you want to prevent other users from using your database you must either change the mode of the directory where your database resides or change the mode of the individual database files For added operating system level security the noper program prints the following message if a user who does not have shell escape permission tries to run sh or edit from ENTER SSQL or SQL Permission denied The noper program is located in the unify bin directory 232 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 11 Data Dictionary reports This chapter describes the standard Unify DataServer ELS data dictionary reports and three database statistics reports The data dictionary reports display as options on the Data Dictionary reports menu These options let you list the database design menus screens group privileges individual privileges help documentation and programs used in your database application Because the data dictionary is a Unify DataServer ELS database you can query the data dictionary like any other database for the information you want However the Data Dictionary reports list the information you probably want to see most often The other three reports described in this chapter list database statistics hash table statistics and B tree statistics 233 1
568. tion otherwise a new file is created If the EDIT environment variable has been set the specified editor is started when you create or modify help documentation If the EDIT environment variable has not been set the default editor is started The default editor is vi Use standard editor commands to enter the help text file When you finish editing the file save it and exit the editor The prompt redisplays so you can enter a new menu program ENTER screen or SQL screen name CTRL U returns you to the menu NOTE The help text files you enter are stored in the following directories These directories must exist for you to create help documentation The documentation for Unify DataServer ELS programs and menus is stored below the system library directory lib hdoc If the Unify DataServer ELS environment variable has been set help documentation is stored in UNIFY hdoc For more information see chapter 5 Environment Variables Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 12 5 Edit SQL or RPT command files Start this program by selecting Edit SQL or RPT command files from the main menu or by entering edit and the file name at the selection prompt e When you select this option from a menu you start the current text editor without a file name e When you enter edit and a file name at the selection prompt you start the current editor for that file e You can enter edit by itself at the selection prompt The editor sta
569. tion Modes SCREEN NAME The name of the screen form to register You can register one screen form with the SQL screen form driver at a time SQL SCRIPT The name of the file containing the SQL script to associate with the screen form HEADING A string of up to 34 characters that displays on the screen when the SQL screen is running and on menus where the SQL screen is a selection option FORMATTING PROGRAMS The area below this prompt is for updating and displaying the report generating processes associated with this SQL screen The combination of the formatting program name parameters title and output options is called a report NAME The name of the executable program that formats the output This is the first prompt of the update area Enter up to eight characters for the program name The formatting program name cannot contain embedded blanks If you enter a name with embedded blanks the name is truncated at the first blank The remaining characters including blanks are deleted Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference A maximum of eight formatting programs can be associated with each SQL screen For SQL Screen Registration the formatting program can be one of the following 1 The report processor RPT You must enter RPT in upper case letters Unify DataServer ELS executables other than RPT are not allowed 2 Anon Unify DataServer ELS formatting program A formatting program that you supply is a custom program
570. tional part is truncated However you can use the modulo operator to obtain the remainder from the division of two integer values The result of this modulo operation is also an integer You can use parentheses to change the order of evaluation for arithmetic expressions Otherwise multiplication division and the modulo operation are performed before addition and subtraction Operators on the same level are evaluated from left to right The table in figure 17 17 uses constants to show how arithmetic expressions are evaluated Expression Result 4 2 0 5 2 1 3 24 11 Figure 17 17 Arithmetic expression resuits Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Expression Result 3 24 6 2 8 103 10 103 10 13 6 3 2 6 3 2 3 2 4 6 10 3 6 2 1 6 9 6 1 5 4 50 9 6 1 5 3 5 1 00 3 2504 1 0096 2 2 260000 11 1 83 30 12 1 83 3 12 84 3 2 84 10 3 12 84 3 2 84 18 50 185 00 Figure 17 17 Arlthmetlc expression resuits Strings Strings are report fields of type string or text character string constants and any strings formed using string fields and constants with the string operators NOTE RPT displays text fields similarly to string fields The default display length of a text field is the same as the display length specified for the field in the database design To display the entire text field you must include a using clause to format the text field display The following subsections
571. tionary Each screen form is then compiled and the h and q files are created After the process the screen clears so you can enter another screen form name Press CTRL U to return to the Create or modify screen forms menu Screen form maintenance utilities 321 14 5 Restore screen to Data Dictionary sfrestr 322 This program lets you recover screen forms inadvertently deleted from the data dictionary or to reorder the prompts on a screen The order of prompts must conform to the following rules e The primary key if any must be the first prompt e Combination fields and B trees must be moved as a unit You cannot reorder the fields within a COMB data type If you have made many changes and the prompts are out of order first process the screen Compile screens and delete the screen Check screen form coordinates Then restore the screen using this program The program reads the q file in the current directory and inserts the form back into the data dictionary Screen field prompts are reordered sequentially Start the program by selecting Restore screen to Data Dictionary sfrestr from the Create or modify screen forms menu The following screen form displays sfrestr Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Restore Screen to Data Dictionary At the SCREEN prompt enter a screen form name to recover the screen form from the q file After the screen form has been recovered the screen clears so you can enter anoth
572. tories are used by all Unify DataServer ELS users and are the ones delivered with your Unify DataServer ELS release The contents of Unify DataServer ELS system directories should not be modified Each application has its own set of application directories These contain the files specific to a particular application You can set environment variables to specify the directory locations for Unify DataServer ELS and application files This is described in chapter 5 Environment Variables The diagram in Figure 4 1 shows the usual structure of the Unify DataServer ELS directories bin inc lude conv system system file programs h files conversion lib hdoc system system prototype a files q files unify db system help documentation Figure 4 1 Unify DataServer ELS Directory Structure Files and directories 49 bin The four directories bin include conv and lib are located in the directory where you installed Unify DataServer ELS Only the bin and lib directories are used at run time The include directory is used when compiling programs An exception to this structure is the Unify DataServer ELS startup program named Unify DataServer ELS unify is placed in usr bin by the installation procedure so you can start Unify DataServer ELS without specifying a path The programs and files in conv are used to convert from one release to another when necessary Refer to the Installation Guide for more information A test case app
573. type Correction Refer to Appendix A or Database Fields in Section 8 1 for valid field lengths gt gt gt Invalid field name Explanation You have entered a database field name that cannot be found in the data dictionary Correction Check the spelling of the field name Unify DataServer ELS messages 623 624 gt gt gt _ Invalid field specification xxxx ffff Explanation SQL cannot recognize the indicated field specification where xxxx is the table and ffff is the field In the following invalid query the table name is misspelled Invalid Query select epm name from emp Correction select emp name from emp gt gt gt Invalid format for field ffff record nnn Explanation The field named ffff in record number nnn of the input file has an invalid format Correction Look for an invalid date time or number with embedded alpha characters If every record has the same problem your specification file might not match the input file gt gt gt Invalid group by clause Explanation The syntax of the group by clause is incorrect This can be caused by various errors The problem in the following invalid query is that it tries to group by computed fields 4 Invalid Query select avg salary from emp group by salaryt tcommission Correction select avg salary from emp group by salary commission gt gt gt _ Invalid having clause Explanation The syntax of the having clause is incorr
574. uced by Transaction Logging This procedure restores the Unify DataServer ELS database and data dictionary file including file dov and B tree index files NOTE You cannot use Read database backup to read backup files created by Unify DataServer ELS prior to Release 4 0 Read database Backup gets the backup device name from the environment variable BUDEV and the current log file or device name from Transaction Logging Status As does Write database Backup Read database Backup can use the information in the BUBLK BUTAPESZ and BUDRVR environment variables The BUBLK environment variable specifies the size of a block on the backup device BUTAPESZ specifies the number of blocks that fit on one tape or diskette of the backup device If BUTAPESZ is not set or is set to zero Read database Backup reads data until the end of the current diskette or tape volume BUDRVR specifies the custom backup device filter that should be used instead of the BUDRVR program For more information on setting BUDEV BUBLK BUTAPESZ and BUDRVR see chapter 5 Environment variables NOTE Since Read database Backup restores the data dictionary from the backup device after the restoration is complete you must exit Unify DataServer ELS and login again This step causes Unify DataServer ELS to open the restored data dictionary 184 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Reading the database backup Make sure no one is using the database before you
575. umber of PARAMETERS is RPT 1 the name of an RPT script LST 1 the name of an LST script blank 0 a custom program 4 Figure 15 2 Parameters per formatting program Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference An RPT or LST script name entered as a parameter must be one word with no embedded or leading spaces If entering parameters for a custom program the parameters are not edited You can place more than one parameter in each PARAMETERS field by leaving a space between each parameter provided the total length does not exceed 14 characters The custom program is then started as if the following command was entered at the operating system level program sel file pl p2 p3 p4 where sel file is the name of the selection file created by the user s query by forms query or LST selection processor query and p1 p4 are the four parameter strings For information on the type of functions you can use with the se file see Selection functions in the Unify DataServer ELS HLI Programmer s Manual TITLE A descriptive label for the report This field displays on the Report options screen section 15 5 to identify the report by its selection number OUTPUT This sets the allowed destinations for report output and sets the optional debugging mode Output can be routed to more than one destination per run The following four characters can be entered S Enables the screen output option DEFAULT P Enables the primer output option F E
576. umn 0 toggle cursor position display ON OFF delete current character delete current screen field delete current line move cursor down move to end of line escape end current mode exit to the Menu Handler go to screen coordinates x y print PAINT help move cursor to home position start insert input mode move cursor left Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Name Action modid modify current screen field nrmlon start normal video nxtln move to next line nxtw move to next word oplna open line above oplnb open line below pryw move to previous word quit quit paint mode redraw redraw screen rep start replace mode right move cursor right rvon start reverse video rvulon start reverse underline video screen display the system name of the current screen stin move to beginning of line trnfld transfer current screen field trnin transfer current line ulon start underline video up move cursor up Figure 6 9 Paint commands Two additional restrictions apply when assigning command keys to PAINT commands 1 ignoremiss TRUE Without this line PAINT prints a message for each command not assigned to a key With it PAINT suppresses the messages Commands not assigned to a key cannot be performed except for the escape and guit commands which are ESC and q by default 2 mrkchar string This keyword lets you change the default marker character that marks the original cursor position for various com
577. up section 9 1 2 Print a database design report This report is useful to keep as a record of the database design before making any changes See Print Database Design section 11 1 136 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Modifying values on the table entry form To use the interactive database design option select Modify Database Design schent from the Database Design Utilities menu The Table Entry screen form appears as follows Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Modify Database Design y 3 table data entry area LN CMD TABLE EXPECTE LONG NAME ESCRIPTION F N ext page P rev page A dd line or number J Table paging area The Table Entry screen form lets you add modify and delete tables in the database design At the top of this screen form is a table data entry area where you can add entries Below the data entry area is a paging area where you can modify existing entries Existing entries display in a page format with 11 table entries per page This is the same screen form used in Design and Create a New Database For an explanation of the prompts see section 8 1 The following are column headings for the data entry area Database design utilities 137 LN CMD TABLE EXPECTED LONG NAME DESCRIPTION The remainder of this subsection describes each column heading It also describes the steps you must follow to change add or delete data in the associated column TABLE
578. up s output is printed just after the top margin on each page of the report except the first page If the before report command group is not used this command group s output is printed after the top margin of the first page as well This command group can only appear in a script once You can suppress the processing of this command group during a report by using a page command with the no header option All the command group commands except page and need are valid in the header command group 529 17 9 Command group commands The following commands are used only in command groups You cannot place a command group command directly after a non command group command or before a command group identifier SYNTAX if expr then command else command where command is either a single command group command or a sequence of command group commands enclosed by the keywords begin and end as shown in the following begin command group command 1l command group command n end USE This command varies output or calculations depending on whether the condition described by the logical expression expr is TRUE or FALSE For more information about logical expressions see section 17 5 If the expression is TRUE or non zero the command group command following the then keyword processes If the expression is FALSE or zero that command is ignored and the command group command following the else keyword processes Note that the else keyword
579. useful because it displays the scripts used with the argument substitution c Cancel the report request and return to the REPORT prompt ENTER data entry query by forms 347 348 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Chapter 16 SQL Query DML language This chapter describes the major Unify DataServer ELS query language interface SQL SQL was developed at the IBM Research Center as a relational inquiry and data manipulation language based on an English keyword syntax Its structure was refined and extensively tested to produce a language easy enough for nonspecialists to use yet powerful enough for data processing professionals SQL is fast becoming the standard relational query language on all sizes of computers The Unify DataServer ELS version of SQL is based on the language described by D D Chamberlin and his associates in SEQUEL 2 A Unified Approach to Data Definition Manipulation and Control To adapt SQL to supermicros and the operating system environment some changes have been made to the syntax Most of the query and data manipulation features have been adopted without modification which means that Unify DataServer ELS SQL is the most powerful relational data language available on supermicros today All the examples in this chapter are based on a simple personnel database containing employee department and taxes tables Figure 16 1 shows the three database tables emp dept Number Name L
580. using a field order list in parentheses EXAMPLE You can verify the contents of the new candidates table sql gt select from candidates recognized query Name Number Dept_No Salary Amato 5800 99 2000 00 Colucci 6700 99 2500 00 Simpson 7000 99 2750 00 SQL Query DML language 403 Using text fields with SQL In SQL TEXT fields are similar to STRING fields with the following differences e You cannot use TEXT fields in a nested select statement e You can input a maximum of 4096 characters to a TEXT fie interactively using insert or update To input a multiple line TEXT field 1 Start and end the TEXT string with a single quote 2 Insert a backslash before pressing RETURN at the end of each line You must include the backslash in multiple line TEXT entries or SQL will display an error message NOTE If you insert TEXT data from another file instead of interactively all specified data is inserted The 4096 character limit does not apply e SQL can print TEXT field data The default number of characters that prints is the display length specified for the TEXT field in the database design For example if the TEXT field display length in the database design is 15 SQL prints the first 15 characters of the field To override the display width and print the entire contents of a TEXT field use the lines 0 command This command prim the entire TEXT field and suppresses column headings To print
581. ut and output of all date constants For input and output of non constant dates RPT uses the format specified in either DATETP or LDATEFMT depending on the data type DATE or LDATE of the date field or variable NOTE RPT may not display date constants correctly unless the RPT script is run with the same setting of LDATEFMT or equivalent month day year order as when the script was written RPT has a built in variable today that contains the current month day and year today displays in the format determined by the LDATEFMT environment variable The following is an example of this variable used in a print statement print today centered today displays as a long date Idate with a four digit year Date constants also display in the specified long date format Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference The following are valid long date constants wnen LDATEFMT is set for four digit years 1 1 1901 6 1 1700 12 32 2099 12 3 1882 01 02 97 The following are valid long date constants for three LDATEFMT settings that specify alphabetic months 3 Jan 2052 21 Dec 1862 6 Mar 95 A number of days can be added to or subtracted from a date However a date cannot be negative Time constants A time constant must be written in the form HH MM where HH is the hour and MM is the minute The hour value must be from 0 to 23 and the minute value must be from 0 to 59 A time constant is based on the twenty four hour clock The following are va
582. valid If you are satisfied that the definition is correct and you want the index to be created as defined answer y yes If you answer yes the following message displays filling index The program increases the record count by tens as it indexes records If you answer n no do not create the index the following message displays instead Do you want to discard this B tree index definition The program confirms that you want to delete this B tree index definition If you answer no to this prompt you can then change the definition In rebuild mode you can rebuild a single B tree index or all the indexes in the database at one time If you press RETURN after the first two prompts on the screen form you see the next prompt Do you want to rebuild ALL of the indexes If you answer y yes all the defined B tree indexes are rebuilt As each index is rebuilt its definition displays Once this process has begun it doesn t stop until all indexes are rebuilt If you have many indexes defined or a large database this can take time Database design utilities 163 8 6 Advanced field attributes afa 164 This chapter describes the Advanced Field Attributes you can define for each field in the database design The basic attributes of a field are its length and data type such as STRING NUMERIC or DATE Advanced field attributes include a default value a list of legal values a one line information message an error message and
583. variables for currency and date display formats Error Messages contains the messages that can display while you are running Unify DataServer ELS Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Syntax Conventions Throughout the manual standard conventions are followed to describe the syntax of various Unify DataServer ELS and shell commands Words within square brackets are optional and may be left out Vertical bars enclosing a stacked list of options means to choose one of the options and only one Ellipsis points indicate that the immediately preceding item may be repeated any number of times Syntax conventions are also outlined in chapter 16 SQL Query DML Language and chapter 18 LST Listing Processor Other Conventions Warnings indicate actions that could cause data loss or damage to the database NOTE Notes indicate conditions of interest or actions that could result in syntax errors but not damage the database or cause loss of data About this manual 17 18 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Part I The Unify DataServer ELS environment Part explains the Unify DataServer ELS operating environment The chapters in Part describe Unify DataServer ELS menus files general directory layout shell environment variables and the termcap and unicap files Although the use of Unify DataServer ELS requires little or no knowledge of the computer s operating system the shell or programming the inf
584. ven t supplied the correct number of parameters to DBLOAD Correction Use the syntax in the error message to try again NOTE You cannot use the parameters n and u together Values must be entered for the existing records before adding this one gt gt gt Values must be entered for the existing records before adding this one Explanation This record cannot be added because this table has fields belonging to a no duplicates B tree index One or more of the fields in the previously added record still have default values All fields in a no duplicates B tree index must have unique values or future records cannot be added to that table Correction Go back and enter unique values for those fields After those fields have values you can add new records gt gt gt Warning group by and order by in the same query The order by will be ignored Explanation The group by and order by clauses cannot be used in the same query This error message is only a warning that the order by will not be performed SQL ignores the order by and runs the query gt gt gt Warning Unable to verify volume length Explanation This message displays if the length of the raw device cannot be verified This is a warning message only Correction Verify that the disk partition contains the number of blocks specified Unify DataServer ELS messages 683 gt gt gt Warning unique may not be used with aggregate functions T
585. ver ELS lets you store a database in up to eight database volumes A volume is a single area of storage space for database information The root volume is the first volume or volume zero because it stores the database header This header includes database parameters and the hash table The root volume must always have an offset of zero blocks from the starting address of the root volume Other volumes store database information These volumes can have volume numbers from one through seven You use Define database volumes to describe database volumes to Unify DataServer ELS In Unify DataServer ELS database volumes can be either ordinary operating system files file volumes or raw files device volumes Raw files consist of contiguous blocks of disk space usually called disk partitions Normally disk partitions are formatted into file systems using the mkfs command These file systems are then mounted as directories in the operating system file hierarchy However instead of formatting a partition and using it as a file system you can leave the partition unformatted and use it as storage for a Unify DataServer ELS database Unformatted disk space is called a raw partition A raw partition can be accessed directly by Unify DataServer ELS s access routines without using the operating system file access software This increases the storage efficiency of a Unify DataServer ELS database 200 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference
586. version of BUDRVR specified in BUDRVR is an executable file Also make sure the file is in a directory specified in your PATH environment variable gt gt gt Invalid column number nnn generated by print statement on line ddd Explanation This message displays at run time It only identifies the approximate location of the print statement The column number nnn is greater than the set page width The actual statement can occur before the line number indicated Note that nnn is one less than the actual number shown in the script Invalid Script width 80 print New State in column 89 Correction width 80 print New State in column 65 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Invalid date Explanation The format of an Idate constant is incorrect The default format for an Idate is MMIDDIYY If the LDATEFMT environment variable is set the specified format is used for Idate constants See Section 5 for more information about setting the LDATEFMT environment variable Invalid Script set start_date to 12 35 84 Correction set start_date to 12 31 84 gt gt gt Invalid field ffff Explanation SQL cannot recognize the field name ffff Make sure you are using the correct long name or access name for the field Invalid Query select ename from emp Correction select name from emp gt gt gt Invalid field length Explanation You have entered an invalid field length for the associated field
587. wed by an end logical transaction code The number of replayed transaction packets increment on the screen form after every hundred transaction packets have been read Database maintenance utilities 187 After the first pass through the transaction log is complete the following screen form displays Unify RDBMS 30 APR 1999 Read Database Backup ERFORMING THE TRANSACTION LOG REPLAY EPLAYI THE ACTUAL TRANSACTIONS INCOMPL F RANSACTION GROUPS 1 RCED E JTG 0 EPLAY ADDREC 0 DELETE PFIELD 0 THE LAST VALID TRANSACTION GROUP ENDED ON Mon Mar 10 9 06 23 1999 ALL nnn TRANSACTION PACKETS HAVE BEEN PROCESSED THERE WERE NOT DATABASE ERRORS ENCOUNTERED The prompts on this screen form are described as follows Incomplete transaction groups The number of transactions found to be incomplete These transactions have a start logical transaction code but do not have an end logical transaction code These transactions cannot be replayed Information about any incomplete logical transaction group is placed in the incomplete summary file The default name for this file is replay not 188 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Forced endltg The number of transactions forced to end by the start of another logical transaction group This is because the program can only have one
588. word The display of the login screen can be set by the system administrator using Modify System Parameters amp Security Using the login information Unify DataServer ELS determines which menu users see when they start Unify DataServer ELS the entry menu also known as the home menu and which options they are allowed throughout the application In addition when a program is run Unify DataServer ELS passes the user s current access privileges to that program Each user has a defined access privilege to every program and menu This ranges from no access privilege the default condition to privileges enabling the user to inquire modify delete or add The four access capabilities can be used in any combination For example a user may have the right to inquire about and delete records in a database to modify and add records or to inquire about records only Or the user may have all four access privileges In addition to access privileges the login ID sets an entry menu for a user This menu is the first one seen after logging in to Unify DataServer ELS and is the one returned to when the user presses the home command key This means a user may only see that portion of the database menu tree that applies to that user Because programs can appear on multiple menus the system administrator can tailor each user s environment exactly as required The Menu Handler 39 As aconvenience each user may be assigned to a user group This group i
589. x for the command requires a constant NOTE String constants must be enclosed in single quotes Invalid Script separator Correction separator gt gt gt A syntax error occurred near the string lt xxxx gt Explanation This message helps you debug syntax errors As the compiler was processing the statement on the specified line an error was detected in the area shown by the string xxxx gt gt gt A syntax error occurred at or near the end of the line Explanation This message helps you debug syntax errors As the compiler was processing the statement on the specified line an error was detected near the end of the line gt gt gt Access privilege does not allow deletion Explanation You must have delete privilege to remove a record from the database Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Adding a line would push a screen field off the bottom Explanation The screen form design does not have enough space to add another line Correction Try rearranging the screen form to create more space gt gt gt Aggregate function imbalance in the select clause Explanation All aggregate functions in a single query must be nested to the same level If you want to display both answers you must perform two queries Invalid Query select avg salary sum avg salary from emp Correction select avg salary from emp or select sum avg salary from emp group by dept_no gt gt gt Aggregat
590. xpressed as Job clerk and Dept_No 10 OR Job programmer and Dept_No 60 Set inclusion notation can be used to express this kind of statement more easily EXAMPLE List the name job salary and department number of the clerks in department 10 and the programmers in department 60 Use parentheses to group the set of constants sql gt select Name Job Salary Dept_No sql gt from emp sql gt where lt Job Dept_No gt is in lt clerk 10 gt sql gt lt programmer 60 gt recognized query Name Job Salary Dept_No Jones clerk 900 00 10 Schmidt programmer 2500 00 60 Scharf clerk 800 00 10 Sets of constants such as lt clerk 10 gt are called itera tuples in relational terminology A literal tuple is a group of constants describing values for specific fields in a record The fields must be identified by preceding the tuples with a field specification list as in the previous example For another use of literal tuples inserting records into the database see Data Manipulation Language Facilities section 16 2 SQL Query DML language 365 unique KEYWORD 366 If a query doesn t select a primary key field from one of the tables the query can produce rows that duplicate each other Because only the primary key must be unique other fields can contain duplicate information Usually these duplicates are not necessary The unique keyword lets you eliminate duplicate
591. xpression means that the enclosed item is optional and can be left out E Vertical bars enclosing a stacked list of options mean to choose only one of the options Database design utilities 167 Command syntax RECORD TYPE SECTION record type table field section The record type statement is used to establish the current table This is necessary because fields are not required to have unique names You need only one table section for each database table All the fields listed in a table section must belong to the current table table The name of a table in the database design FIELD SECTION fieldl default value I offset ie checkref table checkreference legal values FYI string ERRORS string HELP filename A more complete definition of the field statement follows For STRING fields only field 1 Senvironment variable table field2 strang J t string ass l checkreference checkref table 168 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference For NUMERIC FLOAT AMOUNT DATE LDATE and TIME fields fieldl environment variable 1 offset table field2 constant unique today hour Ly checkref table checkreference E not lt constant gt constant constant constant gt constant lt constant field 1 The access name usually the field s long name of a database field in the current t
592. xpressions determine the ordering of records in groups within major sort groups Figure 17 24 illustrates sort sequence for a sort by fieldA fieldB fieldC fieldA valuel lt major sort expression fieldB valuel lt minor sort expression fieldc valuel lt most minor sort expression fieldcC value2 fieldB value2 fieldc value3 fieldc value4 fieldA value2 fieldB value3 Figure 17 24 Sort sequence A report can only use Control Break Processing efficiently if named expressions are sorted The expression names can be used to trigger before name and after name RPT Report processor 523 command groups However a named expression can be sorted without being associated with a before name or after name command group For more information about named expressions see Named expressions in section 17 4 and Expression components section 17 5 top margin SYNTAX top margin number USE This command sets the size of the top margin number indicates the number of lines to be left blank at the top of each page The default top margin number is 2 width SYNTAX width number USE This command specifies the width of a report page number indicates the number of columns or print positions available The left margin is included so the width need not change if the left margin is changed For more information see the left margin command earlier in this section The default width number is 132 This assumes you are using line printer paper
593. xxx Explanation This message is sent to the errlog file when the database is started if you have defined a root volume as a file volume but you have not specified the VOLPATH environment variable For more information about file volumes see Define Database Volumes Section 9 5 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Correction Make sure you have set the VOLPATH environment variable gt gt gt Unable to open backup device Explanation Read Database Backup or Write Database Backup cannot open the specified backup device Correction Make sure the BUDEV environment variable is set correctly Also make sure you have correct access privileges for the backup device gt gt gt Unable to open database file Explanation You have used an incorrect database file name Correction Check spellings of the name and make sure you have read privileges Also make sure that you are in the proper directory The file name must be file db or unify db gt gt gt Unable to open database volume Explanation One of the database volumes specified in Define Database Volumes cannot be opened The database and data dictionary are now invalid Correction Two reasons for this error are that you don t have write privileges for the volume or that the special file entry has been removed or corrupted Any keyboard response returns you to the menu For Read Database Backup to recover you must read the backup again after you have correcte
594. y because they occur before and after a new page This depends on the page size For example the same report using the same data can have its header and footer control breaks in different places if it prints on two sizes of paper Therefore header and footer control breaks float occurring at a transition to a new page Section 17 2 explains these terms by presenting example reports and their report scripts 458 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference 17 2 Basic report examples The following examples of report scripts and their output illustrate most of the features of RPT Starting with basic techniques they progress to more advanced report script development However RPT is too extensive to illustrate every conceivable technique Therefore you should read the descriptions of the RPT command groups and each command s syntax later in chapter 17 You can then develop more complex reports The examples in this chapter are based on the same three table personnel database used in chapter 15 SQL Query DML Language The tables in the personnel database are shown in Figure 17 3 emp Number Dept_No Job Manager Salary Commission dept Number Name Location taxes Min Amount Max _Amount Base_Tax Marginal_ Rate Figure 17 3 Database tables used in RPT examples The emp table contains the employee s number name department number job manager s employee number monthly salary and yearly commission The dept t
595. y DataServer ELS Developer s Reference before report SYNTAX before report command group commands USE before name SYNTAX before name This command group is processed at the beginning of the report It is triggered by the first control break and precedes all before name command groups The first line of detail information is evaluated and held to make it available to this command group while the control break processing takes place The before report command group can only appear in a script once If this command group is present the header command group is not processed at the top of the first page Therefore you can use these commands to print a descriptive heading on the first page of the report Then you can use the header command group to print abbreviated headings on the remaining pages of the report All command group commands are valid in the before report command group command group commands USE RPT Report processor This command group is processed before a group of detail information is printed Therefore you can use before name command group commands to print group headings or introductory text name is the name of an expression that appears in the sort command If an expression is not assigned a name in the sort command and it is not a database field the expression cannot be associated with a before name command group Each before name command group 527 detail 528 must have a different
596. y occupied by deleted records Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference ADJUSTED EXPECTED The approximate number of expected records The space allocation algorithm adjusts the number of records to fit in whole blocks Therefore this number may not be exactly the expected number entered through Design and create a new database or Modify database design The percent used of adjusted expected record space TOTAL ALLOCATED The number of records for which space is allocated This allows room for overflow A given table can contain 166 of the expected number of records Then more space must be allocated by modifying the database design and reconfiguring the database The percent used of the total space allocated for records DELETED The number of records marked for deletion AVAILABLE The amount of available records space AVAILABLE TOTAL ALLOCATED USED DELETED VOL The volume number Volumes are numbered 0 through 7 beginning with the root volume which is always 0 TYP The volume type This is either F for file or D for a disk or tape device CHAR DEV For TYP F the system name of the ordinary file for the database For TYP D the system name of the character or block special file for the database BLOCKED DEV For TYP F the name of the ordinary database file For TYP D the system name of the block special file for the database SIZE The size of the volume in 512 byte blocks Data Dictionary reports 253
597. y of employees in department 10 In this case the common characteristic is the department number When you use an aggregate function in the select clause you must select fields that remain constant for each member of the group To select an employee name with the average salary for a department is meaningless because each employee has a different name If you want to list the names of employees who make the average salary you must use a nested query Aggregate functions are usually used with the group by clause A group by clause lets you partition the selected records into groups for which the indicated aggregate functions are computed If you specify no explicit group by then any aggregate functions apply to the entire set of selected records EXAMPLE Compute and list the total number of employees in department 10 SQL Query DML language 369 370 sql gt select count sql gt from emp sql gt where Dept_No 10 recognized query count EXAMPLE Compute and list the minimum and maximum salaries throughout the entire company Remember if you want to list the names of the employees who make these salaries you must use a nested query sql gt select min Salary max Salary sql gt from emp recognized query min salary max Salary 800 00 7500 00 EXAMPLE List the job and average salary plus commission for all salesreps The job can be listed in this example because all the selected records have the same
598. yee works sql gt select emp Name sql gt from emp dept sql gt where Dept No recognized query dept dept Number List the employee name and all the fields from the department where emp Name Number Name Location Smith 50 Marketing San Francisco Jones 10 Administration Dallas Whittaker 20 Eastern Sales New York Reilly 30 Central Sales Chicago O Neil 20 Eastern Sales New York Dugan 40 Western Sales Los Angeles Schmidt 60 Research Dallas Klein 20 Eastern Sales New York Scharf 10 Administration Dallas Lee 10 Administration Dallas Otsaka 60 Research Dallas Kawasaki 30 Central Sales Chicago Dupre 50 Marketing San Francisco Bleriot 10 Administration Dallas Moehr 70 Finance Dallas Colucci 40 Western Sales Los Angeles Amato 40 Western Sales Los Angeles Fiorella 70 Finance Dallas Brown 60 Research Dallas The where clause in a join query can contain expressions that use fields from any of the tables involved in the join The expression is not limited to an equality as the following query shows EXAMPLE List the employee name and yearly salary from the emp table and the amounts that the yearly salary falls between in the taxes table Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference sql gt sql gt sql gt where Salary 12 between Min_Amount and Max_Amount select Name Salary 12 Min_Amount Max Amount from emp taxes recognized query Name Salary 12 Min_
599. you can refine the database and limit its scope Field data types As you develop the list of fields for your database design think about the kind of information each field represents Is it a name a date a price a quantity or what When you build your database you must tell Unify DataServer ELS what each field s data type is For more information about field characteristics such as internal length versus display length and changing field lengths or types see Appendix A Field data type reference table The reference table shown in Figure 7 1 summarizes Unify DataServer ELS database field types their default display length and when to use each type A more complete Introduction to database design 89 description of each field type follows in this subsection For information about internal data types see Appendix A isos Dala Maximum Display Length Possible Uses Notes NUMERIC 9 digits Ages quantities numbers for calculators FLOAT 20 digits including decimal Real numbers that are not amounts integer places numbers over nine digits AMOUNT 14 digits including decimal Currency amounts Note You can specify a length places up to 11 Unify DataServer ELS adds a decimal point and two decimal digits increasing the maximum length to 14 DATE 8 Dates from 1 January 1900 to 31 December 2077 LDATE 11 Dates from 1 October 1752 to 31 December 9999 TIME 5 Time of day STRING 256 Fixed length alphanumeric data such as names telephone num
600. you change video modes you must change the entire video field gt gt gt Screen already exists Explanation You are trying to add a screen form with a name that exists in this database Screens must have unique names Correction Try entering a new name Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference gt gt gt Screen fields cannot be added at a non blank position Explanation There is text in the position where you are trying to add a screen field Correction Add the field at a blank position gt gt gt Screen is unknown Explanation PAINT cannot locate a screen form in the data dictionary with this name Correction Check the spelling of the screen form name gt gt gt Some fields were not put on the screen because there were too many to all fit Explanation The combination of prompts and fields has used up the space on the current table s screen form If you enter a y at the Continue prompt the default screen form is generated using the fields that fit An n terminates the screen form generation for the current table gt gt gt SOL Can t open xxxx Explanation SQL was started from the shell command line to process the script named xxxx You cannot open this ASCII file Correction Make sure you have access privileges to read the file gt gt gt statement on line nnn Explanation This message helps you locate the error that generated the previous RPT error message gt gt gt Syntax error
601. you have successfully converted all your application data dictionaries You are done Exit to the Unify DataServer ELS Main Menu CTRLD Custom message control 595 596 Unify DataServer ELS Developer s Reference Appendix D Unify DataServer ELS messages Unify DataServer ELS has many useful messages Usually they indicate errors but often they display information about the current option Many Unify DataServer ELS messages have a second help level You can get this additional help by responding to the message with gt gt gt lt EMPTY gt Explanation The Report option s output holding file has no data gt gt gt A database design has not been entered Explanation This message displays if the program cannot find a database design to compile Correction Make sure that your environment variables or your current directory refer to the correct database and that a database design has been defined gt gt gt A database field name was not entered Try again Explanation You cannot skip the FIELD NAME prompt Correction Enter a y to return to the database field entry area and enter a valid field name otherwise the line will be discarded gt gt gt A field name cannot be given twice in one B tree definition Explanation You can use a field name only once in each B tree definition 597 598 gt gt gt A having clause cannot contain nested aggregate functions Explanation Invalid Query

Unify DataServer/ELS Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents